User Manual

Version 9.2.1 May 2018

SYMVIONICS Document SSD-IADS-001
© 1996-2018 SYMVIONICS, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Starting IADS

IADS Support
We take pride in our customer support. We will make every effort to make your usage of
IADS an enjoyable experience!
We encourage all users to join our Google user group. When you post a question using this
forum it is seen by everyone on our team ensuring you get the right person to answer your
question.
Join the IADS Google Group
http://iads.symvionics.com/suppcon.html
Browse the Archives
http://groups.google.com/group/iads
IADS Support Line
Phone: 661-273-7003 x 210
Email: [email protected]
IADS Website
Access our public web site to get general information about the IADS product line, join our
Google user group and download IADS programming examples.
http://iads.symvionics.com

2
 Table of Contents
1. Starting IADS .............................................................................................................11
1.1. IADS Startup Dialog ......................................................................................................... 11
1.2. Log On to IADS ................................................................................................................. 14
1.3. The Desktop ....................................................................................................................... 15
1.4. Creating a New Desktop.................................................................................................... 15
1.5. The Dashboard .................................................................................................................. 16
1.6. The Message Log ............................................................................................................... 17
1.7. Monitoring System Performance ....................................................................................... 17
1.8. Log Off from IADS ............................................................................................................ 18
2. Analysis Windows ......................................................................................................18
2.1. Analysis Windows .............................................................................................................. 18
2.2. Analysis Window Toolbars ................................................................................................ 20
2.3. Analysis Window Right-Click Menu Options .................................................................... 21
2.4. Analysis Window Keyboard Shortcuts............................................................................... 22
2.5. Viewing Analysis Windows from Other Desktops ............................................................. 24
2.6. Adding an Entry to the Security Classification List .......................................................... 25
2.7. Freezing and Unfreezing Analysis Windows and Displays ............................................... 25
2.8. Viewing Multiple Analysis Windows ................................................................................. 26
2.9. Printing.............................................................................................................................. 26
2.10. Scrollbar ............................................................................................................................ 27
2.11. Go To Time ........................................................................................................................ 28
2.12. The Data Search Tool........................................................................................................ 29
3. Creating Displays .......................................................................................................30
3.1. The Display Builder - Core Data Displays ....................................................................... 30
3.2. The Display Builder - ActiveX Controls ............................................................................ 31
3.3. Creating IADS Custom ActiveX Controls.......................................................................... 32
3.4. IADS Dynamics Wizard ..................................................................................................... 33
3.5. DataViews in IADS............................................................................................................ 35
3.6. DataViews Converter ........................................................................................................ 36
4. IADS Data Displays ...................................................................................................37
4.1. Customizing Data Displays ............................................................................................... 37
4.2. Printf Formatting .............................................................................................................. 37
5. Alphanumeric Display ...............................................................................................39
5.1. The Alphanumeric Display ................................................................................................ 39
5.2. Alphanumeric Keyboard Shortcuts.................................................................................... 40
5.3. Alphanumeric Right-Click Menu Options ......................................................................... 40
6. Alphanumeric Table Display ....................................................................................41
6.1. Alphanumeric Table Displays ........................................................................................... 41
6.2. Alphanumeric Table Keyboard Shortcuts ......................................................................... 42
6.3. Alphanumeric Table Right-Click Menu Options ............................................................... 42

i
 Table of Contents

6.4. Displaying Text and Data in Alphanumeric Displays ....................................................... 43

7. Annunciator Display ..................................................................................................44
7.1. Customizing an Annunciator ............................................................................................. 44
7.2. Annunciator Keyboard Shortcuts ...................................................................................... 44
7.3. Annunciator Right-Click Menu Options ............................................................................ 45
7.4. Changing Data Formats .................................................................................................... 45
8. Cross Plot ....................................................................................................................46
8.1. The Cross Plot ................................................................................................................... 46
8.2. Customizing a Cross Plot .................................................................................................. 48
8.3. Cross Plot Keyboard Shortcuts ......................................................................................... 48
8.4. Cross Plot Right-Click Menu Options ............................................................................... 49
9. Display Folder ............................................................................................................50
9.1. Display Folders ................................................................................................................. 50
9.2. Display Folder Right-Click Menu Options........................................................................ 51
10. Display Panel ..............................................................................................................51
10.1. Display Panels................................................................................................................... 51
11. Label ............................................................................................................................52
11.1. Display Labels ................................................................................................................... 52
11.2. Label Display Right-Click Menu Options ......................................................................... 53
12. Frequency Plot ...........................................................................................................53
12.1. Creating a Frequency Plot ................................................................................................ 53
12.2. Customizing a Frequency Plot .......................................................................................... 54
12.3. Frequency Plot Keyboard Shortcuts ................................................................................. 54
12.4. Frequency Plot Right-Click Menu Options ....................................................................... 55
12.5. Viewing Spectral Data....................................................................................................... 57
12.6. Setting Scaling for Frequency Data .................................................................................. 59
13. Frequency Response Plot ..........................................................................................60
13.1. Creating a Frequency Response Plot ................................................................................ 60
13.2. Customizing a Frequency Response Plot .......................................................................... 61
13.3. Frequency Response Plot Keyboard Shortcuts ................................................................. 62
13.4. Frequency Response Plot Right-Click Menu Options ....................................................... 62
13.5. Calculating an Inverse Fourier Transform (IFT) ............................................................. 64
13.6. Flutter Sweep Processing (FSP) ....................................................................................... 64
14. Summary Plot .............................................................................................................65
14.1. Summary Plot Keyboard Shortcuts ................................................................................... 65
14.2. Customizing a Loads Summary Plot.................................................................................. 65
14.3. Flutter Summary Right-Click Menu Options ..................................................................... 66
14.4. Defining the Criteria for Summary Plot Data ................................................................... 67
14.5. Changing the Color and Size of Summary Plot Symbols................................................... 67
14.6. Customizing a Flutter Summary Plot ................................................................................ 68
14.7. Loads Summary Plot Right-Click Menu Options .............................................................. 68

ii
 IADS User Manual

15. Nyquist Plot ................................................................................................................69

15.1. Creating a Nyquist Plot ..................................................................................................... 69
15.2. Customizing a Nyquist Plot ............................................................................................... 70
15.3. Nyquist Plot Keyboard Shortcuts ...................................................................................... 70
15.4. Nyquist Plot Right-Click Menu Options ............................................................................ 71
16. Octave Band Plot........................................................................................................72
16.1. The Octave Band Plot........................................................................................................ 72
16.2. Customizing an Octave Band Plot ..................................................................................... 73
16.3. Octave Band Plot Keyboard Shortcuts .............................................................................. 74
16.4. Octave Band Plot Right-Click Menu Options ................................................................... 74
16.5. Octave Band - Sound Pressure Level ................................................................................ 75
17. Real Time Randomdec Display.................................................................................76
17.1. Customizing a Real Time Randomdec Display ................................................................. 76
17.2. Real Time Randomdec Display Keyboard Shortcuts......................................................... 76
17.3. Real Time Randomdec Display Right-Click Menu Options .............................................. 76
18. Slider ...........................................................................................................................78
18.1. Customizing a Slider ......................................................................................................... 78
18.2. Slider Keyboard Shortcuts................................................................................................. 78
18.3. Slider Right-Click Menu Options ...................................................................................... 78
18.4. Capturing Load Values on Sliders .................................................................................... 79
18.5. Changing Slider Caret and Load Limit Symbols ............................................................... 80
18.6. The Slider Display Format Dialog .................................................................................... 80
19. Stripchart ....................................................................................................................82
19.1. Customizing a Stripchart ................................................................................................... 82
19.2. Stripchart Keyboard Shortcuts .......................................................................................... 82
19.3. Stripchart Right-Click Menu Options................................................................................ 83
19.4. Stripchart Speed ................................................................................................................ 86
19.5. Stripchart Grids................................................................................................................. 87
19.6. Changing the Direction of Data Flow on a Stripchart...................................................... 88
19.7. Data Stitching .................................................................................................................... 88
19.8. Creating a Custom Overlay on a Stripchart...................................................................... 89
19.9. Creating an IRIG Time Display for a Stripchart............................................................... 89
19.10. Setting Filter Frequencies using the Stripchart Filter Frequency GUI ............................ 90
19.11. Creating or Changing a Fixed Block Frequency Plot ....................................................... 90
19.12. Stripchart Toolbox............................................................................................................. 91
20. IADS ActiveX Controls .............................................................................................93
20.1. IADS Generic 3D Model ................................................................................................... 93
20.2. Input Object - Action ......................................................................................................... 93
20.3. Action - Play Sound ........................................................................................................... 95
20.4. The Attitude Direction Indicator (ADI) ............................................................................. 96
20.5. Altimeter Control ............................................................................................................... 97
20.6. Audio Player ...................................................................................................................... 97
20.7. Bar Graph ......................................................................................................................... 98

iii
 Table of Contents

20.8. Blob Viewer ....................................................................................................................... 98

20.9. Input Object - Button ......................................................................................................... 99
20.10. Dial Graph ...................................................................................................................... 100
20.11. Input Object - Dial .......................................................................................................... 101
20.12. Input Object - Drop Down............................................................................................... 101
20.13. Eight Ball Display (Attitude Indicator) ........................................................................... 102
20.14. Force Gauge .................................................................................................................... 103
20.15. Heading Indicator ........................................................................................................... 103
20.16. Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................................................................... 104
20.17. IADS HTML Viewer ........................................................................................................ 104
20.18. IADS Clock ...................................................................................................................... 105
20.19. LED Display .................................................................................................................... 106
20.20. Multi-Graph Control ....................................................................................................... 106
20.21. Primary Flight Display ................................................................................................... 108
20.22. Quick View Display ......................................................................................................... 108
20.23. Input Object - Slider ........................................................................................................ 109
20.24. Input Object - Spin Box ................................................................................................... 109
20.25. Standard Gauge............................................................................................................... 110
20.26. Stick Force....................................................................................................................... 111
20.27. Stop Watch....................................................................................................................... 111
20.28. Text History Viewer ......................................................................................................... 112
20.29. Input Object - Text........................................................................................................... 113
20.30. Input Object - Toggle Switch ........................................................................................... 114
20.31. The Video Player ............................................................................................................. 114
21. Drawing Package .....................................................................................................116
21.1. IADS Drawing Package - Overview ................................................................................ 116
21.2. Drawing Package Right-Click Menu............................................................................... 117
22. Event Monitor ..........................................................................................................121
22.1. Event Monitor Definitions ............................................................................................... 122
22.2. Creating an Event Monitor Input File ............................................................................. 123
23. ICAW Display ..........................................................................................................124
23.1. The ICAW Definitions Table ........................................................................................... 124
23.2. Creating an ICAW Input File .......................................................................................... 125
24. Moving Map Display................................................................................................126
24.1. Moving Map Display Toolbar Buttons ............................................................................ 127
24.2. Moving Map Display Right-click Menus ......................................................................... 128
24.3. Moving Map Targets ....................................................................................................... 129
24.4. Moving Map Overlays ..................................................................................................... 130
24.5. The Moving Map Overlays Table .................................................................................... 132
24.6. Distance Bearing Markers .............................................................................................. 133
24.7. The Georeference Tool .................................................................................................... 134
25. Situational Awareness (SA) Display .......................................................................137
25.1. Situational Awareness (SA) Display Operations ............................................................. 138

iv
 IADS User Manual

25.2. Situational Awareness (SA) Display Keyboard Shortcuts ............................................... 139

25.3. Situational Awareness (SA) Texture Images ................................................................... 140
25.4. Situational Awareness (SA) Envelopes ............................................................................ 142
25.5. Situational Awareness (SA) Overlay Images ................................................................... 143
25.6. Situational Awareness (SA) Display Articulated Models ................................................ 144
26. Toolbox......................................................................................................................145
26.1. ActiveX Toolbox - Layers ................................................................................................ 145
26.2. ActiveX Toolbox – Edit .................................................................................................... 146
26.3. ActiveX Toolbox - Library ............................................................................................... 147
27. Adding Parameters to Displays ..............................................................................148
27.1. The Parameter Tool......................................................................................................... 148
27.2. Adding Parameters to Displays ....................................................................................... 149
27.3. Filtering the Parameter Tool .......................................................................................... 150
27.4. Go To Definition.............................................................................................................. 151
28. Display Operations...................................................................................................152
28.1. The Display Builder - Aligning and Grouping Displays ................................................. 152
28.2. Attaching Data Displays ................................................................................................. 152
28.3. Changing the Size of a Display ....................................................................................... 153
28.4. Copying Displays ............................................................................................................ 154
28.5. Freezing and Unfreezing Data Displays ......................................................................... 154
28.6. Moving a Display ............................................................................................................ 154
28.7. Data Trace....................................................................................................................... 155
28.8. Selecting a Display .......................................................................................................... 155
28.9. Making Point Selections .................................................................................................. 156
28.10. Universal Cursor ............................................................................................................. 157
28.11. Picking X-Y Values .......................................................................................................... 158
28.12. Resetting a Data Display ................................................................................................. 158
28.13. Default Scales for Parameters Displayed in Stripcharts and Frequency Displays......... 158
28.14. Zooming ........................................................................................................................... 159
28.15. IADS Global Options....................................................................................................... 159
29. The Configuration Tool ...........................................................................................160
29.1. The Configuration (Config) Tool .................................................................................... 160
29.2. Configuration Tool Toolbars and Menus ........................................................................ 163
29.3. Configuration Tool Right-Click Menu............................................................................. 165
29.4. Configuration Tool Function and Shortcut Keys ............................................................ 166
29.5. Configuration File Saves and Undo ................................................................................ 167
29.6. Filtering Tables in the Configuration Tool ..................................................................... 168
29.7. Searching for Items in the Configuration Tool................................................................ 169
29.8. Using the File Search Path Table ................................................................................... 170
29.9. The Blob Definitions Table.............................................................................................. 172
29.10. Parameter Aliasing.......................................................................................................... 172
29.11. IADS Parameter Analysis Tool (IPAT) - Debugging a Parameter ................................. 174
29.12. Telemetry Attributes Transfer Standard (TMATS) .......................................................... 177
29.13. Global Parameter Replace .............................................................................................. 179

v
 Table of Contents

29.14. Mission Attributes............................................................................................................ 180

29.15. The Parameter Selection Tool ......................................................................................... 182
29.16. TPP Parameter Rate Selection Dialog ............................................................................ 183
29.17. Derived Function Lookup Tool ....................................................................................... 184
29.18. Desktop Summary Report ................................................................................................ 185
29.19. Parameter Usage Report ................................................................................................. 185
29.20. IADS Validation Dialog .................................................................................................. 185
30. Test Points.................................................................................................................187
30.1. Test Points ....................................................................................................................... 187
30.2. Test Point Right-click Menu ............................................................................................ 188
30.3. Test Point Export Dialog ................................................................................................. 190
30.4. Test Data Request (TDR) Dialog .................................................................................... 191
30.5. Test Point Import Wizard - PlannedTestPointsEx(UserName) Table ............................. 192
30.6. Automated Time Domain Analysis Overview .................................................................. 193
30.7. Flutter Excitation System (FES) Parameters .................................................................. 194
30.8. Using Flutter Excitation System (FES) Automated Analysis System .............................. 197
30.9. Automated Analysis Results............................................................................................. 199
30.10. Plotting Automated Flutter Test Point Data ................................................................... 200
30.11. Planned Flutter Test Points Table................................................................................... 202
30.12. Modal Definitions Table .................................................................................................. 203
30.13. Plotting Loads Test Point Data ....................................................................................... 204
30.14. Planned Loads Test Points Table .................................................................................... 205
30.15. Wind Calibration Macro ................................................................................................. 205
30.16. Calculate Derived Macro ................................................................................................ 207
31. Managing and Creating Parameters ......................................................................209
31.1. The Parameter Defaults Table (PDT) ............................................................................. 209
31.2. The Parameter Defaults State Table ............................................................................... 215
31.3. Creating Derived Parameters ......................................................................................... 215
31.4. Parameter Naming Rules ................................................................................................ 217
31.5. Creating IADS Custom Derived Functions ..................................................................... 218
31.6. Using Set Functions in Derived Equations ..................................................................... 218
31.7. Creating an IAP Derived Parameter ............................................................................... 220
31.8. Processing IAP Derived Parameters in Post Test ........................................................... 222
31.9. Derived Equation Update Tool ....................................................................................... 223
31.10. Enabling TPP Parameters............................................................................................... 224
31.11. IADS Server Archiving and Nulling ................................................................................ 224
31.12. Sign Change .................................................................................................................... 226
32. Functions and Equation ..........................................................................................227
32.1. Equation Operators and Functions ................................................................................. 227
32.2. Derived Function Lookup Tool ....................................................................................... 237
32.3. Derived Equations FAQ .................................................................................................. 239
32.4. 1D Interpolation .............................................................................................................. 240
32.5. 2D Interpolation .............................................................................................................. 242
32.6. 3D Interpolation .............................................................................................................. 243
32.7. Aero Functions ................................................................................................................ 244

vi
 IADS User Manual

32.8. Bitwise Operations .......................................................................................................... 248

32.9. IADS Bus Functions ........................................................................................................ 250
32.10. ByteSwap ......................................................................................................................... 257
32.11. Choose Function.............................................................................................................. 257
32.12. Conversion Functions...................................................................................................... 258
32.13. Coordinate Transformation Functions ............................................................................ 260
32.14. Decom Function .............................................................................................................. 263
32.15. IADS Decom Status ......................................................................................................... 264
32.16. GetConstant ..................................................................................................................... 265
32.17. GetData ........................................................................................................................... 266
32.18. GetTestPointActive .......................................................................................................... 267
32.19. Test Point Import Wizard - PlannedTestPointsEx(UserName) Table ............................. 267
32.20. Get User Input - Distributing User Inputs ...................................................................... 269
32.21. Get Value - Using an ActiveX Property as a Parameter ................................................. 271
32.22. Helicopter Functions ....................................................................................................... 272
32.23. iadsread ........................................................................................................................... 274
32.24. IfThenElse........................................................................................................................ 277
32.25. Make Blob Function ........................................................................................................ 277
32.26. Make Blob2 Function ...................................................................................................... 278
32.27. Malibu Antenna Control Functions ................................................................................. 279
32.28. Manual Nulling................................................................................................................ 282
32.29. Mission Attributes............................................................................................................ 283
32.30. Previous Function ........................................................................................................... 284
32.31. Set Trigger Parameter ..................................................................................................... 285
32.32. String Compare Function ................................................................................................ 286
32.33. Terrain Functions ............................................................................................................ 287
32.34. Time in derived Equations ............................................................................................... 289
32.35. Unit Conversions ............................................................................................................. 292
32.36. Variance Function ........................................................................................................... 292
33. Time Domain Analysis .............................................................................................293
33.1. IADS Data Analysis ......................................................................................................... 293
33.2. Averaging Data Using Real Time Randomdec (RTRD) .................................................. 294
33.3. Averaging Data Using Manual Auto Correlation ........................................................... 295
33.4. Averaging Data Using Manual Pseudo Randomdec ....................................................... 296
33.5. Selecting a Signal Segment for Pseudo Randomdec ....................................................... 296
33.6. Activation Option Table for Pseudo Randomdec ............................................................ 297
33.7. Averaging Data Using Manual Randomdec.................................................................... 298
33.8. Deleting a Data Overlay ................................................................................................. 299
33.9. Calculating Frequency and Damping Using Log Decrement ......................................... 299
33.10. Calculating Frequency and Damping Using Log Decrement Averaging ....................... 300
33.11. Calculating Frequency and Damping Using Log Amplitude Picking ............................. 301
33.12. Calculating Frequency and Damping Using Time History Curve Fit (THCF)............... 302
33.13. Calculating Frequency and Damping Using Damping Ratio ......................................... 304
33.14. Calculating Time Domain RMS (Root Mean Square) on a Vertical Stripchart .............. 305
33.15. Calculating the Time Above Threshold ........................................................................... 305
34. Frequency Domain Analysis ...................................................................................306

vii
 Table of Contents

34.1. Calculating Frequency and Damping Using the Half Power Method ............................ 306
34.2. Calculating Phase and Gain Margin .............................................................................. 307
34.3. Calculating Frequency and Damping Using RFP Curve Fit .......................................... 309
34.4. Calculating the Selective Area RMS and Selective Area Peak ........................................ 310
34.5. Calculating Indirect Frequency Response Functions ..................................................... 311
34.6. Sharing Spectral Data in Frequency Displays ................................................................ 311
34.7. Viewing Spectral Data..................................................................................................... 312
34.8. Editing Spectral Data ...................................................................................................... 314
34.9. Setting/Resetting Peak Hold in Frequency Displays ....................................................... 315
34.10. Calculating an Inverse Fourier Transform (IFT) ........................................................... 315
34.11. Applying the Chirp Z Transform (CZT) within a Frequency Display ............................. 316
34.12. Recalculating Frequency Data That Has Been Scrolled Back in Time ........................... 317
34.13. Automated Frequency Domain Analysis ......................................................................... 317
34.14. Frequency Domain Integration (FDI) ............................................................................. 318
35. Import and Export ...................................................................................................319
35.1. Data Export from a Stripchart ........................................................................................ 319
35.2. Data Export Wizard......................................................................................................... 320
35.3. Data Groups .................................................................................................................... 323
35.4. The Parameter Selection Tool ......................................................................................... 327
35.5. Advanced Import Wizard ................................................................................................. 328
35.6. Importing and Exporting information in the Configuration Tool ................................... 330
35.7. Importing and Exporting Analysis Window, Desktops and Config Information ............. 332
35.8. Data File Import Dialog.................................................................................................. 333
35.9. Data Export from a Frequency Plot ................................................................................ 334
35.10. Test Point Export Dialog ................................................................................................. 335
35.11. Telemetry Attributes Transfer Standard (TMATS) .......................................................... 335
36. Filtering, Nulling and Data Editing ........................................................................337
36.1. Filtering Parameters in IADS ......................................................................................... 337
36.2. Using Set Functions in Derived Equations ..................................................................... 340
36.3. Null Corrections .............................................................................................................. 342
36.4. Data Editing Overview .................................................................................................... 343
36.5. Spike Detection and Correction ...................................................................................... 345
36.6. Sync Lock Processing ...................................................................................................... 346
36.7. Wild Point Correction ..................................................................................................... 346
37. Color Thresholds......................................................................................................347
37.1. Color Thresholds ............................................................................................................. 347
37.2. Setting Thresholds ........................................................................................................... 348
37.3. The Threshold Log........................................................................................................... 349
37.4. Sync Lock Protection ....................................................................................................... 349
38. Envelopes ..................................................................................................................350
38.1. Envelopes Overview ........................................................................................................ 350
38.2. Creating or Modifying Envelopes using the Envelope Properties Dialog ...................... 352
38.3. Creating Envelopes directly in the Envelopes Table ....................................................... 354
38.4. Envelope Function........................................................................................................... 355

viii
 IADS User Manual

38.5. Changing the Line Color and Thickness of an Envelope ................................................ 355
38.6. Cross Plot Load Limit Algorithms................................................................................... 356
38.7. Cross Plot Load Limit Symbol......................................................................................... 357
38.8. Capturing Load Values on Cross Plots ........................................................................... 357
39. IADS Logs / Event Marking....................................................................................358
39.1. IADS Logs ....................................................................................................................... 358
39.2. Editing the IADS Logs ..................................................................................................... 360
39.3. Filtering IADS Log Entries ............................................................................................. 360
39.4. Event Markers ................................................................................................................. 361
39.5. Defining Event Marker Group and Subgroups ............................................................... 363
39.6. Recording a Value when an Event Marker is Triggered ................................................. 364
39.7. Displaying Logged Data and Events ............................................................................... 365
39.8. Log Data to File .............................................................................................................. 365
40. Algorithms ................................................................................................................366
40.1. Auto Correlation.............................................................................................................. 366
40.2. Auto Spectrum ................................................................................................................. 366
40.3. Coherence........................................................................................................................ 367
40.4. Half Power Damping....................................................................................................... 368
40.5. Fixed Block Frequency Averaging .................................................................................. 369
40.6. Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) and Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) ........................ 370
40.7. Feedback Systems and Indirect Frequency Response Functions .................................... 370
40.8. Imaginary ........................................................................................................................ 370
40.9. Inverse Fourier Transform - IFT..................................................................................... 371
40.10. Log Amplitude Picking .................................................................................................... 371
40.11. Log Decrement ................................................................................................................ 371
40.12. Log Decrement Averaging............................................................................................... 372
40.13. Magnitude........................................................................................................................ 372
40.14. Mean Removal ................................................................................................................. 373
40.15. Nyquist Plot ..................................................................................................................... 373
40.16. Octave Band .................................................................................................................... 373
40.17. Overlap Frequency Averaging ........................................................................................ 373
40.18. Phase Reference .............................................................................................................. 374
40.19. Power Spectral Density ................................................................................................... 374
40.20. Pseudo Randomdec ......................................................................................................... 375
40.21. Randomdec ...................................................................................................................... 375
40.22. Real Reference................................................................................................................. 375
40.23. Real Time Frequency Averaging ..................................................................................... 376
40.24. Rational Fraction Polynomial (RFP) Curve Fit ............................................................. 377
40.25. Selective Area RMS (Root Mean Square) ........................................................................ 377
40.26. Smoothing ........................................................................................................................ 378
40.27. Time Domain RMS (Root Mean Square) ......................................................................... 378
40.28. Time History Curve Fit.................................................................................................... 379
40.29. Frequency Response Function ........................................................................................ 379
40.30. Window Equivalent Noise Bandwidth (ENBW) ............................................................... 380
40.31. Window Type ................................................................................................................... 380

ix
 Table of Contents

41. IADS Data Manager ................................................................................................383

41.1. The IADS Data Manager Overview ................................................................................ 383
41.2. Data Manager - Import or Export Table (Test) Information .......................................... 387
41.3. Data Manager - Import or Export Analysis Window or Desktop.................................... 388
41.4. Data Manager - Import Data .......................................................................................... 390
41.5. Data Manager - Export Data .......................................................................................... 391
41.6. Data Manager - Convert, Combine, Merge and Split IADS Data .................................. 392
41.7. Data Manager - Search ................................................................................................... 397
41.8. Data Manager - Command Line and Run File Option.................................................... 398
42. Calibration Tool .......................................................................................................407
42.1. IADS Calibration Tool .................................................................................................... 407
42.2. Importing and Exporting Calibration Data .................................................................... 410
42.3. Creating a Metadata File ................................................................................................ 410
43. Post Test Data Server (PTDS) ................................................................................411
43.1. Post Test Data Server (PTDS)......................................................................................... 411
43.2. Post Test Data Server (PTDS) Menus ............................................................................. 412
43.3. Importing Data using the Post Test Data Server ............................................................ 413
43.4. Z-Ball ............................................................................................................................... 414
44. Settings/Options .......................................................................................................415
44.1. Screen Resolution ............................................................................................................ 415
44.2. IADS Client Application Properties ................................................................................ 415
44.3. IADS Command Line Options ......................................................................................... 415
45. Index ..........................................................................................................................420

x
1. Starting IADS
1.1. IADS Startup Dialog
The IADS Startup Dialog is the default method for launching the IADS Client Display in
playback mode. The IADS Startup Dialog will open when the IADS Playback Client is
started. You can quickly access data on your local machine or from a Post Test Data Server
running on the local network; create and modify IADS configuration files, or select a
configuration file from a recent history list and launch the IADS Playback Client.
Note: The Post Test Data Server (PTDS) is a completely separate application that you run in
order to simulate a data server.

To open the IADS Startup Dialog:

 Click the IADS Playback Client icon on the Desktop or click Start > All Programs >
IADS > IADS Playback Client.
New Tab
Create a blank configuration file with no Analysis Windows or parameters. If you
save to a directory that already has a configuration file it will be replaced
(overwritten).Existing data files will remain if applicable.
Blank
Click the Blank icon > click Open. Click the New User button and enter a User
Name > click Create > click Log On. In the New Desktop Properties dialog enter
the Desktop, Group and SubGroup names > click OK. You will be prompted to
choose a data output directory when you save your configuration.
Create a new configuration file from a data export csv file (such as when you
Import select two points in an IADS Stripchart and Export to CSV File), or merge into an
Data existing configuration file.
Click the Import Data icon > click Open. Navigate to the directory that contains
your csv file and select it > click Open. Select an IADS data output directory >

11
Starting IADS

click OK. Review the selections in the Data File Import Dialog > click OK. Log
On to IADS.

Create a configuration file from one or more IADS Desktop or IADS Analysis
Import
Window files.
DT/AW
Click the Import DT/AW icon > click Open. Select an empty data output
directory (no existing pfconfig file) > click OK.
Click the Demo icon > click Open. Log On to IADS for a demonstration of
Demo
various IADS displays.
Click the Tutorial icon > click Open. Log On to IADS for a short tutorial on the
Tutorial
IADS Desktop.
Click the Flutter icon > click Open. Log On to IADS to create a configuration
Flutter
file with prebuilt displays; intended as a starting point for a typical flutter setup.
Click the Loads icon > click Open. Log On to IADS to create a configuration file
Loads
with prebuilt displays; intended as a starting point for a typical loads setup.
Click the FQ icon > click Open. Log On to IADS to create a configuration file
FQ with prebuilt displays; intended as a starting point for a typical flying qualities
setup.
Existing Tab
Opens a dialog to browse for a configuration file, then launches the IADS Client
Display with that file. This file will automatically be moved to the top of the
Load
recent history list.
Config
Click the Load Config icon > click Open. Navigate to the configuration file of
interest and select it. Log On to IADS.
Displays any Post Test Data Servers running on the network.
Server
Click on the server icon > click Open. Log on to IADS
Recent Tab
Displays a list of configuration files you have opened recently.
pfconfig
Click on the pfconfig file > click Open. Log On to IADS.

To remove a config file from the Recent tab:

 Right-click on the config file > Remove from List or Remove all from List.
IADS Playback Client vs. Post Test Data Server
IADS Playback Client advantages:
1. Simple. When the IADS Playback Client starts you select the config file location in the
IADS Startup Dialog. After the config file is chosen, it loads and starts the desktop. The
least amount of steps, the less probability that something will go wrong. This is the
"method of choice" for everyday use.
2. Quick. The config file is only handled once, thus the loading time is reduced. If the data
is on the local machine this is the fastest method of access.

12
IADS User Manual

IADS Playback Client disadvantages:

 Cannot perform "collaboration" with multiple users.
PTDS advantages:
1. Allows you to orchestrate the interaction of multiple users. If a number of people are
connected to the same PTDS server, you could in essence simulate a mission (for training
purposes) by playing back the data in an orchestrated manner. This technique has been
used in many locations, including test pilot schools, etc. Connecting multiple people also
muxes config changes into a single config file (good for next day mission prep).
2. Allows you to serve a large number of users from the same data set in a more "network
efficient" and possibly secure manner than simply accessing the files across Network
Neighborhood (depending on network speed and security issues of course). Sometimes
network neighborhood access is restricted, but connection to a server is not.
3. Allows you to acquire live data from a number of data sources. These sources include
select cards from LabViews and other miscellaneous "custom" built plug-in applications.
The PTDS can be a mini IADS Server, but of course its scope and capabilities are highly
limited.
4. Allows LAN access without a shared drive being available. If the two machines can make
a socket connect, basically an IT issue, then the Client can connect to PTDS and receive
data. For the IADS Playback Client to run in this environment, a shared drive would need
to be available; a "Z" drive if you will. If this is not desirable then the PTDS is the way to
go.
PTDS disadvantages:
1. It is another application that you must run first, *before* you run the IADS Client in
order to play back data.
2. It is possible to launch the PTDS many times on the same data set. During client startup
and Log On, it can be very difficult to ascertain which PTDS to choose.
3. Every time a user launches a PTDS, the other clients on the network can see this PTDS in
their client Log On list. If everyone on the network used this technique, you could have
quite a long list of available servers which could be confusing.
4. For the everyday user, the whole process to view data is now slower. First they have to
start the PTDS, choose the archive, then wait for it the config file to load and validate. At
this point, they have to run the IADS Client, wait for the list of available servers (this
takes time) and then choose the server. After the server is chosen, it has to "connect" and
the whole entire config file is then "transferred" to the user's temp directory (takes time).
Finally, the client can load the config file (takes time) and start. For the config file sizes
that exceeding 100MB, this can be time consuming.

13
 Starting IADS

1.2. Log On to IADS

All users (sharing the same configuration file) have access to the same Desktops. The two
fields in the Log On dialog box show the Desktop that is associated with the corresponding
user name. You can log on to any User Name and its associated Desktop, even if some other
user already has that Desktop open. If two or more people have the same desktop open and
make changes to the same display(s), IADS will save the changes made by the last person to
log off.
When you create a new user name, the desktop that you select (or create) with it, will be the
default Desktop associated with that user name. All users (sharing the same configuration
file) have access to the same Desktops. When you create a unique user name, the desktop that
you select (or create) with it, will be the default Desktop associated with that user name every
time it is chosen at log on.
The Group and Subgroup are assigned based on the Desktop you select (Group and Subgroup
are defined when a Desktop is created).

To Log On:
1. Click the IADS icon on the Desktop or in the Start Menu.
2. In the IADS Log On dialog, select a User Name.
3. Select a Desktop from the drop-down list. You can create a new desktop by selecting
New Desktop, the New Desktop Properties dialog box will come up after log on and you
can choose its name, group and subgroup. A new desktop will have no analysis windows
until you create one.
4. Click Log On.
To create a new user at Log On:
1. Click New User in the IADS Log On dialog box.
2. Enter a User Name in the Create New User dialog box.
3. Select a Desktop from the drop-down list. You can create a new desktop by selecting
New Desktop, the New Desktop Properties dialog box will come up after log on and you
can choose its name, group and subgroup. A new desktop will have no analysis windows
until you create one.
4. Click Create.
5. Click Log On.

14
 IADS User Manual

1.3. The Desktop

The Desktop contains The Dashboard, The Parameter Tool, The Display Builder and
Analysis Windows (once they are created). You can create several Desktops under the same
user name; however, only one Desktop can be open at a time. If two or more people have the
same desktop open and make changes to the same display(s), IADS will save the changes
made by the last person to log off.
Note: Creating multiple Desktops with fewer Analysis Windows, and specifically fewer
display objects per Analysis Window, will reduce GDI Handle count (additional applications
running on the machine impacts total GDI Handles).
To change Desktops:
The original/current Desktop will close and the new Desktop will open in its place. The new
Desktop may open with its Analysis Windows minimized to the Dashboard.
1. On the Dashboard, click Change Desktop.
2. Select a Desktop from the drop-down list. If you select New Desktop, a new desktop will
be created.
3. Click Change.
To delete a Desktop:
If you delete a Desktop it will destroy all of the Analysis Windows and associated displays on
that Desktop.
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Click the Edit drop down menu > Current Desktop > Delete.
To change the Desktop name:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Click the Edit drop down menu > Current Desktop > Properties.
3. In the Desktop Properties dialog, enter the new name in the Desktop field.
4. Click OK.
Note: A deleted Desktop is backed up in the temp directory on the machine. The Message
Log will update with this information. To view this temp directory type %temp% in the
Windows Explorer (My Computer) address bar and press Enter.

1.4. Creating a New Desktop

You can create a new Desktop at any time; however, only one Desktop can be open at a time.
The old Desktop will close, clearing the computer screen area for the windows and displays
you will create for the new Desktop. If you do not create an Analysis Window on the
Desktop, it will not save. You cannot save an empty desktop.
To create a new Desktop:
1. Click the Display Builder button on the Dashboard.
2. Click the Data Displays tab.

3. Select the Create New Desktop icon on the Display Builder and while holding
down the left mouse button, drag it onto your desktop and release.

15
 Starting IADS

4. Type a desktop name, and names for the Group and Subgroup (you can leave the
group/subgroup blank if desired).
5. Click Create.

6. Select the Analysis Window icon on the Display Builder and while holding down
the left mouse button, drag it onto your desktop and release.
7. Click the SaveConfig button on the dashboard.
- Or -
1. Click the Change Desktop button on the Dashboard.
2. In the Desktop box click New Desktop.
3. Click Change. A new desktop is created.
4. Repeat steps 3-6 above.
Note: If two or more people have the same desktop open and make changes to the same
display(s), IADS will save the changes made by the last person to log off.

1.5. The Dashboard

The Dashboard is a special component of the Desktop similar to a Taskbar, where frequently
used IADS tools can be quickly accessed. The Dashboard also displays a Threshold Alert, the
current Test Point, the current IRIG time, Data Editing enable/disable and Automated
Analysis enable/disable. It also contains any Analysis Windows that have been minimized
from the Desktop.
The Dashboard automatically appears along the bottom edge of each IADS Desktop, but can
be minimized to the Windows Taskbar by clicking the Hide Dashboard button (located near
the lower right corner of the Dashboard itself).
IRIG Time example: 318:17:59:43 = ddd:hh:mm:ss = Julian date:hours:minutes:seconds
To change the Dashboard color:
1. Click the arrow at the IRIG Time display on the Dashboard.
2. Click Set Dashboard Color > Grey, Blue, Black, Teal or Night.

Dashboard Buttons and Settings

Enables/disables Color Displays the IRIG time and Displays a list of the
Thresholds. Clicking the Flight, Test and Tail Analysis Windows on the
Log button brings up the information. Click the arrow Desktop you are logged into.
Thresholds Log. Click the button to access Global Click on an Analysis
arrow button to enable Sync Options (and set the Window to view it.
Lock Protection. Dashboard color).

16
 IADS User Manual

Start/stop the selected Test Enables/disables Data Enables/disables Automated

Point. Click the arrow button Editing. Analysis. Click the arrow
to set Test Point Actions on button to set FES and other
Start/Stop and other settings. automated analysis settings.

Opens the Parameter Tool.

Opens the Global Time dialog. Allows you to select a faster or slower
Post Test Data Server play speed (if applicable) by selecting the Obtain
Time From Post Test Data Server check box.
Opens the IADS Logs.
Opens the Display Builder.
Opens the Message Log.
Opens the Configuration Tool.
Opens the Change Desktop dialog.
Saves all changes to the Configuration file.
Minimizes the Dashboard. To make visible again, in the Taskbar, click
on IADS > Dashboard.
Opens the IADS Performance Window.
Log off IADS.
Opens the IADS Help System.

1.6. The Message Log

The Message log is a record of IADS status information, error messages, and other reports.
To open the Message Log:
 On the Dashboard, click Message Log button.

1.7. Monitoring System Performance

The performance monitoring system on the Dashboard is used to monitor both IADS and core
system performance variables for threshold conditions. The Performance button on the
Dashboard will highlight to warn the user: Warning (yellow) will trigger when 75% of the
resource maximum is reached, and Alarm (red) will trigger when 90% of the resource
maximum is reached.
Creating multiple Desktops with fewer Analysis Windows, and specifically fewer display
objects per Analysis Window, will reduce GDI Handle count (additional applications running
on the machine impacts total GDI Handles). Generally when users reach GDI limits, It is
suggested they decrease the number of Analysis Windows per Desktop; if that is not a viable
option then consider the /maxLoadedAwsPerDt command.
In a non-warning system state, clicking the Performance button brings up the Windows Task
Manager.

17
 Analysis Windows

To view the IADS performance window during a warning:

 On the Dashboard, click the Performance button.
To view system performance (non-warning state):
1. On the Dashboard, click the Performance button to bring up the Windows Task
Manager.
2. Click the Performance tab.
Note: Creating a large amount of displays using Multi-Create may cause a warning state due
to system resource limitations; press the Esc key to stop a Multi-Create in progress. This
display object when deleted remains in the "Undo" queue and does not free up system
resources until another display is deleted.

1.8. Log Off from IADS

 Select the Log Off button on the Dashboard.
Would you like to save your current configuration?
Yes: The changes you made to the Desktop and your configuration will be saved and the next
time you log on your name will be associated with this Desktop. The changes will be saved
globally; that is, whoever logs on to this Desktop will see the changes you made.
No: Your configuration will stay as it was when you logged on; or since your last save.
Note: If two or more people have the same desktop open and make changes to the same
display(s), the changes made by the last person to log off will be saved to that desktop for that
display(s).

2. Analysis Windows
2.1. Analysis Windows
When an Analysis Window is created, the name of the window is listed in the Analysis
Window List on the Dashboard. Your Desktop can contain multiple Analysis Windows and
you can change Analysis Windows at any time. When you create an Analysis Window, a
pop-up box will show the default name of the new window; which you can rename to
something applicable to your project. You can change the name, security classification,
background color and other properties using the right-click menu.
By default a new (empty) Analysis Window is locked. Adding any display to a window will
unlock it to allow changes. A window must be in an unlocked position to move, re-size or
delete displays. Locking the window will prevent inadvertent changes to displays.

18
IADS User Manual

To create an Analysis Window:

1. On the Dashboard, click the Display Builder.
2. Click the Data Displays tab.

3. Click on the Analysis Window icon in the Display Builder, hold down the left
mouse button and drag it onto your Desktop.
To view or change Analysis Window properties:
 Right-click in the Analysis Window (not in a display) > Properties.
Note: [Default in 64-bit IADS] To enable the advanced property dialogs for all the data
displays, click the arrow button at the IRIG time display on the Dashboard > Use Advanced
Property Dialog for all Displays.
To change Analysis Windows:
 Select an Analysis Window name in the list on the dashboard.
- Or -
 Right-click in the Analysis Window list > Analysis Windows; and select a window from
the entire list.
Note: Changing Analysis Windows should not be confused with Changing Desktops.
To lock or unlock an Analysis Window:

 In the top left corner of the window, click or

- Or -
 Right-click on the Analysis Window title bar > Edit > Unlock or Lock.
To minimize an Analysis Window:
 Click the in the corner of the window.
To copy an Analysis Window:
 Click in the title-bar of the Analysis Window and press Ctrl+C, then Ctrl+V ("Copy of
AnalysisWindowName (1)").
To set a floating Analysis Window:
1. Right-click the mouse in the title bar of the Analysis Window.
2. Select Floating Window Style from the menu.
Note: A floating Analysis Window will always remain on top of all other windows.
To delete an Analysis Window in the list:
 On the Dashboard, right-click on the Analysis Window in the list > Delete Selected
Analysis Window.
- Or -
 Right-click on the Analysis Window's Title Bar > Delete > Analysis Window.

19
 Analysis Windows

To use an Analysis Window function key:

 With your cursor in the Analysis Window and not in any display, press the desired
keyboard key.
Note: To duplicate an Analysis Window, create a new Analysis Window using the Display
Builder and paste the contents of the desired window into the new Analysis Window. You
cannot export an Analysis Window and import it back into the same Desktop; the system will
assume you want to replace the current window.

2.2. Analysis Window Toolbars

The Analysis Window Toolbar can be customized to show only those toolbar options
necessary for daily operations, or completely hidden to save Desktop space.
To set toolbar options:
1. Right-click on the Analysis Window Title Bar.
2. Click Toolbars >
Hide All - Hides the entire Analysis Window Toolbar.
Wrap - Wraps the toolbar options when the Analysis Window is resized as necessary.
Standard - Displays the standard toolbar.
Frequency - Displays the frequency toolbar.
Analysis - Displays the analysis toolbar.
Stripchart - Displays the Stripchart toolbar with speed and grid options.
Standard Toolbar Buttons
Locks and Unlocks an Analysis Select or de-select all displays
Window
Prints the Analysis Window. The drop Resets point selections within
down arrow allows you to select any selected displays
printer on the network
Creates an Event Marker. The drop down arrow allows you to set predefined
comments, or enter a comment
Frequency Toolbar Buttons
Opens the Frequency Analysis dialog Resets frequency averaging
box
Recalculates the frequency analysis Captures the maximum % Load
Limit
Resets Peak Hold values

Analysis Toolbar Buttons

Applies Log Decrement analysis Applies Time History Curve Fit
analysis
Applies Log Decrement Averaging Applies Half Power Damping
analysis analysis
Applies Log Amplitude Picking Applies Auto Correlation analysis
analysis

20
 IADS User Manual

Applies Pseudo Randomdec analysis Opens the Filter Selection dialog

box
Applies Randomdec analysis
Stripchart Toolbar Buttons
Displays all the data for the entire test in Set chart speed at 20mm/second
the Stripchart (press the Esc key to
cancel)
Sets chart speed at 1mm/second Sets chart speed at 50mm/second
Sets chart speed at 2mm/second Sets chart speed at 100mm/second
Sets chart speed at 5mm/second Sets chart speed at 200mm/second
Sets chart speed at 10mm/second Sets chart speed at 300mm/second
Sets grid resolution to none Sets grid resolution to 5mm
Sets grid resolution to 1mm Sets grid resolution to 100mm

2.3. Analysis Window Right-Click Menu Options

To select right-click menu options:
1. Right-click in the Analysis Window title-bar (very top).
2. On the pop-up menu click:
Print (F2) - A picture of the Analysis Window is on its way to the printer.
Save Image (Ctrl+Shift+F1) - Saves a bitmap file to a selected designation. It will go to this
destination automatically.
Floating Window Style - Hides the Toolbar and Dashboard
Assign to Secondary Monitor - Assigns selected Analysis Window to a secondary monitor.
Available on single monitor system only. For example, if you have a single monitor at your
workstation and then go to a control room that has dual monitors, you can assign an Analysis
Window to come up on that secondary window.
Classification Bars - Show Both (default), Show on Top, Show on Bottom or Do not show.
Toolbars:
Hide All - Hides the entire Analysis Window Toolbar.
Wrap - Wraps the toolbar options when the Analysis Window is resized as necessary.
Standard - Displays the standard toolbar options.
Frequency - Displays the frequency toolbar options.
Analysis - Displays the analysis toolbar options.
Stripchart - Displays the Stripchart speed and grid toolbar options.
Attachment - Attach or detach selected displays.
Edit - Lock or unlock the Analysis Window. A window must be unlocked before displays can
be moved, re-sized, or deleted.

21
 Analysis Windows

Displays:
Freeze Selected Displays - Freeze all the selected displays on the Analysis Window.
Unfreeze Selected Displays - Unfreeze all the selected displays on the Analysis Window.
Set Up Time Based Stripchart - Allows you to define the Stripchart's chart speed to run in
seconds vs. millimeters.
Run While Window Minimized - Updates non-visible Analysis Windows.
Delete all Data Overlays - Removes all data overlays.
Size - Set to Normal by default. You can set the Analysis Window to display a full screen,
this will remove the Toolbar at the top of the window and the Dashboard at the bottom of the
screen.
Delete - Deletes the current Analysis Window (including all the displays).
Add In Tools - Opens the Stripchart Toolbox.
Import - Allows you to import existing DataViews files into the IADS drawing package. The
DataViews screens must be saved in a PC format using only version 2.3.
Hot Keys - Displays hot key dialog.
Properties - Opens the Analysis Window's property sheet.

2.4. Analysis Window Keyboard Shortcuts

To quickly execute a command you can use a pre-set shortcut key. The cursor should be in
the Analysis Window; or in a display if applicable.
Note: Key hits apply to all selected displays unless otherwise noted.
Key Function
Esc Stops a "Multi-Create Here" in progress
0 (Zero) Toggles real time on and off
F1 Places an Event Marker on the Stripchart(s)
Shift+F1 Places an Event Marker and brings up the comment dialog
Ctrl+Shift+F1 Captures a bitmap of the window
F2 Prints the active Analysis Window
F3 Freezes and Unfreezes the active Analysis Window
F4 Creates a Stripchart at the location of the cursor
F5 Creates a Frequency Plot at the location of the cursor
F6 Creates an Alphanumeric at the location of the cursor
F7 Creates an Alphanumeric Table at the location of the cursor
F8 Creates a Cross Plot
F9 Creates a Slider
F11 Create a Display Panel
F Toggles Freeze on all selected IADS displays
Ctrl+B Aligns all selected displays at their bottom
Ctrl+C Copies all the selected displays
Ctrl+H Aligns all selected displays horizontally
Ctrl+G Aligns all selected displays vertically

22
IADS User Manual

Ctrl+L Aligns all selected displays at their left

Ctrl+R Aligns all selected displays at their right
Ctrl+T Aligns all selected displays at their top
Ctrl+V Pastes the last drop from the Display Builder, Parameter Tool or any
copied displays
Ctrl+X Cuts all selected displays
Ctrl+Z Undo/Redo previous operation (move, delete or align)
Ctrl+Arrows Move selected display(s) using the Ctrl key and an arrow key
simultaneously (unlock the Analysis Window)
Page Up Advances one screen of data up when scrollbar is at the top of its shaft
Page Down Advances one screen of data down when scrollbar is at the bottom of
shaft
Moves data up one point at a time
Shift + Moves data up ten points at a time
Moves data down one point at a time
Shift + Moves data down ten points at a time
Shift To copy a parameter from one display to another, place cursor in title-
bar of display, hold down the Shift key and drag the parameter into
another display.
Alt To enable shortcut keys for each Toolbar button (with your cursor in
the Analysis Window; NOT in a display)

23
 Analysis Windows

2.5. Viewing Analysis Windows from Other Desktops

This tool allows you view Analysis Windows from a Desktop other than the one you are
logged into. When you choose one or more Analysis Windows in the “Select Windows for
Viewing” dialog and click OK, the Analysis Windows you selected will be displayed on your
Desktop. These windows will have quotes around their names in the Analysis Window title-
bar and in the window list on the Dashboard to indicate their "view" status. These Analysis
Windows can be modified and you will be prompted to make a copy of the window on Log
Off or when saving; if you say Yes, the window will become part of your Desktop.

To view Analysis Windows from other Desktops:

1. On the Dashboard, right-click in the Analysis Window list.
2. Click View Analysis Windows from Other Desktops...
3. In the dialog, select the desired Analysis Windows.
4. Click OK.
To save View Only Analysis Window(s) that you have modified to your Desktop:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Save Config button.
2. Click Yes in the Save Changes dialog.
Note: View Only Analysis Windows will not detect changes unless the Analysis Window is
unlocked.
To remove an Analysis Window in the list:
1. On the Dashboard, right-click in the list of Analysis Windows.
2. Select the desired Analysis Window.
3. Click Remove Selected Analysis Window.
- Or -
 Uncheck the Analysis Window name in the “Select Windows for Viewing” dialog.

24
 IADS User Manual

2.6. Adding an Entry to the Security Classification List

Classification levels are configured per Analysis Window and not on a per-parameter basis.
The window classification can be set using the Analysis Window Properties dialog.
To add or modify an entry in the security classifications list:
1. On the dashboard, click Configuration.
2. Open the System folder > Classifications.
3. Select the next available cell and type in the new classification; or modify an existing
entry.
4. Click a Save option.

2.7. Freezing and Unfreezing Analysis Windows and Displays

When frozen, the Analysis Window will stop updating and all displays therein (except those
set to non-freezing). When the Analysis Window is frozen the red button in the stoplight will
be lit up and the scrollbar shaft red. You can move the scrollbar puck up and down to scroll
back the data in this state. Clicking the stoplight will restart the data.
To freeze or unfreeze an analysis window:

 Click the red or green stoplight button at the top of the window scrollbar.
- Or -
 Press the F3 key.
To freeze or unfreeze selected displays in an analysis window:
1. Select the display(s).
2. Move your cursor out of the display and onto the Analysis Window (the cursor cannot be
in or touching any other display).
3. Press the F key to freeze, press the U key to unfreeze.
- Or -
1. Select the display(s).
2. Move your cursor out of the display and onto the Analysis Window (the cursor cannot be
in or touching any other display).
3. Right-click and select Display.
4. Select Freeze Selected Displays or Unfreeze Selected Displays.
Note: displays will be blue when frozen (this does not apply to displays set as never freeze or
when freezing an entire Analysis Window).

25
 Analysis Windows

2.8. Viewing Multiple Analysis Windows

You can display multiple Analysis Window on a single monitor simultaneously. No single
Analysis Window (on the screen) can obscure another window by 50% or more. If one
Analysis Window does obscure another window (by any more than 50%), you will only see
one Analysis Window displayed. Also, if multiple monitors are attached to your computer,
you can view different Analysis Windows on each monitor.

2.9. Printing
You can create a hard copy of any open Analysis Window, display, or configuration
table/log.
To print an Analysis Window:

 On the Toolbar click the print button or press the F2 key.

To print a display:
1. Right-click on the display
2. Click Print.
To print a table/log in the Configuration Tool:
1. Click the Configuration button on the Dashboard.
2. Open the desired table/log.

3. On the Toolbar click the print button.

4. Select a classification level.
5. Click Print.
To save an image of a display or Analysis Window to a bitmap file:
1. Right-click on the display or Analysis Window.
2. Click Save Image.

26
 IADS User Manual

- Or -
 Press Shift+F2.
To select a printer on your network:

1. On the Toolbar click the drop-down arrow next to the print button.
2. Select a printer name.
3. Click OK.
To set the page orientation:

1. On the Toolbar click the drop-down arrow next to the print button.
2. Click Properties.
3. On the Layout tab, under Orientation, click one of the following options:
Portrait - to print vertically on the page.
Landscape - to print horizontally on the page.
4. Click OK.

2.10. Scrollbar
All the displays in a single Analysis Window or on all Analysis Windows within a Desktop,
can scroll simultaneously using the window scrollbar.
To scroll the displays in the current Analysis Window:
1. Freeze the window (the Scrollbar shaft turns red).
2. Drag the scrollbar puck within the scrollbar.
To scroll the displays in discrete jumps:
 Click or press the single or double scroll command arrow buttons at either end of
the scrollbar.
To scroll all of the displays in every Analysis Window on the Desktop:
1. With your cursor in any Analysis Window's Scrollbar, right click.
2. Click Global Scrollbar on the menu.
3. Drag the scrollbar puck within the scrollbar to the desired time.
Note: To scroll past the bottom of the scrollbar shaft press the Page Down key. Scrolled
frequency data does not continuously update, see Recalculating Scrolled Frequency Data.
You can specify the time range for the Analysis Window. Scrollbar time range is the number
of minutes of data available in the entire length of the Scrollbar. For example, if the Scrollbar
time range is set to 3, dragging the Scrollbar box from the top to the bottom of the scrollbar
once will scroll by 3 minutes of data. To scroll past the end of the time and press the Page
Down key.
To change the Scrollbar time range:
1. Right-click on the Analysis Window scrollbar.
2. Select Scrollbar Time Range.
3. Click the number of minutes you want for the time range: 3, 5, 10, 30, 60 or All.

27
 Analysis Windows

To select right-click menu options:

1. Right-click on the Scrollbar.
2. On the pop-up menu click:
Go To Time - Brings up the Go To Time dialog box. You can set the current Analysis
Window to a particular time.
Scrollbar Time Range - The number of minutes of data available in the entire length of the
Scrollbar. For example, if the time range is set to 3, dragging the Scrollbar box from the top
to the bottom of the scrollbar once will display 3 minutes of data.
Play from Here - Allows you to replay an event from the Scrollbar puck position (playback
only).
Affected Data Source - For use with multiple test data. Aligns all data sources selected to the
same time.
Show Tick Marks - Shows a colored hash mark in the Scrollbar area denoting event markers
and analyses.
Blink in Scrollbar - Red background blinks when the window is frozen.
Global Scrollbar - Scroll all of the displays in all of the windows on your Desktop
simultaneously whether the windows are open or closed. If you select this option and do a
“Go To Time”, all the Analysis Windows on the Desktop will be set to that time.

2.11. Go To Time
Using the Go To Time feature you can set the current Analysis Window or all Analysis
Windows on a Desktop to a particular time.

To go to a specific time on only one Analysis Window:

1. With your cursor in the Analysis Window Scrollbar, right-click.
2. Click Go To Time on the menu.
3. Enter the desired time in the IRIG Time dialog box.
4. Click OK.
To go to a specific time globally (each Analysis Windows on the Desktop):
1. With the cursor in any Analysis Window's Scrollbar, right-click.
2. Click Global Scrollbar on the menu.
3. Right-click again in the scrollbar. You will notice that Global Scrollbar is checked.
4. Click Go To Time on the menu.

28
 IADS User Manual

5. Enter the desired time in the IRIG Time dialog box.

6. Click OK.

2.12. The Data Search Tool

Using the IADS Derived Equation Engine users can use this tool to search through archived
data for a particular condition. The Analysis Window will stop and scroll displays to the time
when the condition was met; this time is displayed in the title bar of the display. The search
will continue each time the next button is pressed, skipping consecutive matches. At any
point, the user has the option to change the search direction, or click the Reset Time button to
go back to the time when the dialog was created.
For example, to detect spikes in the data, enter an equation for the spike or threshold
condition you want to find. You can enter a basic 'parameter > value' or use more advanced
operators like InRange, StdDev, Variance, etc...

To open the Data Search Tool:

 Right-click on the Analysis Window Scrollbar > Data Search Tool.
- Or -
1. Put your cursor in the display that contains your "search parameter".
2. Press Ctrl+F to open the Data Search Tool.
3. Type in an Equation that will return a boolean value that is true; for example,
Prev( Latch, 1 ) == 0 && Latch > 0
4. Select a Search Direction.
5. Click the Find Next button.

29
3. Creating Displays
3.1. The Display Builder - Core Data Displays
You create all IADS displays and controls (except envelopes and time bar displays) using
icons in the Display Builder. You must create an analysis window first to contain the
displays.

To create an Analysis Window:

1. On the Dashboard click the Display Builder button.
2. Click the Data Displays tab.

3. Click on the Analysis Window icon and hold down the left mouse button to drag
it onto your Desktop.
To create a display:
1. Click the Data Displays or ActiveX Controls tab.
2. Click on a display and hold down the left mouse button to drag it onto your Analysis
Window.
Note: Linger your cursor over an icon to view the display name.
To set display defaults (saved default settings for a display type are indicated by a check
mark on the Display Builder):
1. Right-click on a display on the Display Builder.
2. Click Default Properties.
3. Set the controls properties as desired and close the property sheet.
4. Drag the display onto your Analysis Window to see all the default settings; some settings
will now show until a parameter is added to the display.
- Or -
1. Select a display on your Analysis Window.
2. Right-click > Edit > Make default.

30
 IADS User Manual

3. Click Yes in the Default display settings popup.

Note: When you choose "Make default" only display settings are saved not parameter
defaults. Not applicable to folders, panels and summary plots.
To reset a display to the original IADS defaults:
1. Right-click on a display on the Display Builder.
2. Click Reset Defaults.
To create multiple displays of the same type:
1. Right-click on an icon in the display builder and drag it onto your Analysis Window
2. Select Create Multiple Here from the pop-up menu.
3. Click the arrow buttons to select the number of Columns and Rows; or manually enter
the number.
4. Click OK.
To delete a display:
 Click on the display to select it and press the Delete key on the keyboard
- Or -
 Right-click on the display > Delete > Display.
Warning: Creating a large amount of displays may cause the system to become sluggish or
unresponsive due to system resource limitations. If the Performance button on the
Dashboard highlights, press the Esc key to stop the Multi-Create Here in progress; click the
Performance button to view which variable is over the limit. This display object when deleted
remains in the "Undo" queue and does not free up system resources until another display is
deleted.

3.2. The Display Builder - ActiveX Controls

You create all IADS displays and controls (except envelopes and time bar displays) using
icons in the Display Builder. You must create an analysis window first, to contain the
displays.

31
 Creating Displays

To add an ActiveX Control to the Display Builder ActiveX Control Tab:

1. Click the Display Builder button on the dashboard.
2. In the Display Builder, click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. Right-click on the ActiveX Control tab to bring up the Add ActiveX Control dialog box.
4. Select the desired control.
5. Click OK. The Control will now be accessible from an icon on the ActiveX Controls tab
of the Display Builder. Hinting on an icon will show the ProgID (icons name) for that
display.
Note: If you have installed an ActiveX control and it does not appear in the list of the dialog
box, you may need to register that control on your workstation. Follow instructions provided
with the control, or check with the manufacturer.
To create an ActiveX display:
1. On the Dashboard click the Display Builder button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. Click on a display and hold down the left mouse button to drag it onto your Analysis
Window.
Note: Linger your cursor over an icon to view the display name.
To create multiple ActiveX displays of the same type:
1. Right-click on an icon in the display builder and drag it onto your Analysis Window
2. Select Create Multiple Here from the pop-up menu.
3. Click the arrow buttons to select the number of Columns and Rows; or manually enter
the number.
4. Click OK.
To delete a display.
 Click on the display to select it and press the Delete key on the keyboard
- Or -
 Right-click on the display > Delete.
To remove an icon from the Active X Control tab:
 Click on the ActiveX control > Remove.

3.3. Creating IADS Custom ActiveX Controls

The following tutorials can be downloaded from the SYMVIONICS website at:
http://iads.symvionics.com/programs.html
Custom Display Tutorials and Examples
1. Creating an ActiveX Display using C++ VS2005
2. Creating an ActiveX Display using Visual C++ 6.0
3. Creating an ActiveX Display using .Net
4. Creating an ActiveX Display using Visual Basic
5. ActiveX Display - 3D Model Demonstration

32
 IADS User Manual

6. Flash Display
7. Example of a Display Requirement
You can also search for additional information on these subjects on the IADS Google group
at: http://groups.google.com/group/iads

3.4. IADS Dynamics Wizard

The Dynamics Wizard allows any parameter attached to an IADS display to harness the full
power of the IADS Equation Engine by modifying the output of the parameter as required to
drive the display's behavior. For example, you can add visual signals to a display using a
parameter's value.
Note: Color dynamics can only be applied to one property at a time.
To dynamically change a property in a display using a parameter's value:
1. Right-click on the display > Properties.
2. Drag the desired parameter onto the applicable property.
3. Click in the property to display the button.
4. Click the button to open the IADS Dynamics Wizard.
5. Choose a translation technique and click Next.

6. Click the button to add the desired number of table entries (not applicable to Scale).
7. Edit the values as necessary and click Finish.
To use the Numerical Equation (Advanced) option in the wizard to trigger messages in a
.csv file:
1. Drop the parameter onto the Text property of a Text object.
2. Click the in the Text property to bring up the Dynamics Wizard.
3. Click the Numerical Equation (Advanced) button > Next.
4. Under Condition enter True. Under Value Equation enter Interpolate1D(Parameter,
"path/filename.csv", 0)

Wizard Buttons
Adds entries to the table Moves selected equation up
Removes selected entries Moves selected equation down
Removes all entries Import entries from csv file

Example

Note: For the purpose of this example create a derived parameter with the Data Source
Argument SawToothWave(0,1,1) and an update rate of 100.

33
Creating Displays

To create a display that changes color and text when certain values are reached:
1. Drag and drop a Text control onto the Analysis Window (if the Text primitive does
not exist, add it to the ActiveX Controls tab).
2. Right-click on the control and select Properties.
3. Click on the FillStyle property drop down and select Solid.
4. Drag the "Example" parameter onto the FillColor property.
5. Click in the FillColor property to bring up the button and click on it.
6. In the IADS Dynamics Wizard select a translation technique:

Range of Data

1. Click the button to add three table entries. Update the entries to reflect the graphic
below and click Finish.

2. Drag the "Example" parameter onto the Text property.

3. Click in the Text property to bring up the button and click on it.
4. In the IADS Dynamics Wizard, click the Range of Data button.

5. Click the button to add three table entries. Update the entries to reflect the graphic
below and click Finish.

Boolean Equation

1. Click the button to add three table entries. Update the entries to reflect the graphic
below and click Finish.

2. Drag the "Example" parameter onto the Text property.

3. Click in the Text property to bring up the button and click on it.
4. In the IADS Dynamics Wizard, click the Boolean Equation button.

5. Click the button to add three table entries. Update the entries to reflect the graphic
below and click Finish.

34
 IADS User Manual

Table Lookup or Interpretation

1. Click the button to add three table entries. Update the entries to reflect the graphic
below and click Finish.

2. Drag the "Example" parameter onto the Text property.

3. Click in the Text property to bring up the button and click on it.
4. In the IADS Dynamics Wizard, click the Table Lookup or Interpretation button.

5. Click the button to add three table entries. Update the entries to reflect the graphic
below and click Finish.

3.5. DataViews in IADS

DataViews is a licensed product that must be purchased and installed on any machine using
IADS prior to use. The icon will not be available on the Display Builder for selection if
DataViews is not installed. Their web site is www.dvcorp.com.
To use DataViews:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Display Builder button.
2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the Analysis Window icon from the Display
Builder and drop it onto your desktop.

3. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the DataViews icon from the Display
Builder and drop it onto the analysis window. DataViews appears and consumes the
entire analysis window.
4. Right-click in the DataViews window and from the pop-up box select Load View File.
5. Select your .v file from the Load Data Views file box and click Open. That DataViews
file is loaded into the display.
Note: IADS attempts to match the Data Variables defined in DataViews with parameters
defined in IADS. Data is presented when that match occurs. Please refer to the DataViews
user manual for building displays. Scroll back capabilities are limited to DataViews graphs
with 1 sample "1 slot" defined on the X axis, as well as digits, text, and dynamic text.
Standard IADS displays dropped into DataViews will remain in that same position (in the

35
 Creating Displays

window when views are changed). Please refer to the DataViews editor menu for adding
ActiveX controls to views.

3.6. DataViews Converter

DataViews screens can be converted into the IADS Drawing Package components very
TM

quickly. Once converted, each item in the display is now an IADS component; every aspect
of the components are definable. For more information see the IADS Drawing Package topic
in the help system.
Before a view file can be converted into the IADS Drawing Package:
The view files should run correctly (all sub-views/files are in the correct directory) in
DataViewsTM. The IADS Converter is DataViewsTM version dependent, for more
information please call the IADS Support at661-273-7003 x 210. At the present time, only
Version 2.3 of DataViewsTM is supported.
To convert DataViews screens into the IADS Drawing Package:
TM

2. Right click your mouse in the Analysis Window toolbar (at the top of the window).
3. Select Import > Data Views Files from the menu.
4. Click Load View File in the DV Converter dialog box.
5. Use the navigation box to choose the DataViews file.
TM

6. Click the Convert View File button.

To convert a UNIX DataViews screen into the IADS Drawing Package:
TM

1. Save the file in an ASCII format in the DataViews application.

TM

2. Move the saved files onto your PC.

3. Run DataViews and view the screens for accuracy.
TM

4. Close the DataViews application.

TM

5. Launch the IADS Client Workstation.

6. Right click your mouse in the Analysis Window toolbar (at the top of the window).
7. Select Import -> DataViews Files from the menu.
TM

8. Click Load View File in the DV Converter dialog box.

9. Use the navigation box to choose the DataViews file.
TM

Dialog Descriptions:
Load View File - This button allows you to access the view files on your PC and preview the
view in the DV Converter window.
Convert View File - This will convert the loaded view file into the IADS Drawing Package
components.
Close - Closes the DV Converter dialog box.
Batch Convert All Views - Opens a navigation box and converts all views in a selected
directory.
Batch Convert Selected Views - Opens a navigation box and allows you to select multiple
views to convert.

36
 IADS User Manual

Create New Analysis Window - Create a new Analysis Window for each view that is
converted (if multiple views are selected, each view will be in its own Analysis Window). If
this is not checked, the view will be converted into the current Analysis Window (if multiple
view files are selected, all the views will be merged into the current window).
Attach Params to Converted View - This will attempt to attach the parameters (variables)
to each applicable component in the converted view. If this box is unchecked, the parameters
cannot be added to the Parameter Defaults table in the Configuration File. If data for the
parameter does not exist, the parameters will still be attached to the components, but the
component will not update (will not run data).
Add View Params to Config File - Will attempt to add the parameters (variables) in the
converted view file into the Parameter Defaults table (if they don't already exist) in the
Configuration File. This option is only available if the Attach Parameter box is
checked. This allows you to use the parameters in other displays. If the data files for the
parameters do not exist, the entries will be made in the Parameter Defaults table but the
components will not update.

4. IADS Data Displays

4.1. Customizing Data Displays
Customizing means changing display and parameter properties such as grids and scales,
thresholds, filters, and other functions depending on the type of display. You can change
properties for a single display in that display’s property sheet without changing its default.
To customize how a parameter is presented in a display:
1. Drop a parameter into the display.
2. Right-click on the display.
3. Select Properties.
4. Set the desired options in the Property Sheet.
Note: Display property settings override, but do not change, the parameter defaults specified
in the Parameter Defaults table.

4.2. Printf Formatting

A printf style format string is purely a presentation based, not parameter based function that
formats the parameter's value into a figure that is more informative.
Specifier Output Example
%b Binary 00100101
%c A single character a
%d Signed decimal 392
%e Scientific notation 3.9265e+2
%f Decimal floating point 392.65
%g Use the shorter of %e or %f 392.65
%i Signed integer 392
%o Octal 610
A string of characters (%s %s - combines two
%s apple
strings, etc...)

37
IADS Data Displays

%u Unsigned integer 7235

%x Hexadecimal 7fa
%X Unsigned hexadecimal integer (capital letters) 7FA
%p Pointer address B800:0000
Nothing printed. The argument must be a pointer to
%n a signed int, where the number of characters
written so far is stored.
%% A % followed by another % character will write % to %
stdout
Flags Description
Left-justify within the given field width; Right justification is the default (see
-
width sub-specifier).
Forces to precede the result with a plus or minus sign (+ or -) even for positive
+
numbers. By default, only negative numbers are preceded with a - sign.
(space) If no sign is going to be written, a blank space is inserted before the value.
Used with o, x or X specifiers the value is preceded with 0, 0x or 0X respectively
for values different than zero. Used with e, E and f, it forces the written output to
contain a decimal point even if no digits would follow. By default, if no digits
#
follow, no decimal point is written.
Used with g or G the result is the same as with e or E but trailing zeroes are not
removed.
Left-pads the number with zeroes (0) instead of spaces, where padding is specified
0
(see width sub-specifier).
Width Description
Minimum number of characters to be printed. If the value to be printed is shorter
(number) than this number, the result is padded with blank spaces. The value is not truncated
even if the result is larger.
The width is not specified in the format string, but as an additional integer value
*
argument preceding the argument that has to be formatted.
Length Description
The argument is interpreted as a short int or unsigned short int (only
h
applies to integer specifiers: i, d, o, u, x and X).
The argument is interpreted as a long int or unsigned long int for integer
1 specifiers (i, d, o, u, x and X), and as a wide character or wide character string for
specifiers c and s.
The argument is interpreted as a long double (only applies to floating point
L
specifiers: e, E, f, g and G).
To format the value in a Text display:
1. Right-click in the Text display > Properties.
2. In the ValueFormat property enter a C printf style format string. See the tables below for
formatting options.
For example, to display the current time, create the derived parameter currentTime() and
attach it to the Value property; enter %t or %T (increases the precision) in the Value Format.
New format specifications include: %pParameter - specifies the Name of the attached
parameter, %pShortName - specifies the ShortName of the attached parameter,
%pLongName - specifies the LongName of the attached parameter, %pUnits - specifies the

38
 IADS User Manual

Units of the attached parameter. Based off the parameter attached to the Value property. For
example, %pParameter: %f %pUnits would output ABC0001: 1.345 g
To enter a Printf Statement in an Alphanumeric display:
1. Right-click in the display > Properties.
2. Click in the PrintfStatement field and enter the statement; or select the Printf check box
to activate the text box in the classic Alphanumeric property sheet only (not available for
x64).
Examples of Printf statements for Latitude/Longitude:
printf("%+3d:%04.1f",Floor(parameter), Deg2Minutes(parameter)) - Short representation.
printf("%+3d:%02d:%06.3f",Floor(parameter), Deg2Minutes(parameter),
Deg2Seconds(parameter)) - Long representation.
Examples of Printf statements for current IRIG time:
printf( "%03d:%02d:%02d:%06.3f", fmod(p/(24*60*60),365), fmod(p/(60*60),24),
fmod(p/(60),60), fmod(p,60) ) - Returns the time in an IRIG time format. You must set up a
"CurrentTimeOfYear() derived parameter, drop that parameter into the Alphanumeric display
and set the printf in the properties sheet.

5. Alphanumeric Display
5.1. The Alphanumeric Display

An Alphanumeric display represents data as letters and numbers only.

Note: There is no user setting for the update rate on an Alphanumeric display but you can
change how fast it updates by hitting the 'u' key while your mouse is located in the display.
The 'u' key hit allows the display to update as fast as the system will allow instead of the
default setting of 2 updates per second. You could also create a derived parameter based on
the actual parameter with a lower sample rate.
To create an Alphanumeric display:
1. Click the Display Builder button on the Dashboard.
2. Click the Data Displays tab.
3. Drag and drop the Alphanumeric onto the Analysis Window.
To view/change Alphanumeric display properties:
 Right-click on the Alphanumeric display > Properties.
Note: To enable the advanced property sheet (default in 64-bit IADS), click the arrow button
at the IRIG time display on the Dashboard > Use Advanced Property Dialog for all
Displays.

39
 Alphanumeric Display

5.2. Alphanumeric Keyboard Shortcuts

With your cursor in the drawing area of the display (not the title bar) press the desired
keyboard key.
L Toggle LED mode on/off
N Toggles between parameter name, user defined name or short name
U Update rate
/ Enables/Disables thresholds for this display only (thresholds must be enabled)
? Displays the keyboard shortcuts for the display

5.3. Alphanumeric Right-Click Menu Options

To select right-click menu options:
1. Right-click on the Alphanumeric Display.
2. On the pop-up menu click:
Print - A picture of the display is on its way to the printer.
Save Image - Saves a bitmap file to a selected designation. It will go to this destination
automatically.
Label Type - Parameter Name, Short Name or User Defined name.
Align Label - Left, Right or Center. Word wrap is automatic if you select "right" or "center"
alignment.
Word Wrap - Applies to the "left" label alignment only.
Data Format - Select one of the following data formats:
Float - Real numbers.
Integer - A signed whole number.
Scientific - A floating-point value with an exponent.
Hexadecimal - An integer with a base 16 numbering system.
Octal - An integer with a base 8 numbering system.
Binary - Numbers are expressed according to the binary scale, or in which two figures only, 0
and 1, are used.
Data Precision - Choose a number from 0 - 8, 16, 32 or 64. Specifies the number of digits to
the right of the decimal. The precision specification can cause either the truncation of the
output value or rounding of a floating-point value.
Show Units - Show the units assigned to the parameter in the Parameter Defaults Table in the
Configuration Tool.
Peak Hold - Disabled, Hold Min or Hold Max.
Clear Dynamics - Select one of the following options:
On Parameter Delete- Clears the dynamics when the parameter is deleted via the right click
menu.
On Parameter Replace- Clears the dynamics when the parameter is replaced (via a drag/drop
from the Parameter Tool).

40
 IADS User Manual

Size - Normal or Maximize to the full size of the Analysis Window.

Order - Bring To Front or Send To Back.
Delete - Active Parameter or Display.
Go To Definition - Opens the Configuration Tool Parameter Defaults Table at the selected
parameter.
Debug Parameter - Opens the Parameter Analysis Tool with the selected parameter's
information.
Properties - To open the display's property sheets.

6. Alphanumeric Table Display

6.1. Alphanumeric Table Displays
You can create numerous alphanumeric displays in one Alphanumeric Table Display. The
Alphanumeric Table Display allows you to add rows, columns, and adjust the data
dynamically.

To create an Alphanumeric Table display:

1. Click the Display Builder button on the Dashboard.
2. Click the Data Displays tab.

3. Drag and drop the Alphanumeric Table onto the Analysis Window.
To use a cell as a label:
1. Right-click on the cell in the Alphanumeric Table > Cell Properties.
2. Select Label Only.
3. Double-click in the cell and enter the desired text.
4. Click Enter.
Note: If a parameter is attached to a cell that has “Label Only” selected, thresholds and other
data related functions (dynamics) will still apply.
To view/change Alphanumeric Table display properties:
 Right-click on the Alphanumeric Table > Properties.
Note: To enable the new advanced property dialogs for all the data displays, click the arrow
button at the IRIG time display on the Dashboard > Use Advanced Property Dialog for all
Displays.
Display tab to change the background color, set the pixel position and size, or keep the
display from freezing.
Data tab to change the filter, data format or the precision of the displayed value.

41
 Alphanumeric Table Display

Threshold tab to change the color thresholds.

6.2. Alphanumeric Table Keyboard Shortcuts

With your cursor in the drawing area of the display (not the title bar) press the desired
keyboard key.
A Toggles the "move all column adjustors" in a given column at once
C Create column / Shift+C Delete column
E Permanently set the display to equilateral sizing
F Fixed sizing
G Toggles visibility of grid adjustors
L LED Mode
N Toggles between the parameter and its short name
P Proportional sizing
R Create row / Shift+R Delete row
S Temporarily sets the display to equilateral so all Alphanumerics are visible
T Edit title
U Update rate
/ Enables/Disables thresholds for this display only (thresholds must be enabled)
` Toggles display Toolbars: Title, Scale, None or All
? Displays the keyboard shortcuts for the display

6.3. Alphanumeric Table Right-Click Menu Options

To select right-click menu options:
1. Right-click on the Alphanumeric Table.
2. On the pop-up menu click:
Print - A picture of the display is on its way to the printer.
Save Image - Saves a bitmap file to a selected designation. It will go to this destination
automatically.
Edit Title - Allows you to change the display's title bar name.
Title Alignment - Select Left, Right or Center.
Rows and Columns - Allows you to add or delete rows and columns.
Adjust All Labels - Selecting yes will adjust all the cell dividers in the table when you move
any one of them.
Data Hint - Cell Under Cursor or Selected Cell (by default).
Cell Properties - Label Only, Data Only, or Both.
Label Type - Parameter Name, Short Name or User Defined.
Data Format - Select one of the following data formats:
Float - Real numbers.
Integer - A signed whole number.
Scientific - A floating-point value with an exponent.

42
 IADS User Manual

Hexadecimal - An integer with a base 16 numbering system.

Octal - An integer with a base 8 numbering system.
Binary - Numbers are expressed according to the binary scale, or in which two figures only, 0
and 1, are used.
Data Precision - Choose a number from 0 - 8, 16, 32 or 64. The precision specification can
cause either the truncation of the output value or rounding of a floating-point value.
Show Units - Displays the units defined in the Parameter Defaults Table for the Parameter.
Grid - On or Off.
Grid Sizing - Select one of the following formats:
Equilateral – size of each cell will be equal if the display is re-sized.
Proportional – regardless of the cell sizes, if the display is re-sized, the cells will auto resize
by the percent that the display was re-sized.
Fixed – the size of the cell is fixed, its size will not change if the display is re-sized.
Clear Dynamics - Select one of the following options:
On Parameter Delete- Clears the dynamics when the parameter is deleted.
On Parameter Replace - Clears the dynamics when the parameter is replaced.
Size - Normal or Maximize to the full size of the Analysis Window.
Order - Bring To Front or Send To Back.
Delete - Active Parameter (of the cell your cursor is in) or display.
Go To Definition - Opens the Configuration Tool Parameter Defaults Table at the selected
parameter.
Debug Parameter - Opens the Parameter Analysis Tool with the selected parameter's
information.
Properties - To open the display's property sheets.
Grid Sizing Note: Pressing the S key will temporarily set the display to Equilateral (so that all
the alphanumeric Displays within the table are visible). The G key will switch between the
grid options. The R key will add a row and the C key will add a column. Pressing the Shift+C
keys will delete a column and the Shift+R keys will delete a row.

6.4. Displaying Text and Data in Alphanumeric Displays

To display text in Alphanumeric Displays:
1. Click the Configuration Dashboard button to open the Configuration Tool.
2. Click the Data folder.
3. Click Parameter Defaults.
4. Scroll right to the String Lookup Table cell and type in a string, for example: 0 ON 1
OFF (this string is space sensitive, including the space after OFF)
5. Save the table and re-drop the parameter to see the change.
To edit the position of data or text in an Alphanumeric Table:
1. Right click on the Alphanumeric Table.

43
 Annunciator Display

2. Click Grid Sizing.

3. Select the desired sizing:
Equilateral – size of each cell will be equal if the display is resized.
Proportional – regardless of the cell sizes, if the display is resized, the cells will auto resize
by the percent that the display was resized.
Fixed – the size of the cell is fixed, its size will not change if the display is resized.
Note: Pressing the S key will temporarily set the display to Equilateral (so that all the
alphanumeric Displays within the table are visible). The G key will switch between the grid
options. The R key will add a row and the C key will add a column. Pressing the Shift+C
keys will delete a column and the Shift+R keys will delete a row
To change font color and size:
1. Right-click on the display > Properties.
2. Click the Display tab.
3. Click the Label or Data button under "Fonts". Make changes as desired and click OK.

7. Annunciator Display
7.1. Customizing an Annunciator
An Annunciator display tracks data numerically and allows for color changes when a
threshold is met. Annunciators are the only IADS display that present a background color
change without threshold enabling.

To create an Annunciator:
1. Click the Display Builder button on the Dashboard.
2. Click the Data Displays tab.
3. Drag and drop the Annunciator onto the Analysis Window.
To view/change Annunciator properties:
 Right-click on the Annunciator > Properties.
Note: To enable the advanced property sheet (default in 64-bit IADS), click the arrow button
at the IRIG time display on the Dashboard > Use Advanced Property Dialog for all
Displays.

7.2. Annunciator Keyboard Shortcuts

With your cursor in the drawing area of the display (not the title bar) press the desired
keyboard key.
N Toggles between the parameter and its short name
U Update rate
/ Enables/Disables thresholds for this display only (thresholds must be enabled)
` Toggles display Toolbars: Title, Scale, None or All

44
 IADS User Manual

? Displays the keyboard shortcuts for the display

7.3. Annunciator Right-Click Menu Options

To select right-click menu options:
1. Right-click on the Annunciator.
2. On the pop-up menu click:
Print - A picture of the display is on its way to the printer.
Save Image - Saves a bitmap file to a selected designation. It will go to this destination
automatically.
Use Short Name - Replaces the parameter name with its short name defined in the Parameter
Defaults Table.
Show Data Value - Show/hide the data value. Selected by default.
Show Threshold Label - Displays the threshold label (default). If unchecked, the data value
is centered in the display and no threshold label is displayed.
Data Format - Select one of the following data formats:
Float - Real numbers.
Integer - A signed whole number.
Scientific - A floating-point value with an exponent.
Hexadecimal - An integer with a base 16 numbering system.
Octal - An integer with a base 8 numbering system.
Binary - Numbers are expressed according to the binary scale, or in which two figures only, 0
and 1, are used.
Data Precision - Choose a number from 0 - 8, 16, 32 or 64. The precision specification can
cause either the truncation of the output value or rounding of a floating-point value.
Size - Normal or Maximize to the full size of the Analysis Window.
Order - Bring To Front or Send To Back.
Delete - Active Parameter or Display.
Go To Definition - Opens the Configuration Tool Parameter Defaults Table at the selected
parameter.
Debug Parameter - Opens the Parameter Analysis Tool with the selected parameter's
information.
Properties - To open the display's property sheets.

7.4. Changing Data Formats

To change the number format of the data displayed on an Annunciator, Alphanumeric
or Alphanumeric Table:
1. Right-click on the display.
2. Select Properties.
3. Select the Data tab.

45
 Cross Plot

4. Select an option from the Format drop-down list.

5. Click the Precision increment/decrement buttons to select the number of decimal points
you want.
6. Click Apply to preview the changes.
7. Click OK to apply changes and close the Property Sheet.

- Or -
1. Right-click on the display.
2. Select Data Format, then the desired format.

8. Cross Plot
8.1. The Cross Plot
A Cross Plot is a display that plots either time domain data from one parameter against the
time domain data of a second parameter, for example, airspeed versus altitude; or calculated
non-time dependent values against other non-time dependent values, for example, damping
versus velocity.
To create a Cross Plot:
1. Click the Display Builder button on the Dashboard.
2. Click the Data Displays tab.

3. Drag and drop the Cross Plot onto the Analysis Window.
To create a Fixed Block Cross Plot:
Fixed block Cross Plots are used to create a cross plot based on a time slice obtained from a
Stripchart(s). A fixed block cross plot is created from point selections in a frozen
Stripchart(s).
1. Freeze the Analysis Window.
2. Select two points in a Stripchart that contains 2 parameters or select two points in
multiple Stripcharts.
3. Right click the mouse and select Compute and Cross Plot from the menu.
To add a pair of parameters to the Cross Plot:
1. On the Dashboard, click Parameter Tool.
2. Using the Parameter Tool, select the parameter with the mouse.
3. Drag the X Axis parameter into the display and click X Parameter.
4. Drag the Y Axis parameter into the display and click Y Parameter.
5. Press the Ctrl key to add additional parameter pairs.
To calculate the slope between two points on the Cross Plot:
1. Freeze the Analysis Window.
2. Select two points in the Cross Plot.
3. With your cursor in the display, press the S key to display the slope calculation.

46
IADS User Manual

4. Click on any other point(s) to recalculate the slope.

To set a Trigger parameter:
 Right-click on the Cross Plot > Display > Trigger Parameter > X Axis Parameter or Y
Axis Parameter.
Note: This option is only active if both parameters are aperiodic.
To change Cross Plot data symbols:
1. Right-click on the Cross Plot.
2. Select Properties.
3. Select the Data tab.
4. Under Current or Past Data, select a Symbol and Size.
5. Click the Color button.
6. In the Color Selection dialog box, select or create a color.
7. Click Apply to preview the changes.
8. Click OK to apply changes and close the Property Sheet.
To set the tail length on a Cross Plot:
1. Right-click on the Cross Plot.
2. Select Properties.
3. Select the Data tab.
4. Select or type in a tail length. The number will determine the length in seconds of the
"history trail" or "tail" of your data. Time divided by sample rate equals the number of
data points.
5. Click Apply to preview the changes.
6. Click OK to apply changes & close the Property Sheet.
To clamp the data/envelope(s) to the min/max of the axes:
 Right-click in the display and select Clamp Data to Axes.
To plot polar coordinates in the Cross Plot use the polar to rectangular derived functions:
Polar2Cart_X and Polar2Cart_Y (Cart2Polar_R, Car2Polar_Theta). Once you have the polar
coordinates plotted you can use the Cross Plot's envelope feature to track the operating limits

47
 Cross Plot

8.2. Customizing a Cross Plot

To add parameters to a Cross Plot:

1. On the Dashboard, click Parameter Tool.
2. Using the Parameter Tool, grab the X-Axis parameter with the mouse, drag it to the cross
plot, and drop it onto the cross plot by releasing the mouse. Select either X Axis or Y
Axis.
3. Repeat the above step to add the second parameter.
Note: Cross Plots require two parameters; you will not see any data in the Cross Plot until
you have added the second parameter.
To view/change Cross Plot display properties:
 Right-click on the Cross Plot > Properties.
Note: To enable the advanced property sheet (default in 64-bit IADS), click the arrow button
at the IRIG time display on the Dashboard > Use Advanced Property Dialog for all
Displays.

8.3. Cross Plot Keyboard Shortcuts

With your cursor in the drawing area of the display (not the title bar) press the desired
keyboard key.
A Auto-scale
C Decreases color for a lissajous (decaying color tail) / Shift+C Increases....
E Decreases the secondary (80%) envelope / Shift+E Increases....
M Swap Scales
N Toggles between the parameter and its short name
O Toggles on/off the overlay text on event markers
P Toggles "show active parameter pair" and "show all parameter pairs"
S Calculates the slope between two points
T Decreases buffer (tail) / Shift+T Increases buffer
X Toggle active envelope line style
Moves cursor one point up / Shift + Moves cursor ten points up

48
 IADS User Manual

Moves cursor one point down / Shift + Moves cursor ten points down
/ Enables/Disables thresholds for this display only (thresholds must be enabled)
` Toggles display Toolbars: Title, Scale, None or All
[ ] Show active envelope
Ctrl Absolute cursor
Shift Sets turbo hint to time of max %LL within the visible data (including tail)
Backspace Undo last point selection
Shift+Backspace Redo last point selection
? Displays the keyboard shortcuts for the display

8.4. Cross Plot Right-Click Menu Options

To select right-click menu options:
1. Right-click on the Cross Plot.
2. On the pop-up menu click:
Print - A picture of the display is on its way to the printer.
Save Image - Saves a bitmap file to a selected designation. It will go to this destination
automatically.
Use Short Name - Replaces the parameter name with its short name defined in the Parameter
Defaults Table.
Clamp Data to Axes - Clamps data within the display's axes.
Plot Connected Lines - Connects the data symbols.
Display - Display options for title, grids and tick labels:
Show Plot Title - Clearing the check box removes the display title.
X or Y Axis - Show Tick Labels, Show Grid lines - Clearing the check box removes the axis
tick labels or grid lines.
Trigger Parameter - Allows you to select either the X or Y Axis parameter has the trigger
parameter. This option is only active if both parameters are aperiodic.
Log Selections - Logs all user defined point selections to the Selections Log (frozen data
only).
Log Data - Logs visible range of data only. Select one of the following options (frozen data
only):
Log to File - Logs the visible area of data to a user selected text file.
Log to Clipboard - Logs the visible area of data to the clipboard for use (paste) in other
programs.
Log to Window - Logs the visible area of data to a secondary window on the desktop.
Data Export - Logs a range of data. Select one of the following options (frozen data only):
Export to CSV File - Exports the selected time slice of data to a comma delimited file.
Export to Excel File -Exports the selected time slice of data to an Excel file. Excel must be
installed on the machine.

49
 Display Folder

Export to Matlab File - Exports the selected time slice of data to a Matlab file. Matlab must
be installed on the machine.
Envelopes - Hold down the Ctrl key to select more than one envelope. If you select an
envelope without pressing the Ctrl key, only that envelope will show on the display and all
others will be de-selected. Selecting the Show All option will display all the envelopes for the
parameters in the display (individual envelope names in this case will not be selected).
Show Envelope Names - Displays the envelope name above the displayed envelope(s).
Reload Envelopes - Reloads the envelopes on the display.
Size - Normal or Maximize to the full size of the Analysis Window.
Order - Bring To Front or Send To Back.
Delete - Active Parameter Pair or Display.
Go To Definition - Opens the Configuration Tool Parameter Defaults Table at the selected
parameter.
Debug Parameter - Opens the Parameter Analysis Tool with the selected parameter's
information.
Properties - To open the display's property sheets.

9. Display Folder
9.1. Display Folders
You can create a display that holds multiple tabs, each tab acts like an analysis window.
Clicking between the tabs allows you a quick look at data.
To monitor thresholds on non-visible tabs, you must enable the threshold checking on the
Dashboard. When a threshold alarm has been exceeded, the display and the tab borders will
highlight in red.
To create a display folder:
1. Click the Display Builder button on the Dashboard.
2. Click the Data Displays tab.

3. Drag and drop the display folder onto the Analysis Window.
4. Select a display in the Display Builder, hold down the left mouse button, and drag it onto
your display folder.
To view/change the folder Background Color or the active Tab Label:
 Right-click on the title-bar > Properties.
To re-size the display folder and all the displays within it:
1. Unlock the Analysis Window.
2. Select the edge of the display panel and re-size it.
To re-size the display folder without re-sizing any of the displays:
1. Select the edge of the display panel.

50
 IADS User Manual

2. Hold down the Ctrl key and re-size it.

To view/change most of display folder properties:
 Right-click on the title-bar (or tab) of the display folder > Properties.
Note: To enable the advanced property sheet (default in 64-bit IADS), click the arrow button
at the IRIG time display on the Dashboard > Use Advanced Property Dialog for all
Displays.

9.2. Display Folder Right-Click Menu Options

To select right-click menu options:
1. Right-click at the Display Folder title bar or on a tab name.
2. On the pop-up menu click:
Print - A picture of the Display Folder is on its way to the printer.
Save Image - Saves a bitmap file to a selected designation. It will go to this destination
automatically.
Edit Folder Title - Allows you to change the display's title bar name.
Show Folder Title - Select to show the folder title on the display.
Append New Tab - Adds a new tab to the display folder.
Edit Current Tab Label - Allows you to change the name of the active tab.
Rotate Tab Right - Moves the order of the active tab one place to the right.
Allow Tabs to be Colored - Allows tabs to be colored the same as their folder background
color.
Show Icon on Active Tab - Displays an icon the tab that is active.
Position Tabs at Bottom - Positions the tabs at the bottom of the display instead of the top.
Size - Select a display size, maximized or normal.
Order - Bring To Front or Send To Back.
Delete - Delete the Active Tab or Display.
Go To Definition - Opens the Configuration Tool Parameter Defaults Table at the selected
parameter.
Debug Parameter - Opens the Parameter Analysis Tool with the selected parameter's
information.
Properties - To open the display's property sheets.

10. Display Panel

10.1. Display Panels
You can delete or resize the display panel and it will affect all the displays within it.
To create a display panel:
1. Click the Display Builder button on the Dashboard.
2. Click the Data Displays tab.

51
 Label

3. Drag and drop the display panel onto the Analysis Window.
4. Select a display in the Display Builder, hold down the left mouse button, and drag it onto
your display panel.
To re-size the display panel and all the displays within it:
1. Unlock the Analysis Window.
2. Select the edge of the display panel and re-size it.
To re-size the display panel without re-sizing any of the displays:
1. Select the edge of the display panel.
2. Hold down the Ctrl key and re-size it.
To view/change display panel properties:
 Right-click on the display panel > Properties.
Note: To enable the advanced property sheet (default in 64-bit IADS), click the arrow button
at the IRIG time display on the Dashboard > Use Advanced Property Dialog for all
Displays.

11. Label
11.1. Display Labels

Label displays are useful for tagging data or displays with descriptive information.
To create a display panel:
1. Click the Display Builder button on the Dashboard.
2. Click the Data Displays tab.
3. Drag and drop the display label onto the Analysis Window.
To add test, tail, flight, flight date, or today's date dynamically:
1. With the cursor in the display right-click to activate the menu.
2. Select Edit Label.
3. Type in a script: $Test$ $Tail$ $Flight$ $FlightDate$ $Today'sDate$
4. Press Enter; the data is dynamically entered with information from the Configuration
Tool Mission Attributes table.
Note: If the text area does not display all the entered data, simply re-size the display.
To view/change display label properties:
 Right-click on the display panel > Properties.
Note: To enable the advanced property sheet (default in 64-bit IADS), click the arrow button
at the IRIG time display on the Dashboard > Use Advanced Property Dialog for all
Displays.

52
 IADS User Manual

11.2. Label Display Right-Click Menu Options

To select right-click menu options:
1. Right-click on the Label.
2. On the pop-up menu click:
Print - A picture of the display is on its way to the printer.
Save Image - Saves a bitmap file to a selected designation. It will go to this destination
automatically.
Align - Aligns the label text to the Right, Left or Center.
Font - Opens the Label Font selection dialog box.
Edit Label - Displays the text in an editable state.
Size - Normal or Maximize to the full size of the Analysis Window.
Order - Bring To Front or Send To Back.
Delete Display - Deletes the label display.
Properties - To open the display's property sheets.

12. Frequency Plot

12.1. Creating a Frequency Plot
A Frequency Plot displays spectral data in the form of a Power Spectral Density (PSD) or an
Auto Spectrum. When you add a parameter to a Frequency Plot, if that parameter has a
Compute Type defined in the Parameter Defaults Table it will be displayed; otherwise a PSD
is displayed by default.
In real time, displays that are frozen and then scrolled back will not update until you
recalculate the frequency analysis by clicking the RFreq button on the toolbar.
To create a Frequency Plot:
1. Click the Display Builder button on the Dashboard.
2. Click the Data Displays tab.

3. Drag the Frequency Plot onto the Analysis Window.

4. Add a parameter to the display. To add multiple parameters to the display, hold down the
Ctrl key.
To change the Compute Type or other settings:
1. Right-click in the Frequency Plot > Properties.
2. Click the Analysis Tab (classic property sheet - not available in 64-bit IADS).
3. Click the Analysis drop down menu and select PSD or Auto Spectrum.
4. Set additional analysis options as desired.
5. Click Apply or OK.
- Or -
1. Select the Frequency plot.

53
 Frequency Plot

2. Click the Freq Toolbar button.

3. Select analysis options and click OK.
Note: You can change settings on multiple plots simultaneously using the Frequency
Analysis property sheet; this will apply to all Frequency Plots selected at that time.
To create an Auto Spectrum or PSD Plot from a stripchart:
1. Select the Stripchart(s).
2. With your cursor inside the Stripchart right-Click > Compute > PSD or Auto Spectrum.
- Or -
1. Select the Stripchart(s).
2. Click the Freq toolbar button.
3. In the Frequency Analysis dialog box, under Analysis, select Auto Spectrum or PSD.
4. Select any editing options and click OK.
To calculate an Auto Spectrum or PSD from a fixed block of data: after selecting a
Stripchart, pick exactly two points on the frozen parameter trace. Follow step 2 in either
method above.
Note: Fixed block Frequency plots do not update when you scroll back through frozen data,
and will disappear when you restart the data.

12.2. Customizing a Frequency Plot

To change Frequency Plot properties:

 Right-click on the Frequency Plot > Properties.
Note: To enable the advanced property sheet (default in 64-bit IADS), click the arrow button
at the IRIG time display on the Dashboard > Use Advanced Property Dialog for all
Displays.

12.3. Frequency Plot Keyboard Shortcuts

With your cursor in the drawing area of the display (not the title bar) press the desired
keyboard key.
4 Single Parameter Waterfall Top Down view / 5 Alternate Top Down view
A Auto-scale

54
 IADS User Manual

C Toggles the color scheme: Normal, Amplitude Rainbow or Time Contrast (Single
Waterfall only)
D Delete selected Half Power Damping bar (HPD), Selected Area RMS bar, or Phase/Gain
boundary bar
E Extends Waterfall peak hold
F Freeze peak hold
G Squares data
H Half Power damping toggle
K Toggles SARMS peak
L Log Half Power damping results
M Dominate mode
N Toggles between the parameter and its short name
O Toggles Receptance, Mobility and Accelerance models while HPD is enabled
P Reset Peak Hold
R (real time) Reset averaging / R (frozen) Re-calculate frequency data at current time
S Redo last point selection
T Decrease Waterfall Plot tail length / Shift+T Increase Waterfall....
V Visible Range Auto-scale toggle
W Toggles the Plot Type: Waveform, Filled Waveform, Spectral Lines or Waterfall
Z Use Chirp Z Transform
` Toggles display Toolbars: Title, Scale, None or All
Ctrl Absolute cursor
Shift Displays the point of the largest peak of either the hold or data trace
Backspace Undo last point selection
Shift+Backspace Redo last point selection
? Displays the keyboard shortcuts for the display

12.4. Frequency Plot Right-Click Menu Options

To select right-click menu options:
1. Right-click on the Frequency Plot.
2. On the pop-up menu click:
Print - A picture of the display is on its way to the printer.
Save Image - Saves a bitmap file to a selected designation. It will go to this destination
automatically.
Use Short Name - Replaces the parameter name with its short name defined in the Parameter
Defaults Table.
Auto Scale Visible Range - A snapshot of the visible data on the X axis is used to set the Y
axis scale.
Show only Primary Parameter - Shows only the upper most parameter when multiple
parameters are in the display.
Show Legend - Shows the parameter names (with corresponding pen color) in a legend.
Show Dominant Mode Indicator - Shows the dominate mode in the plot.

55
Frequency Plot

Display - Display options for title, grids and tick labels:

Show Plot Title - Clearing the check box removes the display title.
X or Y Axis - Show Tick Labels, Show Grid lines - Clearing the check box removes the axis
tick labels or grid lines.
Log Selections - Logs all user defined point selections to the Selections Log (frozen data
only).
Log Data - Select one of the following options (frozen data only):
Log to File - Logs the visible area of data to a user selected text file.
Log to Clipboard - Logs the visible area of data to the clipboard for use (paste) in other
programs.
Log to Window - Logs the visible area of data to a secondary window on the desktop.
Log Input Data to Stripchart - brings up a Stripchart showing the input data of the frequency
algorithm.
Data Export - Exports the visible range of data or the data based on point
selections. Currently, only Export to Excel is available.
Compute - Select one of the following options (hold down the Ctrl key to select more than
one option):
Use Chirp Z Transform - The Chirp Z transform can be used in place of the FFT to increase
X Axis resolution in a Frequency Plot or Frequency Response Plot
Half Power Damping - The Half Power Damping algorithm is used to extract frequency and
damping from frequency domain data
Selective Area RMS - The Selective Area RMS algorithm computes the RMS of a parameter
over a specified frequency range.
Selective Area Peak
Stripchart Filter Frequency GUI - The Filter Frequency Graphical User Interface (GUI) can
be used to graphically adjust the filter of a parameter in a Stripchart in real time.
Use Window ENBW - Window ENBW is a scaling factor calculated from Hanning,
Hamming, Blackman, Kaiser-Bessel and Flat Top Windows.
Show Peak Amplitude - Toggles between Peak and RMS amplitude. Must be in non-squared
units to be active (G key hit).
Enable Integration in Hint - Enables the Frequency Domain Integration (FDI) information on
the display.
Enable Single Integration - Enables single FDI.
Enable Double Integration - Enables double FDI.
Enable Pre-FFT Detrend - Removes the DC (0 Hz) component from the signal before the
FFT.
Size - Normal or Maximize to the full size of the Analysis Window.
Order - Bring To Front or Send To Back.
Delete - Active Parameter or Display.

56
 IADS User Manual

Go To Definition - Opens the Configuration Tool Parameter Defaults Table at the selected
parameter.
Debug Parameter - Opens the Parameter Analysis Tool with the selected parameter's
information.
Properties - To open the display's property sheets.

12.5. Viewing Spectral Data

Spectral data is displayed in Waveform by default. You also have the option to display your
data in Filled Waveform, Spectral Lines, Single Waterfall or Multiple Waterfall plot types.
Multiple parameters can be viewed simultaneously in the Multiple Waterfall plot.
To select a Frequency Plot Type:
1. Right-click on the Frequency Plot > Properties.
2. Set the PlotType property to Normal - Waveform, Normal - Filled Waveform, Normal -
Spectral Lines, Waterfall - Single Parameter Waveform or Waterfall - Multiple Parameter
Waveform (or by pressing the W keyboard key with your cursor in the plot area). See an
example of each plot type below.

Normal - Waveform

Normal - Filled Waveform

Using a filled waveform can aid the user in identifying transient events by making waveform
movement more visible. When chosen, the software fills in the area under the waveform.

Normal - Spectral Lines

Spectral lines aids the user in evaluating the frequency resolution of frequency domain data.
When chosen, the software draws a spectral line from a zero magnitude to the calculated
point magnitude for each frequency point.

57
Frequency Plot

Waterfall - Single Parameter Waveform

A single parameter Waterfall Plot shows a series of consecutive spectral computations
allowing the user to see a time-varying frequency spectrum. With effective block size,
averaging, and overlap settings, the user can view the relationship between critical modes as
aircraft state conditions change. The horizontal and vertical axes represent frequency and
magnitude (like the default display), and the "Z" axis represents time (scale-able by the user
via sample rate, block size and overlap). The "front" waveform is the most current. The
number of previous computations to be displayed can be set by the user.

Waterfall - Multiple Parameter Waveform

A multiple parameter waterfall shows the most current computational result of multiple
parameters. This can be used to view several structures simultaneously and determine relative
sensitivity to a given excitation or maneuver. Also, for multiple parameter overview, this
option can be used to free up the Desktop area. A drop-down title list is used to allow the user
to choose which parameter is up front (frequency domain analyses like Half Power Damping
only work on the front parameter).

To view a Waterfall plot from the top down:

 With the cursor in the plot area press the "4" or "5" keyboard key (shown below with a
Filled Amplitude Rainbow plot color scheme). To return to the plot to its original state,
press the "2" or "3" keyboard key with your cursor in the plot area.

58
 IADS User Manual

To select a plot color scheme:

1. Right-click on the Frequency Plot > Properties.
2. Set the PlotColorScheme to Normal, Time Contrast, Amplitude Rainbow or Filled
Amplitude Rainbow (or by pressing the C keyboard key with your cursor in the plot area).
Additional features:
 3-D Rotation - Left-click drag on the display.
 Scaling - Right-click and drag up & down to scale the displays contents.
 Parameter peak hold - An E key hit toggles the peak hold extension which draws a peak
hold "surface" (single waterfall) or enables peak hold on all parameters. Peak hold must
be enabled in the property sheet.
 Tail length adjustment - A T key hit decreases tail length (number of previous spectra
data).

12.6. Setting Scaling for Frequency Data

When you activate dynamic scaling in a Frequency Plot the Y Axis scales will continually re-
size to contain the data as it changes. This activation will override any user selected min and
max scale values on the Y Axis (this may not be noticeable until the dynamic scaling
threshold value is met and triggers the change in the scale).
Checking the Auto box on the Y Axis tab will activate auto (1,2,5 rule) scaling. The values
you input in the Min and Max will be changed to the closest value that adheres to the 1,2,5
rule. This applies to both dynamic and user selected (fixed) scaling.
To set dynamic scaling for frequency domain data:
1. Right-click on the frequency plot.
2. Select Properties.
3. Click the Display tab.
4. Under Dynamic Scaling, click the Activate check box.
5. If desired, type a threshold value in percent.
6. Click Apply to preview the changes.
7. Click OK to apply changes and close the Property Sheet.
Note: The threshold value you enter is the percent of increase away from the current scale
required to trigger a change in the scale. For example, if you enter a 10% threshold value and
the scale is 500, when a value reaches 550 the scale will change to accommodate that value
(10% of 500 = 50; 500 + 50 = 550). A threshold value of 0.0 tells the system to change the
scale continuously to fit the data.
To apply auto (1,2,5 rule) scaling on the Axes:
1. Right-click on the Frequency Plot.
2. Select Properties.
3. Click the X Axis or Y Axis tab.
4. Under Grids, click the Auto check box.
To auto scale a visible data range:
1. Right-click on the Frequency Plot.

59
 Frequency Response Plot

2. Select Auto Scale Visible Range.

Note: Only data that is visible within the Frequency Plot will be scaled.

13. Frequency Response Plot

13.1. Creating a Frequency Response Plot
You can create a Frequency Response (FRP) Plot from real-time or frozen time history data;
to create a FRP in real time a parameter must have an excitation parameter assigned to it (see
below). Frequency Response Plot is a dual plot of various properties of the Frequency
Response function. The sub-plots within the display are adjustable by moving the line that
separates the two. This size and position saves to the configuration file. You can create Phase
& Imaginary, Phase & Real, Phase & Magnitude, Phase & Gain, Coquad and Bode.
To create a Frequency Response Plot:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Display Builder.
2. Select the Data Displays tab.

3. Select the Frequency Response Plot icon from the Display Builder and while
holding down the left mouse button drag it onto your desktop
4. Add data using the Parameter Tool.
To add a Coherence subplot to the display:
1. With your cursor in the display hit the C keyboard key. You can toggle the Coherence
subplot on and off within the display using the C key.
2. With the cursor in the display and coherence subplot on, hit the G key to toggle between
and .
- Or -
1. Select the Frequency Response Plot
2. Right-click, select Properties.
3. Click the Display tab.
4. Check the Show Coherence box, then click Apply or OK.
To create a Frequency Response Plot from Real-Time time history data:
1. Select the Stripchart.
2. On the Toolbar, click Freq.
3. In the Frequency Analysis dialog box, under Analysis, select the Frequency Response
Function.
4. Select the editing options for the spectrum type, then click Apply or OK.
To create a Frequency Response Plot from frozen time history data:
1. Select the Stripchart.
2. Select exactly two points on the frozen parameter trace to define the segment you want to
analyze. Or, if no points are selected, the system uses the visible data in the Stripchart.
3. On the Toolbar, click Freq.

60
 IADS User Manual

4. In the Frequency Analysis dialog box, under Analysis, select the Frequency Response
Function.
5. Select the editing options for the spectrum type, then click Apply or OK.
To pre-assign excitation parameters:
1. Click the Configuration Toolbar button.
2. Select the Data Folder named Parameter Defaults.
3. Select the Excitation cell and type in a parameter name, for example, AW0001.
4. Save the table and re-drop the parameter to see the change.
To assign an excitation parameter when you create the display:
1. Create a Frequency Response Plot.
2. Select a parameter from the Parameter Tool and drop it onto the FRP.
3. When the excitation dialog is displayed, select the desired signal from the drop-down list.
4. Select OK to close the drop-down.

13.2. Customizing a Frequency Response Plot

To view/change Frequency Response Plot properties:

 Right-click on the Frequency Response Plot > Properties.
Note: To enable the advanced property sheet (default in 64-bit IADS), click the arrow button
at the IRIG time display on the Dashboard > Use Advanced Property Dialog for all
Displays.

61
 Frequency Response Plot

13.3. Frequency Response Plot Keyboard Shortcuts

With your cursor in the drawing area of the display (not the title bar) press the desired
keyboard key.
A Auto-scale
C Toggles on and off a Coherence subplot within the display
D Delete selected Half Power Damping bar (HPD), Selected Area RMS bar, or Phase/Gain
boundary bar
F Freeze peak hold
G Toggles Gamma Squared On / Off
H Half Power damping toggle
I Changes the feedback type
J Changes the smoothing type
K Displays and decreases the Phase/Gain margin values within the defined area / Shift+K
Increases....
L Log Half Power damping results
M Phase/Gain Margin toggle
N Toggles between the parameter and its short name
O Toggles Receptance, Mobility and Accelerance models while HPD is enabled
P Reset Peak Hold
R (real time) Reset averaging / R (frozen) Re-calculate frequency data at current time
S Swaps the phase/gain plots
T Decreases the transparency of the Phase/Gain margin values / Shift+T Increases....
U Toggles Multiple Degree of Freedom Curve Fit Algorithm
Add Degrees of Freedom (when enabled) / Remove Degrees of Freedom
V Visible Range Auto-scale toggle
W Toggles the data type
Z Use Chirp Z Transform
` Toggles display Toolbars: Title, Scale, None or All
Ctrl Absolute cursor
Shift Displays the point of the largest peak of either the hold or data trace
? Displays the keyboard shortcuts for the display

13.4. Frequency Response Plot Right-Click Menu Options

To select right-click menu options:
1. Right-click on the Frequency Response Plot.
2. On the pop-up menu click:
Print - A picture of the display is on its way to the printer.
Save Image - Saves a bitmap file to a selected designation. It will go to this destination
automatically.
Use Short Name - Replaces the parameter name with its short name defined in the Parameter
Defaults Table.

62
IADS User Manual

Auto Scale Visible Range - A snapshot of the visible data on the X axis is used to set the Y
axis scale.
Show Dominant Mode Indicator - Shows the dominate mode in the plot.
Show Coherence Plot - Adds a Coherence subplot to display. Toggle on and off using the C
key.
Show Phase/Gain Margins - Adds Phase and Gain margins to the plot. Toggle on and off
using the M key.
Use Chirp Z Transform - Activates the Chirp Z transform within the plot.
Enable Half-Power Damping - Activates Half-Power Damping within the plot (Frozen Data
only).
Enable RFP Curve Fit - Activates the RFP Curve Fit within the plot.
Show Data on Nyquist Plot - Brings up a Nyquist plot showing the data.
Set as FSP Master - Sets the Flutter Sweep Processing (FSP) Master Frequency Plot;
automatically give the plot a FSP display index of 1.
Set FSP Display Index - Assigns an FSP index.
Display - Display options for title, grids and tick labels:
Show Plot Title - Clearing the check box removes the display title.
X or Y Axis - Show Tick Labels, Show Grid lines - Clearing the check box removes the axis
tick labels or grid lines.
Log Selections - Logs all user defined point selections to the Selections Log (frozen Data
only).
Log Data - Select one of the following options (frozen Data only):
Log to File - Logs the visible area of data to a user selected text file.
Log to Clipboard - Logs the visible area of data to the clipboard for use (paste) in other
programs.
Log to Window - Logs the visible area of data to a secondary window on the desktop.
Log Input Data to Stripchart - Brings up a Stripchart showing the input data of the frequency
algorithm.
Data Export - Logs a range of data. Select one of the following options (frozen data only):
Export to CSV File - Exports the selected time slice of data to a comma delimited file.
Export to Excel File -Exports the selected time slice of data to an Excel file. Excel must be
installed on the machine.
Export to Matlab File - Exports the selected time slice of data to a Matlab file. Matlab must
be installed on the machine.
Envelopes - Hold down the Ctrl key to select more than one envelope. If you select an
envelope without pressing the Ctrl key, only that envelope will show on the display and all
others will be de-selected. Selecting the Show All option will display all the envelopes for the
parameter in the display (individual envelope names in this case will not be selected).
Size - Normal or Maximize to the full size of the Analysis Window.

63
 Frequency Response Plot

Order - Bring To Front or Send To Back.

Delete - Active Parameter or Display.
Go To Definition - Opens the Configuration Tool Parameter Defaults Table at the selected
parameter.
Debug Parameter - Opens the Parameter Analysis Tool with the selected parameter's
information.
Properties - Opens the display's property sheets.

13.5. Calculating an Inverse Fourier Transform (IFT)

The IFT produces the Impulse Response Function for a system. Currently, IADS supports
IFT on fixed block (frozen) data.
To calculate an IFT:
1. Freeze the Analysis Window.
2. Select two or more points in a Frequency Plot.
3. Right-click inside the plot and select Log Data > Log Input Data to Stripchart.
Note: When the Analysis Window is unfrozen the Stripchart that is created will be removed.

13.6. Flutter Sweep Processing (FSP)

The FSP is an operating deflections shape animation that overlays frequency response data on
an aircraft model; and sets things in motion with a sinusoidal timer. Setup requires knowledge
of accelerometer locations, and the selection of a Master Frequency Response Function (FRF)
for the selection of the frequency of interest. The Master FRF display collects data from slave
FRF's and pushes the data and the frequency to the model. Sensor locations and the animation
direction can be defined in a CSV file and loaded via the model's property sheet. If a file is
not defined, the model's default sensor locations will be used for the overlay.
Note: Not available for all models. Please contact IADS customer support for more
information on this topic.
To set up Flutter Sweep Processing:
1. Create a model display.
2. Create a Frequency Response Plot for each sensor (parameter) up to 10.
3. Add response parameters to each of the Frequency Response Plots.
4. Select all of the Frequency Response Plots and Attach them.
5. Right-click on the display that will act as the master > Set as FSP Master.
6. Right-click on each Frequency Response Plot > Set FSP Display Index.
7. Select an index number from 2-10 (the master FSP index is set to 1).
8. Right-click on the Model > Properties.
9. Click in the FSPCoordFile field to select a csv file with sensor location defined (see
below for file setup).
10. Set the ShowFSP property to True.
11. Freeze the Analysis Window to view the FSP overlay on the model.

64
 IADS User Manual

12. Move the red bar in the Magnitude subplot of the 'Master' Frequency Response Plot to
change the frequency of the overlay.
Note: The Flutter Sweep Processing can only be activated when data (Analysis Window) is
frozen; or the overlay will not be visible.
To setup a csv file to define the sensor locations:
1. Create a file in Excel.
2. In the first cell of the first row enter the number of sensor locations.
3. In the first cell of the second row enter the axis of the display (see below).
4. In the rows that follow enter the 3-space coordinates for each sensor location.
5. Save the file as CSV.

14. Summary Plot

14.1. Summary Plot Keyboard Shortcuts
With your cursor in the drawing area of the display (not the title bar) press the desired
keyboard key.
A Auto-scale (Flutter Summary Plot only)
` Toggles the display toolbar buttons
? Displays the keyboard shortcuts for the display

14.2. Customizing a Loads Summary Plot

65
 Summary Plot

To create a Loads Summary plot:

1. Click the Display Builder button on the Dashboard.
2. Click the Data Displays tab.

3. Drag and drop the Loads Summary Plot onto the Analysis Window.

To view/change loads Summary Plot properties:

 Right-click on the Loads Summary Plot > Properties.
Note: To enable the advanced property sheet (default in 64-bit IADS), click the arrow button
at the IRIG time display on the Dashboard > Use Advanced Property Dialog for all
Displays.

14.3. Flutter Summary Right-Click Menu Options

To select right-click menu options:
1. Right-click on the Flutter Summary Plot.
2. On the pop-up menu click:
Print - A picture of the display is on its way to the printer.
Save Image - Saves a bitmap file to a selected designation. It will go to this destination
automatically.
Connect Symbols - Connects with lines all the symbols displayed in the plot.
Show - You have several options for displaying the data from the query you perform to create
the plot. You can show all the data from the query or one of the following categories of data
(to display multiple data, hold down the Ctrl key while selecting items):
All - All the data from the test.
Measured - Measured data is data that has been gathered from actual test. However, as it
applies to Summary Plots, when you choose "Measured" as the data to "Show" on a Summary
Plot, any data that is not identified as Average in the Parameter column of the Summary Log
will be displayed on the Summary Plot.
Predicted Min or Max - Predicted data is data that has been generated by analysis, simulation,
or previous test. It is used as a baseline to compare to actual (or current) test data. As it
applies to Summary Plots, when you choose "Predicted" as the data to "Show" on a Summary
Plot, only data that is identified as Predicted in the Analysis Type column of the Summary
Log will be displayed on the Summary Plot.
Official - An official result is an analysis result, designated as such by the lead or responsible
test engineer, to be carried forward for summary data and reports. As it applies to Summary
Plots, when you choose "Official" as the data to "Show" on a summary plot, only data that is
identified with a Y (yes) in the Official Result column of the Summary Log will be displayed
on the Summary Plot.
Average - Averaged Data is the average value of a designated group of analysis results. As it
applies to Summary Plots, when you choose "Average" as the data to "Show" on a Summary
Plot, only data that is identified as an Average in the Parameter column of the Summary Log
will be included and displayed on the Summary Plot.

66
 IADS User Manual

Size - Normal or Maximize to the full size of the Analysis Window.

Order - Bring To Front or Send To Back.
Delete Display
Properties - To open the display's property sheets.

14.4. Defining the Criteria for Summary Plot Data

The Summary Log will only plot data that is saved within the Analysis Log and meets the
criteria defined in the Modal Definitions table. The Summary Logs both flutter and loads, can
be edited or queried to only show the data of interest.
To define the criteria for a summary plot:
1. Select the IADS Logs Dashboard button.
2. Select the Summary Log tab.

3. Select the Log Filter toolbar button and define the query strings.
4. Create the Flutter Summary Plot or Loads Summary Plot and use the drop-downs on the
plot to edit the data even further.
To return the Log Back to its Default:
1. Select the "Delete last Query" button in the Log Filter dialog.
2. Click OK.

14.5. Changing the Color and Size of Summary Plot Symbols

On both types of Summary Plots, Flutter and Loads, you can change the color, size, and
shape of the data symbols.
To change a Summary Plot symbol for both Loads and Flutter Plots:
1. Right-click on the Summary Plot.
2. Select Properties.
3. Select the Data tab.
4. Select a Symbol Type.
5. Select a Symbol Size.
6. Click the color button under the category of data you want to change.
7. Select a color or create a color in the Color Selection dialog box.
8. In the Color Selection dialog box, Click OK to apply changes and close the dialog box.
9. In the Loads Summary Plot Properties dialog box, click Apply to preview the changes.
10. Click OK to apply changes and close the Property Sheet.

67
 Summary Plot

14.6. Customizing a Flutter Summary Plot

To create a Flutter Summary plot:

1. Click the Display Builder button on the Dashboard.
2. Click the Data Displays tab.

3. Drag and drop the Flutter Summary Plot onto the Analysis Window.
To use a keyboard key in a Flutter Summary Plot:
With your cursor in the drawing area (not the title bar) press the desired keyboard key.
A Auto-scale
To view/change Flutter Summary Plot properties:
 Right-click on the Flutter Summary Plot > Properties.
Note: To enable the advanced property sheet (default in 64-bit IADS), click the arrow button
at the IRIG time display on the Dashboard > Use Advanced Property Dialog for all
Displays.

14.7. Loads Summary Plot Right-Click Menu Options

To select right-click menu options:
1. Right-click on the Loads Summary Plot.
2. On the pop-up menu click:
Print - A picture of the display is on its way to the printer.
Save Image - Saves a bitmap file to a selected designation. It will go to this destination
automatically.
Size - Normal or Maximize to the full size of the Analysis Window.
Order - Bring To Front or Send To Back.
Delete Display

68
 IADS User Manual

Properties - To open the display's property sheets.

15. Nyquist Plot

15.1. Creating a Nyquist Plot
The Nyquist Plot is a rectangular/polar plot of the frequency response function of a system.
The real and imaginary parts (rectangular) of the frequency response function are shown
directly, and magnitude and phase information (polar) can be obtained from the popup hint.
To create a Nyquist plot:
1. Click the Display Builder button on the Dashboard.
2. Click the Data Displays tab.

3. Drag and drop the Nyquist Plot onto the Analysis Window.
4. Drop a parameter onto the display. If the parameter does not have an excitation parameter
attached to it, you will have to drop it onto the display as well.
5. Freeze the Analysis Window.
6. Select the Nyquist Plot. (The data must not be frozen.)
7. On the Analysis Window Toolbar click the Freq button and select the frequency options
for the Nyquist plot.
To create a Nyquist plot from real time, time history data:
1. Select the Stripchart.
2. On the Toolbar, click Freq.
3. In the Frequency Analysis dialog box, under Spectrum Type, click Nyquist.
4. Select the editing options for the Nyquist plot.
To create a Nyquist plot from frozen time history data:
1. Select the Stripchart.
2. Select exactly two points on the frozen parameter trace to define the segment you want to
analyze. Or, if no points are selected the system uses the visible data in the Stripchart.
3. On the Toolbar, click Freq.
4. In the Real Time Frequency Analysis dialog box, under Analysis Type, click Nyquist.
5. Select the editing options for the spectrum type.

69
 Nyquist Plot

15.2. Customizing a Nyquist Plot

To change Nyquist Plot properties:

 Right-click on the Nyquist Plot > Properties.
Note: To enable the advanced property sheet (default in 64-bit IADS), click the arrow button
at the IRIG time display on the Dashboard > Use Advanced Property Dialog for all
Displays.

15.3. Nyquist Plot Keyboard Shortcuts

With your cursor in the drawing area of the display (not the title bar) press the desired
keyboard key.
A Auto-scale
D Toggles between degrees and radians
G Show gain line
I Changes the feedback type
J Changes the smoothing type
N Toggles between the parameter and its short name
R (real time) Reset averaging / R (frozen) Re-calculate frequency data at current
time
S Toggles unit circle to an ellipse
U Brings up the Unit Circle Overlay
` Toggles display Toolbars: Title, Scale, None or All
Ctrl Absolute cursor
Shift Sets turbo hint to time of max %LL within the visible data (including tail)
Backspace Undo last point selection
Shift+Backspace Redo last point selection
? Displays the keyboard shortcuts for the display

70
 IADS User Manual

15.4. Nyquist Plot Right-Click Menu Options

To select right-click menu options:
1. Right-click on the Nyquist Plot.
2. On the pop-up menu click:
Print - A picture of the display is on its way to the printer.
Save Image - Saves a bitmap file to a selected designation. It will go to this destination
automatically.
Use Short Name (N key hit) - Replaces the parameter name with its short name defined in
the Parameter Defaults Table.
Show Unit Circle (U key hit) - Brings up the Unit Circle overlay.
Show Gain Line (G key hit) - Shows the Gain line.
Show PM in Degrees (D key hit) - Toggles between degrees and radians for the hint and the
Phase Margin Text overlay.
Show GM in dB - Shows dB units in the gain margin text box.
Display - Display options for title, grids and tick labels:
Show Plot Title - Clearing the check box removes the display title.
X or Y Axis - Show Tick Labels, Show Grid lines - Clearing the check box removes the axis
tick labels or grid lines.
Log Selections - Logs all user defined point selections to the Selections Log (frozen data
only).
Log Data - Select one of the following options (frozen data only):
Log to File - Logs the visible area of data to a user selected text file.
Log to Clipboard - Logs the visible area of data to the clipboard for use (paste) in other
programs.
Log to Window - Logs the visible area of data to a secondary window on the desktop.
Log Input Data to Stripchart - Brings up a Stripchart showing the input data of the frequency
algorithm.
Data Export - Logs a range of data. Select one of the following options (frozen data only):
Export to CSV File - Exports the selected time slice of data to a comma delimited file.
Export to Excel File -Exports the selected time slice of data to an Excel file. Excel must be
installed on the machine.
Export to Matlab File - Exports the selected time slice of data to a Matlab file. Matlab must
be installed on the machine.
Size - Normal or Maximize to the full size of the Analysis Window.
Order - Bring To Front or Send To Back.
Delete - Active Parameter or Display.
Go To Definition - Opens the Configuration Tool Parameter Defaults Table at the selected
parameter.

71
 Octave Band Plot

Debug Parameter - Opens the Parameter Analysis Tool with the selected parameter's
information.
Properties - To open the display's property sheets.

16. Octave Band Plot

16.1. The Octave Band Plot
The Octave Band Plot displays data in octave bands (default) or 1/3 octave bands; to view
portions of the frequency spectrum in parts. The plot can be displayed in normal, normal with
3D, and Waterfall with 3D formats.
To create an Octave Band plot:
1. Click the Display Builder button on the Dashboard.
2. Click the Data Displays tab.

3. Drag and drop the Octave Band Plot onto the Analysis Window.
To create an Octave Band or 1/3 Octave Band from a Stripchart:
1. Create a Stripchart.
2. Right-click on the Stripchart.
3. Select Compute > Octave Band or 1/3 Octave Band.
To change the analysis format in an Octave Band Plot:
1. Right-click on the Octave Band Plot.
2. Select Properties.
3. Click the Analysis tab.
4. Select the desired Analysis format.
5. Click Apply to preview the change.
6. Click OK to apply changes and close the Property Sheet.
To change the display format in an Octave Band Plot:
1. Right-click on the Octave Band Plot.
2. Select Properties.
3. Select the Display tab.
4. From the Plot Type drop-down, select the desired display format.
5. Click Apply to preview the change.
6. Click OK to apply changes and close the Property Sheet.

72
 IADS User Manual

Normal

Normal/3D

Waterfall/3D

16.2. Customizing an Octave Band Plot

To view/change Octave Band Plot properties:

 Right-click on the Octave Band Plot > Properties.
Note: To enable the advanced property sheet (default in 64-bit IADS), click the arrow button
at the IRIG time display on the Dashboard > Use Advanced Property Dialog for all
Displays.

73
 Octave Band Plot

16.3. Octave Band Plot Keyboard Shortcuts

With your cursor in the drawing area of the display (not the title bar) press the desired
keyboard key.
3 Toggles 3D on/off (normal format only)
A Auto-scale
C Toggles color gradient on/off
D Peak hold decay
F Freeze peak hold
N Toggles between the parameter and its short name
P Reset peak hold
R (real time) Reset averaging / R (frozen) Re-calculate frequency data at current time
S Toggles the Y axis EU RMS/dB-SPL
T Decrease Waterfall Plot tail length / Shift+T Increase Waterfall....
V Visible range Auto-scale
W Toggle Waterfall Plot mode
+ Zoom in Y axis / - Zoom out Y axis
` Toggles displays Toolbars: Title, Scale, None or All
Ctrl Absolute cursor
End Resets the Y axis translate
Shift Displays the point of the largest peak of either the hold or data trace
Home Resets the Y axis zoom
Backspace Undo last point selection
Shift+Backspace Redo last point selection
? Displays the keyboard shortcuts for the display

16.4. Octave Band Plot Right-Click Menu Options

To select right-click menu options:
1. Right-click on the Octave Band Plot.
2. On the pop-up menu click:
Print - A picture of the display is on its way to the printer.
Save Image - Saves a bitmap file to a selected designation. It will go to this destination
automatically.
Use Short Name - Replaces the parameter name with its short name defined in the Parameter
Defaults Table.
Display - Display options for title, grids and tick labels:
Show Plot Title - Clearing the check box removes the display title.
X or Y Axis - Show Tick Labels, Show Grid lines - Clearing the check box removes the axis
tick labels or grid lines.
Log Selections - Logs all user defined point selections to the Selections Log (frozen data
only).

74
 IADS User Manual

Log Data - Select one of the following options (frozen data only):
Log to File - Logs the visible area of data to a user selected text file.
Log to Clipboard - Logs the visible area of data to the clipboard for use (paste) in other
programs.
Log to Window - Logs the visible area of data to a secondary window on the desktop.
Log Input Data to Stripchart - Brings up a Stripchart showing the input data of the frequency
algorithm.
Data Export - Logs a range of data. Select one of the following options (frozen data only):
Export to CSV File - Exports the selected time slice of data to a comma delimited file.
Export to Excel File - Exports the selected time slice of data to an Excel file. Excel must be
installed on the machine.
Export to Matlab File - Exports the selected time slice of data to a Matlab file. Matlab must
be installed on the machine.
Size - Normal or Maximize to the full size of the Analysis Window.
Order - Bring To Front or Send To Back.
Delete - Active Parameter or Display.
Go To Definition - Opens the Configuration Tool Parameter Defaults Table at the selected
parameter.
Debug Parameter - Opens the Parameter Analysis Tool with the selected parameter's
information.
Properties - To open the display's property sheets.

16.5. Octave Band - Sound Pressure Level

IADS Octave Band plots provide the ability to view data in dB-SPL for sound pressure level
measurements, the default reference value is 2.9e-9 PSI.
Value in dB-SPL = 20*log10{(Value in PSI)/(2.9 x 10-9 PSI)}
If the parameter of interest is not in PSI, the reference value used for the conversion to dB
may be changed via the IADS Constants Table in the Configuration Tool. The variable name
is “dBSPLConstant”. Some useful constants are provided below:
0.0 dB-SPL ≡ 0.0002 μbar = 2.0 x 10-4 dynes/cm2 (1 μbar = 1 dyne/cm2)
= 20 μPa = 2.0 x 10-5 N/m2 (1 Pa = 1 N/m2)
= 2.9 x 10-9 lbs/in2
To activate the dB-SBL in an Octave Band plot:
 With the cursor in the Octave Band plot, click the S key board button.

75
 Real Time Randomdec Display

To change the reference value for the dB conversion:

1. Click the Configuration Tool dashboard button.
2. Click the Test folder, Constants table.
3. Type in the changes and Save the table.
4. With the cursor in the Octave Band plot, click the S key board button.

17. Real Time Randomdec Display

17.1. Customizing a Real Time Randomdec Display

To view/change real time Randomdec display properties:

 Right-click on the real time Randomdec display > Properties.
Note: To enable the advanced property sheet (default in 64-bit IADS), click the arrow button
at the IRIG time display on the Dashboard > Use Advanced Property Dialog for all
Displays.

17.2. Real Time Randomdec Display Keyboard Shortcuts

With your cursor in the drawing area of the display (not the title bar) press the desired
keyboard key.
E Creates a Log Envelope
L Writes Real Time Randomdec results to the IADS Log
N Toggles between the parameter and its short name
S Toggles reset Event Marker
X Toggles Log Decrement
Y Toggles Log Decrement Averaging
Z Toggles Log Amplitude Picking
? Displays the keyboard shortcuts for the display

17.3. Real Time Randomdec Display Right-Click Menu Options

To select right-click menu options:
1. Right-click on the Randomdec Display.
2. On the pop-up menu click:
Print - A picture of the display is on its way to the printer.

76
IADS User Manual

Save Image - Saves a bitmap file to a selected designation. It will go to this destination
automatically.
Use Short Name - Replaces the parameter name with its short name defined in the Parameter
Defaults Table.
Display - Display options for title, grids and tick labels:
Show Plot Title - Clearing the check box removes the display title.
X or Y Axis - Show Tick Labels, Show Grid lines - Clearing the check box removes the axis
tick labels or grid lines.
Log Data - Select one of the following options (frozen data only):
Log to File - Logs the visible area of data to a user selected text file.
Log to Clipboard - Logs the visible area of data to the clipboard for use (paste) in other
programs.
Log to Window - Logs the visible area of data to a secondary window on the desktop.
Log RTRD Analysis Results - Logs results to the IADS Log's Analysis Tab.
Data Export - Select an exporting option: Export to CSV File, Export to Excel or Export
to Matlab > Selected Displays or Data Group (Excel and Matlab are only available if that
application is installed on the machine you’re using).
Compute - Select one of the following options:
LogDec - With the Stripchart frozen use the Log Decrement method to calculate frequency
and damping from a decaying amplitude time history where one mode is present.
LogDecAve - With the Stripchart frozen use the Log Decrement Averaging method to
calculate frequency and damping from a decaying amplitude time history that does not follow
a clean exponential curve.
LogAmpPick - With the Stripchart frozen use the Log Amplitude Picking method to calculate
frequency and damping from time history data that does not display a clean exponential
damping envelope.
THCF - Creates Time History Curve Fit Display.
Size - Normal or Maximize to the full size of the Analysis Window.
Order - Bring To Front or Send To Back.
Delete - Active Parameter, Data Overlays, Point Selection, or Display.
Go To Definition - Opens the Configuration Tool Parameter Defaults Table at the selected
parameter.
Debug Parameter - Opens the Parameter Analysis Tool with the selected parameter's
information.
RTRD Settings - Opens the Real Time Randomdec dialog.
Properties - To open the display's property sheets.

77
18. Slider
18.1. Customizing a Slider
The Slider is a bar-type analog display. A change in data is represented by the carets sliding
movement along the bar.

To create a Slider display:

1. Click the Display Builder button on the Dashboard.
2. Click the Data Displays tab.
3. Drag and drop the Slider onto the Analysis Window.
To add a history (tail):
1. Press the Shift+T keyboard keys to increase the tail length.
2. Press the T keyboard key to decrease the tail length.
Note: Default tail length is 0 seconds. Applies to the Slider load limit calculation during
scroll back only.
To view/change Slider properties:
 Right-click on the Slider > Properties.
Note: To enable the advanced property sheet (default in 64-bit IADS), click the arrow button
at the IRIG time display on the Dashboard > Use Advanced Property Dialog for all
Displays.

18.2. Slider Keyboard Shortcuts

With your cursor in the drawing area of the display (not the title bar) press the desired
keyboard key.
A Auto-scale
H Show or hide tail
N Toggles between the parameter and its short name
S Scale to LL
T Decreases tail / Shift+T Increases tail
Y Dynamic Scale
` Key toggles display Toolbars: Title, Scale, None or All
? Displays the keyboard shortcuts for the display

18.3. Slider Right-Click Menu Options

To select right-click menu options:
1. Right-click on the Slider.

78
 IADS User Manual

2. On the pop-up menu click:

Print - A picture of the display is on its way to the printer.
Save Image - Saves a bitmap file to a selected designation. It will go to this destination
automatically.
Use Short Name - Replaces the parameter name with its short name defined in the Parameter
Defaults Table.
Show Tail - Holds a tail for a defined amount of time. To set the tail time, place the cursor in
the Slider and select Shift+T to increase, or T to decrease.
Visual Control - Select 1 or more options from the dialog box to customize the look of the
display's interface and click OK.
Size - Normal or Maximize to the full size of the Analysis Window.
Order - Bring To Front or Send To Back.
Delete - Active Parameter or Display.
Go To Definition - Opens the Configuration Tool Parameter Defaults Table at the selected
parameter.
Debug Parameter - Opens the Parameter Analysis Tool with the selected parameter's
information.
Properties - To open the display's property sheets.

18.4. Capturing Load Values on Sliders

To set the LL Negative and LL Positive ranges for a parameter in the Configuration Tool:
Note: If these fields are left blank, the load limit bar, and load limit values will not be
displayed on the Slider (or Cross Plot).
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Find the row of the parameter of interest.
3. Scroll to the right to the LLNegative and LLPositive fields and enter a value for each.
4. Save the table.
To record the maximum % Load Limit on a Slider:

 On the Toolbar, click the %Load Limit button. The maximum %Load Limit and
the values of the data at that point will be recorded in the Loads Summary log if the
current Test Point is a Loads Test Point.
Note: The test point must be a valid Loads Test Point in order for the data to be written to the
Loads Summary Log.
To reset the % Load Limit:
1. Select the Slider display.

2. On the toolbar click the Reset Peak Values button.

Note: If no displays on the Analysis Window are selected then all applicable displays will be
reset. If one or more displays are selected, only those chosen will be reset.

79
 Slider

18.5. Changing Slider Caret and Load Limit Symbols

To change the size and color of the Slider caret:
1. Right-click on the Slider.
2. Select Properties.
3. Select the Data tab.
4. Under Caret, click the Color button.
5. In the Color Selection dialog box, select or create a color.
6. In the Color Selection dialog box, Click OK to apply changes and close the dialog box.
7. Click the Size increment/decrement buttons.
8. Click Apply to preview the changes.
9. Click OK to apply changes & close the Property Sheet.
To change the color of the Slider Load Limit symbol:
1. Right-click on the Slider.
2. Select Properties.
3. Select the Data tab.
4. Under Load Limit, click the Color button.
5. In the Color Selection dialog boxes, select or create a color.
6. In the Color Selection dialog box, Click OK to apply changes & close the Property Sheet.
7. Click Apply to preview the changes.
8. Click OK to apply changes & close the Property Sheet.

18.6. The Slider Display Format Dialog

This dialog is accessible in the Slider classic property sheet which is not available in 64-bit
IADS. To format the dialog using the advanced property dialog, enter a Printf statement in
the AxisFormat, DataValueFormat, LlDataFormat, and LLPercentDataFormat properties.
The Display Format dialog box guides the user in building a legal display format string for
the load limit, data, and sign formats within the Slider display. Each field of the format
specification is a single character or a number signifying a particular format option. These
format options allow the user to customize the Slider data display.
To select data format options:
1. Select the Slider display.
2. Right-click in the display > Properties…
3. Click the Data tab in the Slider properties sheet.
4. Click the button for each Data Format to be changed.
5. Make the desired changes for that data format. For example, should the load limit value
be displayed as a floating compact number or a scientific value on the Slider? You would
select an option from the Format drop-down menu on the dialog box to make this
specification.
6. Click Apply to preview the changes.
7. Click OK to apply changes and close the Property Sheet.

80
IADS User Manual

Dialog Descriptions:
Justify – To pad a field by inserting spaces at the end or beginning of a generated field. Right
justify is the default.
Zero Prefix – Pads zero characters before the data is displayed within the specified field. Not
useful with left justify.
Sign – Prefix the output value with a sign (+ or -) if the output value is of a signed type. If (-)
is selected the sign appears only for negative signed values (default). If (-sp) is selected a
space is inserted before the number if it becomes negative.
Format – The data can be displayed in 7 different formats:
Float - Real numbers
Float Compact (default setting) - Automatically adjusts to either a float or scientific value
depending on whether the value fits within the field width specified.
Scientific - A floating-point value with an exponent.
Integer - A signed whole number.
Discrete - An unsigned integer.
Hexadecimal - An integer with a base 16 numbering system.
Octal - An integer with a base 8 numbering system.
Precision – Specifies the number of digits to the right of the decimal. The precision
specification can cause either the truncation of the output value or rounding of a floating-
point value.
Min Width – If the number of characters in the output value is less than the specified width,
blanks are added to the left or the right of the values depending on whether left or right justify
(default) is specified, until the minimum width is reached. If width is prefixed with zero,
zeroes are added until the minimum width is reached (not useful for left justified values).
The width specification never causes a value to be truncated. If the number of characters in
the output value is greater than the specified width, or if width is not given, all characters of
the value are printed (subject to the precision specification).
Pre & Post-String – Display a character string before or after the data, for example a % sign.

81
19. Stripchart
19.1. Customizing a Stripchart

To create a Stripchart:
1. Click the Display Builder button on the Dashboard.
2. Click the Data Displays tab.

3. Drag and drop the Stripchart onto the Analysis Window.

To view/change Stripchart properties:
 Right-click on the Stripchart > Properties.
Note: To enable the advanced property sheet (default in 64-bit IADS), click the arrow button
at the IRIG time display on the Dashboard > Use Advanced Property Dialog for all
Displays.

19.2. Stripchart Keyboard Shortcuts

With your cursor in the drawing area of the display (not the title bar) press the desired
keyboard key.
A Auto-scale (centers data)
B Decrease active parameter transparency / Shift+B Increase active parameter transparency
E Edits selected Event Marker
F Shows state of FES parameters in a Stripchart pop-up hint (non-real time)
G Reset "Time Above Warning" value on the Stripchart display
H Shows/Hides "Time Above Warning" on a vertical Stripchart
I Shows LL between the last two selected points in a Stripchart pop-up hint (non-real time)
J Decrease font size on drop down menu / Shift+J Increase font size
L Decrease Stripchart paper length by 50mm / Shift+L Increase Stripchart paper length by
50mm
M Position Negative and Positive scales on the left or right of the Stripchart
N Toggles between the parameter and its short name
O Hides/shows overlay on non-active parameters
P Hides all but the current parameter on multiple parameter display
Q Fills in the area between two data traces
R Shows/Hides a Root Mean Square (RMS) display on the Stripchart
S Shows slope between the last two selected points, in a Stripchart's pop-up hint (non-real
time)

82
 IADS User Manual

T Shows time between last two selected points, in a Stripchart's pop-up hint (non-real time)
U Decreases the dynamic threshold % / Shift+U Increase the dynamic threshold %
V (Frozen Stripchart) toggles on/off dynamic update of Frequency Plot when data point is
moved
W Wraps data
X Adds multiple LL calculation to the bottom of the display
Y Toggles Dynamic Scaling on/off
Z Decrease time range for LL calculation / Shift+Z Increase time range for LL calculation
` Toggles display Toolbars: Title, Scale, None or All
/ Enable/Disable thresholds for this display only (Thresholds must be enabled)
\ Toggles the active parameter in the Stripchart
' Toggles enhanced pen effects / Shift+' Show pen value at the top of the Stripchart
- Zoom in / + Zoom out
* Clamps the data to the edge of the Stripchart
; Increases enhanced pen blending / : Decreases enhanced pen blending
< Decreases the time precision on the display's pop-up hint / Shift+< Increases …
> Decrease the data precision on the display's pop-up hint / Shift+> Increases ...
Moves the cursor up one point at a time (frozen data) / Shift+ Moves cursor ten points up
Moves the cursor down one point at a time (frozen data) / Shift+ Moves cursor down
points up
$ Allows parameters to be displayed with their own scaling; scale text color will match pen
color
F1 Place event marker at cursor position
F5 Creates a Frequency Plot in real-time, or a fixed block of the visible range in a Stripchart
1-9 Chart speed
End Resets zoom
Ctrl Absolute cursor
Home Resets translate
Shift Sets turbo hint to time associated with max %LL within the visible data (including tail)
Translate left/right
Enter Picks a point at the current cursor position (in non-real-time)
Backspace Undo last point selection
Ctrl+Shift+ Moves cursor to previous overlay / Ctrl+Shift+ Moves cursor to next overlay
Shift+Backspace Redo last point selection
? Displays the keyboard shortcuts for the display

19.3. Stripchart Right-Click Menu Options

To select right-click menu options:
1. Right-click on the Stripchart.
2. On the pop-up menu click:
Print - A picture of the display is on its way to the printer.

83
Stripchart

Save Image - Saves a bitmap file to a selected designation. It will go to this destination
automatically.
Label - Select one of the following options:
Parameter Name - Displays the parameter name in the Stripchart.
Short Name - Displays the short name defined in the Parameter Defaults Table.
User Defined - Displays a label that is typed in using the Edit Label option below.
Edit Label - Type in a label on the fly.
Match Data Color - Matches the data color to the display name.
Orientation - Changes the direction of the data flow, Top to Bottom or Bottom to Top.
Time - Select one of the following options:
Left - Displays a time bar on the left side of the Stripchart.
Right - Displays a time bar on the right side of the Stripchart.
Off - Removes the time bar.
Show Current Time - Displays the current time.
Rotate Time Text - Rotates the time text.
Time Label Lags - When label is rotated, the time leads (by default) or lags.
Grids - Opens the Data Grid Setup dialog.
Display - Select one or more of the following options:
Show Data Value - Displays the current pen value.
Show Pen - Standard, Standard Recessed, Caret, Caret Recessed and Enhanced.
Clamp Data to Edge of Paper - If the data goes off the visible range of data, the pen will hold
to the edge of the paper.
Show Only Primary Parameter - If more the one parameter is in the Stripchart, only the
uppermost (primary) parameter will be displayed.
Enable Sound Effects - Turns on pen sound effects.
Dynamic Scaling - Resets the scales in the Stripchart so that the data always stays in visible
range.
Scale Per Parameter - When multiple parameters exists, allows parameters to be displayed
with their own scaling even if the current scale is completely different. Also, the scale text
color will match the pen color for that parameter.
Swap Scales (Mirror) - Position Negative and Positive scales on the left or right of the
Stripchart.
Show Legend - Displays all the parameters in the display in a legend.
Wrap Data if Off Scale - When the data exceeds the scale range the pen will wrap around on
the display.
Fill Data Intersection - Fills the area between two parameters in a Stripchart.
Show RMS - Displays the Root Mean Square on the bottom of the Stripchart for the data.

84
IADS User Manual

Digital Draw Style - Shows no diagonal lines between the points on the Stripchart.
Log Selections - Logs all user defined point selections to the Selections Log (freeze (stop)
the window to make available).
Log Data - Select one of the following options (freeze (stop) the window to make available):
Log to File - Logs the visible area of data to a user selected text file.
Log to Clipboard - Logs the visible area of data to the clipboard for use (paste) in other
programs.
Log to Window - Logs the visible area of data to a secondary window on the desktop.
Data Export - Select an exporting option: Export to CSV File, Export to Excel or Export
to Matlab > Selected Displays or Data Group (Excel and Matlab are only available if that
application is installed on the machine you’re using).
Compute - Select one of the following options:
PSD - Creates a Frequency plot that is the same as Auto Spectrum, but the magnitude of each
frequency bin is divided by the frequency resolution (bin width) for data consistency between
differing block sizes and sample rates.
Auto Spectrum - Creates a Frequency plot that displays power or energy content as a function
of frequency (Hz). Each point represents a frequency band (bin). There are "(block size)/2"
equally spaced frequency bins. Frequencies from 0 to "(sample rate)/2" are displayed.
Octave Band - Creates a Frequency plot that provides the capability to view portions of the
frequency spectrum in parts. The upper frequency is twice the lower frequency.
1/3 Octave Band - Creates a Frequency plot that provides the capability to view portions of
the frequency spectrum in parts. The upper frequency is 1.26 times the lower frequency.
Phase & Real - Creates a Frequency Response plot with phase vs. frequency on the top and
the real part of the Frequency Response function vs. frequency on the bottom.
Phase & Imaginary - Creates a Frequency Response plot with phase vs. frequency on the top
and the imaginary part of the Frequency Response function vs. frequency on the bottom.
Coquad - A plot of the imaginary part of the frequency response function vs. frequency on the
top and the real part of the frequency response function on the bottom.
Phase & Magnitude - Creates a Frequency Response plot with phase vs. frequency on the top
and magnitude of the Frequency Response function vs. frequency on the bottom.
Phase & Gain - Creates a Frequency Response plot with phase vs. frequency on the top
(defaults to radians) and gain in dB (20Log10) vs. frequency on the bottom.
Bode - Creates a Frequency Response plot with phase vs. frequency on the top and gain in dB
(20Log10) vs. frequency on the bottom.
Nyquist - The Nyquist plot is a rectangular/polar plot of the Frequency Response function of
a system. It can be used to extract phase and gain margin. The display tab of the Nyquist plot
properties dialog has a check box which enables display of a unit circle. Phase and gain
margin will be displayed if the unit circle is enabled.
Cross Plot - Creates a Cross Plot (frozen data only) for 2 parameters.
LogDec - With the Stripchart frozen use the Log Decrement method to calculate frequency
and damping from a decaying amplitude time history where one mode is present.

85
 Stripchart

LogDecAve - With the Stripchart frozen use the Log Decrement Averaging method to
calculate frequency and damping from a decaying amplitude time history that does not follow
a clean exponential curve.
LogAmpPick - With the Stripchart frozen use the Log Amplitude Picking method to calculate
frequency and damping from time history data that does not display a clean exponential
damping envelope.
PseudoRandomDec - With the Stripchart frozen use the Pseudo Randomdec method to
average out noise from burst data.
Damping Ratio - With the Stripchart frozen use the Damping Ratio to determine the level of
damping in a system.
AutoAnalysis - Set the Surface, Phase, Mode and Analysis for the Automated Analysis.
Goto Previous Analysis - With the Stripchart frozen click here to go to the previous analysis.
Goto Next Analysis - With the Stripchart frozen click here to go to the next analysis.
Data Group Compute - Allows you to compute a multi-parameter PSD or Auto Spectrum of
a predefined group of parameters. Parameter groups are defined in the Data Groups table.
Size - Normal or Maximize to the full size of the Analysis Window.
Order - Bring To Front or Send To Back.
Delete - Active Parameter, Data Overlays, Point Selection, or Display, .
Go To Definition - Opens the Configuration Tool Parameter Defaults Table at the selected
parameter.
Properties - To open the display's property sheets.

19.4. Stripchart Speed

Changing the chart speed affects the IRIG time displays as well as how fast the data scrolls
down a Stripchart; only Stripcharts are affected by the chart speed. The speed times are in
millimeters per second.
You can also change the "paper" length which also has a similar visual effect (L and
Shift+L). Increasing the length makes the data appear slower and decreasing the length
makes it appear faster.

To change the chart speed:

 On the Toolbar, click a chart speed button.
To change the length of the Stripchart:
1. Right-click on the Stripchart > Properties.
2. At the PaperLength property, increase or decrease the viewable paper length in
millimeters.

86
 IADS User Manual

To view all the flight data in one frozen Stripchart (playback only):

 On the Toolbar, click the button.

Time based grid spacing Stripchart speed buttons

19.5. Stripchart Grids

Data based grids change the vertical spacing of the horizontal lines on a Stripchart; based on
the paper length of the Stripchart. For example, if the paper length of your Stripchart is 1mm
(the default) you will have 120 horizontal grid lines. Click the 5mm Grid button and you will
have 24, etc...
There is also the option to use time based grids which change the vertical spacing of the
horizontal Stripchart lines base on time. For example, setting the darker horizontal accent line
to 10 means there will
be 10 seconds of data between these lines, regardless of paper length. When you change the
Stripchart to use time based grids, your Stripchart speed buttons will also change to time
based.
To use data based grid line spacing on all Stripcharts:
 On the Toolbar, click a grid spacing: no grid, 1mm, 5mm, or 100mm.

Note: Grid lines initially default to match the scale increments of a display.
To use time based grid spacing on all Stripcharts:
1. Right-click in the Analysis Window > Displays > Setup Time Based Stripcharts....
2. Select the Activate this feature checkbox.
3. Enter the Accent Line interval in seconds.
4. Enter the Major Divisions interval in seconds.
5. Enter the Minor Divisions interval in seconds.
6. Click Apply to view and OK to accept the change.

To change the spacing and color of the grid lines on a single Stripchart:
1. Right-click on the Stripchart > Properties.

87
 Stripchart

2. Click the Categorized tab > Grids.

To access the advanced grid placement dialog:
1. Right-click in the Stripchart > Grids > Setup Data Grids...
2. Select the Activate this feature checkbox.
3. Enter the scale values.
4. Enter the division marks.
5. Enter the labeled divisions on the Stripchart. You can enter up to 6 scale values or leave
the field blank if unused.
6. Click OK.

19.6. Changing the Direction of Data Flow on a Stripchart

When you create a vertical Stripchart the pen position is at the top, by default. The default
pen position of a horizontal Stripchart is the on the left. You can change the pen position, and
thereby the direction of data flow, using the Stripcharts pop-up menu.
To change the pen position on a Stripchart:
 Right-click on the Stripchart > Orientation.
- Or -
1. Right-click on the Stripchart > Properties.
2. At the Orientation property click the drop-down to select an option.

19.7. Data Stitching

The purpose of this process is to analyze discontinuous data as if it were continuous. For a
single measurement in a single flight, a user can select multiple time slices in a Stripchart,
stitch them together, and view the results in the frequency domain or time domain.
To setup data stitching:
1. Freeze the Analysis Window.

88
 IADS User Manual

2. Select the Stripchart containing the data you want to analyze.

3. Select multiple pairs of points, for example, points 1 and 2 define time slice #1, points 3
and 4 define time slice #2 etc.

4. Click the Freq toolbar button.

5. Click the “Combine Data from Multiple Time Slices” check box.
6. Click OK. The results are displayed in a frequency plot.
To view the stitched results in a Stripchart:
1. Right-click in the "Stitched" frequency display.
2. Select Log Data > Log Input Data to Stripchart.

19.8. Creating a Custom Overlay on a Stripchart

Create overlays (lines) on a Stripchart without any calculations.
To create a custom overlay:
1. Right-click on the Stripchart.
2. Select Go To Definition > Parameter.
3. In the Configuration Tool scroll to the very right.
4. In the Property Bag Column of the highlighted row enter:
\CustomOverlayLines=value1,lineWidth1,lineStyle1,color1,value2,lineWidth2,lineStyle2,col
or2,...valueN,lineWidthN,lineStyleN,colorN
For example: \CustomOverlayLines=-15,4,dashed,0,15,4,dash-Dot-Dot,0
5. Re-drop the parameter into the Stripchart to view the overlay(s).
Value: The value of the line.
LineWidth: The thickness of the line.
LineStyle: Solid, Dashed, Dotted, Dash-Dot or Dash-Dot-Dot.
Color: Enter a RGB value (0-255).

19.9. Creating an IRIG Time Display for a Stripchart

Before you can create an IRIG time display you must have created a Stripchart. You can
position a time display at the top or bottom of a horizontal Stripchart, and the left or right of a
vertical Stripchart.
To create an IRIG time display:
1. Right-click on a Stripchart.
2. Select Time.
3. Click a position for the time display: Top, Bottom, Left, or Right (depending on if you
are using a horizontal or vertical Stripchart).
Note: Since all the displays in a window are synchronized, you can display a single time bar
that applies to the entire Analysis Window.
To remove an IRIG time display:
1. Right-click on the Stripchart from which the time display was created.

89
 Stripchart

2. Select Time.
3. Click Off.

19.10. Setting Filter Frequencies using the Stripchart Filter Frequency GUI
The Filter Frequency Graphical User Interface (GUI) can be used to graphically adjust the
filter of a parameter in a Stripchart in real time. It can be used to also control the filter of a
parameter in a Real Time Randomdec Display if the display is attached to the Stripchart.
Elliptic stop band frequencies are automatically calculated when using this method.

To calculate a Stripchart Filter Frequency GUI:

1. Create a Stripchart and place a parameter in the display.
2. Ensure that a filter is active on the Stripchart parameter (select the Stripchart and click
the button or right-click on the Stripchart and click Properties > Data tab.
3. Right-click the cursor in the Stripchart and select Compute and PSD from the menu.
4. Right-click the cursor in the newly created Frequency Plot and select Compute and
Stripchart Filter Freq GUI.
5. Use the mouse and drag the red bar(s) to adjust the filter.
Note: Elliptic Filters require stop band and pass band frequencies to be specified. This GUI
only adjusts the pass band frequencies, the stop band frequencies are automatically
calculated. The stop band frequencies are displayed as a blue bar and cannot be moved
(dragged). For adjustment of these frequencies, the filter dialog or the property dialog of the
Stripchart must be used.
If a Stripchart and a Frequency plot already exist running the same parameter, this method
can be made available by simply attaching the two plots as long as there is an active filter on
the Stripchart parameter.

19.11. Creating or Changing a Fixed Block Frequency Plot

Fixed block Frequency Plots are used to create a frequency plot based on a time slice
obtained from a Stripchart. Frequency plots can be created from a real time Stripchart(s) or
point selections in a frozen Stripchart(s).
To create a Fixed Block Frequency Plot:
1. Freeze the Analysis Window.
2. Select two points in the Stripchart.

90
 IADS User Manual

3. Right click the mouse and select Compute > PSD, Auto Spectrum, etc. from the menu.
To create a Fixed Block Frequency Plot based on multiple point selections:
1. Freeze the Analysis Window.
2. Select multiple points in the Stripchart.

3. Click the Freq toolbar button.

4. Select the Combine Data From Multiple Time Slices check box.
5. Click OK. The results are displayed in a frequency plot.
Note: For more information see the Data Stitching topic.
To change a Frequency Plot(s) analysis:
1. Select the Frequency Plot.
2. Click the Freq Toolbar button.

3. Change any of the analysis settings.

4. Click OK.
Note: You can move the point selections in the Stripchart and the associated Frequency Plots
will automatically update.

19.12. Stripchart Toolbox

The Stripchart toolbox allows you to quickly compute Derivative, Double Derivatives,
Double Integrate, Double Integrate with Mean Removal, Integrate, Wave File Out, and
Wavelet De-noise. Integration and differentiation functions provided in IADS are very simple
algorithms (see below). Sinusoidal accelerometer measurements can indeed be integrated to
obtain velocity and displacement as long as the proper scaling factors are applied before
integration.
Derivative An overlay is generated by passing the selected data through the
following algorithm: Outputpresent = (datapresent- datalast)/(time
between samples). The result is a sort of instantaneous slope.
Double An overlay is generated by passing the selected data through the
Derivative above algorithm twice
Double Integrate An overlay is generated by passing the selected data through the
above algorithm twice
Double Integrate An overlay is generated by passing the selected data through the
with Mean above algorithm twice, but a mean removal occurs between
Removal integration steps
Integrate An overlay is generated by passing the selected data through the
following algorithm: Outputpresent = (outputpast+
Datapresent)/(time between samples)
Fixed Block Enter a derived equation or choose from built-in statistical equations
Derived of which the results can save to a CSV file
Wave File Out Records data to a .wav file
Wavelet De- Extracting frequency and damping from transient data (natural
noise decays, random decrement signatures, IFT results, etc.) can be made
very difficult if not impossible by the use of discrete filters due to

91
Stripchart

their own inherent impulse responses. Wavelet de-noising can

provide an effective means of separating the modal information
from noise. An overlay is generated by passing the selected data
through the following process:
a. Pass the data through the wavelet transform
b. Delete information with power lower than the "threshold"
c. Reconstruct the data using the inverse wavelet transform
To open the Stripchart Toolbox:
1. Right-click in the Analysis Window title bar.
2. Select Add In Tools > Stripchart Toolbox.
3. Freeze the Analysis Window.
4. Pick points in the Stripchart to select a block of data.
5. Click the desired Toolbox button.
To create a wave file from an .iadsData file (parameter):
1. Right-click in the Analysis Window title bar.
2. Select Add In Tools > Stripchart Toolbox.
3. Drop the audio parameter into a Stripchart.
4. Freeze the Analysis Window.
5. Pick two points in the Stripchart to select a block of data.
6. Click the Wave File Out button to create the wave file.

92
20. IADS ActiveX Controls
20.1. IADS Generic 3D Model
This control is used to view the attitude (yaw, pitch and roll) of a single 3D object. The 3-D
model file you load in the property sheet, has to be in 3DStudio (.3ds) file format.

To create a 3-D Model:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the 3-D control does not exist add the Iads3DModel control to the ActiveX Controls
tab.
4. Click OK.

5. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

6. Right-click in the display > Properties.
7. Click in the FileName property to navigate to your 3ds Model file.
To zoom in/out and rotate the model:

1. Click the button to lock the Analysis Window.

2. With your cursor in the model, press the right-mouse button to zoom in and out.
3. With your cursor in the model, press the left-mouse button to rotate in any direction.

20.2. Input Object - Action

The action control allows you to have specific actions take place based on input either from a
parameter value or an input object. For example, you can change to a different Analysis
Window when a value is triggered.
To create an Action control:
1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Action object does not exist add the IadsInputObjects.IadsAction control to the
ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the Action object onto the Analysis Window.
Note: If you are using the Action objects to Go to Tab, drag and drop the Action object onto a
tab in the Display Folder.

93
IADS ActiveX Controls

To view/change control properties:

1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.
To setup an action object:
1. Right click on the Action control and select Properties from the menu.
2. Select the Action Type from the drop down and enter the Action Argument (if
applicable):
No Action - Default.
Go to Window - The name of the Analysis Window you want to switch to when the
button is pushed.
Go to Tab - The Tab you want to switch to when the button is pushed. Enter 1 to
represent the first tab, 2 for the second, etc.
Pause Window - The name of the Analysis Window you want to pause if other than
current.
Resume Window - The name of the Analysis Window you want to resume if other than
current.
Print - The name of the Analysis Window you want to print if other than current.
Event Marker - The comment that will be displayed on the Event Marker.
Set Constant - Set a constant global variable.
Set Mission Attribute - Set a mission attribute.
Start Test Point - The name of the Test Point you want to start if other than current.
Stop Test Point - The name of the Test Point you want to start if other than current.
Desktop Summary - Execute a Desktop Summary report.
Run VB Script - Executes a VB script; to play a wav file for example.
Run Exe - Runs an executable.

3. Drag and drop the Input button onto the Analysis Window.
4. Right-click on the button and select Properties.
5. Select the Button Type drop down arrow and select Normal.
6. Put your cursor on the button primitive, hold down the Shift key and the left mouse
button and drag the icon onto the Action object.
7. Click Execute Action.
8. Click the button to execute.
To setup an action object to trigger on true/false:

1. Drag and drop the action object onto the Analysis Window.
2. Right-click on the button and select Properties.
3. Select the ActionType from the drop down. Set the ActionArgument as necessary.
4. Drag the parameter that will trigger the event to the ExecuteAction property.

94
 IADS User Manual

5. Click the [...] next to the parameter to open up the Dynamics Wizard.
6. Configure the Dynamics to return 1 : 0 or True : False based on the input of the parameter
meeting the requirement. When the condition is met the parameter returns true and the
action object executes the event.
To assign a parameter to drive the execution of an action object, for example, to set an Event
Marker using a OneZeroParameter as a trigger, create the derived parameter:
SetEventMarker = (OneZeroParameter==0&&(prev(OneZeroParameter,1)==1)?1:0. Drop
this parameter onto the Action Object and click Execute Action (the ActionType is Event
Marker).
To run a VB Script:
1. Right-click on the Action object and select Properties.
2. Add the entire path of the VB script to the ActionArgument property (see below).
3. Click the ActionType drop down and select RunVBScript.
4. Drop the "Trigger Parameter" onto the ExecuteAction property.

20.3. Action - Play Sound

A text string or return value from an IADS Text Input object can be played aloud in IADS.
Create a VBScript file with the code below and save it to an easy to find directory

Create the IADS objects:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.

3. Drag and drop an Action object onto the Analysis Window.

4. Drag and drop a Button object onto the Analysis Window.

5. Drag and drop a Text Input object onto the Analysis Window.

95
 IADS ActiveX Controls

Setup the play sound action:

1. Put your cursor on the Button object (changes to pointed finger), hold down the Shift key,
click the left mouse button and drag the cursor (now with + sign on it) onto the action
object > Execute Action.
2. Put your cursor on the Text Input object (changes to pointed finger), hold down the Shift
key, click the left mouse button and drag the cursor (now with + sign on it) onto the
action object > More > ActionArgument2.
3. Right-click on the Action object > Properties.
4. Click the ActionType drop down and select RunVBScript.
5. In the ActionArgument field enter the path and file name of your VB script.
6. Click in the Text Input object and enter a phrase, for example, Knock it off (click out of
the text box or hit enter).
7. Click the Button to hear the wav file sound and text phrase.

20.4. The Attitude Direction Indicator (ADI)

The ADI display is a graphical representation of the pitch and roll of an aircraft.

To create an ADI Display:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the ADI control does not exist add the IadsACGauges.IadsADIControl control to the
ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

96
 IADS User Manual

To view/change control properties:

1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.

20.5. Altimeter Control

The altimeter is an instrument that measures the altitude of an aircraft.

To create an Altimeter Display:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Altimeter control does not exist add the IadsACGauges.AltimeterControl control
to the ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.

20.6. Audio Player

The Audio Player allows you to play voice data from a test. The player supports CVSD and
Raw PCM audio input.

To create an Audio Player:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Audio Player does not exist add the IadsMediaPlayers.AudioPlayer control to the
ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

97
 IADS ActiveX Controls

To view/change control properties:

1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.
To create a wave file from the audio input:
1. Drop the audio parameter into the player; select CVSD_Input or RawPCM_Input.
2. Click in the center of the Audio Player to start recording (displays Rec).
3. Click again to stop recording and save the file.
Note: If you do not have real audio for testing you can use an audible range sine wave.

20.7. Bar Graph

The Bar Graph can display up to 10 bars.

To create a Bar Graph Display:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Bar Graph control does not exist add the IadsGraphs.IadsBarGraph control to the
ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.

20.8. Blob Viewer

The Blob Viewer displays an IADS Blob parameter in bytes in hexadecimal format. The start
and stop bytes are referenced from left to right and top to bottom.

To create a Blob Viewer:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.

98
 IADS User Manual

3. If the Blob Viewer does not exist add the IadsBusMessageDisplays.BlobViewer control
to the ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.
To add a parameter to the Blob Viewer:
1. Click the Parameter Tool Dashboard button.
2. In the Parameter Tool, select the Blob parameter.
3. Drag the parameter into the display and click Blob_Input.

20.9. Input Object - Button

A button can be created and when clicked, controls an aspect of another display.
To create a button that drives a primitive control:
1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Button object does not exist add the IadsInputObjects.IadsButton control to the
ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop a Button object onto the Analysis Window.

5. Right-click and select Properties.
6. Select the Button Type drop down arrow and select Toggle.
7. Click the button to close the property sheet.
8. Create another primitive type, for example a circle.
9. Place your cursor on the button primitive, hold down the Shift key and the left mouse
button and drag the icon into the circle.
10. Click Fill Color in the pop-up menu to attach the parameter.
11. Right-click on the circle and select Properties.
12. Click on the Fill Color property.
13. Click the button to open the IADS Dynamic Wizard.
14. Click the Boolean Equation option and click Next.
15. Click the button to add two rows.
16. Edit the value in the first row to reflect value == 0, and select the color red.
17. Edit the value in the second row to reflect value == 1, and select the color yellow.
18. Click the Finish button.
19. Repeatedly click the Button.
To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.

99
 IADS ActiveX Controls

2. Click Properties.
Example of a Count Up Down button:

1. Drag and drop the input button onto the Analysis Window.
2. Right-click and select Properties.
3. Select the Button Type drop down arrow and select Count Up Down.
4. Click the button to close the property sheet.
5. Create another primitive type, for example a circle.
6. Place your cursor on the button primitive, hold down the Shift key and the left mouse
button and drag the icon into the circle.
7. Click Border Width in the pop-up menu to attach the parameter.
8. Right-click on the circle and select Properties.
9. Select a Border Color that is different than the Fill Color and click the button to close
the property sheet.
10. Repeatedly click the Button.

20.10. Dial Graph

The dial graph can display up to five parameters.

To create a Dial Graph Display:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Dial Graph control does not exist add the IadsGraphs.IadsGauge control to the
ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.

100
 IADS User Manual

20.11. Input Object - Dial

A dial can be created and used to control any aspect of another display. For example, you
can set the dial to offset another parameter or drive a display when selected.

To create and use the Input Object Dial:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Dial object does not exist add the IadsInputObjects.IadsDial control to the
ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the Dial object onto the Analysis Window.
5. Create another primitive type or display, for example a text object.
6. Place your cursor on the Dial primitive, hold down the Shift key and the left mouse
button and drag the icon into the text object.
7. Click Text.
8. Lock the Analysis Window.
9. Use the Dial control to update the value.
To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.

20.12. Input Object - Drop Down

A drop down can be created and used to control any aspect of another display. For example,
you can set the drop down to view other grouped controls when selected, then attach the drop
down to a Layer Object.

To create and use the Input Object Drop Down:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Drop Down object does not exist add the IadsInputObjects.IadsDropDown
control to the ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the Drop Down object onto the Analysis Window.
5. Right-click and select Properties.

101
 IADS ActiveX Controls

6. Select the List Items and type in the items you would like to see in the drop down list
(separated by comma).
7. Create another primitive type, for example a text object.
8. Place your cursor on the drop down primitive, hold down the Shift key and the left mouse
button and drag the icon into the text object.
9. Click Text.
10. Use the drop down object and change the selection.
To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.

20.13. Eight Ball Display (Attitude Indicator)

An instrument which displays the attitude (axes) of the aircraft.

To create an Eight Ball Display:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Eight Ball control does not exist add the IadsACGauges.IadsEightBall control to
the ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.

102
 IADS User Manual

20.14. Force Gauge

This display is typically used for parameters that measure force, such as rudder pedal.

To create a Force Gauge Display:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Force Gauge control does not exist add the
IadsAcGauges.IadsForceGaugeControl control to the ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.

20.15. Heading Indicator

An instrument used to display an aircraft's heading.

To create a Heading Indicator Display:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Heading Indicator does not exist add the IadsAcGauges.IadsHeadingIndicator
control to the ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.

103
 IADS ActiveX Controls

20.16. Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)

The horizontal situation indicator displays a pictorial view of the vehicle's position with
respect to various navigation points and shows a visual perspective of certain guidance,
navigation and control parameters. This display can be created from the ActiveX Control tab
of the display builder.

To create a Horizontal Situation Indicator Display:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Horizontal Situation Indicator does not exist add the
IadsAcGauges.IadsHeadingIndicator control to the ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.

20.17. IADS HTML Viewer

The purpose of this display is to act as a HTML viewer within the IADS client. The Internet
Explorer right-click menu is available from the display and in general all Internet Explorer
functions such as plug-ins, flash controls, etc. work as well. The IADS HTML Viewer also
acts as a general purpose Web Browser for display of other supported file types such as PDF.

To create the HTML Viewer:

1. On the Dashboard, click Display Builder.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab on the Display Builder.

104
 IADS User Manual

3. Left-click drag the icon onto your Analysis Window.

To access HTML Viewer properties to load a web URL or enter other display
information:
1. Right-click in the title bar (very top portion) of the display.
2. Click Properties.
To add the HTML Viewer icon to the Display Builder:
1. Click the Display Builder dashboard button.
2. Click on the ActiveX Controls tab on the Display Builder.
3. Right-click the mouse inside the tab.
4. Click the IadsHTMLViewer.HTMLViewer check box.
5. Click OK.

20.18. IADS Clock

The IADS Clock can take raw time words such as BCDDays, HighTime, LowTime and
MicroTime and display the time on a clock display. IADS Clock supports 4 different time
formats, depending on what you set the Time Format property to. The time formats are as
follows:
1) Acra BCD. This format uses words BCDDays, HighTime, LowTime and MicroTime.
2) IRIG BCD. This format uses words BCDDays, HighTime, LowTime and MicroTime;
because the actual Julian day crosses both the BCDDays and the HighTime words, you must
turn its usage on (set the UseBCDDays property to True) if you drop a parameter onto
BCDDays.
3) IRIG Binary. This format uses HighTime, LowTime and MicroTime.
4) IADS Native. This is IADS' native in double floating point format present total seconds.
You can access this time by creating a derived parameter using the CurrentTime() or
CurrentTimeOfYear() derived functions.

To create an IADS Clock display:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the IADS Clock control does not exist add the IadsClocks.IadsIRIGClock control to
the ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.

105
 IADS ActiveX Controls

2. Click Properties.
To add time words and other parameters to the IADS Clock:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Parameter Tool button.
2. Drag and drop the time word onto the display and select the associated property in the
dialog.
3. Repeat as necessary.
Note: Not all properties are available in the drag-n-drop parameter menu. Right-click on the
display > Properties to view all available properties.

20.19. LED Display

The LED display uses a parameter to activate the light. You can create a LED display with or
without the attached label.

To create a LED display:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the LED control does not exist add the IadsElectronicComponents.IadsLED control
to the ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.

20.20. Multi-Graph Control

To create a Multi-Graph Display:
1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Multi Graph control does not exist add the IadsACGauges.MultiGraphControl
control to the ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.

106
IADS User Manual

To create a composite of two multi-graphs to function as a zero centered bar graph:

1. Create two Multi Graph displays, top and bottom.
2. Select both displays, right-click Properties, and set the Display Type property on both to
Bar Graph.
3. Set the Inner Edge Style property on both displays to None.
4. Select the top display only, right-click Properties, and set the Bottom Margin property to
0.
5. Set the Add Sign Margin Offset property on the top display to True.
6. Set the Scale Max and Scale Min properties on the top display to n and 0 (adjust the
Number of Large/Small Divisions accordingly).
7. Select the bottom display only, right-click Properties, and set the Top Margin property
on the bottom display to 0.
8. Set the Pointer Value Location property on the bottom display to None (adjust the
display size accordingly).
9. Set the Scale Max and Scale Min properties on the bottom display to 0 and -n.
10. Line up the two displays on the 0.00 line (see example above).
11. Select both the top and bottom display and right-click > Group > Connect.
12. Right-click Edit > Add to Library.

107
 IADS ActiveX Controls

20.21. Primary Flight Display

The IADS Primary Flight Display (PFD) simulates a typical aircraft PFD which combines an
Attitude Direction Indicator (ADI) with several other cockpit instruments into a single
compact display. The PFD display can be configured to show or hide (using the property
sheet) many of its basic components:

To create a Primary Flight Display:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Primary Flight control does not exist add the
IadsAcGauges.IadsPrimaryFlightDisplay control to the ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.

20.22. Quick View Display

The Quick View display is used to view all parameters in the Parameter Defaults table.

To create a Quick View display:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.

108
 IADS User Manual

2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.

3. If the Quick View control does not exist add the
IadsQuickView.IadsQuickViewControl to the ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.

20.23. Input Object - Slider

A slider can be created and used to control any aspect of another display. For example, you
can set the slider to offset another parameter or drive a display when selected.

To create and use the Input Object Slider:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Slider object does not exist add the IadsInputObjects.IadsSlider control to the
ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the Slider object onto the Analysis Window.
5. Create another primitive type or display, for example a text object.
6. Place your cursor in the bottom (gray) area of the slider primitive, hold down the Shift
key and the left mouse button and drag the icon into the text object.
7. Click Text.
8. Use the slider control to update the value.
To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.

20.24. Input Object - Spin Box

A Spin Box can be created and used to control any aspect of another display. For example,
you can set the drop down to view other grouped controls when selected, then attach the drop
down to a Layer Object.

To create and use the Input Object Spin Box:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Spin Box object does not exist add the IadsInputObjects.IadsSpinBox control to
the ActiveX Controls tab.

109
 IADS ActiveX Controls

4. Drag and drop the input spin box onto the Analysis Window.
5. Right-click and select Properties.
6. Select the Max or Min and type in the values.
7. Create another primitive type, for example a text object.
8. Place your cursor on the spin box, hold down the Shift key and the left mouse button and
drag the icon into the text object.
9. Click Text.
10. Use the spin box buttons to see the changes.
To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.

20.25. Standard Gauge

A dial-like instrument.

To create a Standard Gauge Display:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Standard Gauge control does not exist add the
IadsAcGauges.IadsStandardGauge control to the ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.

110
 IADS User Manual

20.26. Stick Force

The IADS Stick Force Display allows you to see the display using Magnitude/Force or
Latitude/Longitude. This display can be created from the ActiveX Control tab of the display
builder.

To create a Stick Force Display:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Stick Force control does not exist add the IadsAcGauges.IadsStickforce control to
the ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.

20.27. Stop Watch

This is a timer display that allows you to turn on/off with a mouse click.

To create a Stop Watch Display:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Stop Watch does not exist add the IadsElectronicComponents.IadsStopWatch
control to the ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To create a Countdown Timer:
1. Create a Stop Watch Display.
2. Right-click in the display > Properties.
3. Set the Mode property to Countdown Timer.
4. Enter the Start Time and Stop Time property values (set the ShowDays property to True if
applicable).
5. Click the Arrow in the display to start the Timer.

111
 IADS ActiveX Controls

To view/change display properties:

1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.

20.28. Text History Viewer

The Text History Viewer is a tabular display that shows the history of a group of parameters
(up to 10) during a test - kind of like a Stripchart but in a table format. It has a few different
methods to display values, some given time interval, a Boolean equation, or for example,
"value change". When this method is set, anytime any of the parameters attached to the
display change value a new row is added to the table with the corresponding time and value
of the parameter(s) that changed at that time. This control can also log these time/values to an
external file as you are playing back the data. (Updates at the highest sample rate for multiple
parameters.)

To create a Text History Viewer that logs the times of a group of parameters as they are
triggered:
1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Blob Viewer does not exist add the IadsBusMessageDisplays.TextHistoryViewer
control to the ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

5. Drag/drop the individual parameters from the Parameter Tool that you would like to
trigger off of (e.g. param1, param2, param3) onto the Text History Viewer control. When
you drop each parameter onto the display, you will get a popup menu with a list of values
to attach the parameter to. Choose "Add Parameter" at the top for each one - this adds a
new instance of that parameter to the display. As you add each parameter you will see a
new column created in the display for each one. Currently this control can display up to
10 different parameters at a time.
6. Right-click on the display and select "Properties" to bring up the Property Sheet. From
here you can adjust how it triggers rows and where it logs them to.

112
 IADS User Manual

7. For the TriggerOutputType property, select "ValueChange". This will trigger a row each
time any of the attached parameters changes value.
8. For the LogFilePath property, enter the full name and path to an external file you would
like the values to be logged to (the control will automatically create this file). Example:
C:\Folder1\TextHistoryOutput.csv
9. For the LogEntries property, set the value to "True"
Note: You cannot view the csv file until you close IADS as it maintains a lock on the file
while the control is running.
To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.

20.29. Input Object - Text

To create a Text Input Object:
1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Text Input object does not exist add the IadsInputObjects.IadsTextInput control
to the ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the Text Input object onto the Analysis Window.

You can create a text input object, enter a value, and then use that value in another display or
derived parameter. For example, if null values need to be changed on the fly, you can type in
the value on the screen to see an immediate value change in all the corresponding displays
that contain the derived parameter.
To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.
To create and use the Text Input to drive a Stripchart:
1. Repeat steps 1-4 above.
2. Right-click and select Properties.
3. Select the Input Type drop down arrow and select Numeric.
4. Create a Stripchart.
5. Place your cursor on the text object, hold down the Shift key and the left mouse button
and drag your cursor into the Stripchart.
6. Click on the text object, type in a value and hit Enter.

113
 IADS ActiveX Controls

20.30. Input Object - Toggle Switch

A Toggle Switch can be created to control any aspect of another display. For example, you
can use the value of the Toggle Switch to drive another display.

To create and use the Toggle Switch:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Toggle object does not exist add the IadsInputObjects.IadsToggle control to the
ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the input toggle switch onto the Analysis Window.
5. Right-click and select Properties.
6. Select the Value and type in a zero or one.
7. Create another primitive type, for example a text object.
8. Place your cursor on the toggle switch control, hold down the Shift key and the left
mouse button and drag the icon into the text object.
9. Click Text.
10. Click the toggle switch buttons on the display.
To view/change control properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.

20.31. The Video Player

The Video Player ActiveX control is capable of receiving and displaying real time video from
two distinct sources provided by IADS.
One source for real time video is the IADS Real Time Station application, extracting video
from PCM data with some strict requirements on what devices created the video stream
onboard. The second source for real time video is the IADS Stand-alone Audio Video Server.
This application is capable of acquiring real time video from a video capture device such as a
Winnov Videum, archive it to an AVI file, and broadcast it to a specific video channel for
display in the video player.
Video is automatically generated by the system for all enabled video channels. Video will
appear in the IADS Media Player channel list as “Channel 1”, “Channel 2”, etc where
“Channel 1” is the first enabled video channel, “Channel 2” is the second, etc. Unless data
archiving has been disabled in the IADS Start Wizard, video will also be recorded as AVI
files in the IADS data output directory. The files names will appear as “VideoChannel1.avi”,
“VideoChannel2.avi”, etc where “VideoChannel1.avi” is the first enabled video channel,
“VideoChannel2.avi” is the second, etc.
In IADS Playback mode, the video player supports all media file types that Windows Media
Player (WMP) plays (WMV, AVI, MPEG and ASF)

114
IADS User Manual

Note: In IADS Playback mode, MPEG-4 (MP4) files require the installation of the latest
ffdshow codec available on-line (ffdshow-tryouts.sourceforge.net); and the LavFilter
"install_splitter.bat" (https://github.com/Nevcairiel/LAVFilters/releases). Also, the video's
IRIG time will not get set automatically in IADS; you will only see the first frame of video
until you set the IRIGStartTime in the Video Player property sheet.

To view video in IADS:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Video Player does not exist add the IadsMediaPlayers.VideoPlayer control to the
ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the Video Player control onto the Analysis Window.
To assign a channel to the video player:
1. Right-click in the display > click Properties.
2. At the VideoChannel property, click the drop down to select a channel.
Note: In playback, if Smart Mode is not setup for an external video channel (e.g., video from
the IADS Stand-alone Video Server), set the SmartMode property of the Video Player to
FALSE. (The Video Player does not respond properly to a change of the SmartMode property
from TRUE to FALSE. Click the Change Desktop button on the Dashboard to save and
reload the Desktop.
To view/change other control properties:
 Right-click in the display > click Properties.

115
21. Drawing Package
21.1. IADS Drawing Package - Overview
The IADS Drawing Package is a tool set that allows you to create controls on the Analysis
Window. You can create Lines, text, circles, arcs, rectangles, pictures, etc. Each of these
controls has a rich set of properties that you can modify to customize their appearance. You
can layer, combine, and animate these controls to create quite complex display arrangements.
The capability is very similar to other drawing packages except that both the controls and the
containers that manage them are fully ActiveX compliant providing a much greater range of
flexibility.

IadsPrimitives.IadsCircle IadsPrimitives.IadsLine

IadsPrimitives.IadsMesh IadsPrimitives.IadsPicture

IadsPrimitives.IadsPolygon IadsPrimitives.IadsRectangle

IadsPrimitives.IadsText IadsPrimitives.IadsTriangle

IadsPrimitives.IadsNGon IadsPrimitives.IadsOverlay
To create a composite (grouped) control:
1. Design a new control using the IADS Drawing Package (or any ActiveX controls).
2. Click in the Analysis Window (outside of the design) and hold down the left mouse
button to select all the controls in the design.
3. Right-click Group > Connect.
To add a composite to the Library:
1. Right-click on the grouped control.
2. Click Edit > Add to Library.
To view composite properties or the individual properties of a control in the composite:
1. Right-click on the composite > Group Properties.
2. Click on an individual control or the group to view its properties.
To add a primitive to the Display Builder ActiveX Control Tab:
1. Click the Display Builder button on the dashboard.
2. In the Display Builder, click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. Right-click on the ActiveX Control tab to bring up the Add ActiveX Control dialog box.
4. Select the desired control.
5. Click OK. The Control will now be accessible from an icon on the ActiveX Controls tab
of the Display Builder. Hinting on an icon will show the IADS Primitive Name (which is
simply the icons name) for that display.

116
 IADS User Manual

21.2. Drawing Package Right-Click Menu

Each control in the drawing package contains a right-click menu that allows every aspect of
the control to be defined.
To select right-click menu options:
1. Right-click on the Drawing Package Object.
2. On the pop-up menu click:
Cut - Removes the selected display.
Copy - Copies the selected display.
Paste - Pastes the items from the clipboard.
Delete - Deletes the selected display.
Order - Sets the Z order of the display:
Bring to Front - Brings the selected display to the front.
Send to Back - Send the selected display to the back.
Move Forward - Brings the selected display one level forward.
Move Back - Sends the selected display one level back.
Align - When multiple controls are selected you can:
Left - Moves all the selected controls so the left edge (of the last selected control) align.
Center - Moves all the selected controls so the center (of the last selected control) align.
Right - Moves all the selected controls so the right edge (of the last selected control) align.
Top - Moves all the selected controls so the top edge (of the last selected control) align.
Middle - Moves all the selected controls so the middles (of the last selected control) align.
Bottom - Moves all the selected controls so the bottom edge (of the last selected control)
align.
Distribute Horizontal - Distributes all the selected controls horizontally.
Distribute Vertical - Distributes all the selected controls vertically.
Tile Horizontal - Tiles the selected controls horizontally.
Tile Vertical - Tiles the selected controls vertically.
Make Same Width - Enforces all the selected controls width to the last control selected.
Make Same Height - Enforces all the selected controls height to the last control selected.
Make Same Size - Enforces all the selected controls size to the last control selected.
Group - Groups together selected controls.
Connect - Connects the selected controls to each other (treats them as one control).
Disconnect - Disconnects the selected control (treats them as individual controls).
Edit - Edits selected controls.
Mirror - Flips the selected controls on their X/Y axis. This function is only available for
polygons, lines and picture controls.

117
Drawing Package

Select All of This Type - Selects all of the controls type, i.e., circle.
Make Default - Allows you to set what properties appear each time a display is created from
the Display Builder. This is definable per user.
Add to Library - Add the selected control(s) to the Library.
Library Toolbox - Opens the Library Toolbox.
Edit Toolbox - Opens the Edit Toolbox.
Layers - Layers selected controls (Analysis Window must be unlocked).
Assign Layers - Assigns the selected controls to a layer.
Visible Layers - Determines what layer (controls) are visible.
Lock Layers - Prevents the selected layer from edit/move.
Select Layers - Select those controls on layers.
Layer Tools - Opens the Layer Tools.
Go to Definitions - Opens the Parameter Default Table and highlights the row that contains
the parameter that is contained in the control.
Properties - Opens the controls property sheet.
To create a Circle:
1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Circle control does not exist add IadsPrimitives.IadsCircle to the ActiveX
Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To create a Line:
1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Line control does not exist add IadsPrimitives.IadsLine to the ActiveX Controls
tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To view/change Line properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.
Line Key Hits
Key Function
A With the first or last point selected, pressing the A key will put you back in creation mode,
adding points connecting to the selected point.
B Move the mouse cursor over a line segment will display a small box at the intersection of
the line and the cursor and the line will be highlighted. The mouse cursor icon will change

118
IADS User Manual

to an up arrow. Pressing the ‘B’ key on the keyboard will break the line at that point,
creating a new point.
D Deletes selected point.
E Creates an equilateral polygon from the points. The size of the polygon is determined by the
point that is furthest away from the center rotation point (the largest area). Hitting the E key
again rotates the polygon by half the angle.
R Set rotation point. If a point is selected, the rotation point will be assigned the same location
as the point. If a line is highlighted with a break location box, the rotation point will be
placed at the break location.
U One level undo.
X Stop line creation. Double clicking the left mouse button will place the last point and stop
creation. (Pressing any keyboard key will stop creation mode without placing the last
point).
[ Select previous point
] Select next point

To create a Mesh control:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Mesh control does not exist add IadsPrimitives.IadsMesh to the ActiveX Controls
tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To create a NGon:
1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the NGon control does not exist add IadsPrimitives.IadsNGon to the ActiveX
Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To create an Overlay:
1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Overlay control does not exist add IadsPrimitives.IadsOverlay to the ActiveX
Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

5. Right click in the Overlay control and select Properties.
6. Click in the Display List cell.
7. Type in the desired names of the library controls you would like to see in the Overlay
control.

119
Drawing Package

Note: The primitive Overlay allows you to stack displays that can be made visible on a button
click, or driven by a data value or event. For example you can create a complex composite of
primitive controls, place those controls in the library and then call them to be displayed.
To view Overlays:
1. Assign an Input Object to toggle the display, for example a Button.
2. Lock the Analysis Window and click the input object to view the displays assigned to the
Overlay control.
To create a Picture display:
1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Picture control does not exist add IadsPrimitives.IadsPicture to the ActiveX
Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To create a Polygon:
1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Polygon control does not exist add IadsPrimitives.IadsPolygon to the ActiveX
Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To create a Rectangle:
1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Rectangle control does not exist add IadsPrimitives.IadsRectangle to the ActiveX
Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To create an IADS Text display:
1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Text control does not exist add IadsPrimitives.IadsText to the ActiveX Controls
tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

Note: The Text object is the ActiveX equivalent of the Alphanumeric display with complete
control over almost every property (and the ability to animate properties). A label is not
automatically created with the text object but can be added via the ValueFormat property.
To view time in the IADS Text display:
 In the ValueFormat property enter %t or %T

120
 IADS User Manual

To view the parameter name (label) with the value in the IADS Text display:
 In the ValueFormat property enter %pParameter: %f
To create a Triangle:
1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Triangle control does not exist add IadsPrimitives.IadsTriangle to the ActiveX
Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

22. Event Monitor

The purpose of the Event Monitor display is to monitor events as they occur and display them
based on user-specified criteria. Each event being monitored is shown as a row of information
on the display. At each time point, the display will iterate through each row and evaluate the
expression supplied in the “EventArgument” field to determine whether an event (and an
event marker if applicable) will be triggered or not.

To create an Event Monitor:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Event Monitor control does not exist add the IadsEventMonitor control to the
ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

To setup the system to run an Event Monitor display:
 Create an Event Monitor input file or populate the Event Monitor Definitions table in the
Configuration Tool.
Note: If changes are made to the Event Monitor table or input file after the display is created,
they will not take effect in the display unless you Reload (see below).
To customize the Event Monitor display properties:
1. Right-click in the title bar (very top portion) of the display.
2. Click Properties.
To resize a column header:
 Click on the border line between column headers; when your cursor changes move the
border left/right to the desired location.
To change a column header location:
 Click in the column header, hold down the left mouse button and drag it left/right to the
desired location.

121
 Event Monitor

To access the Event Monitor right-click menu:

1. Right-click in the body of the display (not the title bar).

2. On the pop-up menu click:
Clear - Clears the events (rows) from the display. If events are occurring rapidly, you will
not notice the "clear" unless you freeze the Analysis Window.
Reload - Reloads the display with the information in the input file or the Event Monitor table
(whichever you are running from).
Show/Hide Columns - Select or de-select items in this check box to show/hide column
headers.
Filtering - These entries match the group and subgroup entries you have in the Event
Monitor table or input file. Use the drop-down menus to define the events for display.

22.1. Event Monitor Definitions

The Event Monitor display can read setup information from either a table in the IADS
Configuration, or from a input file. The Event Monitor Definitions table can be populated by
manually, entering information into the required fields, or by importing an existing Event
Monitor text input file.
To edit the Event Monitor Definitions table in the Configuration File:
1. Click the Configuration Tool dashboard button.
2. Click the Test folder, Event Monitor Definitions table.
3. Enter Event Monitor information.
4. Click a Save option.
Event Monitor fields:
Event Group – designation of the event. This field can be used to filter the results displayed
on the Event Monitor control.
Event SubGroup – Subgroup designation of the event. Like the EventGroup field, this field
can be used to filter the results displayed on the Event Monitor control.
Event Title – Title of the event.
Event Description – Textual description of the event.
Event Argument – User-derived equation that determines what criteria must be satisfied to
trigger the event. When this equation evaluates to “True” an event will be triggered on the
Analysis Window if the EventMarkerTrigger field is set to true.

122
 IADS User Manual

Persist Count – The number of frames/milliseconds that the criteria specified in the
EventArgument field must be true before the event triggers.
Hold Count – The number of milliseconds a message remains in the display after its trigger
transitions to 0 (false). This can be used to hold messages with a very short on/off cycle.
Sort Priority - The order in which the events are to be displayed in the control; lower
numbers have higher priority, one being the highest. If no priority is specified the event will
fall to the bottom.
Color - Event row color in the Event Monitor control.
Event Marker Trigger - When EventArgument equation evaluates to “True” an event will
be triggered on the Analysis Window if this field is set to true. 1 = True, 0 = False.
Event Marker Text - Message displayed on the Event Marker.
Note: If you are running the Event Monitor from the Event Monitor Definitions table the
control's "Use External File" property must be set to False.

22.2. Creating an Event Monitor Input File

The Event Monitor control can read setup information from either the Event Monitor
Definitions table in the IADS Configuration Tool, or from an input file. The input file will
consist of a header and a list of rows, where each row contains the information needed to
define a single event.
Copy and paste this example into Notepad to get started (the # symbol preceding any line
will be commented out of the input file):
EVENT_MONITOR_INPUT_FILE
EventGroup|EventSubGroup|EventTitle|EventDescription|EventArgument|PersistCount|Hold
Count|SortPriority|Color|EventMarkerTrigger|EventMarkerText
Group1|SubGroup1|Event 1|Parm 1 above 0|Parameter1>0|0|0|1|123123|0|Marker 1
Group1|SubGroup2|Event 2|Parm 1 below 0|Parameter1<0|0|0|2|123123|0|Marker 2
Group1|SubGroup3|Event 3|Parm 2 above 0|Parameter2>0|0|0|3|123123|0|Marker 3
Group2|SubGroup4|Event 4|Parm 2 below 0|Parameter2<0|0|0|4|123123|0|Marker 4
Note: If you are running the Event Monitor from an external input file, the control's "Use
External File" property must be set to True, and the "Input File Name and Path" property
must have a file selected.

123
23. ICAW Display
The ICAW display is used to monitor the health and status of a test vehicle during a mission.
It accomplishes this by constantly monitoring and comparing the values of a predefined set of
parameters to known fault values. When an ICAW fault value is detected, a message
associated with that fault is displayed within the display, either at the top, or categorized by
the Caution, Warning or Advisory message type. Optionally, ICAW fault messages can be
written to a log file, available for post test analysis.

To setup the system to run an ICAW display:

 Create an ICAW input file or populate the ICAW Definitions table in the Configuration
Tool.
To open the ICAW display:
1. On the Dashboard click the Display Builder button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab on the Display Builder.

3. Left-click drag the ICAW icon onto your Analysis Window.

To view/change ICAW properties:
 Right-click on the ICAW > Properties.
Note: To enable the advanced property dialog, click the arrow button at the IRIG time display
on the Dashboard > Use Advanced Property Dialog for all Displays.

23.1. The ICAW Definitions Table

The ICAW control can read setup information from the ICAW Definitions table in the IADS
Configuration or from an input file. The ICAW Definitions Table can be populated manually,
entering information into the required fields, or by importing an existing ICAW test file.
To set the ICAW to read the setup information from the ICAW Definitions Table:
1. Right-click on the ICAW > Properties.
2. Set the UseExternalFile property to False.
To edit the ICAW Definitions table in the Configuration File:
1. Click the Configuration Tool dashboard button.
2. Click the Test folder, ICAW Definitions table.
3. Enter ICAW information.
4. Click a Save option.
ICAW Fields:
IRIG Time - The time the function bit was triggered.
ICAW Group - The group defined in the ICAW Definitions table in the Configuration Tool.
This group is meant as a filtering mechanism, and is not associated with the Desktop
Group/Subgroup.

124
 IADS User Manual

ICAW SubGroup - The subgroup defined in the ICAW Definitions table in the
Configuration Tool. This subgroup is meant as a filtering mechanism, and is not associated
with the Desktop Group/Subgroup.
Parameter - The Parameter name is used to identify each ICAW for instrumentation and
telemetry.
Bit Number - Identifies the bit field of the current parameter value to be used to recognize
events as they occur.
ICAW - A short description of the ICAW event. This is the exact text the pilot will see in the
cockpit for any given ICAW.
Hold Count - The number of milliseconds a message remains in the display after its trigger
transitions to 0 (false). This can be used to hold messages with a very short on/off cycle.
Trigger - The event will trigger on transition to this bit value (either zero or one).
Alert Type - There are three levels of ICAWs: WARNING, CAUTION, and ADVISORY.
Each level is associated with a specific color; RED for WARNING, YELLOW for
CAUTION and BLUE for ADVISORY.
ICAW # - The ICAW Number is used to define a specific failure or indication. There is only
ONE failure associated with any given ICAW. The ICAW will eventually be used to direct
the pilot to specific actions via an electronic checklist in the cockpit.
ICAW Description - The description is a further definition (in text) of a given ICAW.
IPT Group - IPT defines which of the Integrated Product Teams is responsible for the
ICAW.
Page Number - The Emergency Procedure document is defined for each row in the Page
Number column. This file's (pdf, excel, text, html, etc…) path name is entered via the
Configuration Tool > Test > ICAW Definitions Table if the ICAW Definition Source is a
Table; or entered in the .txt file if the ICAW Definition Source is an input file.
Show Row Buttons - If selected on the ICAW Properties Sheet Display Tab, the user must
click on the row button associated with the ICAW fault to bring up the Emergency Procedure
document. If row buttons are turned off, the user can click the ICAW or ICAW Description
cell to open the Emergency Procedure document.

23.2. Creating an ICAW Input File

The input file will consist of a header and a list of rows, where each row contains all the
information needed to define a single ICAW fault. The header defines the unique fields for
the rows in the input file, and only the columns specified will appear in the ICAW Property
Sheet. The file name (ICAW_INPUT_FILE) and the columns TITLE, HOLD COUNT,
PARAMETER, BIT NUMBER, and ALERT TYPE are mandatory. Columns can be in any
order in the input file.
Copy and paste this example into Notepad to get started:
ICAW_INPUT_FILE
TITLE|HOLD COUNT|PARAMETER|BIT NUMBER|TRIGGER VALUE|LONG
TITLE|ALERT TYPE|PAGE NUMBER|ICAW#
AIRSPEED APU|10000|TTT1001XX|15|0|Possible
damage|Advisory|D:\ICAW\EmergencyProcedure.doc|1

125
 Moving Map Display

APU DOOR|10000|TTT0002XX|14|1|Possible restricted

airspeed|Warning|D:\ICAW\EmergencyProcedure.doc|2
AIRSPEED APU|10000|TTT1001XX|15|0|Possible
damage|Caution|D:\ICAW\EmergencyProcedure.doc|3
Note: The # symbol preceding any line will be commented out of the input file.

24. Moving Map Display

The Moving Map control allows the user to display a map image with one or more aircraft
accurately positioned over the map. Using the standard IADS drag and drop interface,
parameter information such as latitude, longitude, airspeed and heading are applied to each
target to present control room engineers with real time situational awareness capability.
The Moving Map display can hold two map images: Visual Flight Rules (VFR) and
Instrument Flight Rules (IFR); which you can switch between. The current version of the
display only handles the Lambert Conformal Conic (LCC) projection accurately; because the
control was originally designed specifically to display US sectional charts which use that
format.
Many IADS users use screen shots of their airfields and surrounding countryside as the maps
for the control, since projection distortion for such a small area is not an issue. As you zoom
out however, you will begin to see the effects of distortion which will grow more pronounced
as your coverage area increases. It is best to experiment and see if you can find a compromise
between complete accuracy and the coverage area in this case.
Note: Images that are too large, for example 12000 x 12000 pixels, may not load in the
control and you will get an error message that could be due to a memory issue; the image
may need to be resized or the color depth reduced (or the image may be corrupt). We
recommend using 256 color BMP files only. Please attempt to convert your image to this
format. Using JPG or other full color formats could consume too much memory and cause the
map to fail, or other adverse effects. The video card also plays an important role; some
images may not load on a machine with less video power.

To add the Moving Map icon to the Display Builder, ActiveX Controls tab:
1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click on the Active X Controls tab on the Display Builder.
3. Right-click the mouse inside the tab.

126
 IADS User Manual

4. Click the IadsSA.IadsMovingMap check box.

5. Click OK.
To create a Moving Map display:
1. On the dashboard, click the Display Builder button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab on the Display Builder.

3. Drag the icon onto your Analysis Window. Double-click in the title-bar of the
display to maximize the display.
4. Click the Open Map File button.
5. Select a VFR map file. To select an IFR map file, click the IFR Map button and then the
Open Map File button to load it.
To move to a different location on the map:

 Click the Translate Map button. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the map
to a new location.
To zoom in and out of the map quickly:
 Click on the map and move the mouse wheel forwards and backwards.
To cycle to the next target (or find a target that is not visible):
 With your cursor in the display press the Tab key.
To access moving map properties:
1. Right-click in the title-bar of the display (the area above the tool bar buttons).
2. Click Properties.

24.1. Moving Map Display Toolbar Buttons

Load Map - Opens a navigation box that allows you to choose a map file. The Moving Map
display can be used with Bitmaps, GIF and JPG files. To operate correctly with positional
data, the map images must be geo-referenced. An image map that has already been geo-
referenced will have a .geo file with the same as the map file in the same directory on the
computer (this file must reside in the same directory as the map file).

Visual Flight Rules (VFR) Map - Displays the VFR Map. To change this map, click the
VFR button and use the Open Map file button to locate and load the new image.

Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) Map - Displays the IFR Map. To change this map, click
the IFR button and use the Open Map File button to locate and load the new image.

Zoom In - Zooms in the current IFR/VFR map only.

Fit Map to Display - Auto resize the map to fit the current window dimensions.

Zoom Out - Zooms out the current IFR/VFR map only.

Show Labels - Toggles (on/off) the labels associated with the markers and targets.

Distance Bearing Tool - Creates distance bearing markers on the display.

127
 Moving Map Display

Translate Map - The cursor becomes a hand that lets you move the map by holding
down the left mouse button and dragging across screen.
Note: If there is an aircraft target active on the map and its tracking is set to Center in
Window, you will not be able to move the map. Right-click on the target and select Tracking
> Keep within Window or No Constraints.

Locate Airports - Displays the airports in local area of the map (only if geo-reference
file exists).

Load Overlays - Opens a new overlay text file which will replace the current overlays.
To save any overlays you load or create using the dialog to the

Toggle Overlays - This button toggles the overlays on/off.

Overlay Properties - Opens the Overlay Properties dialog.

Reference Map - Opens the Geo-Reference Tool.

24.2. Moving Map Display Right-click Menus

To select the Title-bar right-click menu options:
1. Right-click at the Moving Map Title-bar (the area above the toolbar buttons).
2. On the pop-up menu click:
Print - A picture of the display is on its way to the printer.
Save Image - Saves a bitmap file to a selected designation. It will go to this destination
automatically.
Edit Title - Allows you to add a title to the display.
Select Data Properties - Displays what properties are available when you drop target lat,
lon, heading, airspeed and altitude parameters onto the display.
Size - Normal or Maximize to the full size of the Analysis Window.
Order - Bring To Front or Send To Back.
Delete - All Parameters or Display.
Properties - To open the display's property sheet.
To select the Map right-click menu options:
1. Right-click on the Moving Map.
2. On the pop-up menu click:
Show Toolbar - Show/hide the display toolbar (T key hit).
Show Lat Long Grid - Show/hide the latitude and longitude grid lines on the display (G key
hit).
Show Map Scale - Show/hide the map scale on the display (S key hit).
Show Target Information - Show/hide the target information window on the display (I key
hit).
Use Kilometers - Displays information in kilometers vs. nautical miles.

128
 IADS User Manual

Hide Map - Hides the map.

Close Map - Closes the map.
Invert Map Colors - Inverts the map colors.
Global Aircraft Options - Show Trails, Reset Trails, Show Range Rings and Show Overlay
Intercepts.
Airport Display Options - In the dialog, select the types of airfields you wish to be
displayed.
Overlays - By default all overlays are selected in the list and visible on the map when you
first load an overlay file (a check will appear next to the overlay name); click the overlay
name to hide/unhide it on the map.

24.3. Moving Map Targets

Note: The active target on the map is marked with a red circle. Click on a target to make it the
active target.
To place a target on the map:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Parameter Tool button.
2. Drag and drop the target latitude parameter onto the display and select the associated
target property in the dialog (Target1_Latitude).
3. Drag and drop the target longitude parameter onto the display and select the associated
target property in the dialog (Target1_Longitude).
4. Drag and drop optional airspeed and heading parameters and select the associated target
properties.
To delete a target:
 Right-click on the target > Properties > Delete Target.
To view a target's Lat / Lon coordinates (distance to bearing marker information if
applicable):
1. Click on the desired target.
2. View coordinate information at the bottom of the display.
To select the target right-click menu options:
1. Right-click on the target.
2. On the pop-up menu click:
Identify - Displays target information.
Tracking (Target Tracking):
Center in Window - Target set to center of window; cannot move map manually in this mode.
Keep within Window - Map adjusts to keep target in visible window always.
No Constraints - Target can move outside visible view.
Delete Target - Deletes the selected target.
Properties (Target Information):
Identify Target - Enter a target label/name.

129
 Moving Map Display

Target Symbol - Select the target symbol type.

Target Size - Select a target symbol size from 1-10.
Target Color - Select a target symbol color from the Color Selection dialog.
Show Aircraft Trail - Checking this box shows the target's trail history as defined by the
following:
Trail Color - Select a trail history color from the Color Selection dialog.
Trail Length - Trail history length in minutes.
Trail Width - Select a trail width size from 1-10.
Target Tracking - Center in Window, Keep within Window or No Constraints.
Center Icon over lat/long position - If checked the target is centered over the lat/long position
on the map. If unchecked the lat/long position is at the target nose on the map.
Show Rings - Checking this box will display rings around the target on the moving map
display. The number of rings is determined by the Count entry. The first ring will be
displayed x amount of nautical miles from the target lat/long position as determined by the
Radius entry. Each additional ring is calculated from the previous ring's radius the same x
amount of nautical miles.
Radius - Nautical miles.
Count - Number of rings.
Show Overlay Intercept - Checking this box shows a vector (point at intersection) from the
target heading to the nearest POLYGON overlay edge it intercepts. Distance and time to
intercept will be displayed on the status bar at the bottom of the display. To acquire an
intercept with a polygon that is not necessarily the nearest, other polygons can be hidden via
the right click menu option.
Type - Vector or Point (the target must have a Target_Heading parameter associated with it).
Show Compass - Displays a compass ring around the target. Heading is displayed at the top of
the compass ring (the target must have a Target_Heading parameter associated with it to
display a correct compass reading).
Show Radar Sweep - Displays a radar sweep (cone).
Deg - The angle of the radar sweep.
NM - The nautical miles of the radar sweep.
Color - The color of the radar sweep.

24.4. Moving Map Overlays

Users now have the option to import all overlay information in an external overlay text file to
the new MovingMapOverlays table in the Configuration Tool. Polygons and markers created
using the Polygon Properties dialog are automatically saved to the table.
To import an overlay text file into the MovingMapOverlays table:

1. Click the Click the Load Overlays button (fourth button from right).
2. Select the desired overlay .txt file from the directory.
3. Click Open.

130
IADS User Manual

4. Click Yes to automatically import the file into the MovingMapOverlays table.
Note: Overlays added to the map by loading an overlay text file, are not editable via the right-
click > Properties until the Table mode is enabled. To enable Table mode, click the
Overlay Properties button.
To create an overlay file:
1. Open Notepad on your computer.
2. For each overlay enter: label,type,string,color,lat,lon,lat,lon.... (Latitude and longitude
coordinates need to be in degrees format). For example:
overlay1,text,string for text overlay,255,34.5,117.0
overlay2,polygon,,16711680,34.8,117.2,34.8,118.6,35.3,118.6,34.8,117.2
overlay3,ellipse,,65280,35.2,118.3,35.6,118.8
Note: To comment out a line in the overlay file insert // before the text.
To create a new overlay or marker using the Overlay Properties dialog:

1. Click the Overlay Properties button.

2. Enter a Group name (required); will default to last known value.
3. Enter a unique overlay Name (required).
4. Select an overlay Type from the drop down menu or click the Browse for Icon button to
select a custom_Icon
5. Set the Overlay Style options as desired (some options are not applicable to all types and
will be grayed out).
6. [Optional] Enter text for a label.
7. Click OK.
8. Click the desired location(s) on the Map.
9. Right-click to lock into place.
To change overlay properties:
1. Click on the overlay to highlight it.
2. Right-click > Properties.
3. Make changes in the Overlay Properties dialog.
4. Click OK.
To filter your overlay selection by Overlay Group name(s):
1. Right-click in the display title-bar > Properties.
2. At the OverlayGroup property, enter the overlay group name(s), separated by commas, of
those you wish to view on the map.
To toggle on/off all overlays:

 Click the Toggle Overlays button.

To hide an overlay or marker:
1. Put your cursor over the overlay or marker to highlight it.
2. Right-click > Hide.

131
 Moving Map Display

- Or -
1. Right-click on the map (not in an overlay).
2. Overlays > click on the overlay name to deselect it in the list.
To toggle on/off the text (labels):

 Click the Show Labels button.

To move a marker (not applicable to polygons):
 Click on the icon to select it (should be highlighted), hold down the left mouse button and
drag the marker to the desired location.
Polygon Overlay Intercepts
Right-click on the target, click Properties, and check the Show Overlay Intercept check
box. When active, a vector will be drawn from the target to the nearest polygon edge along
the target's heading. Distance and time to intercept will be displayed on the status bar at the
bottom of the display. To acquire an intercept with a polygon that is not necessarily the
nearest, other polygons can be hidden via the right click menu option.

24.5. The Moving Map Overlays Table

To change overlay properties in the table:

1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Test folder > Moving Map Overlays.
3. Make the desired changes and save the table.
4. Click the Change Desktop button.
Note: Changes saved to the Moving Map Overlays table will not be applied to the map until
you do a Change Desktop or Log Off and Log On.
Table Descriptions:
Overlay Group - [Required] Overlay group name. Allows users to filter/view overlays by
Group name.
Overlay Name - [Required] Unique overlay name.
Shape (Type) - [Required] Type of polygon or marker.
Text - [Optional] Overlay label.
Line Color - The line or polygon border color. Not applicable to icons.
Line Width (Size) - [Required] Width of the line or polygon border; the size of an icon.
Line Style - Solid (default), Dash, Dot, DashDot or DashDotDot.
Fill Color - The polygon fill color.

132
 IADS User Manual

Transparency - The transparency of the fill color (if applicable); or the transparency of a
line.
LatLongPairs - The Latitude and longitude coordinate pairs of the overlay. The latitude and
longitude entries in the table can be numeric values (coordinate pairs or parameter names
(TPP or Derived); will update as parameter values change.

24.6. Distance Bearing Markers

To create a Distance Bearing Marker:
1. Click the Distance Bearing Marker button.
2. Move the cursor onto the map and left click the mouse to "start" the marker.
3. Move the cursor to the end point and left click the mouse again to "stop".
To access Marker Properties:
1. Place the cursor on the marker and right-click the mouse.
2. Click Properties on the menu.

To move a Distance Bearing Marker:

 Click the start or end point of the marker and move with the mouse.
To attach a Distance Bearing Marker to a target:
 Click the Distance Bearing Marker end point and drag it onto the desired target.
To view the Distance and Bearing Values:
 Attach the Distance Bearing Marker to a target and view the results at the bottom of the
window.
- Or -
 Click on any Distance Bearing Marker's start/stop point on the map.

133
 Moving Map Display

24.7. The Georeference Tool

The Georeference Tool allows you to create or modify Georeference files to accurately
display a chart/map image with reference to latitude and longitude. The display functions best
with Bitmaps, but can use GIF and JPG files also. To operate correctly with positional data,
the image must have an associated reference file. The reference file has the same name as the
image file with a .geo file extension and exists in the same directory. If an image file is
loaded that does not have a reference file, use this tool to create one.
Note: The projection type is fixed. The control requires charts/maps that use the Lambert
Conic Conformal Projection with two standard parallels. Any other projection may not plot
correctly. For more information on Lambert Conformal Conic Projection, please see the
Wikipedia page.
To create or modify a georeference file on the Moving Map display:
1. On the Moving Map display, click the Reference Map toolbar button. The
Georeference Tool will open.
2. Enter/edit the map values in the tool. If an associated reference (.geo) file already exits,
the Georeference Tool will update with those values. If there is no associated reference
file, all fields in the Georeference Tool will be empty.
Note: If the fields in the Georeference Tool are empty, cancel out of the dialog so you can
manipulate the map directly (you cannot maneuver the map and enter the values into the
tool simultaneously). See instructions below to define map values.
3. Click Apply to activate "fine tuning". Click OK to overwrite an existing reference file
(you should make a copy of your original reference file). If no reference file existed
previously, a .geo file will be created at the same location as the map file. You will notice
the display updates with latitude and longitude reference lines on and outside your chart
on whole degrees only; these lines will appear red, and are adjustable while the Fine
Tuning dialog is up. See the Fine Tuning dialog instructions at the end of this topic.
4. Press the Esc key to exit the Fine Tuning dialog and save the Georeference file

134
IADS User Manual

To define map values:

All fields in the Georeference Tool are required and entries must be as accurate as possible.
Ideally, this information is provided by the map creator; many maps have this information
printed on the side of them. If you are unable to discover the exact values to generate the
chart, these internet sites may help you determine latitude and longitude coordinates:
www.googleearth.com or aeroplanner.com > Charts > SmartChart. Write these values down
and repeat step 1 above when you have all the values defined.
1st and 2nd Parallels - Determine two latitude values; the nearest to the top and bottom of
your chart. The closest latitude lines at the top and bottom of your chart may be some
distance away from the chart borders. A good rule of thumb is to use the integer value closed
to top/bottom of your display. For example, if the upper most latitude line on your chart is
34.0 degrees, use 35.0 degrees for this entry.
Latitude of Origin - The Latitude of Origin is the latitude of the line that appears most
horizontal in your map. It essentially defines the latitudinal center of the Lambert Conical
Conformal projection on the map, a horizontal line that appears the least curved. Grab your
map with the hand button and drag up and down until you find a line that lines up as straight
as possible with the edge of your display. Ensure that this latitude value is somewhere
between the top and bottom of your map.
Longitude of Origin - The Longitude of Origin is the longitude of the line that appears most
vertical in your map. It essentially defines the longitudinal center of the Lambert Conical
Conformal projection on the map, a vertical line that appears the least curved. Grab your map
with the hand button and drag left and right until you find a line that lines up as straight as
possible with the vertical edge of your display.
Longitude and Latitude (image information) - You will need to estimate these coordinates as
you did with the parallels. For example a Latitude South East entry would be a latitude value
that lies near the lower right corner of the display. Use the Map Translate (hand) button to
drag the map into that area and zoom in to view the coordinate.
Note: The Analysis Window must be locked to use the toolbar buttons in the display.
To use the Fine Tuning dialog:
With your cursor in the display, fine tune the display latitude and longitude (red) lines until
they correctly overlay the image longitude and latitude lines using the keys below. While you
fine tune the map, the lat/lon coordinates at the bottom of the display will not update until
you move your cursor. Continually move your cursor at the point of interest as you make
changes to view the new coordinates. Press the Esc key to exit the Fine Tuning dialog and
save the geo-reference file.
M Places a marker on the map
Tab Switches between markers
Shift+X Scales longitude lines closer together
X Scales longitude lines farther apart
Shift+Y Scales latitude lines closer together
Y Scales latitude lines farther apart
Right Arrow Moves longitude lines right
Left Arrow Moves longitude lines left
Up Arrow Moves latitude lines up
Down Arrow Moves latitude lines down

135
Moving Map Display

S Save values
R Restore values
Esc Exits Fine Tune mode
+ or - Increase/decrease change increments

Using markers
When georeferencing map images that do not have lines of latitude and longitude, such as
airfield or satellite images, it is often useful to use markers. Four of these markers are
automatically generated when georeferencing the map, one at each corner of the map. Click
on these markers and drag them to any position on the image you wish to identify.
Additionally, more markers can be generated by hitting the <m> key on the keyboard.
For example,
1. Use the procedure described above to identify the corners of your map, as well as the
horizontal and vertical lines of origin using the georeference dialog.
2. Use a program such as Google Earth to note the exact lat/lon of the centers of the ends of
the runways (as exact as possible).
3. Create a marker for each end of each runway.
4. Position the markers on the ends of the runway, and click on them to open an edit box.
Enter the know values for the ends of the runway (the markers will probably move as the
map is not yet fully geo-referenced).
5. Use the keyboard arrow keys as described above to move the markers back to their
correct positions.
Note: In some cases the chart may be significantly small and have only one or no display
latitude or longitude lines visible on the display chart. If you move outside the chart using the
Translate Map button you will eventually come across a display line but this will not help you
with fine tuning. In this case you will have to visualize the changes you make lining up
outside your range and rely solely on your cursor coordinates to see the changes you are
making.

136
25. Situational Awareness (SA) Display
The SA control allows the user to display up to 10 aircraft accurately positioned over terrain
data. Using the standard IADS drag and drop interface, parameter information such as
latitude, longitude, altitude, yaw, pitch and roll are applied to each aircraft to present users
with real time situational awareness capability.

To add the SA Display icon to the Display Builder:

1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click on the ActiveX Controls tab on the Display Builder.
3. Right-click the mouse inside the tab.
4. Click the IadsSA.IadsSAControl check box.
5. Click OK.
7.
To create an SA display:

1. Drag and drop the control onto the Analysis Window.

2. Double-click in the display to maximize it.
Note: When you create the display, the default location of aircraft1 is over the Hawaiian
Islands. A display without the Earth image (grayed out) has no data. Check the Data
Directory location in the property sheet to verify it is pointing to the correct directory
(Program Files\IADS\ClientWorkstation\IadsSA_Data). Please refer to the SA Texture
Images topic for more information.
To re-size an SA display:
 Double-click in the display to maximize/minimize.
- Or -

 Unlock the Analysis Window and grab the edge of the display with the mouse and
drag it to the desired size
To change the view mode:
 Press the C key to cycle through the view modes: Chase View, Target View, Follow
View, Leading View, Cockpit View or Rotate View (with your cursor in the display, hold
down the left mouse button to rotate the view).

137
 Situational Awareness (SA) Display

To save a preset view:

1. Press Shift+1 to set the first view, Shift+2 for the second, and so on.
2. To go to the first view, press the 1 key, to go to the second view press the 2 key, and so
on.
To add an aircraft to the display:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Parameter Tool button.
2. Drag and drop the Aircraft 1 Latitude parameter onto the display and select the Latitude1
property in the parameter drop popup menu.
3. Drag and drop the Aircraft 1 Longitude parameter onto the display and select the
Longitude1 property in the parameter drop popup menu.
4. Drag and drop the Aircraft 1 "Heading" parameter onto the display and select the Yaw1
property in the parameter drop popup menu.
5. Repeat as necessary for Altitude1, Pitch1, and Roll1.
6. Repeat steps 3-5 to add additional aircraft (up to 10) to the display.
7. Adding/Viewing additional aircraft to the display will require you to activate them
(Active2 property = Yes).
To select an aircraft (has focus on the display):
 Press the [ or ] key to cycle to the desired aircraft.
- Or -
 Press Ctrl+1, Ctrl+2, etc... keys to select the aircraft for main focus.
To view/change aircraft properties:
1. Right-click on the aircraft.
2. Click Properties.
To select a target:
1. Right-click in the display > Properties.
2. Set the view mode to Target View (press the C key to cycle through the view modes or
set the CameraViewMode property.
3. Set the CameraSelectTarget property to the desired aircraft.

25.1. Situational Awareness (SA) Display Operations

To view/change display properties:
1. Right-click in the display.
2. Click Properties.
To zoom in and out:

1. Lock the Analysis Window.

2. With your cursor in the display, press the right-mouse button and move forward and back
to zoom in and out.
Note: The display make take a few seconds to update when changes are made to display
coordinates.

138
 IADS User Manual

To rotate in any direction:

1. Lock the Analysis Window.

2. Press the C key to cycle to the Rotate View Mode (View Mode displayed in bottom left
corner of the display.
3. With your cursor in the display, press the left-mouse button and move your cursor to
rotate in any direction.
To pan back and forth (enables free roaming mode):
1. With your cursor in the display hold down both the left and right mouse buttons to pan
back and forth (window must be locked).
2. Click the + or - keys to zoom up or down.
3. Press the C key to put the focus back on the aircraft.

25.2. Situational Awareness (SA) Display Keyboard Shortcuts

With your cursor in the drawing area of the display (not the title bar) press the desired
keyboard key.
Many of the following key hits are applicable to the aircraft that is selected (has focus on the
display). Use the [ or ] keys to cycle to the desired aircraft.
Shift+A Toggle altitude line
B Toggle region borders
C Cycle view mode: Chase View, Target View, Follow View, Cockpit View or
Rotate View (with your cursor in the display hold down the left mouse button and
rotate the view)
Ctrl+C Toggle on/off compass ring
D Toggle distance lines between you and another aircraft
Shift+D Toggle distance information (set the InfoShow property of the aircraft to other than
None, or use the I key hit to cycle through the options)
E Cycle through envelope show modes
Shift+E Toggle envelope information
Ctrl+E Toggle show/hide envelope altitude cut lines
G Toggle lat/long earth grids (zoom out to Earth view to see grids)
H Show help menu on display (set the TextColor property for optimal viewing)
I Toggle current aircraft information on display
Shift+I Toggle current aircraft information location on display
L Toggle map labels
Ctrl+L View SA log information
M Toggle current aircraft marker
N In Rotate view mode, sets the view to North.
In Target view mode, sets the target (CameraSelectTarget property) to the nearest
aircraft.
Shift+N Toggle Night/Day mode
O Resets OpenGL settings

139
 Situational Awareness (SA) Display

P Toggles flight path trail options

Shift+P Toggle flight path trails (set ShowFlightPath property for aircraft to True, or use
the P key hit to cycle through the options)
Ctrl+P Reset (clear) current flight path
Ctrl+Shift+P Reset (clear) all flight paths
R Toggle runway lines
S Toggle aircraft shadows (set the ColorMarker and ShadowSpacing properties for
optimal viewing)
Shift+S Toggle display satellite images
T Toggle display terrain images
V Cycle viewing distance modes Short, Medium or Far (the Visibility property)
X Decrease camera distance to aircraft - zoom in
Z Increase camera distance to aircraft - zoom out
[ Cycle to previous vehicle
] Cycle to next vehicle
Shift+[ Cycle to previous target (target view only, press C key to cycle through view
modes)
Shift+] Cycle to next target (target view only, press C key to cycle through view modes)
Ctrl+1..9 Select the applicable aircraft if active
Shift+1..9 Assign current view mode to a key number 1-9 (for example, 1 = Cockpit View)
1-9 Set view to assigned view
0 Go to default view mode (Rotate view)
~ (Shift+1) Displays the regions of the earth that do have image data. For details, press the C
key to cycle to Rotate view. Hold down the right mouse button and zoom out.
Hold down both mouse buttons to pan back and forth.
Spacebar Hold down spacebar to flip view 180 degrees.

25.3. Situational Awareness (SA) Texture Images

The SA display's default terrain images are elevation color gradients. Each image covers a
1x1 degree latitude-longitude region corresponding to the Earth's surface. When a new SA
display is created, the location of Aircraft1 (Active by default) is over the Hawaiian Islands.
These terrain images are included with the IADS Installation located at
\IADS\ClientWorkstation\IadsSA_Data\Textures\Terrain Images. This directory contains
default terrain images that should not be removed or modified by the user. By default, the
display will show satellite images if they are available; otherwise terrain images.
SA Display 'Custom' Satellite Images

Users can create their own satellite images for use with the SA display. Actual satellite
images are not provided with the IADS installation package; some demo satellite images of

140
IADS User Manual

Hawaii are included for "show" when a new display is created. The default satellite image
directory is located at \IADS\ClientWorkstation\IadsSA_Data\Textures\Satellite Images.
More than one custom image directory can created by the user. The display's
SatelliteDirectory property is used to select the input path to the directory that contains the
desired "set" of custom images.
Satellite Images can be in Windows Bitmap (.bmp) or JPEG Image (.jpg) formats. If files
exist in the directory with identical coordinates but different formats (Bitmap and JPEG), the
JPEG will supersede the Bitmap and load first. The user’s format preference will depend on
system performance as Bitmaps images load quicker but are much larger files whereas JPEG
images are much smaller but take longer to load. The size of the image must have a pixel
dimension of a power of 2 (for example 256x256, 512x512) up to the maximum texture size
allowable for your system.

To determine the maximum texture size for your system:

1. Right-click in the SA display > Properties.
2. Scroll down to the MaxTextureSize property. This value is read-only and not editable.
To add your own satellite image:
1. Name the file as S+/-<two digit lat>+/-<three digit lon>_L01. For example, S+18-
156_L01.bmp; the lower left corner of the 1x1 degree region is +18 latitude and -156
longitude. The L01 denotes a land region expanding across 1 area only (not subdivided).
2. Add the new file to the Satellite Images directory or replace an existing file (if
applicable).
To turn off satellite images:
1. Right-click on the SA display > Properties.
2. Set the ShowSatelliteTextures Property to False.
Troubleshooting
 Region is white? Make sure your image pixel dimensions is not larger than the maximum
texture size for your system; pixel dimension must be a power of 2.
 Verify the image files are in the correct directory (terrain or satellite).
 Verify the DataDirectory property (SA data files; includes the Terrain Images folder) and
the SatelliteDirectory Property (satellite images) are pointing to the location(s) where the
images files are stored on your machine/network.

141
 Situational Awareness (SA) Display

25.4. Situational Awareness (SA) Envelopes

After a Situational Awareness display has been created, the user has the option to display
envelopes. This information is stored in a text file. Envelope line width, transparency, altitude
and "show" properties can be customized in the SA Property Sheet.
To add an envelope to the SA display:
1. Right click on the SA display.
2. On the popup menu click Properties.
3. Click the Categorized tab.
4. Scroll down to Envelopes.
5. Click in the EnvelopeFiles cell.
6. Click the button to navigate to the desired envelope files.
7. Click on the envelope (hold down the Ctrl key to select more than one envelope file).
8. Click Open.
To create an envelope:
1. Open Notepad on your computer.
2. For each envelope enter label,type,string,color,behavior,min (altitude),max
(altitude),lat1,lon1,lat2,lon2...latN,lonN (latitude and longitude coordinates need to be in
degrees format - see example below).
3. Save the file.
Note: Latitude and longitude coordinates need to be in decimal degrees. Polygons are NOT
implicitly closed. To create a closed polygon, the last point value needs to be the same as the
first point.
Envelope file descriptions:
Label – Name of envelope.
Type – Polygon.
String – Not implemented in this version.
Color - Hexadecimal value "0xBBGGRR" (blue, green, red format) or integer value.
Behavior - Set to 1 will make the envelope react when inside the envelope area; set to -1 will
make the envelope react when outside the envelope area, set to 0 for no reaction to being
inside or outside the envelope.
Min - Minimum altitude for envelope.
Max - Maximum altitude for envelope.
Lat, Lon - Latitude and longitude coordinate pairs up to N points in decimal degrees.
Copy and paste the following into Notepad to get started
Kahoolawe,polygon,,0x0000FF,1,0.0,30000.0,20.6027,-156.503,20.6445,-156.5928,20.574,-
156.7467,20.4568,-156.7552,20.4958,-156.4996,20.6027,-156.503
Note: More than one envelope can be defined in the envelope file; the delimiter between
envelopes in the envelopes file is a new line in the text file. // preceding any line will be
commented out of the input file.

142
 IADS User Manual

25.5. Situational Awareness (SA) Overlay Images

After a SA display has been created the user has the option to add overlay images to the
terrain; for example, to emphasize a runway on the display. This information is stored in a
text file and references bitmaps in the same directory at \Program Files
(x86)\IADS\ClientWorkstation\IadsSA_Data\Textures\Overlays. Only one texture overlay
file can be selected at a time. An overlay text file can have multiple overlays defined in it.
Overlays in the file you do not want to display can be commented out with double hash marks
//.
To create an overlay file:
1. Open Notepad on your computer.
2. For each overlay enter Lat1, Lon1, Lat2, Lon2, Alpha, File.
3. Save the file in the Overlays directory referenced above.
4. Add the bitmap or jpeg files referenced in the text file to the Overlays directory also.
File properties:
Lat1 - The latitude coordinate for the bottom edge.
Lon1 - The longitude coordinate for the left edge.
Lat2 - The latitude coordinate for the top edge.
Lon2 - The longitude coordinate for the right edge.
Alpha - The opaque value for the drawing image.
File - The image file name; bmp or jpg.
Note: Latitude and longitude coordinates need to be in decimal degrees. An opaque value of
1.0 is solid, 0.0 is invisible.
Overlay file example
//34.865, -117.92298, 34.9475, -117.84046, 1.0, red.bmp
34.875, -117.88172, 34.90625, -117.85046, 1.0, blue.bmp
34.90625, -117.88172, 34.9375, -117.85046, 1.0, green.bmp
34.875, -117.91297, 34.90625, -117.88171, 1.0, orange.bmp
34.90625, -117.91297, 34.9375, -117.88171, 1.0, yellow.jpg
Note: To comment out a line in the overlay file insert double hash marks // before the text.
To show a texture overlay on the display:
1. Right-click on the SA display.
2. Click Properties.
3. At the Texture Overlay Files property, click the button to navigate to the Overlay
directory that contains the text file (and associated bitmap) and select it.
4. Set the Show Texture Overlays property to True.

143
 Situational Awareness (SA) Display

25.6. Situational Awareness (SA) Display Articulated Models

The ability to articulate aircraft model surfaces in the Situational Awareness display is
available for aircraft models that have an associated Pivot (PVT) file. The PVT file must have
the same name, and reside in the same directory as the IADS Model File (IMF) file, for
example, C:\Program Files (x86)\IADS\ClientWorkstation\IadsSA_Data\Models\ Jet.imf and
Jet.pvt. When you select an IMF file in the SA Control property sheet, if there is an
associated PVT file it will load automatically (the same applies to a 3DS model file).
To add parameters to aircraft model properties:
1. Click on the desired aircraft to give it focus.
2. Press the Tab key. The aircraft model will be displayed in its own window.
3. Use your cursor to move the aircraft around to the desired are. The surfaces that can be
articulated are shown in green. When you put your cursor over an area it will highlight in
blue to show the property name and value (ShowAfterBurner = 0).
4. Drag and drop your parameter onto the desired property (highlighted blue). You will not
see the articulation take effect until you exit this mode and are back in the SA display.
5. Press the Tab or Esc key to exit this mode.
To delete a parameter from a model property:
1. Click on the desired aircraft to give it focus.
2. Press the Tab key.
3. Move your cursor over the desired property until it is highlighted in blue.
4. Press the Shift key and click the left mouse button simultaneously.
5. A white box will append the "property = value" field. Put your cursor in the white box
and use the Backspace key to remove the associated parameter then press the Enter key.
6. Repeat steps 3-5 as necessary.
7. Press the Tab or Esc key to exit this mode.

144
26. Toolbox
26.1. ActiveX Toolbox - Layers
Using layers allows you to display and edit ActiveX controls on the visible layer. When you
create a control it will be placed on the current selected layer; Layer 1 by default if no
specific layer is selected. Not applicable to IADS Data Displays.

To open the Layer Toolbox:

1. Unlock the Analysis Window.
2. Right-click the mouse in the Analysis Window and select Layers and Layer Tools,
Layers tab.
To use the Layer Toolbox:
1. Select one or more of the ActiveX controls in the window or right-click the mouse and
select Edit and Select All of this Type.
2. Click one of the Assign boxes in the Layer Toolbox, all of the selected items are now
assigned to the selected layer.
3. Click the Visible button to display specific layers.
4. Click the Lock button to prevent editing on specific layers.
Note: The key in working with layers is the selected displays. If you select displays and click
on an Assign button, you have now assigned the displays to that layer. As a default, all the
displays are initially assigned to layer one. When the Analysis Window is locked, all the
displays are visible (even if the visibility is turned off for the layer). Any newly created
displays will automatically be placed on layer one.
Assign controls to a new or existing layer. Clicking this button will select all of the
controls within that layer. If the icon is grayed out, the layer is either not visible or is locked.
Toggles on/off the visibility of a layer. Controls that are on layers that are not visible, will
not be seen, and cannot be selected or edited.
Lock/unlock the layer to prevent/enable editing. Controls on a locked layer cannot be
selected.
Note: Layering can only be performed with controls assigned to the library.

145
 Toolbox

26.2. ActiveX Toolbox – Edit

The edit tab of the ActiveX Toolbox allows you to quickly perform editing operations on
selected ActiveX controls. Not applicable to IADS Data Displays.

To open the Edit Toolbox:

1. Unlock the Analysis Window.
2. Right-click the mouse in the Analysis Window and select Layers and Layer Tools, Edit
tab.
To use the Edit options:
1. Select one or more of the ActiveX controls in the window or right-click the mouse and
select Edit and Select All of this Type.
2. Select one of the following editing options:
Undo last action
Removes the selected controls
Copies the selected controls
Pastes the items from the clipboard
Deletes the selected controls
Adds selected controls to the Library
Move selected control forward one level
Move selected control backwards one level
Sends the selected display to the back
Brings the selected display to the front
Connects the selected displays to each other (now one control)
Disconnects the selected control (now individual controls)
User defined properties on display creation (per user)
Moves all selected displays so the bottom edges align (to last selected control)
Moves all selected displays so the top edges align (to last selected control)
Moves all selected displays so the right edges align (to last selected control)
Moves all selected displays so the left edges align (to last selected control)
Moves all selected displays so the centers align (to last selected control)
Moves all selected displays so the middles align (to last selected control)
Distributes all selected controls horizontally
Distributes all the selected controls vertically
Enforces all selected controls height to the last control selected
Enforces all selected controls size to the last control selected
Enforces all selected controls width to the last control selected

146
 IADS User Manual

Tiles the selected controls horizontally

Tiles the selected controls vertically
Flips the selected controls X/Y axis (Line, Picture and Polygon only)

26.3. ActiveX Toolbox - Library

Grouped ActiveX controls (composites) or individual ActiveX controls can be added to a
Library for quick access. If the control contains a parameter, that data will be assigned to the
control. Library objects are available to all users.
Note: Libraries are saved at the User level. To access another's Library, login as that user and
save those objects to your Desktop.

To open the Library Toolbox:

1. Right-click in the Analysis Window and select Layers > Layers Toolbox.
2. Click the Library tab.
To add an object in the Library to your Analysis Window:
 Click on the desired object and drag it onto your Analysis Window.
To add controls to the Library:
1. Right-click on the control or grouped control.
2. Click Edit > Add to Library.
- Or -
 Click the Edit tab in the ActiveX Toolbox and click the Add to Library button.
To delete controls in the Library:
1. Right-click the mouse in the Analysis Window and select Layers and Layer Tools,
Library tab.
2. Select the control in the library, right click and select Delete Item from the menu.
To rename controls in the Library:
1. Right-click the mouse in the Analysis Window and select Layers and Layer Toolbox,
Library tab.
2. Select the control in the library, right click and select Rename Item from the menu.
3. Type in the desired name and click OK.

147
 Adding Parameters to Displays

27. Adding Parameters to Displays

27.1. The Parameter Tool
The Parameter Tool is used to add parameters to displays and controls. The parameters are
organized in the Parameter Tool based on their organization in the Parameter Defaults table.
The top category in the Parameter Tool is the name entered in the Parameter Group column
of the Parameter Defaults table. Clicking that category brings up any subgroups you have
defined in the Parameter Sub Group (ParamSubGroup) column. The blank box at the top of
the tool allows you to type in the parameter name. The Group, Subgroup and Parameter
names on the parameter tool will update and the parameter name will be highlighted.

To open the Parameter Tool:

 On the Dashboard, click the Parameter Tool button.
Parameter Tool right-click menu options:
 Right-click in the lower section of the Parameter Tool:
View Query - Filters the Parameter Tool. An active query is denoted by the binoculars in the
left, top corner. Queries are saved per user.
Go To Definition - Opens the Parameter Defaults Table at the selected parameter.
Debug Parameter - Opens the Parameter Analysis Tool with the selected parameter's
information.
Identify Displays - Highlights the border of displays that contain selected parameter all on
Analysis Windows on the Desktop.
Stop Identify Displays - Removes highlight from border of displays with selected parameter.
To customize the Parameter Tool:
 Put your cursor on the column heading (Parameter, ShortName) and right click:
Resize All Columns - Return to default column width.
Show/Hide Column - Will remove the column from your viewable area. To unhide the
column, use your cursor to move the bars the separate the columns.

148
 IADS User Manual

Sort Ascending - Sorts the contents of the column in alphabetical order from A to Z, thus
sorting the entire table by that columns entries.
Sort Descending - Sorts the contents of the column in alphabetical order from Z to A, thus
sorting the entire table by that columns entries.
Sub-Sort - When two or more columns are selected you can sub-sort ascending or
descending.
Freeze Column - Allows you to move the rest of the table right and left while using the
frozen column as a label marker.
Read Only - Will keep you from inadvertently putting entries into that columns cells.

27.2. Adding Parameters to Displays

You can add parameters to IADS displays using the Parameter Tool, the most common
method, or via the Configuration Tool; using a simple drag and drop interface. Multiple
parameters can be displayed in Stripchart, Octave Band and Frequency Plots, and multiple
parameter pairs in Nyquist, Frequency Response and Cross Plots; the parameter name in the
display's title bar drop down list is the 'active' parameter (or parameter pair).

To add a parameter to a display using the Parameter Tool:

1. On the Dashboard click the Parameter Tool button.
2. In the Parameter Tool, click on a parameter.
3. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the parameter on the display (or onto a
property on the display's Properties...).
4. Release the left mouse and select the desired property, for example, Value.
To add multiple parameters to a display:
 Press and hold the Ctrl key as you drop each parameter onto the display.
To add a parameter to a display using the Configuration Tool:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder > ParameterDefaults.
3. Click on the row number of the parameter of interest (the row will highlight).
4. With your cursor in the highlighted area, hold down the left mouse button and drag the
parameter on the display (or onto a property on the display's Properties...).
5. Release the left mouse and select the desired property, for example, Value.
Note: You can dynamically drive most display properties by adding a parameter.
To add a parameter to a property in the display's property sheet, via the property sheet:
1. Right-click on the display > Properties.
2. Click the = on the property of interest (this will change to fx).
3. Click in the cell next to the right of the fx to make available the button.

149
 Adding Parameters to Displays

4. Click the button to open the IADS Dynamics Wizard.

5. Select the Parameter Group, Parameter SubGroup and Parameter Name.
6. Click Finish.
To delete a parameter from a data display:
 Right-click on the display > Delete > Active Parameter or All Parameters.
To show only the 'active' parameter trace in the display:
 Right-click on the display > Properties > set ShowAllParameters to False.
To add a parameter to a control's property sheet:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Parameter Tool button.
2. Right-click on the display > Properties.
3. Hold down the left mouse button and drag a parameter (from the Parameter Tool or
Configuration Tool - see above) onto a property name.

27.3. Filtering the Parameter Tool

You can use the Filter dialog to view only those items of interest, for example, specific
Groups/Subgroups, in the Parameter Tool. Filtering hides any parameters that do not meet the
criteria you define in the IADS Filter dialog. The Keys/Values used to define the filter is
based on Parameter Default table information.
Note: An active filter on the Parameter Tool is denoted by binoculars in the heading of the
Parameter Tool.
To clear a filter:
1. Right-click in the Parameter Tool.
2. Click View Query.
3. Click the Clear All button.
4. Click OK.
To filter the Parameter Tool:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Parameter Tool button.
2. Right-click in the Parameter Tool.
3. Click View Query.
4. In the Filter dialog box, click a selection in the Keys list. The Keys list shows all of the
column headings in the Parameter Defaults Table.
5. Click an Operator.
6. Click a selection in the Values list. The Values shows all of the options available for the
selected Key (column).
Note: For some queries there may be to many "values" to list. In this case you will need
to edit the query by hand after clicking the Add button. If you click on any text in the
Values field after selecting the Key and Operator, then Add, you will have a statement
you can edit. To use a "wild card", place asterisks around the value, for example
(Parameter = *CPD10*).
7. Click Add. Click in the query to hand edit it if necessary.

150
 IADS User Manual

8. To refine your search, repeat steps 3-5 as required by clicking And or Or to join
arguments.
9. Click OK.
To undo the last argument in the string:
1. In the Filter dialog box, click the Delete Last Query button.
2. Click OK.

27.4. Go To Definition
The Go To Definition utility opens the Parameter Defaults Table (PDT) at a selected
parameter in a display, in a derived equation, or named in a table in the Configuration Tool.
You can easily update or view a parameter's default information without opening the
Configuration Tool and searching for the parameter.
Note: Parameters that have no data will show a red bang before the name. Also, parameters
that have an alias will be displayed as IADS Name (Data Source Name) as shown below.

To Go To Definition from any display:

 Right-click in the display > Go To Definition > Parameter.
To Go To Definition from a parameter or Data Group name in a derived equation (or in
a table):
1. Click in the cell with the derived equation and highlight the parameter or Data Group
name of interest.
2. Right-click > Go To Definition (F3). If the parameter exists in the PDT, the entire row
will be highlighted. If it is a Data Group, that row in the DataGroups table will be
highlighted.

151
28. Display Operations
28.1. The Display Builder - Aligning and Grouping Displays
You create all IADS displays and controls (except envelopes and time bar displays) using
icons in the Display Builder. You must create an analysis window first to contain the
displays.

To line up two or more displays:

1. Arrange displays in the position you want them.
2. Select the displays.
3. On the Display Builder, click the Alignment tab.
4. Click an Alignment option: the Left, Right, Top, or Bottom of the display.
5. Click a Distribution option: Horizontal or Vertical across the window.
6. Click Apply.
To undo the alignment:
 On the alignment tab, click the undo button (currently only one level of undo is possible).
Note: Click Vertical for a left or right alignment, and click Horizontal for a top or bottom
alignment. If two or more displays are selected, you can move them as a group. The upper
most left display will be the anchor point. You can enforce the size of all of the selected
displays by checking the enforce size box. The upper most left display will determine the size
of all the selected displays.

28.2. Attaching Data Displays

If you want to see data from the same parameter in two different displays, you can attach the
displays prior to dropping in the parameter. For example, if you attach a Stripchart to a
Frequency Plot, when you drop a parameter into the Stripchart, the Frequency Plot will
display the same parameter in the frequency domain.
To attach two displays:
1. Select the display to be attached.

152
 IADS User Manual

2. Right-click within the Analysis Window's title bar.

3. Select Attachment.
4. Click Attach.
5. Drag and drop a parameter into one of the displays.
To detach two displays:
 Follow the process above, but select Detach.
Note: You cannot attach displays that are inside a display panel.

28.3. Changing the Size of a Display

Data Displays
To change the size of a data display:
1. Unlock the window.
2. Grab the edge of the display with the mouse and drag it to the desired size.
- Or -
1. Right-click and select Properties.
2. On the Display tab enter the height and width in pixels.
3. Select Apply to preview the changes.
4. Select OK to apply changes and close the Property Sheet.
To maximize the drawing area of a data display:
 With your cursor in the display toggle the ` tilde keyboard key.
To maximize the entire data display to the size of the Analysis Window:
 Double-click in the Title Bar; double click again to return it to its default size.
- Or -
1. Right-click on the display.
2. Select Size.
3. Click Maximize.
ActiveX Controls
To change the size of an ActiveX control:
1. Unlock the window.
2. Click on the ActiveX control to view its drawing area.
3. Grab a point with the mouse and drag it to the desired size.
- Or -
1. Right-click and select Properties.
2. Click the Categorized tab.
3. In the Position section, enter the Height and Width in pixels.

153
 Display Operations

28.4. Copying Displays

To copy the last display you dragged from the Display Builder:
1. Click anywhere within the Analysis Window, outside of a display.
2. Press the Ctrl+V on the keyboard.
To copy displays to different Analysis Windows:
1. Select all the displays you want to copy.
2. Press Ctrl+C on the keyboard.
3. Go to the Analysis Window where you want the displays and press Ctrl+V on the
keyboard.
Note: Displays paste with the parameters inside them.
To copy parameters from one display to another:
1. Move the cursor into the title bar of the display.
2. Press the Shift key and left click, drag the parameter to another display.
Note: The system does not currently allow you to copy displays from desktop to desktop.

28.5. Freezing and Unfreezing Data Displays

You can choose to keep specific displays updating even though you freeze others in the same
window. This allows you to display data in real time while performing near real time analyses
in the same window.
To freeze or unfreeze data displays:
1. Select the display.
2. Move the cursor into the Analysis Window Title Bar and right click the mouse.
3. Select Displays > Freeze Selected Displays or Unfreeze Selected Displays
To set a nonfreezing data display:
1. Right-click on the display.
2. Select Properties.
3. Select the Display tab.
4. Click the Never Freeze check box.
5. Click OK.
To set the Freeze State in an ActiveX control (default is Normal):
1. Right-click on the ActiveX control > Properties.
2. At the FreezeState property select Normal, Always or Never.

28.6. Moving a Display

To move a display:

1. Click the button to unlock the Analysis Window.

2. Grab the display with your cursor and drag to the desired location.

154
 IADS User Manual

3. Lock Analysis Window.

- Or -
1. Right-click and select Properties.
2. Enter the X and Y coordinates.
3. Close the Property Sheet.

28.7. Data Trace

You can use the data translate buttons to move a data trace in a Cross Plot, Slider, Stripchart,
Summary Plot or any Frequency display. The buttons are located on the display frame.
To move a data trace:
 Click the translate arrow in the direction you want to move the parameter trace.
To reset the data trace to its original position:
 Click the unmarked button between the translate buttons.
To change the data color and width in a display:
1. Right-click on the display.
2. Select Properties.
3. Click the Data tab.
4. Click the data Color button.
5. In the Color Selection dialog box, select or create a color.
6. In the Color Selection dialog box, Click OK to apply changes and close the dialog box.
7. Select a data Width.
8. In the property sheet, click Apply to preview the changes.
9. Click OK to apply changes and close the Property Sheet.

28.8. Selecting a Display

A display must be selected prior to performing an analysis (and some operations). Selecting
will highlight the display, focusing it for the next action. A display that has been selected will
have a thin, dark border around it, while a display that has not been selected has a thin, white
border.
To select a single data display:
 Click the display in its title bar.
To select a single ActiveX control:
 Click on the display.
To deselect displays:
 Click in the Analysis Window (outside of any display).
To select multiple displays:
 Group Select: click in the Analysis Window (outside of any display)then drag to pull a
box around the display(s) you want to select.

155
 Display Operations

- Or -
 Press the Ctrl key while you click each display in succession.
To select or deselect all the data displays in a window simultaneously:

 On the Toolbar, click the Select/Deselect All Displays button.

28.9. Making Point Selections

You can select points on Stripcharts, Frequency Plots, Bode plots, and Cross Plots.
To select a point:
1. Freeze the Analysis Window.
2. Select the point with the mouse.
To Undo/Redo a point selection:
 Press the Undo/Redo point selection buttons on the display.
- Or -
 Press the Backspace or Shift+Backspace key(s).
To remove all points in a display:
 Click the unmarked button between the two arrows .
To remove all the points from all the selected displays in a window:

 On the Toolbar, click the Reset All button.

To Log Selected Points:
1. Right-click the mouse in a display that has points selected in it (the cursor must be inside
the display).
2. Click Log Selections on the menu.
To display the point of the largest peak of either the hold or data trace in a Frequency
Plot or Frequency Response Plot:
 Press the Shift key.
Stripcharts
You can select data points in frozen Stripcharts in one of three modes: data mode, peak mode,
and absolute mode. The point selections represent the X-Y Pick on a Stripchart, where Y is
time.
To select points on a Stripchart in Curve mode:
In Curve (data) mode, as you move the cursor, the point will exactly follow the curves of the
parameter trace. Data mode is useful for selecting signal segments for Randomdec, Pseudo
Randomdec, and Autocorrelation. Data mode is the default picking mode
 Click on (or near) a point of interest.

156
 IADS User Manual

To select points on a Stripchart in Peak mode:

In Peak mode, as you move the cursor the point will jump from peak to peak on the
parameter trace. Peak mode is useful for selecting peaks for Log Decrement, Log Decrement
Averaging, Log Amplitude Picking, and Fixed Block Frequency Domain Analysis.
 Press the Shift key while you click on (or near) a point of interest.
To select points on a Stripchart in Absolute mode:
In Absolute mode, the system places a dot exactly at the head of the cursor when you click
with the mouse whether or not the cursor is on the parameter trace. Absolute mode is useful
for Manual Wild Point editing.
 Press the Ctrl key while you click on a point of interest.
To move a selected point in a Stripchart:
1. Move the cursor over the point so that it turns red.
2. Hold down the left mouse button and move the point to a new location.
To move the cursor point to point:
 With the cursor in the Stripchart select the keys.
To move the cursor 100 points at a time:
 With the cursor in the Stripchart select the Page Up/Page Down keys.
Note: You can select points on the data trace (default), peaks only (Shift key) or absolute
value (Ctrl key). Selecting data points should not be confused with Loads Capturing.

28.10. Universal Cursor

Use the Universal Cursor to compare data or select data points on several Displays at the
same time. The display that has the cursor inside it defines the controlling “time”. In the
Frequency Domain the Universal Cursor works on a combination of displays: Frequency
Plots, Frequency Response Plots and Nyquist Plots (no Octave Band at this time). Universal
point selection in these displays is not available.

157
 Display Operations

To select or view points on multiple displays simultaneously:

1. Freeze the displays.
2. Select the displays containing the data of interest while holding down the Ctrl key.
3. Move the cursor into any of the selected displays. The universal cursor appears in all of
them.
4. Click a point with the mouse.

28.11. Picking X-Y Values

Pick X-Y is a function that allows you to determine the X and Y values at a point on a plot, or
the value of a point on a Stripchart. The values are logged to the Selections Log.
To log the X-Y values at a point on a plot:
1. Click a point in the plot with a left mouse click.
2. Right-click on the plot and select Log Selections.
To view values in the Selections Log:
1. On the Dashboard click the IADS Logs button.
2. Click the Selections tab.
Note: You cannot log selections from multiple displays simultaneously.

28.12. Resetting a Data Display

To Reset a Display:
 On the display click the Reset button, or click the center button between each set of
plus/minus or arrow buttons.

28.13. Default Scales for Parameters Displayed in Stripcharts and Frequency Displays
The default scale settings for a parameter determine what scale increments you will see on a
display when you drop the parameter into it. You can set the scales yourself or let the system
determine the scaling. You can override the default for a single display however, within that
display’s property sheet.
To set the default scale for a parameter:
1. On the Dashboard, click Configuration.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. Find the row for the parameter of interest.
4. In the TScaleAuto (time scale) or FScaleAuto (frequency scale) column, enter False.
5. In the TScaleRangeMin column, enter the minimum scale value.
6. In the TScaleRangeMax column, enter the maximum scale value.
7. Click a Save option.
To let the system determine the scaling for a parameter:
1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration Tool button.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. Find the row with the parameter of interest.

158
 IADS User Manual

4. In the TScaleAuto (time scale) or FScaleAuto (frequency scale) column, enter ON.
5. Click a Save option.

28.14. Zooming
Zooming is available on any display that contains a parameter trace.
To rope zoom a data display:
1. Freeze the Analysis Window.
2. Select the display you want to zoom.
3. Hold down the left mouse button and using your cursor, select the data from top left to
bottom right.
4. To reset/undo the rope zoom, hold down the left mouse button and select the data going
in the opposite direction (bottom right to top left).
To increase the scale of a data display (zoom out):
 On the display, click the “ + ” button.
To decrease the scale of a data display (zoom in):
 On the display, click the “ - ” button.
To reset the data display to the default scale:
 Click the unmarked button between the “ - ” and “ + ” buttons.
Note: If you have multiple parameters in a Stripchart, you can set the scales for each
parameter independently.

28.15. IADS Global Options

To change global options:

1. Click the arrow at the IRIG time display on the Dashboard.
2. Select the preferred option(s).
Hints - Defines what information is displayed on the displays popup data hints.
Show Time on Hints - When the cursor lingers on the data a popup hint will display the IRIG
time (of the cursor), the data value and the Load Limit information.
Show Load Limit on Hints if Defined - When the cursor lingers on the data a popup hint will
display the IRIG time (of the cursor), the data value and the Load Limit information.

159
 The Configuration Tool

Allow Global Data Hints - When multiple displays are selected, the system time aligns the
data and displays a popup on each selected display.
Allow Global Parameter Hints - When the cursor lingers in the title bar of a display the
parameter information is displayed for all the selected displays
Allow Data Hints on ActiveX Controls - Not implemented in this version.
Allow Text Wrap on Event Markers - Displays multiple lines of text for Event Markers.
Save Data Overlays - Retains Event Markers, Analysis and Test Point overlays from real
time to playback.
Save Point Selections - Retains Point Selections from real time to playback.
Saves Window State and Time - Saves the state of the window (minimized, maximized,
etc.) and the time.
Multi Print Tab Displays - Prints all tabs on the Display Folder.
Allow Parameter Drop to Reset Scales - If selected, resets scales globally on all Stripcharts
when a parameter is dropped.
Use Advanced Property Dialog for all Displays - In the 32-bit version of IADS, this option
activates the advanced property dialog for the data displays (Stripcharts, etc). in 64-bit IADS,
all data displays use the advanced property dialogs (the 'classic' property sheets are no longer
available).
Identify Displays with Missing Data - If selected, windowless ActiveX controls (Text
Primitive, Circle, Triangle, etc..) with parameters attached that have missing data or an illegal
derived equation will display a red X.
Set Dashboard Color - Select a color for the Dashboard.
Update Current Flight Info - Opens the Current Flight Information dialog to update the
current flight information.

29. The Configuration Tool

29.1. The Configuration (Config) Tool
The Configuration Tool is used to view the IADS Configuration file/database and to set
system/user attributes. All the information defining Users, Desktops, Analysis Windows and
displays, parameters, and other IADS items required for a test is located here. The left side of
the tool contains a file structure that allows you to navigate to the table of interest. The right
side of the tool contains the tables that are activated when you open a file. Most tables in the
Configuration Tool can be edited by the user. Each of the tables within the Config Tool allow
you to import, export and append data using the right-click menu.
The config file is a text based file and in some extreme cases it can be modified directly in a
text editor program. However, It is recommended to edit the config file content in the IADS
Client. If you have a number of changes to be made you can also export the information, for
example the Parameter Defaults table, edit it and then import it back into IADS. If you are a
programmer, another safe alternative is to use the IADS Configuration File Interface API at
http://iads.symvionics.com/programs.html

160
IADS User Manual

To open the Configuration Tool:

 Click the Configuration button on the Dashboard.
Toolbar and Menus

The Status Bar at the very bottom of the tool has three panes to display information. The left
pane displays the current state, for example, Loading, Saving, Validating or Ready. The
middle pane displays the Parameter, Data Source Type, and the Data Source Argument (for
Derived or IAP parameters) when you click on a row number or in any cell in the Parameter
Defaults Table. An incorrect Data Source Argument equation will show a red font in the
pane. The right pane displays the row and column number of the cursor location.
Table Folders:
Automation Folder
FES Parameters - Required for automated analyses.
Macros - An advanced editing technique. Contact the IADS Team or go to
http://groups.google.com/group/iads for more assistance.
Data Folder
Data Groups - Allows you to define a data group in advance to export data for multiple
parameters.
Envelopes - Allows you to define a series of envelopes that appear on Cross Plots and
Frequency Plots.
Parameter Defaults - All parameters and their attributes are detailed in this table.
Parameter Defaults State - Sets the state of a "set" of parameters to active or inactive.
Display Folder
These tables are for viewing purposes only and should not be edited by the user.
Analysis Windows - A list of all Analysis Windows in the configuration file.
Data Displays - A list of all data displays in the configuration file per display type.
Desktops - A list of all Desktops in the configuration file.
Logs Folder
These tables are for viewing purposes only and should not be edited by the user.
Actual Flutter Test Points Log Table - When a test point is started, this table will show you
the start and stop time.
Actual Loads Test Points Log Table - When a test point is started, this table will show you the
start and stop time.
Analysis Log Table - Contains all the Analysis entries that are written to the IADS Logs.

161
The Configuration Tool

Event Marker Log Table - Contains all the Event Marker entries that are written to the IADS
Logs.
Flutter Summary Log Table - Contains all the Flutter Summary entries that are written to the
IADS Logs.
Loads Summary Log Table - Contains all the Loads Summary entries that are written to the
IADS Logs.
Log Behavior Table - Not implemented.
Replace Parameter Log Table - Contains all the replacements made using Global Parameter
Replace and undo.
Selections Log Table - Contains all the Selection entries that are written to the IADS Logs.
Test Point Log Table - Contains all the Test Point entries that are written to the IADS Logs.
Threshold Log Table - Contains all the Threshold entries that are written to the IADS Logs.
Time Segment Log Table - Contains all the Time Segment entries that are written to the IADS
Logs.
User Validation Log Table- Contains IADS Validation errors.
Validation Log Table - Contains system validation errors.
Test Folder
Blob Definitions - Provides data structure details for a blob parameter.
Constants - For use in derived equations and the Action Object; returns the value for the
corresponding name in the table.
Data Storage Information - Not implemented.
Event Monitor Definitions - Defines setup information for the Event Monitor display.
ICAW Definitions - Defines setup information for the ICAW display.
Mission Attributes - Defines mission attribute information that is used directly in a display or
as a parameter.
Modal Definitions - Sets the range of frequency and damping and assigns the mode and
symmetry for each parameter.
Moving Map Overlays - Defines overlays for the Moving Map display.
Null Correction Info - Specifies the start and end times of the Null Bias calculation period for
each null group.
Parameter Alias - Aliases a parameter name in the data source.
Planned Flutter Test Points - Contains planned flutter test point information for automated
analysis.
Planned Loads Test Points - Contains planned loads test point information for automated
analysis.
Planned Test Points - Only test points that have been manually added to this table will be
available for selection.
Planned Test Points Ex "User Discipline" - Contains auxiliary test point information from the
TestPoint Import Wizard.

162
 IADS User Manual

Predefined Comments - Defines the comments for use in Event Markers.

System Parameter Defaults - Defines time and decom status parameters.
Table Filters - A list of all filters created using the Table Filter dialog.
TPP Definitions - Defines TPP parameters (for internal use only).
Unit Conversions - A predefined list of common unit conversions.
User Input Values - A list of all user input object output names (values) for use in the
GetUserInput function.
Groups Folder
Group Definitions - Not implemented.
Users - A list of all Users in the configuration file.
Systems Folder
These tables are for viewing purposes only and should not be edited by the user.
Classifications - Defines the entries in the security classification drop down list.
Current Test Point Choice - Displays the current test point choice.
File Search Path - The purpose of this tool is to search for a specified file using a logical
search.
System Values - For internal use only.

29.2. Configuration Tool Toolbars and Menus

Standard Toolbar Buttons
Save changes to the Paste
configuration file
Save changes to the open Undo changes to current table
table only
Prints the open table Redo last undo
Cut Sort Ascending
Copy Sort Descending
Data Toolbar Buttons
Import data into table Opens the IADS Validation dialog
Export data from table

Tools Toolbar Buttons

Opens the TMATS Import Create Desktop Summary Report
Utility
Global Parameter Replace Opens the Envelope Properties dialog
Create Mission Attributes Opens the Table Filter dialog
parameter
Status Bar - Displays the status bar at the bottom of the Configuration Tool Window

163
The Configuration Tool

Menu descriptions
File:
Save - Saves the current open table to all the workstations. See section 29.5 “Configuration
File Saves and Undo”.
Save All - Saves the entire Configuration File (all the tables) to all the workstations.
Save Private - Saves the current Configuration File to this workstation only (like a "Save As"
feature).
Import - Allows you to import an IADS Analysis Window, Desktop or a configuration
update.
Export - Allows you to export an IADS Analysis Window, Desktop or a configuration
update.
Print - Sends the current table to the printer
Exit - Closes the Configuration Tool
Edit:
Undo Last - Removes the last change to the current table.
Redo Last - Re-enters the last change to the current table
Undo All Changes - Removes all the changes to the current table since the last save.
Delete All Rows - Deletes all the rows in the current table.
Cut - Removes the selected text (from the entire table, columns, rows or cells).
Copy - Places a copy of the selected text in the clipboard (from the entire table, columns,
rows or cells).
Paste - Pastes the clipboard contents in a cell, column, row or table.
Find - Launches a dialog to allow you to search for items in a table.
Replace - Searches the table and replaces the entries.
Current Desktop - The options are to delete the current Desktop or edit its properties.
View:
Tree View - A hierarchical representation of the folders and files.
Edits Since Last Save - Highlights the rows that have had edits since the last save.
Use Inline AutoComplete - As you type in the DataSourceArgument cell, a list parameter
names in the PDT that closely match what you enter are displayed in a list box. If a
suggestion in the list matches your criteria for that field, click on it to enter it in the cell.
Prevent Duplicate Parameter Names - If this is checked, the duplicate parameter will be
renamed Copy(N)_Of_Parameter.
Warning Messages - Displays warning messages for: Invalid Derived Equation Warning,
Cell Value Type Mismatch and Mark Rows with Inactive Parameters and Show Warning
Dialog on IAP Edit. Warnings will be displayed that have a check mark next to them.
Toolbars - Toolbars that are currently displayed have a check mark next to them.

164
 IADS User Manual

Tools:
TMATS Import and Validation - Imports parameters from a standard IRIG 106-99. Populates
the configuration file with TMATS information to create a starting point towards building a
functional configuration file; or to validate/update an existing IADS configuration file.
Create Mission Attribute Parameters - Create a derived parameter from an existing Mission
Attribute.
Global Parameter Replace - Allows you to change a parameter name and have that change
applied in every display or table the parameter is present.
Parameter Selection Dialog - Automates the tedious task of entering lists of parameter
names; often needed for Data Group export.
TPP Parameter Rate Selection Dialog - Provides the user the option to set one or more TPP
parameters to Aperiodic (zero sample rate) or Periodic.
Function Lookup Dialog - Opens the dialog to lookup a derived function in IADS.
Desktop Summary Report - Use the Desktop Summary Report to list all the parameters that
are being used on a specific Desktop.
Parameter Usage Report - Opens the Parameter Usage Report to list all the IAP and TPP
parameters that are used in the entire configuration.
Validate Parameters and Displays - Opens the dialog to perform a Desktop Validation or
Parameter Defaults Validation.
TestPoint Import Wizard - Opens the Test Point Import Wizard.
Window:
Close - Closes active Table in Configuration File.
Close All - Closes all open tables in the Configuration File.
Arrange - Not implemented in this version.
Help: Configuration Tool - Opens IADS Help

29.3. Configuration Tool Right-Click Menu

To select right-click menu options:
1. Right-click on any table in the Configuration Tool.
2. On the pop-up menu click:
Cut - Removes the selected text, cell contents or row contents.
Copy - Saves a copy of the selected text, cell contents or row contents to the clipboard.
Paste - Replaces the contents of the selected text, cell contents or row contents to the
clipboard.
Insert Row - Inserts an empty row.
Above Selected - Inserts an empty row above the selected row.
Below Selected - Inserts an empty row below the selected row.
Clear Selection - Clears the contents of the cell.

165
 The Configuration Tool

Import - Opens a navigation box to allow you to choose a file to replace the current
table. Once the file is selected, the Table Import dialog will open.
Export - Copies the entire table or selection to a text file
Table - Exports the entire table to a text file.
Selection - Exports the selected rows or columns to a text file.
Import Equations - Finds and replaces only the derived equations for the defined
parameters. For example: ParamName = AB11111+10; the equation would be replaced for
"ParamName".
Go To Definition - Finds the definition of the parameter.
Debug Parameter - Opens the Parameter Analysis Tool with the selected parameter's
information.
Function Lookup Dialog - Opens the Derived Functions dialog.
Insert/Edit Comment - Allows you to type in a comment that will be displayed when the
cursor is lingered on the cell. A red triangle is placed in the corner of the cell that contains the
comment.
Remove Comment - Removes the comment assigned to the cell.

29.4. Configuration Tool Function and Shortcut Keys

Key Function
Ctrl+C Copy
Ctrl+End End of table
Ctrl+Home Top of table
Ctrl+Left Arrow Move left (must have a column or row selected)
Ctrl+PageUp/PageDown Cycle between tables (tabs at bottom of Config Tool)
Ctrl+Right Arrow Move right (must have a column or row selected)
Ctrl+Tab Cycles through the tabs in a dialog
Ctrl+V Paste
Ctrl+X Delete contents
Ctrl+Z Undo last action
Delete Delete the selected contents
Down Arrow Move down to next cell / in a cell with a drop down, cycles
down the list / if a row is selected, moves the table view down /
if a table in selected in the left window, moves down to the next
table
End Move to the end (must have column or row selected)
Enter Complete edit and select the cell below / Accept input to dialog
elements that have keyboard focus
Esc End edit / Closes an open dialog (i.e., Desktop Summary Report)
F3 Finds the next match in the 'Find and Replace' dialog
Home Move to the first column in the table (must have column or row
selected)

166
 IADS User Manual

Left Arrow Moves the table to the left (must have column or row selected)
Left Mouse Click+Shift Select all from last selection to current
Page Up Move up one screen
Page Down Move down one screen
Right Arrow Moves the table to the right (must have column or row selected)
Shift+Up Arrow Extend the selection up one row
Shift+Down Arrow Extend the selection down one row
Shift+Ctrl+Home Extend the selection to the first row
Shift+Ctrl+End Extend the selection to the last row
Shift+Tab Complete edit and select cell to the left
Spacebar Toggle checkbox selections in a dialog
Tab Complete edit and select cell to the right / Tabs to the next
element in the dialog
Up Arrow Move up to next cell / in a cell with a drop down, cycles up the
list / if a row is selected, moves the table view up / if a table in
selected in the left window, moves up to the next table

29.5. Configuration File Saves and Undo

In real time, it is recommended to delay saving large table changes, importing
Desktops/analysis windows for example, especially when you are doing something
significant, unless it is very important or until you find some downtime in the test. Small
items are okay, such as one or two lines of equation changes, event markers, analyses, etc.
In the control room, anytime a change is saved by a user, those changes are sent to everyone
in the room; the displays and windows do not update automatically. The updates are "lying in
wait" for the user to log out/in or click the Change Desktop Dashboard button to re-load the
Desktop to see the updates/changes. In other words, once UserA is running, some other user
cannot change UserA's configuration unless UserA logs out/in or re-loads the Desktop. For
example, UserA makes a change to parameter XYZ and saves the changes. The changes are
sent to the server, the server sends the changes to everyone in the room. UserB receives the
changes. UserB sees the changes in the Parameter Defaults table (automatically shows the
update), but UserB's parameter XYZ on their Stripchart is not changed (until re-load).
Another scenario. UserA imports a very large desktop DEF and saves. The updates are sent to
the server, and the server sends the updates to UserB who is on desktop DEF... UserB sees no
changes (unless they re-load their Desktop). See the pattern? Likewise, UserC gets the
desktop changes for DEF, but they are on desktop GHI and of course see no changes.. but if
the changes are large enough they will still see a stutter or delay. Bottom line is that everyone
gets every change, they might be delayed for that change, but it shouldn't affect their window
or parameters unless they re-load. The nulling system is an exception. Nulling changes are
applied automatically to the user's desktop. If multiple users change the same object, the last
person's change will 'win', similarly if different users change different aspects of the same
window, the result is a melding of the changes.
Inside the Logs folder in the "IADS Output Files" directory, there is a file called
"IadsClientLog.txt". That file should give you a good idea of what the users are doing at the
time. Look for a line that says "UserAction". If a user imports a desktop, saves a table,
changes an equation, etc it will have an entry with a time stamp.

167
 The Configuration Tool

To save all changes to the configuration file:

 Click the Save Config button on the Dashboard.
Note: This may require other users to click the Change Desktop button on the Dashboard
to update their Desktops/Analysis Windows to see the changes. They are not essentially
changing to another Desktop, but just clicking OK in the Change Desktop dialog (same
User/Desktop name) to re-load the Desktop and pick up the new changes.
- Or -

 In the Configuration Tool, click the Save Changes to All Tables button; or click the
File drop down menu > Save All.
To save changes to the current open table only:

 In the Configuration Tool, click the Save Changes to Current Table button; or
click the File drop down menu > Save.
To save private:
Saves changes temporarily to the current configuration and pushes changes to displays (at
your workstation only) until you click a permanent save option or save at log off.
 In the Configuration Tool, click the File drop down menu > Save Private.
To undo a change in the configuration tool:
1. Click the Configuration Tool Dashboard button.

2. Click the Undo button to remove any changes to the table since the last save.
- Or -
 Click Edit > Undo Last or Undo all Changes to remove the last updates.

29.6. Filtering Tables in the Configuration Tool

Filtering hides any rows in the table that do not meet the criteria you defined in a filter
created using the IADS Filter dialog.
Note: A table with an active filter will display the filter name next to the Filter button; if
no filter is applied, Not Filtered is displayed. Also, filtered results show the table row
numbers highlighted in blue.
To add a filter to a table:
1. In the Configuration Tool, click on the table of interest.
2. Click the drop down arrow next to the button in the Toolbar.
3. Select the desired filter.
To clear a filter from a table:
1. In the Configuration Tool, click on the table of interest.
2. Click the drop down arrow next to the Table Filter Dialog button in the Toolbar.
3. Click Not Filtered.
To create a filter:
1. In the Configuration Tool, click on the table of interest.

168
 IADS User Manual

2. Click the Table Filter Dialog button.

3. Click the Add button.

4. In the Filter dialog box, click a selection in the Keys list. The Keys list shows all of the
column headings in the current table.
5. Click an Operator button.
6. Click a selection in the Values list. The Values shows all of the options available for the
selected Key (column).
Note: For some queries there may be to many "values" to list. In this case you will need
to edit the query by hand after clicking the Add button. If you click on any text in the
Values field after selecting the Key and Operator, then Add, you will have a statement
you can edit.
To use a wild card, place asterisks around the value, for example *max* (see the picture
above).
7. Click Add. Click in the query to hand edit it if necessary.
8. To refine your search, repeat steps 3-5 as required by clicking And or Or to join
arguments.
9. Enter a unique filter name.
10. Click OK.
To edit a filter:
1. In the Configuration Tool, click on the table of interest.

2. Click the Table Filter Dialog button.

3. Select the name of the filter to edit.

4. Click the Edit button.

5. Edit the statement and click OK.
To delete a filter:
1. In the Configuration Tool, click on the table of interest.

2. Click the Table Filter Dialog button.

3. Select the name of the filter to delete.

4. Click the Delete button.

29.7. Searching for Items in the Configuration Tool

You can locate individual cells or entire rows within the configuration tool quickly by using
the Find function.
To find rows or cells in the configuration tool:
1. With the desired table open, click the Edit button at the top of the Configuration Tool
box.
2. Select Find from the menu.

169
 The Configuration Tool

3. Select the desired options within the Find dialog box and click the Find Next button.

To replace cells in the configuration tool:

1. With the desired table open, select the Edit button at the top of the Configuration
toolbox.
2. Select Replace from the menu.
To quickly sort data:
 With the desired table open, right-click the mouse while the cursor is in the column
heading to:

Resize All Columns - Resizes the entire column to the single largest cell entry within the
column.
Show/Hide Columns - Removes the column from your viewable area. To un-hide the
column, use your cursor to move the bars the separate the columns.
Sort Ascending - Sorts the contents of the column in alphabetical order from A to Z, thus
sorting the entire table by that columns entries.
Sort Descending - Sorts the contents of the column in alphabetical order from Z to A, thus
sorting the entire table by that columns entries.
Sub-Sort - When two or more columns are selected you can sub-sort ascending or
descending.
Freeze Column - Allows you to move the rest of the table right and left while using the
frozen column as a label marker.
Read Only - Will keep you from inadvertently putting entries into that columns cells.

29.8. Using the File Search Path Table

The purpose of this tool is to setup IADS to look in a particular location for external files. If a
control points to an external file and the external file exists at the exact location specified by
the control, then that file is used. If the specified file does not exist at that location, the File
Search Path table will execute and search for the specified file in locations you setup in the
table. Each entry in the table is read from top to bottom, and files are searched for in the
specified locations in that order. If the file isn't found at any of the specified locations, a last
effort will be made to extract if from the Z-Ball (if a Z-Ball is running). If that fails, the
control will be loaded without the external file.

170
IADS User Manual

To use the File Search Path table:

1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Open the System folder, then click FileSearchPath.
3. Select a File Path Type from the drop down menu:
FileSystem - Search for files at a particular location on the local hard disk or network
drive; this function does not search recursively. The FilePathArgument must contain the
exact path to the file location. Do not include the file name in the path, the tool will
search for the file name specified in the control. For example: D:\PostTestData\TestSet
GlobalInputDir - Search for files in the global input directory. The directory with your
IADS data files and config file. No FilePathArgument necessary.
Z-Ball - Search for files in the Z-Ball (if you are running a Z-Ball). No
FilePathArgument necessary.
EnvVariable - Search for files at the path defined by an environment variable (right-
click on My Computer > Properties > Advanced tab > Environment Variables button). In
the File Path Argument enter the Variable name; not the value (path). If multiple paths
are defined by the specified environment variable, then all of those paths are searched.
4. Add an entry in the FilePathArgument column if applicable.
5. Save the table.
6. Click the Change Desktop button on the Dashboard, then the Change button in the
dialog to force the changes. This will just change your Desktop back to itself.

171
 The Configuration Tool

29.9. The Blob Definitions Table

The purpose of the Blob Definitions table is to provide data structure details for a Blob
parameter including field names, field sizes in bits and field data formats. A single IAP
derived parameter is produced for each Blob parameter and made available in the Parameter
Defaults Table for use with IADS. (Currently, the only display in IADS that supports Blob
parameters is the Blob Viewer.)

To view the Blob Definitions Table:

1. Click the Configuration button on the Dashboard.
2. Click the Test folder, Blob Definitions table.
Note: The Property Bag column is used to identify data source specific attributes, for
example, unique data formats specific to the data source type.

29.10. Parameter Aliasing

Note: Currently, parameter aliasing is supported for IADS Custom, MCS, Omega, System
550 and Vista data sources.
Parameter aliasing can be used to create new IADS parameter names, to replace existing data
source (front end) names. Parameters in the Parameter Defaults table will be compared
against the data source name in the Parameter Alias table. If a match is found, the alias
parameter name (IADS name) will be used for the enable request to the TPP and will be the
data that the display parameter uses. The parameter data files will exist on the IADS Server
with the new parameter alias names.
The Parameter Alias table can be setup in a real time or a post test environment. The process
of aliasing those parameters however takes place on the IADS Server in real time on startup
only. The Operator Console enables parameter aliasing to run with a configuration file that
already has Parameter Alias table information. All other IADS parameters (those that are not
aliased) do not have to be in the Parameter Alias table in order to be successfully enabled.

172
IADS User Manual

To setup the Parameter Alias table:

1. Click the Configuration button on the Dashboard.
2. Click the Test folder > Parameter Alias table.
3. In the first column enter the IADS parameter name (same name in the Parameter Defaults
table).
4. In the second column enter the corresponding TPP parameter name (the parameter name
as represented in the data source parameter database.
5. Repeat steps 3 & 4 for all required parameter aliasing.
6. Save the table.
7. Log off from IADS.
Note: Make sure the parameter names in the Parameter Defaults table, are the same as aliased
parameter names (IadsName) in the Parameter Alias table; not the DataSourceName.
To view the data source name of a parameter in an IADS display (alias quick look):
 Right-click in the display with the aliased parameter(s) > Go To Definition. The IADS
name is displayed with the corresponding data source name in parenthesize; as defined in
the Parameter Alias table: Configuration Tool > Test folder > Parameter Alias table.
To configure the Operator Console to enable parameter aliasing:
1. At the Operator Console, click the Settings menu > Access Advanced Property Sheet
Items to make available the property.
2. Right-click on the IADS Server > Properties. You can only change server properties
prior to starting the IADS Server. The property sheet is "view only" when the server is
running.
3. Set the Parameter Alias Enabled property to True.
4. Start the IADS Server.
Note: Parameter aliasing occurs in real time only; the Operator Console will need to be
started using the modified configuration file with the Parameter Alias table information.
When the IADS Server is started, the system will alias and store the data files. The System
Values table will show the ParameterAliasState as either OFF or ON.

173
 The Configuration Tool

29.11. IADS Parameter Analysis Tool (IPAT) - Debugging a Parameter

The IPAT tool can be used to evaluate changes to a parameter's equation or filtering before it
is propagated to other users. Once it is functioning as expected, the changes can be applied to
the configuration directly using the Tool.
Note: An IAP parameter's value can be viewed in the tool but the IAP parameter itself cannot
be debugged or edited at this time.
To open the IADS Parameter Analysis Tool to debug a parameter:
 In a display, right-click > Debug Parameter > Parameter Name. Press the Play
button in the IPAT Tool.
 In the Parameter Tool, right-click on the parameter > Debug Parameter. Press the Play
button in the IPAT Tool.
 In the Parameter Defaults Table, right-click on a cell in the row of the parameter of
interest (or select an individual parameter name in a cell) > Debug Parameter. Press the
Play button in the IPAT Tool.
Note: The IPAT tool will come up "paused" at the Current Time. To start the tool press the
Play button.
Root Parameter

Data Format: The format of the data values displayed in the tool. This field is editable and
changes are applied to the tool by clicking the Apply button.
Time
Current Time - The Dashboard (server) time that all parameter values are evaluated.
Go To Time Button - Enter a specific time at which parameter values are evaluated.
Drive Current Desktop - Syncs the Desktop time (and the time of all Analysis Windows in
the Desktop) to the time in the tool.
Arrow Buttons / Scrollbar - Retract, pause or advance the time; this can also be
accomplished using the scrollbar. Note: Modifying time will pause the Analysis Window if
the Drive Current Desktop check box is selected.

174
IADS User Manual

Parameter Info Tab

Parameter right-click menu:

 Right-click on a parameter in the tree:
Go to Definition - Opens the Configuration Tool Parameter Defaults Table at the selected
parameter.
Debug Parameter - Clears the tree to only show the applicable parameter for debugging
purposes. To get back to the previous parameter, click the Recent Parameters drop down (at
the bottom of the dialog) and select it.
Find First Error - Highlights the branch containing the first error found in a derived
equation.
Find Parent - Highlights the parent of the selected node. Useful in large complicated derived
parameters.
Verify TPP Data - Verifies the data delivery from the upstream data source.
Parameter Properties
Derived Parameter Properties:
All derived parameter property information in this dialog is derived from the Parameter
Defaults Table.
Tpp Parameter Properties:
Parameter - The parameter name.
Data Source TagId - The Id the data source uses to identify the parameter. Depending on the
data source, this Id may be what IADS maintains as its TagId to identify packets coming from
the front-end, or it could be overwritten.
TagId - Identifies the parameter in the communication between IADS and the data source.
This is the value is the Tag field of the Tpp Definitions Table in the Configuration Tool.

175
The Configuration Tool

Update Rate - Same as DataSourceSampleRate. This is the value in the UpdateRate field of
the Parameter Defaults Table.
Data Source Sample Rate - Same as the Data Source Sample Rate.
Aperiodic Flag - 0 false, 1 true.
Parameter Type - The data source parameter format type: integer, discrete, float, long,
ulong, double, ascii or blob.
Data Source Number - The data source stream number.
Data Source Name - The data source name.
Data Size - The size of the parameter in 8-bit bytes.
Parameter Category - Data, Time, etc...
Start Time - Start time in milliseconds.
To modify an equation in the parameter tree:
1. Click on an equation in the parameter tree. The Selected Equation field updates to show
the equation.
2. Make your changes to the equation in the Selected Equation field.
3. Click the Update button to apply those changes to the parameter tree.
4. Click OK to close the tool and apply all changes to the configuration file.
To add parameters to the Watch List:
1. Click the Pause button in the tool.
2. Click in the Parameter field and enter the parameter name.
3. Click into another cell in the list or press the Enter key to accept the entry.
4. Click the Play button to see the values update.
To view updates to the root parameter in a Stripchart:
1. Make the desired changes on the Parameter Info and Data Correction tabs.
2. Click the Time History tab.
3. Click the Play button to start the Stripchart.

To apply data corrections or thresholds:

1. In the Parameter Analysis Tool dialog, click the applicable tab.
2. Enable data correction options by selecting the check boxes. All options are initialized
with the corresponding values from the root parameter’s entry in the Parameter Defaults
table.

176
 IADS User Manual

3. Click the Update button.

4. To save your changes to the configuration file click the OK button.
To Generate an Analysis Window (Stripchart for each parameter in the equation):
1. Click the Generate AW button.
2. Check the Drive Current Desktop option to start/stop the generated Analysis Window
using the VCR controls in the IPAT tool (this will affect all Analysis Windows on the
current Desktop).
Note: The Generate AW button is disabled if the root parameter is a TPP parameter.

29.12. Telemetry Attributes Transfer Standard (TMATS)

The purpose of TMATS is to provide a common definition and format to facilitate the
transfer of information between the user and the test range. The IADS TMATS Import and
Validation option imports parameters from a standard IRIG 106-09 file into IADS. The
purpose of the TMATS validation in the IADS Configuration Tool is to populate a
configuration file with the TMATS information to create a starting point towards building a
functional configuration file or to validate/update an existing IADS configuration file.

To open the TMATS file:

1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Click the Tools drop down menu > TMATS Import and Validation.
3. In the TMATS Import Utility dialog, click the File > Open to select the TMATS file.
4. Select a range of parameters from the list, or click the select all button.
5. Click the Next button.
6. Set the options in the TMATS Defaults dialog.
7. Click Apply.
8. Click Done.

177
The Configuration Tool

Dialog Descriptions
Update entries already existing in IADS with information from - If checked, IADS entries
with matching measurement names may be updated with information either from the TMATS
file, or from selected default settings. If this option is not checked, matching entries will not
be altered.
Add new entries (not found within IADS) with the following settings - If checked, new
rows will be added to IADS when no matching measurement name is found. You may fill in
the new rows with select information such as ParameterDefaults name, Group name, and
Subgroup name. Also, you have the option to make the Group active, and fill those cells that
do not contain TMATS specific information with default values.
Parameter Defaults - Identifies a set of parameters. If this "SetName" is set to True in the
IsActive cell of the Parameter Defaults State Table, all parameters that belong to this set will
be available for selection in the Parameter Tool.
If you are importing parameter default information, such as an excel file, check to see that the
ParameterDefaults cell naming convention(s) are the same as you are currently using in
IADS, or add the new name to the Parameter Defaults State table and set to True (save table).
Parameter Group and SubGroup - The Parameter Tool contains all of the parameters you
have defined here; organizing them by parameter group, for example, A/C STATE; and more
specifically subgroup, such as FQSC/VMS.
Make this new group active - Checking this box will not only add the parameters to the
parameter defaults table, but will also make them available for immediate use.
Fill new rows using defaults - Checking this box will use default values in the cells within
the parameter defaults table. If you uncheck the box the cells will remain empty
Create derived parameters that do EU conversion - Engineering Unit conversion is
usually performed by the Telemetry Pre Processor (TPP). If you require IADS to do it, this
option can be used to create derived parameters for these data conversion types:
1. Pair Sets: Data from TMATS is used to create a linear interpolation equation.
2. Coefficients: Data from TMATS is used to create a univariate polynomial equation.
Newly created derived parameters will be identified with the measurement name from the
TMATS file. Unique names for TPP entries made from the same TMATS file can be created
by appending or pre-pending a sub-string to the measurement name. It is this name that will
be used to build the derived equations.

178
 IADS User Manual

29.13. Global Parameter Replace

The tool servers two purposes. The first is to rename all instances of an existing parameter.
Changes are applied to every instance of the parameter in tables and displays, much like a
Global Search and Replace. The option is useful to modify an existing config file for your
own use. This tool can also be used to set the output of a TPP parameter to a set value or
equation. The option to Undo is made available at the beginning of the process, and is
necessary to return a TPP parameter to its original state.

To replace the name of a single parameter:

1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Click the Tools menu > Global Parameter Replace > New Replace.
3. If you think you may need to undo these changes at a later time click Yes.
4. Click I want to rename all instances of existing parameter(s).
5. Enter the name of the Current Parameter.
6. Enter the New name.
7. Click OK to reload the Desktop and apply changes.
To replace the value of a parameter:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Click the Tools drop down menu > Global Parameter Replace > New Replace.
3. If you think you may need to undo these changes at a later time, click Yes.
4. Select I want to set an equation or value as the output of existing parameter(s).
5. Click the Example drop down to view pre-defined equations.
6. Enter the desired equation or select a pre-predefined equation and click the Apply button.
7. Click OK.
To replace a single parameter with a new name:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Click the Tools drop down menu > Global Parameter Replace > New Replace.
3. If you think you may need to undo these changes at a later time, click Yes.
4. Select I want to rename all instances of existing parameter(s).
5. Enter the Current Parameter.

179
 The Configuration Tool

6. Enter the New name.

7. Click OK to reload the Desktop and apply changes.
To replace multiple parameters:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Click the Tools drop down menu > Global Parameter Replace > New Replace.
3. If you think you may need to undo these changes at a later time, click Yes.
4. Select I want to rename all instances of existing parameter(s).
5. At the Input file location, click the button to navigate to the csv file, or type in the file
path. Only the items specified in the file will be changed in the Parameter Defaults table.
The file syntax is as follows: Original Parameter Name, New Parameter Name (in pairs).
6. Click OK to reload the Desktop and apply changes.
To undo the parameter replace:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Click the Tools drop down > Global Parameter Replace > Undo Previous.
3. Select the date/time of the replacement.
4. Click OK in the dialog.
5. Click OK to reload the Desktop and apply changes.
To view the replacement log:
1. Click on the Configuration dashboard button.
2. Click on the Logs folder and select Replace Parameter Log.

29.14. Mission Attributes

IADS uses mission attribute information in displays and also as a parameter if desired. For
example, you can add an entry for wind speed and then use that entry as part of a derived
equation. This information can be entered at any time during the test at the Operator Console
or an IADS Client.
To enter mission attribute information at the Operator Console:

1. At the Operator Console Toolbar click the Modify Mission Attributes button.
Note: This button will be grayed out if the Start Server and Start Data Gather have not
been activated (first two buttons on the toolbar - top left). You can also use the Edit menu
to bring up the dialog.
2. In the Flight Info box, type in the Flight Number, Tail Number and Test Number.
3. Select OK.
- Or -
1. Click the Edit menu button and select Mission Attributes.
2. Edit or add the entries in the dialog.
3. Click OK.
To create a Mission Attributes derived parameter in IADS:
1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.

180
IADS User Manual

2. Open the Test folder, click Mission Attributes.

3. Input an entry in the table
4. Click a Save option.
5. Click on the row number of the desired mission attribute (the entire line should be
highlighted).
6. At the Configuration Tool Toolbar click Tools > Create Mission Attribute Parameters.
7. Click OK. Check the Parameter Defaults Table to view the new mission attribute
parameters.
To verify a Mission Attributes derived parameter in IADS:
1. Create a Text display.
2. On the Dashboard, click the Parameter Tool button.
3. Click the Mission Group folder > Attributes Subgroup folder.
4. Drag the mission attribute parameter into a TEXT display and drop onto the Text
property at the top.
To add test, tail, flight, flight date, or today's date to a label display:
1. Create a Label display.
2. Right-click > Edit Label.
3. Type in a script: $Test$ $Tail$ $Flight$ $FlightDate$ $Today'sDate$
4. Press Enter; the data is dynamically entered with information from the Configuration
Tool Mission Attributes table.
To use the GetMissionAttribute function:
1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder, click Parameter Defaults.
3. Copy and paste an existing parameter.
4. In the Parameter column, enter a unique name for the new derived parameter (Invalid
parameter name characters are \ / : * ? " < > | and no leading or trailing spaces, or tabs
allowed).
5. In the Data Source Type column, select Derived.
6. In the Data Source Argument column enter: GetMissionAttribute("AttributeName")
for example, GetMissionAttribute("ProjectID")
7. Enter/change information in the remaining columns as required.
8. Click a Save option.
To edit the Mission Attributes table in the Configuration File:
1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Click the Test folder, Mission Attributes table.
3. Input an entry in the table
4. Click a Save option.

181
 The Configuration Tool

29.15. The Parameter Selection Tool

The Parameter Selection Dialog automates the tedious task of hand entering lists of parameter
names into various IADS tables and dialogs, for example, the Parameters field of the
DataGroups table. You can choose the parameters from a list of all the active parameters; this
subset will be copied into Windows Clipboard for pasting, or in some cases it is automatically
copied into the active dialog or window. This dialog can be opened from several IADS
controls, or directly from the Configuration Tool.

To open the Parameter Selection Dialog:

1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Click the Tools drop down menu > Parameter Selection Dialog.
3. Use the Group and Subgroup drop-down menus to define parameters for selection.
4. Select one or more (hold down Shift key) parameters to copy.
5. Click the right arrow button.
6. Repeat steps 3-5 to add parameters from multiple groups/subgroups.
7. Click OK.
8. Paste into the IADS table, Notepad, etc. (if this is not accomplished automatically).
To search for a parameter name in the dialog:
1. Define the parameter Group and Subgroup using the drop-down menus.
2. Click anywhere in the left pane and type one or more letters of the parameter name.

182
 IADS User Manual

29.16. TPP Parameter Rate Selection Dialog

Provides the user the option to set one or more TPP parameters to Aperiodic (zero sample
rate) or Periodic. Not applicable to derived parameters.
Note: Excessive use of aperiodic parameters will adversely impact the performance of the
system.

The system maintains the Rate=0 Data Source Argument convention as a method for
identifying a TPP parameter as aperiodic. The picture below of the Parameter Defaults Table
shows those TPP parameters that are aperiodic with the Rate=0 Data Source Argument
(outlined in yellow). If an aperiodic parameter is changed back to periodic, the Data Source
Argument cell will update with the sample rate you entered but remain in a grayed out state
(the original/default sample rate still displayed in the Update Rate cell). If the parameter is
reset to its default state in the tool, the Data Source Argument cell will be cleared.

Note: A parameter will not be processed as aperiodic until after the Parameter Defaults Table
is saved in the Configuration Tool and the IADS Server is restarted.
To change a parameter's periodicity to aperiodic:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Click the Tools drop down menu > TPP Parameter Selection Rate Dialog ...
3. Search for Parameters as you type in the Parameter Name field, or browse through
existing Parameter Defaults Groups to define your parameter selection.

183
 The Configuration Tool

4. Hold down the Ctrl key to select more than one parameter in the Parameters list, or click
the Select All button.
5. Click the Make Aperiodic selection.
6. Click OK.
7. Click a save option in the Configuration Tool.
8. Log Off IADS and restart the IADS Server.
To change a parameter(s) periodicity to periodic:
1. Repeat steps 1-4 above.
2. Click the Make Periodic selection.
3. Enter a sample Rate.
4. Click OK.
5. Click a save option in the Configuration Tool.
6. Log Off IADS and restart the IADS Server.
To reset a parameter(s) default periodicity:
1. Repeat steps 1-4 in the first set of instructions.
2. Click the Reset All to Defaults selection.
3. Click OK.
4. Click a save option in the Configuration Tool.
5. Log Off IADS and restart the IADS Server.

29.17. Derived Function Lookup Tool

The purpose of the tool is to lookup a derived function in IADS.

To lookup a derived function:

1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Click the Tools drop down menu > Function Lookup Dialog (Shift+F3).
3. Click on a Function Category on the left side of the tool. To view the entire list of
functions click All.

184
 IADS User Manual

4. Click on a Function Name on the right side of the tool to view the return type (if
applicable) and the derived function syntax.
5. Click Copy to copy the Function Name to the Clipboard.
6. Click OK to close the dialog.
Table of Functions
Note: Click on a Function Category or Function Name in the tool and use the up and down
arrow keys to scroll through the list. You can also press a keyboard key to jump to that letter
in the list.

29.18. Desktop Summary Report

To view a desktop summary report:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.

2. Click the Desktop Summary Report button or click the Tools drop down menu >
Desktop Summary Report.
3. Click the drop down arrow to select the desired Desktop.
4. Click OK.
To identify a display in the report:
1. Click on the cell of interest.
2. Right-click > Highlight this Display. The display border will highlight in red.
3. Click on the display to clear the highlight.

29.19. Parameter Usage Report

This report lists the parameters by type (TPP or IAP) and where they are used in IADS; data
displays, Active X Controls, Data Groups, ICAW, Event Monitor and Envelopes.
To view a parameter usage report:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Click the Tools drop down menu > Parameter Usage Report.
3. Click a tab at the bottom of the dialog to view parameters of that type.

29.20. IADS Validation Dialog

The IADS validation now has two distinct components: Desktop Validation and Parameter
Defaults Validation.
Desktop Validation focuses on the displays in the Analysis Windows of a particular Desktop.
The process will check for unregistered or invalid ActiveX controls, verity data and check
displays for missing parameters and automatically recover them (if they are derived
parameters. Recovered parameters will be added back to the Parameter Defaults table (PDT)
under the ParameterDefaults "Recovered". This can occur when a derived parameter is
deleted from the PDT but still exists in a display (data is still displayed but you cannot find
the parameter in the PDT). The results of the validation are written to the User Validation
Log.
The Parameter Defaults validation process examines the Parameter Defaults Table (PDT) and
flags invalid derived equations, invalid IAPs and TPP parameters with no data. The results

185
The Configuration Tool

are displayed graphically in the PDT with invalid entries highlighted in red; no results are
written to a log. An automatic filter (Failed Validation) is set when you run the Desktop
validation and only those parameters with errors are displayed. Clicking on a parameter with
an invalid entry will display the error at the bottom of the screen in the status bar area.
Note: While Desktop Validation performs the same in both real time and playback
operations, there is a difference in the Parameter Defaults Validation. In real time, the
Parameter Defaults Table is validated by the IADS Server at startup and errors are posted to
the Validation Log (not to be confused with the User Validation Log).

To perform IADS validation:

1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.

2. Click the Validation Dialog button on the Toolbar.

3. Click the Parameter Defaults Validation or Desktop Validation tab.
4. Select the desired options.
5. Click Apply. A Parameter Defaults Validation will open the Parameter Defaults Table
and show only those parameters that failed validation. A Desktop Validation will open
the User Validation Log and show error details.
To clear the Failed Validation filter in the Parameter Defaults Table:
1. Click the drop down arrow next to the Table Filter Dialog button in the Toolbar. If
the binoculars (Toolbar) is not visible, go to View > Toolbars, and select the Tools
Toolbar to make it available.
2. Click Not Filtered.
To clear existing entries in the User Validation Log before validation:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.

2. Click the Validation Dialog button on the Toolbar.

3. Check the Clear the log table before validation option.
4. Click OK.

186
30. Test Points
30.1. Test Points
Test points are generally used to define events based on flight variable criteria and perform
actions at the start or end of the events. Test points can be identified by Test Point ID,
maneuver, or description. The system allows you to auto-stop the test point after a defined
number of seconds, or you can manually start and stop the test point.
Only test points that have been manually added to the Planned Test Points table within the
Configuration File, will be available for selection. If you plan to do Automated Analysis, the
Planned Flutter and Planned Loads Test Point tables must also be populated.
To add test points to the Planned Test Points table:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Double-click on Test to open the folder.
3. Click on PlannedTestPoints to open the table.
4. Right click in the table > Import.
5. In the directory, navigate to the csv file of interest and select it.
6. Click Open.
7. Preview the layout of the test point information. If row one contains header information,
click the arrow Read from file beginning at line to 2.
8. Click Replace existing entries or Append to exiting entries (in table).
9. Click OK.
10. Review the import information in the table.
11. Save the table.
Note: The Test Point list in the drop down menu on the Dashboard (when TestPoint
Identification Type is set) can be filtered by Group and SubGroup disciplines. Verify the
information is correct in the Group and SubGroup columns in the Planned Test Points table.
To view the Test Point list on the Dashboard:
 On the Dashboard, right click on Test Point > TestPoint Identification Type > select an
option other than “None”. If the list appears to blank, verify the TestPoint, Description
and Maneuver (Identification type) information is in the Planned Test Points table.

To filter the test points in the list:

1. On the Dashboard, click the Iads Logs button.
2. Click the Test Points tab. If the log is empty, click the Start Test Point button on and
off once to place an entry in the log. Your Group and SubGroup information is displayed.

3. Click the Log Filter Dialog button.

4. Click the Group key = your "Group" and then the Add button and/or click the SubGroup
key = your "SubGroup" and then the Add button.

187
 Test Points

5. Click OK.
6. Click the Save button in the IADS Logs.
7. On the Dashboard, right click on the Test Point button > Drop Down Settings > Limit
items by TestPointLog View Query.
To change test points:
1. Click the drop-down arrow above the Start Test Point button on the Dashboard.
2. Click on the desired test point.
To start and stop a test point:
 Click the Start Test Point/Stop Test Point toggle button on the Dashboard.
- Or -
1. Right-click on the Start Test Point button.
2. Click on Use Middle Button to Start/Stop.

30.2. Test Point Right-click Menu

To select right-click menu options:

1. Right-click on the Start Test Point button.
2. On the pop-up menu click:
Test Point Identification Type - Select TestPointId, Maneuver, Description or None.
Test Point Auto Stop - Select a pre-defined length of time or click User Defined.
Test Point Log Settings:
Auto Complete Log Entry if Test Point Known - When a test point is set the IADS Log will
update with all the known information (defined in the Planned Test Point table within the
Configuration).
Auto Complete Log Entry if Description Known - If you identify the test point by description
(and the description is unique) the IADS Log will update with all the known information
(defined in the Planned Test Point table within the Configuration).
Limit Test Point List in Log by Maneuver - If the maneuver is known in the log, the drop
down list will be limited by those test points. For example, you can have 100 entries in your
Planned Test Point table, but only those test points that have a maneuver associated with
them will be available in the drop down.
Drop Down Settings:
Allow typing in drop-down - Clears the current test point and allows you to type in the text
box. (Entered test points are saved to the Planned Test Point table
Alphabetize Drop Down- Resorts the drop-down list alphabetically.

188
IADS User Manual

Limit Items by TestPointLog ViewQuery - Because the test point table is shared by all users,
filtering the table allows you to see only your Desktop "group". If no Desktop group is
defined, all the available test points will appear in the drop down menu. To use this feature,
first you must create a bogus test point (you do this by clicking the start/stop test point
dashboard button), open the IADS Logs and use the Log Filter dialog to display only your
"group", save the change and the drop down will now contain only the entries from your
"group".
Actions on Start:
Reset Peaks - Resets all peaks holds on the window.
Reset Frequency Averaging - Restarts the Frequency Averaging for all Frequency Plots on
the Analysis Window.
Reset Derived Parameters - Starts re-calculation derived parameters and resets the max
values.
Actions on Stop:
Execute Macro - Calculate Derived, Linear Regression, Wind Calibration.
Data Export - Exports parameters automatically to commercial applications. Parameters
must be defined in the Data Groups table in the Configuration file > Data Groups folder.
Export to CSV File - Exports the predefined data groups to a comma delimited file. To set up
the data groups, click on the Configuration dashboard button, click on the Data folder and
click on the Data Groups table. If your group and subgroup are not defined within the Data
Groups table, all the export files will be available.
Export to Excel - Exports the predefined data groups to a Excel file. To set up the data
groups, click on the Configuration dashboard button, click on the Data folder and click on the
Data Groups table. If your group and subgroup are not defined within the Data Groups table,
all the export files will be available.
Export to Matlab - Exports the predefined data groups to a Matlab. If Matlab is not installed,
the file will be exported to a .mat file. To set up the data groups, click on the Configuration
dashboard button, click on the Data folder and click on the Data Groups table. If your group
and subgroup are not defined within the Data Groups table, all the export files will be
available.
Increment Drop Down - Automatically selects the next test point in the drop-down list. To
override the "auto" increment feature, hold down the Ctrl key while clicking the Start Test
Point button.
Pause Analysis Window - The Analysis Window will stop scrolling data when the test point is
stopped.
Print Analysis Window - Sends a job to the printer.
Freeze Peaks - Freezes all peaks in Frequency Plots.
Capture Max %LL - The Load Limit value is written to the IADS Log (a Loads Test Point
must be set).
Group Settings: (This is not a filtering mechanism. See Drop Down Settings > Limit items
by TestPointLog View Query above.)
Define my Discipline as: Select My User Group or My User SubGroup as your discipline
description (same Group and SubGroup names as defined in the Desktops Table).

189
 Test Points

Allow Actions to be Triggered by my Discipline - Allows anyone within the same discipline
(as defined above) to trigger an action remotely as a result of a test point being set.
Allow Drop Down to be set by my Discipline - Sets the current test point choice in the drop
down list for (whichever is selected by the user) for everybody logged in with the same
discipline (same user Group and Subgroup). A Test Point Identification Type other than None
must be selected. Based on the CurrentTestPointChoice field in the CurrentTestPointChoice
table in the Configuration Tool.
Ignore Test Points Initiated by Other Disciplines (default is off/unchecked) - Allows multiple
disciplines to start test points that overlap in time. For example, if both Loads and FQ
Desktops have this option selected, each group can start and stop test points independently
from the other group. If the Loads group starts a test point, and then subsequently the FQ
group starts a test point, each will run until stopped by their own group; The FQ group cannot
stop the Loads test point and vice versa. The Test Points log will show ALL the test point
entries (unless filtered).
Use Middle Mouse Button to Start/Stop - If selected uses the middle mouse button to start
and stop test points (cursor must be in the Analysis Window).

30.3. Test Point Export Dialog

Test Point data can be exported directly from an IADS Log, by row, into a csv file or excel.

To export specific test point data:

1. On the Dashboard, click the IADS Logs button.
2. Click the Test Points tab.
3. Click on one or more rows containing (click on the row number) the test points to export
(hold down the Ctrl key to select multiple rows).

4. At the top of the IADS Logs dialog box, click the Export Selected Rows button.
5. In the Test Point Export Dialog, click the Data Group drop down to select one.
6. Click the Export Type drop down to select one.
7. Click the Browse Button to select a destination directory.
8. Click the Export button.
Note: If duplicate test points exist in the log, only the last time slice will be exported. IADS
assumes each Test Point name is unique.

190
 IADS User Manual

30.4. Test Data Request (TDR) Dialog

Transfers the selected Test Points (or Event Markers) rows to a dialog which then makes
them available to outside applications. For example, if you are interested in obtaining post
test data based on time slices, you can use this dialog to create the list you would submit as
part of the data request. This listing can also be saved in Excel.

To use the TDR Dialog:

1. Set Test Points or mark Event Markers.
2. Click Iads Logs on the Dashboard.
3. Click the Test Point tab.
4. Select the desired rows. To select the entire row, click the row number, hold down the
Ctrl/Shift key to select multiple rows.

5. Click the Toolbar button.

6. Use the TDR Dialog to edit/export the data.
Dialog Descriptions:
Title - Enter a title for the report.
Flight Date, Pilot, OFP, Form-F, Configuration - These text fields can be filled in by right-
clicking on the dashboard IRIG time and clicking Flight Information.
Add \ Edit Time Slice - The first drop down represents the Julian date (001-365) and the
next spin box represents hours, minutes and seconds.
TestPoint - Select the desired test point.
Description - The description of the test point. This information is generated from the
Planned Test Point Table in the configuration file.
Valid Times - Not Implemented
Re-sequence - This button updates the Test Point table if the start/stop times are changed.

191
 Test Points

30.5. Test Point Import Wizard - PlannedTestPointsEx(UserName) Table

The purpose of the wizard is to import planned test point auxiliary information to a test point
such as flight conditions, aircraft configuration, and predicted results. Allows multiple
disciplines/groups to have their own separate table to include any piece of information related
to a Test Point/Flight Card. Information imported using the wizard is saved to an entirely new
table PlannedTestPointsExUserGroup in the Configuration Tool.
Using the derived parameter GetTestPointInfoEx function, you can populate your displays
and other functions with vital test point information pertaining to the currently active Test
Point.

To import auxiliary test point information into the PlannedTestPointsExUserGroup

table:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Click the Tools drop down menu > Test Point Import Wizard...
3. Select a User Discipline from the drop down menu and click Next.
4. Select the CSV file to import and click Next. Note: The first column name in the CSV
file must be defined as "TestPoint".
5. Click Finish.
Note: It may be necessary to copy some data (columns) from the PlannedTestPoints table
into your new PlannedTestPointsEx table.
To create a GetTestPointInfoEx derived parameter:
1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. Copy and paste an existing parameter.
4. In the Parameter column, enter a unique name for the new derived parameter, for
example: GetTestPointInfoEx
5. In the Data Source Type column, select Derived.

192
 IADS User Manual

6. In the Data Source Argument column enter: GetTestPointInfoEx("UserGroup",

"ColumnName", ValueToReturnIfNotExists) for example:
GetTestPointInfoEx("Loads", "N", 0)
7. Enter/change information in the remaining columns as required.
8. Click a Save option.
Note: Set the derived parameter's ParamType to ascii if you are retrieving ascii data.

To use the GetTestPointInfoEx derived function to retrieve information in the table:

1. Drop the new GetTestPointInfoEx derived parameter into a display (see example below).
2. Click the Test Point drop down arrow to select the desired test point. In this example, the
value that will be displayed will be at: ColumnName "N" and selected TestPoint "4.3".

Troubleshooting
 The value in the display does not update when you select a different test point? Solution:
Open the CurrentTestPointChoice table in the System directory of the Configuration
Tool. Delete all entries and save the table.

30.6. Automated Time Domain Analysis Overview

The Flutter Excitation System Automated Analysis (FESAA) is used to automatically extract
frequency and damping results from the time domain data output of a Flutter Excitation
System (FES) installed on a test vehicle. The primary purpose of the FESAA tool is to
increase efficiency for test point clearance during flutter testing. Since most FES systems are
unique, customer specific derived parameters will need to be created in order to use this
capability. The end user will need to decide if the setup time required to setup the FESAA
processing is necessary given the number of flutter test points to clear.
The FESAA calculates frequency and damping from multiple Stripcharts during real time and
playback. The system does the point selection automatically, filters the data of interest and
presents the frequency and damping results. During real time operation or in playback mode
the FESAA is a background task that looks for a trigger to begin operation. Once the trigger
occurs, the FESAA automatically performs the point selection to form the data range, adjust
filter settings and performs the frequency and damping calculations using either the
Logarithmic Decrement (LogDec) technique or a Pseudo Random Decrement - LogDec
(PRD-LD) for burst mode. Finally, the results are presented on the displays and saved to the
results in the Analysis Log.

193
 Test Points

The FES Automated Analysis is accomplished as follows:

1. Enter the required information in the FES Parameters Table.
2. Add FES Output parameters to the Parameter Defaults Table.
3. Build displays for FES check-out and real time operation.
4. Use the Stripchart property dialog to setup the FES parameters.
5. Set the FES and Automated Analysis settings using the Dashboard FES Panel right-click
menu options.
6. Monitor displays and computational results.

30.7. Flutter Excitation System (FES) Parameters

The FES Automated Analysis (FESAA) requires certain parameters in IADS in order to
control its processing to match the desired computational analysis. The FES Parameters
Table, located in the Configuration Tool under the Automation tab, is required in order to
match required FES Output data, such as the “Arm” parameter with the actual parameter
name as defined in the Parameter Defaults Table. The following is an example of this table
with all the required FES Output types.
The FES Parameters Table

Definitions of the necessary FES Outputs:

1. Arm (required) - FES Arm State - This parameter is used to determine the start and stop of
an "FES" event. Typically the pilot arms the FES whereby this bit would go high. An event is
triggered to perform the automated analysis when the bit goes low. This creates a "frame" of
time around which the response signal will be processed. An IADS Local Derived parameter
is created and assigned to the "Arm" parameter in this FES Parameters table within the IADS
Configuration file. Please note that all of these bit pick local derived parameters can use the
"table lookup" column so that a user readable string can be viewed in an alphanumeric
display instead of a number.
2. State - Not currently implemented.

194
IADS User Manual

3. Start/Stop Frequency (required*) - These values are taken at the start of the Arm on.
These values are not used by the FESAA, but by the auto-filtering. Also used by the
Dashboard FES panel display.
4. Cycles (required*) - Used to determine the number of successive cycles/burst being
applied. Can be used to determine if the FES generated the correct number and duration of
bursts before beginning processing or cancel altogether. Used by the Dashboard front panel
display.
5. FES Generator Mode - Identifies the mode the FES system is operating. For example,
Stripcharts will only compute automated LogDec or PRD in "Burst" mode, and will respond
to automated filter changes differently depending on mode (see Stripchart properties, the auto
tab). Frequency Response plots will respond to "Sweep" modes for automated Peak Hold
reset. Used by the Dashboard front panel display.
6. Panel Mode (required*) - Not used in the Automated Analysis Process. Used by the
Dashboard front panel display.
7. Surface/Phase (required*) - Both the surface and phase values are sent as part of the
"Arm" trigger event to each Stripchart, where from the property sheet, it is set to match the
signal's surface and phase with that sent as part of the event. This is how a response signal in
a Stripchart is matched to the FES event that was triggered. Both are used by the dashboard
front panel display.
8. FES Generator Signal (required) – This is the excitation signal from the aircraft’s FES
system. This parameter is used to determine the location of the excitation within the response
parameters and forms the data range where the automated analysis picks the correct points for
the LogDec computation or locates the start and stop data ranges for each burst for the PRD
computation (Requires multiple bursts per ARM on/off cycle).
* These values can be hard-coded with a derived parameter value if you do not have data for
them.
Note: To verify the frequency and damping computations are operating properly, data for the
response parameters is needed that was generated during the FES test in response to the
excitation from the "FES Generator Signal"
Adding FES Output Parameters to the Parameter Defaults Table
Each FES system is unique and therefore it is very likely that IADS Derived parameters will
have to be created for several of the required FES Output values in order to provide the
required data states to perform the FES process. These include; the Arm, FES Generator
Mode, Panel Mode and Surface and Phase. The other FES Output parameters can most likely
be used from the test vehicle without further processing. The FESAA expects data outputs to
match its preset algorithmic expectations. The figure below shows an example set of FES
parameter entries in the Parameter Defaults Table. Typically, these parameters and their Bit
definitions are available from the instrumentation department. You will need to derive
parameters using a bit pick function to extract the information required to perform an Auto
Analysis. This information varies from aircraft to aircraft.

195
Test Points

The Parameter Defaults Table with sample FES Derived Parameters

FES Parameter Expected Values

Arm Generator Mode Panel Mode
0 = "Disarm" 0 = "DSweep" 1 = "Flutter"
1 = "Armed" 1 = "Burst" 2 = "SC"
2 = "Sweep"
3 = "Contin"
4 = "Rand"
Surface/Phase
PhaseValue = 0 PhaseValue = 1 PhaseValue = 2 PhaseValue = 3
0 = RightAUX 0 = LeftAUX 0 = AntiSymmetricAUX 0 = SymmetricAUX
1 = RightNOZ 1 = LeftNOZ 1 = AntiSymmetricNOZ 1 = SymmetricNOZ

2 = RightLEFlap 2 = LeftLEFlap 2 = AntiSymmetricLEFlap 2 = SymmetricLEFlap

3 = RightFlaperon 3 = LeftFlaperon 3 = AntiSymmetricFlaperon 3 =
SymmetricFlaperon
4 = RightFlaperon 4 = LeftFlaperon 4 = AntiSymmetricFlaperon 4 =
SymmetricFlaperon
5 = RightAileron 5 = LeftAileron 5 = AntiSymmetricAileron 5 = SymmetricAileron
6 = RightRudder 6 = LeftRudder 6 = AntiSymmetricRudder 6 = SymmetricRudder
7 = RightStabilizer 7 = LeftStabilizer 7= 7=
AntiSymmetricStabilizer SymmetricStabilizer

196
 IADS User Manual

30.8. Using Flutter Excitation System (FES) Automated Analysis System

It is recommended that several displays be built for the FES Automated Analysis (FESAA)
system. Build a display for the FES Output parameter checkout, which will aid in
determining if the FES Output parameters have the required data output values; then build a
display for each surface under test, for example “Flutter-Vertical Tail” would have several
displays with Stripcharts containing the response parameters, several Frequency plots, and
other textual displays. Another may be “Flutter-Wing”, and so on. The Stripchart “Auto” tab
is used to communicate the type of parameter attached to the FESAA process so that it can
properly process the data.

A. Setup the automated analysis in a Stripchart:

1. Right-click on the Stripchart > Properties.
2. Click the Auto Tab in the Stripchart Properties sheet.
3. Select the Analysis Type: Log Decrement (LDec) or Pseudo Randomdec followed by a
Log Decrement (PRD-LDec). Pseudo Randomdec followed by Log Dec averages the
burst data (as represented by a green overlay) and automatically picks points in the
averaged data to extract the Log Decrement Frequency and Damping Results. The Log
Dec option calculates only the first burst in a multiple burst selection.
4. Select the Surface that will be excited during the maneuver of interest.
5. Select the % Reduction for the response. For Pseudo Randomdec, the percent reduction
is the percent between the result peaks. For example, for the system to calculate the next
peak it must have been reduced by at least 40% (if the reduction is set to 40) for the
system to use that peak in calculating the Pseudo Randomdec.

197
Test Points

6. Select the Burst type Absolute or Percent. When the system detects a change in the FES
Frequency Band Pass, fc1 and fc2 will be automatically set by either an absolute value or
a percentage.
7. Select the value for the Burst type change.
8. Select the minimum frequency (Min Freq) cut off. To invoke Auto Filtering: When the
system detects a change in the FES Frequency Band pass, fc1 and fc2 will be
automatically set by either an absolute value or a percentage. Setting the value, for
example, 20 would change the frequency of a band pass filter: fc1 would be 0 and fc2
would be 40. If a minimum frequency cutoff is needed the “min Freq” text box is set. For
example, +/- 20 around the burst, but it will not go below the minimum frequency of 3.
When automated analysis is disabled the Stripchart's filtering will return to whatever was
set prior to the auto filtering.
9. If the data is an FES Sweep, type in the Sweep fc1 and fc2 cut off values.
10. Click OK to close the property sheet.
11. Repeat as necessary.
B. Set the FES and Automated Analysis settings:
 On the Dashboard, right-click on the Automated Analysis panel. Several options are
available from the Dashboard/FES Panel to set run-time conditions and post trigger
events.

Flash at FES Start – Enable this to flash the Stripcharts with the Response parameters under
test.
Reset Peaks/Averaged at FES Start – Enable this to reset the Peaks on Frequency Plots
associated with the response parameters.
Add Event Marker at FES Stop – Enable this to add event markers at the end of the FES
trigger event.
Adjust AutoAnalysis Band Pass Filters to FES Freq – This will enable a tracking band
pass filter for the response parameters under test based on the filter setting on the Stripchart
Property dialog.
Add Sticky not at AutoAnalysis Filter Change – Enable this option to show on the
Stripchart when the FESAA changed a filter setting.
Automatically Write Analysis to Summary Log – Enable this to push results from the
Analysis Log to the Summary Log. The Summary log is a living log in that results are
maintained across multiple tests.
Show LogDec Overlay – Will show the computed overlay on the Response parameter for
which the LogDec computation was performed.

198
 IADS User Manual

C. Set a Flutter Test Point:

1. Click the drop down menu and select a row number for the point you want to set. The
Test Points MUST exist in both the Test Point Table and the Planned Test Point Table for
Automated Analysis to work properly.
2. Click the Start Test Point Button.
D. Enable Automated Analysis:
 Click the Automated Analysis Disabled button to enable the process.
Here are the items to watch for during an FES event:
1. The FES panel on the Dashboard will flash upon start and during an FES cycle as defined
by the Arm trigger parameter.
2. Visual indicators will be automatically added to the Stripcharts including for such items
as Auto Filter changes, Burst data selection, LogDec overlays, and the computed
frequency and damping.
3. Upon trigger complete, the computations will be performed and displayed on the enabled
Stripcharts. After the FES event is complete, computations are performed, and various
visual elements are added to the displays. Analysis results are visually shown on the
appropriate Stripcharts displays and saved to the Analysis log. It is typical for Test
Engineers to review results during the test point and to scroll back and review previous
results during momentary downtimes.

30.9. Automated Analysis Results

Flutter Test Point: The System will use the Test Points Number, Altitude, Mach, KEAS,
and Maneuver Type when an Analysis result is saved to the Flutter Summary Log. The
system allows you to perform a manual analysis without setting a test point, however, the
results will not be available for plotting from the Flutter Summary Log (since no Test Point
information for that result is available).
Modal Definitions Table: If you defined the modes of interest in the Modal Definitions
table, the Mode and Symmetry information (from the Modal Definitions table) is stamped
onto your Analysis result in the Analysis Log, if the Parameter and Min/Max Frequency are
the same as those of your results. If no matching Mode is found for the Parameter and
Frequency Min/Max (as defined in the Modal Definitions), the system will automatically
stamp the Mode and Symmetry as “Undefined” in the Analysis Result.
Analysis Log: Once your results are written to the Analysis Log, they can then be pushed to
the Flutter Summary Log to be plotted. You change the default N to a Y in the “Saved”
column and push the table (Save Changes and Push to Group). If you save an Analysis result
that is “Undefined” (Mode and Symmetry), those results will be written and available for
plotting in the Flutter Summary Log, but the Mode and Symmetry will be labeled as
“Undefined”.
Flutter Summary Log: When the Analysis results are pushed into this log, the system will
automatically retrieve Test Point number, Altitude, Mach, KEAS, and Maneuver Type (from
the Test Point that was set) and stamps that as part of the entry in the Flutter Summary Log.
The Mode, Symmetry, Parameter, Frequency and Damping results are also written into this
log. For each entry in the Flutter Summary Log, where Mode, Symmetry, Mach and KEAS
are the same, an “Averaged” entry is created. If you edit the Flutter Summary Log (directly)

199
 Test Points

you must click the “Build All Averages” button to recalculate the averaged entries in the
table.

30.10. Plotting Automated Flutter Test Point Data

Data displayed in Flutter Summary Plots comes directly from the Flutter Summary Log. After
an automated analysis, information from the analysis is updated in the log if it meets a certain
criteria. Two checks are performed automatically:
1. The analysis result is matched against the Test Point table (for the current test point), and
additional information is assigned.
2. The result needs to fall within the pre-established frequency range set in the Modal
Definitions Table for that parameter.

200
IADS User Manual

When the results meet all the established criteria the final results are written to the Flutter
Summary Log. Each entry in the log appears as an item in the Flutter Summary Plot’s drop
down list.
To setup flutter test points:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Test folder > Planned Flutter Test Points table.
3. Enter the flutter test point information and save the table.
4. Open the Planned Test Points table. Test points have to be added to the Planned Test
Points table to be available for selection during a test.
5. Enter the desired flutter test point Id's (TISPoint) to the TestPoint column
(maneuver/description information is optional).
6. Save the table.
To setup the Modal Definitions table:
This table is used to set a range of frequency and damping, and assign the mode and
symmetry for a set of parameters. The Modal Definitions Log is updated with this
information when the Modal Definitions table is saved.
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Test folder > Modal Definitions table.
3. Enter the modal information and save the table.
To setup an automated analysis:
1. Select the Stripchart(s).
2. Right-click to bring up the property sheet.
3. Click the Auto tab.
4. Make the desired Automated Analysis selections.
5. Click OK to close the property sheet.
6. Right-click next to the Automated Analysis Dashboard button.
7. Select Automatically Write Analysis to Summary Log (this can be done manually if
preferred).
8. Click the Automated Analysis Dashboard button to activate.
Note: If an automated analysis or a manual analysis is performed, the frequency and damping
results are written to the IADS Log automatically (this information is not available to plot
yet), these logs are also available in Post Test.
Set the current test point:
1. Right-click on the Start Test Point button.
2. Click on Test Point Identification Type and select TestPointId, Maneuver, Description or
None.
3. Select a Test Point from the drop-down menu.
4. On the Dashboard click the Start Test Point button.
Select the analysis results to be plotted:
1. On the Dashboard, click IADS Logs.

201
 Test Points

2. Click the Analysis tab (the frequency and damping results extracted from any analysis,
automated or manual, are recorded here).
3. In the Saved column, click Y-yes, for each result that you want to be plotted.
4. Click a save option.
Note: If you delete a result from the Analysis Log, that result will still exist in the Flutter
Summary Log until it is deleted there.
To plot the flutter data:
1. Create a Flutter Summary Plot display.
2. Click the Mode(s) drop down list and select the desired mode to be plotted. Selecting the
Multiple... option will bring up dialog that allows you to choose more than one mode.
3. Select additional search criteria from the Symmetry, Flight Condition, Operator and
Test Condition Values drop-down lists.
4. Right-click on the Plot.
5. Point to Show and click a category of data to display: All, Measured, Predicted Min,
Predicted Max, Official, or Average. To display multiple data, hold down the Ctrl key
while selecting items from the Show drop-down.
To connect the data symbols:
1. Right-click on the Plot.
2. Select, Connect Symbols.

30.11. Planned Flutter Test Points Table

Only test points that have been added to the Planned Test Point tables will be available for
selection during a test. When this table is saved, the information is used to update the Actual
Flutter Test Point Table and the Test Point Log.

To enter a planned flutter test point:

1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Test folder > Planned Flutter Test Points.
3. Fill in the appropriate fields for each test point.
4. Select a Save option.
Table Descriptions:
Altitude - Test altitude.
Amplitude - Percent of full FES amplitude; for example, 100% is full amplitude, and 20% is
20% of amplitude.
Bank Angle - Bank angle of the vehicle under test.
FES Mode - The type of FES it is, for example, Burst, Sweep or Continuous.
FES Profile - The FES waveform. For example, Sine, SineLinear.

202
 IADS User Manual

FES Surface/Phase - The surface that is being excited; and whether it is Symmetric or
AntiSymmetric. For Example: Horiz Stab/Anti, Rudder/Sym.
Frequency 1 - Start frequency.
Frequency 2 - Stop frequency.
KCAS - Knots calibrated airspeed.
KEAS - Knots equivalent airspeed.
Maneuver Type - Type of maneuver performed, for example, 1-G Trim or Nose Right SS.
Nz - Normal acceleration.
NzW - Normalized (corrected) normal acceleration.
RR Limit - Roll rate limit.
TIS Point - A number assigned by the user for each test point. Each number should be
unique.
Bursts - The frequency of the burst frequency in burst mode.
Duration - Number of cycles.
M/MH - Allows you to put in a normalized Mach number if the real Mach number is
classified.

30.12. Modal Definitions Table

The Modal Definitions Table allows you to set a range on frequency and damping and assigns
the Mode and Symmetry for each parameter. Defining this criteria allows you to plot data for
individual modes to the Summary Log. Analysis results in IADS are saved and will be
pushed to the Summary Log provided the results meet the criteria defined in the Modal
Definitions Table and the Test Point table.

To define criteria in the Modal Definitions Table:

1. On the dashboard, click Configuration.
2. In the Configuration Tool select the Test folder.
3. In the test folder select the Modal Definitions file.
4. Edit the desired column or right click to Import/Export/Append the modal definitions
information.
5. Select a Save Option (the save will propagate the information to the Modal Definitions
Log.
Table/Log Descriptions:
Group & SubGroup - These column entries should match the group and subgroup entries
you have in the Parameter Defaults list. The subgroup is less specific here; for example,
Wing, as compared to Wing Left (parameter defaults table).

203
 Test Points

Mode - A description of the structural mode, for example, First V.Tail Shear, Second V.Tail
Shear.
Symmetry - Either symmetrical or anti-symmetrical.
Minimum & Maximum Frequency (Hz) - The minimum and maximum frequency you will
expect your results to fall within for this mode. This allows you to set the frequency range
based on mode and/or parameter.
Parameter List - The parameters that will apply to the specific mode frequency min. and
max. band (multiple parameters allowed, for example, "AT0001, AT0002, AT0003, AT0004,
AT0011, AT0012". Note: When you import this table from Excel, the system automatically
puts quotes around the parameter set.
Surface - The surface of the vehicle under test. Enter rudder, stab, aileron or flaperon. Note:
The IADS Dashboard will show an abbreviation of the entry. Do not enter an abbreviation in
the Modal Definitions Table.

30.13. Plotting Loads Test Point Data

Data for Loads Summary Plots comes directly from the Loads Summary Log and uses the
information in the Loads Test Point Table. For example, if you have an analysis result that
you wish to plot, the result is matched against the Test Point table (for the current test point)
and if the information is correct the results are then written to the Loads Summary table. Only
Cross Plot data (with envelopes) can be plotted; although all load limits such as slider load
limits can be logged.
Note: Drop downs in the summary plot are populated from the column entries in the Loads
Summary log.
To setup loads test points:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Test folder > Planned Loads Test Points table.
3. Enter the load test point information and save the table.
4. Open the Planned Test Points table. Only test points that are also added to the Planned
Test Points table will be available for selection during a test.
5. Enter the desired load test point Id's (TISPoint) to the TestPoint column
(maneuver/description information is optional).
6. Save the table.
To summarize loads data in a plot:
1. Create a Loads Summary Plot display.
2. Select the search criteria in the Location, Envelope, Test Condition, Operator, Load Limit
and Maneuver fields.
Note: If you delete a result from the Analysis Log, that result will still exist in the Loads
Summary Log until it is deleted there.

204
 IADS User Manual

30.14. Planned Loads Test Points Table

Only test points that have been added to the Planned Test Points table will be available for
selection during a test. When this table is saved, the information is used to update the Actual
Loads Test Point Table and the Test Point Log.

To enter a planned loads test point:

1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Test folder > Planned Flutter Loads Points.
3. Fill in the appropriate fields for each test point.
4. Select a Save option.
Table Descriptions:
TISPoint - A number assigned by the user for each test point. Each number should be
unique.
Man.Type - Type of maneuver performed, for example, 1-G Trim or Sideslip (SS).
M/MH - Allows you to put in a normalized Mach number if the real Mach number is
classified.
Alt - Test Altitude.
%NzW - Percent Normalized (corrected) normal acceleration.
%NzWLimiter - Percent Normalized (corrected) normal acceleration. The limiter limits the
NzW to avoid overloading the aircraft.
Direction - Right or left.
%MPR - % maximum rate (roll rate).
Purpose - The test point purpose, for example, buildup, instrumentation validation,
demonstration point, etc.

30.15. Wind Calibration Macro

The Wind Calibration macro captures all the data within a given Test Point (for a select few
parameters) and creates a set of IADS envelopes. Once those envelopes are created, Cross
Plots that include these parameters will automatically load the new envelope data.
The arguments used for the macro are WindSpeed, WindDirection and Altitude. The
envelope contents after the wind calibration maneuver gives you a range of values within that
maneuver for WindSpeed vs Altitude and WindDirection vs Altitude. This macro can be used
for any three parameters. Essentially it captures the ranges/relationships between two
parameters and a third parameter.
To setup the Wind Calibration macro:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.

205
Test Points

2. Click the Automation folder > Macros.

3. In the Name column enter WindCalibration.
4. In the Arguments column enter
\\ExecuteOnDescKey=WindCalibration\\WindSpeed=WindSpeedParam\\WindDirection
=WindDirectionParam\\Altitude=Altitude\\WindSpeedEnvelope=WindSpeedEnv\\Wind
DirectionEnvelope=WindDirectionEnv\\EnvelopeDataSampleRate=2
Note: Each argument is separated by “\\” in the string.
Argument Descriptions:
ExecuteOnDescKey = A 'key' name that you put in the Description field of the
PlannedTestPoints table that will let the macro know whether to execute, or not, for a given
Test Point. In other words, you do not want this macro to execute on every Test Point so you
need a special word in the description field to key off. In this example WindCalibration is the
key name.
WindSpeed = Specific parameter name for WindSpeedParam
WindDirection = Specific parameter name for WindDirectionParam
Altitude = Specific parameter name for Altitude
WindSpeedEnvelope = Envelope name (in the Envelopes table) that the macro will update
for the WindSpeed vs Altitude data.
WindDirectionEnvelope = Envelope name (in the Envelopes table) that the macro will
update for the WindDirection vs Altitude data.
EnvelopeDataSampleRate = Sample rate of the data entered into the Envelope table. In
other words, you may not want a density of points at the native Altitude/Direction/Speed
parameters (say 50 samples/sec). It is more reasonable to use 2 points/sec (or something close
to that).
5. Click the Test folder > PlannedTestPoints.
6. Create a new WindCalibration test point. In the TestPoint field enter the Test Point Id. In
the Description field enter the 'key' name to fire off the macro. For this example enter
WindCalibration as the key name.
7. Save the table.
To setup the Wind Calibration envelopes:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Click the Data folder > Envelopes.
3. Create a new envelope. In the Parameter1 field enter your WindSpeed parameter
(specific to your data set and the same parameter name as entered in the \\WindSpeed
argument=).
4. In the Parameter2 field enter your Altitude parameter (specific to your data set and the
same as entered in the \\Altitude argument).
5. In the EnvName field enter your envelope name (same as entered in the
\\WindSpeedEnvelope argument). Leave the ParameterValuePairs field blank (the macro
will fill this entry upon execution).
6. Enter the other information as necessary.

206
 IADS User Manual

7. Create a new envelope. In the Parameter1 field enter your WindDirection parameter
(specific to your data set and the same parameter name as entered in the
\\WindDirection= argument).
8. In the Parameter2 field enter your Altitude parameter (specific to your data set and the
same as entered in the \\Altitude argument).
9. In the EnvName field enter your envelope name (same as entered in the
\\WindDirectionEnvelope argument).
10. Leave the ParameterValuePairs field blank (the macro will fill this entry upon
execution).
11. Enter the other information as necessary.
12. Save the table.
To setup the Cross Plots:
1. Create two Cross Plots on an Analysis Window.
2. In the first Cross Plot, drop the WindSpeed parameter on the X axis and the Altitude
parameter on the Y axis (or vice versa).
3. Repeat for the WindDirection parameter in the second Cross Plot.
4. Select both Cross Plots and press the A key to scale the data into view.
5. Press the K key twice to change both X\Y scale format to K format [optional].
To activate the Test Point:
1. Click the arrow next to Start Test Point on the Dashboard's Test Point panel (second from
left).
2. Click TestPoint Identification Type > TestPointId.
3. Click Actions on Stop > Execute Macro > Wind Calibration
4. At the Dashboard, select the 'WindCalibration' Test Point from the drop down list.
5. Click the Start Test Point button.
6. At the end of the maneuver click the Stop Test Point button. The envelopes will reload
in the Cross Plots.

30.16. Calculate Derived Macro

The Calculate Derived macro will allow you to calculate any parameter or equation over the
range of the TestPoint data. It fires off immediately after the TestPoint is complete and allows
you to perform a whole host of operations including: output the final result of a parameter,
average airspeed, average load factor, max load factor, etc...; essentially anything you can put
into an equation. The results are pushed to the Test Points Log property bag if the macro
specifies \\OutputType=TestPoint.
Syntax
\\Arg1\\Arg2\\ArgN
Note: Each argument is separated by “\\” in the string. You can have any number of
parameters in the arguments field and they will be calculated and output in the TestPoint's
PropertyBag field. See examples below.

207
Test Points

Example:
\\OutputType=TestPoint\\Param1=RECNUM\\Param2=TpAvgAirSpeed\\Param3=TpMaxLo
adFactor
Example: \\OutputType=TestPoint\\Eq1=Avg(AirSpeed,0)\\Eq2=Max(LoadFactor,0)
Argument Descriptions:
Arg1 = OutputType = TestPoint - Output to the current test point.
Arg2-N = Param1="Parameter" or Eq1=DerivedEquation
Examples:
Param1=RECNUM - Run the parameter RECNUM over the TestPoint and output the final
result. In this instance, RECNUM will (hopefully) just be a constant, so the output will show
the RECNUM for the TestPoint.
Param2=TpAvgAirSpeed - TpAvgAirSpeed is just an arbitrary name for some derived
parameter that will be created. You can change the name to whatever you want. The key is
that this equation will run over the entire duration of the TestPoint, so if we can build the
appropriate equations, we can get the desired results. In this case, to calculate the average air
speed for the TestPoint, thus the equation for TpAvgAirSpeed parameter would be
Avg(YourAirSpeedParam, 0). Notice that the second argument (numPtsToAverage) is set to
0. This denotes ‘infinite averaging’ or in this case ‘average over the entire TestPoint’.
Because the length in number of points of the TestPoint is unknown, we set the number to 0
and let the macro run the equation over the entire length. This same technique is used again to
calculate the ‘max’.
Param3=TpMaxLoadFactor - The equation would be: Max(LoadFactorParam, 0).
Or:
EQ1=Avg(YourAirSpeedParam, 0)
EQ2=Max(LoadFactorParam, 0)
To setup the Calculate Derived macro:
The Calculate Derived plugin gets its arguments from the Macros table. When it is launched,
it looks in this table for an entry with the name CalculateDerived. It then pulls the
“Arguments” column from this row and uses it to drive the action. The subsequent arguments
are the parameters or equations that you want calculated over the TestPoint start/stop time
range; and output to the PropertyBag column of the Test Points Log (Dashboard > Iads Logs
> Test Points).
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Click the Automation folder > Macros.
3. In the Name column enter CalculateDerived.
4. In the Arguments column enter: \\Arg1\\Arg2-N - see the examples above.
5. Save the table.
To activate the Test Point:
1. Click the arrow next to Start Test Point on the Dashboard's Test Point panel (second
from left).
2. Click TestPoint Identification Type > select TestPointId.

208
 IADS User Manual

3. Click Actions on Stop > Execute Macro > Calculate Derived.

4. At the Dashboard, select the Test Point from the drop down list.
5. Click the Start Test Point button.
6. At the end of the maneuver click the Stop Test Point button.

31. Managing and Creating Parameters

31.1. The Parameter Defaults Table (PDT)
All parameters must be listed in the Parameter Defaults Table in the Configuration Tool for
use in IADS. You can set the default attributes for all your parameters in this table. When you
set a default property for a parameter, that setting will be applied every time you drop that
parameter into a data display. You can override the default for a single display however, by
changing it within that display's property sheet. Overriding the property for a parameter in a
display via the property sheet, does not change the default in the Parameter Defaults Table. If
you re-drop the parameter into the display, its defaults will be applied.

To set or change a default property for a parameter:

1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder > ParameterDefaults.
3. Find the row of the parameter of interest.
4. Set or make changes as necessary.
5. Click a Save option.
ParameterDefaults - This is a 'default' name for a 'set' of parameters. Parameters that share
the same ParameterDefaults name are either active (black) or inactive (grayed out)
depending on the ParameterDefaults status (True/False) in the ParameterDefaultsState table.
Parameters that are active are available for selection in the Parameter Tool.
Parameter - A description (naming convention) of a value obtained from a DAU, sensor,
data bus or other data source.
Parameter Type - The system currently supports: float (32 bit floating point IEEE 754), int
(32 bit signed integer), discrete (32 bit unsigned integer), double (64 bit floating point IEEE
754), long (64 bit signed integer), ulong (64 bit unsigned integer), blob (binary large object)
and ascii (string of 8 bit ascii characters).
Parameter Group and Subgroup – The Parameter Tool contains all of the parameters you
have defined here; organizing them by parameter group, for example, flutter; and more
specifically subgroup, such as Air Data, FES, or hydro; this is helpful to manage large
parameter counts.
Note: A parameter can be assigned to multiple groups and subgroups by using a comma
separated list of group/subgroup names.

209
Managing and Creating Parameters

Short Name and Long Name – A parameter’s description; these names are displayed in the
Parameter Tool next to that parameter (enlarge tool to see both). Name strings are limited to
499 characters. For example: Parameter = AT1003X, Short Name = R HT Tip T.E., Long
Name = Nz Right Horizontal Tail Tip Boom-Nz
Units – The abbreviation for that measurement which the data represents. For example, ft=
feet, v= volts, g= g’s. This abbreviation will be visible on the displays.
Color – The default pen color for that parameter in any display. Click the cell to activate the
color selection dialog box. Note: In a .csv file (in Excel) you will see the hexadecimal RGB
value. Changing the color outside of the application is not advised.
Width – The default pen width for that parameter in a Stripchart or Frequency Plot. The
higher the number, the thicker the data line.
Data Source Type:
TPP – Original data from the data source via the IADS Server.
Derived - A non-TPP parameter created (or imported into the table) by the user, using an in-
line equation or a COM based add-in function. The derivation is performed on the IADS
Client, as such, no data file is archived by the server. You can create derived parameters at
any time during a test in both real time and post test (as long as the base parameters exist).
You do not need to restart the system.
IAP - IAP derived parameters can receive and create data in real time and act the same as a
TPP parameter. An IAP derived parameter is created using the same technique as a "regular"
derived parameter, using an in-line equation or a COM based add-in function as the Data
Source Argument. The IADS Server creates .iadsData files for the IAP at the point of
creation.
Data Source Argument - For use with derived parameters; the derivation equation is entered
here. Please refer to the Creating a Derived Parameter help topic.
This field is left blank for periodic TPP parameters. In the case of aperiodic TPP parameters,
the system maintains the 'Rate=0' Data Source Argument convention as a method for
identifying a TPP parameter as aperiodic.
Update (Sample) Rate – The samples per second of the parameter. The Update Rate field is
determined by the IADS Server (CDS) and the table populated upon startup of the system; it
computes the information from your data source. Likewise, derived equations are computed
based on their TPP input parameters; the default behavior is to compute at the rate of the
highest sample rate input parameter (if you click on the Equation Field and then ‘tab’ to the
next field, the Update Rate column will be recomputed). This field is generally for
informational purposes except for equations with no TPP input parameters. For example,
functions such as “GetConst” or “SineWave” do not depend on TPP parameter data and thus
this field is your mechanism to specify the sample rate.
The TPP Parameter Rate Selection dialog provides the user the option to set one or more TPP
parameters to Aperiodic (zero sample rate) or Periodic. Not Applicable to derived
parameters.
Other Table Descriptions
LL Negative and Positive – The Load Limit for that parameter. If you leave these cells
empty, no load limit calculation will be visible on the Stripchart's hint and the Slider's load
limit bar will not be displayed. This is typically used in Slider and Cross Plot displays.

210
IADS User Manual

Time Scale Range Minimum and Maximum – The minimum and maximum value you
want to be the default in the Stripchart or Slider displays.
Time Scale Auto - Not implemented in this version.
Frequency Scale Range Minimum and Maximum – The system default for the min is 0
Hz. The system default for the max is one half the sample rate. These settings apply to the
frequency axis.
Frequency Scale Auto – Not implemented in this version.
Warning Threshold Range Minimum and Maximum - The Min/Max cutoff numbers for
the warning threshold.
Warning Threshold Color - The default color of the warning threshold lines for that
parameter. When the thresholds are enabled the border color will change to this selected color
when the threshold is exceeded. Click the cell to activate the color selection dialog box.
Warning Threshold Label - The label remark that appears when the threshold is exceeded.
Applies to Annunciators only, no other display has a warning threshold label.
Warning Threshold Line Width – The default warning threshold line width on the
Stripchart. The higher the number, the thicker the threshold line.
Alarm Threshold Range Minimum and Maximum - The Min/Max cutoff numbers for the
alarm threshold.
Alarm Threshold Color - The default color of the warning threshold lines for that
parameter. When the thresholds are enabled the border color will change to this selected color
when the threshold is exceeded. Click the cell to activate the color selection dialog box.
Alarm Threshold Label - The label remark that appears when the threshold is exceeded.
Applies to Annunciators only, no other display has a warning threshold label.
Alarm Threshold Line Width - The default warning threshold line width on the Stripchart.
The higher the number, the thicker the threshold line.
Filter Active
Yes - When the parameter is dropped into a display any filtering selected will be active.
No - When this parameter is dropped into a display no filtering is applied to it at the default
level.
Filter Algorithm - You can apply Butterworth or Elliptic filters.
Filter Pass Type
Low pass – A device that will only pass signals below a set frequency.
High pass – A device that will only pass signals above a set frequency.
Band pass - A device that will only pass signals between two set frequencies. It can be
thought of as a combination of a low pass filter and a high pass filter.
Filter Low Cutoff - Enter the low cutoff frequency in Hertz. The frequency can be any Real
number between zero and half the sample rate.
Filter High Cutoff - Enter the high cutoff frequency in Hertz. The frequency can be any Real
number between zero and half the sample rate.

211
Managing and Creating Parameters

Filter Order – determines how steep the roll-off response curve near the corner frequency
will be. The higher the Order number the steeper the curve. Enter an integer from 1-8.
Wild Point Range Minimum - The absolute minimum amplitude value that the data will
reach before the Wild Point Editing is applied.
Wild Point Range Maximum - The absolute maximum amplitude value that the data will
reach before the Wild Point Editing is applied.
Wild Point Correction Method – Wild Point Editing is accomplished for data loss, data
spikes, and loss of synchronization. Lost or bad data is replaced with a point correction
method that the user chooses here.
Default value – A user defined point value.
Last value – The system will fit a spline through five good (valid) data points before the wild-
point, and five good data points following the wild-point. For example, if the system found in
succession one wild-point, two good points, one wild point, and five good points, the system
will fit a curve through the five data points preceding the first wild-point, the following two
good data points, and the three data points following the next wild point. Once this point is
corrected, it will be considered good when correcting other wild points.
None – No Wild Point editing applied. Overrides the data enabling dashboard button.
Wild Point Correction Value – The system corrects the wild points with this user defined
point value. Only needs to be entered here if you selected default value from the previous
column (Wild Point Correction Method).
Sign Change - Multiplies the data by –1.
Null Correction - Corrects the actual sensor value to a theoretical value.
Data Source Type Tpp - Select Yes or No.
Data Source Type Derived - No, Equation Result (null bias applied to the result of the
calculation in the derived equation) or Equation Inputs (null bias applied to each input
parameter in the derived equation (using each parameters specified value).
Null Baseline - Enter a constant value, a parameter name or an equation. IADS will calculate
the Null Bias value based on this entry. Note: Derived parameter equation rules apply, for
example, a parameter name of all numbers would have to be entered with curly brackets
{1234}.
Null Average - IADS will take the average of all Null Baseline equation values calculated
during the nulling period (approximately 15 seconds) and apply the result in the calculation
of the Null Bias value. This field is not editable.
Null Bias - Actual value applied to the data. An entry is added in the IADS Configuration
File, Null Corrections Info table specifying the start and end times of the Null Bias
calculation period. This field is not editable.
Null Group - Select Null Group Aircraft or Weapons Bay.
Spike Detection Method – Checks for a change from the previous data value using an
absolute value change or slope change comparison.
Slope Change – If the Spike Change Limit is set to 10 the system looks for a slope change
that is 10 times greater than the current data. Once the limit is exceeded the system calculates
an average of the last 5 non-zero slopes and displays this average as the corrected slope.

212
IADS User Manual

Absolute Change – If data is streaming in at a value of 1.2, and the spike change limit is set
to 10, the data would need to spike to a value of 11.3 before changing.
Spike Correction Method:
Last Good Value – The last good value before the spike. (Only applies to Spike Correction.)
None – No correction is applied. (Only applies to Spike Correction.)
Spike Change Limit – The value you set for the Slope Change or Absolute Change spike
detection methods.
Trigger Conditions - Not implemented in this version.
Auto Analysis Type - Not implemented in this version.
Activation Option - Not implemented in this version.
Auto Block Size - Not implemented in this version.
Percent Reduction - Not implemented in this version.
Auto Frequency Calculation - Not implemented in this version.
Frequency - Not implemented in this version.
User Factor - Not implemented in this version.
Compute Type – The default analysis type displayed when you drop a parameter into a
Frequency Plot or Frequency Response Plot.
PSD - Creates a Frequency plot that is the same as Auto Spectrum, but the magnitude of each
frequency bin is divided by the frequency resolution (bin width) for data consistency between
differing block sizes and sample rates.
Auto Spectrum - Creates a Frequency plot that displays power or energy content as a function
of frequency (Hz). Each point represents a frequency band (bin). There are "(block size)/2"
equally spaced frequency bins. Frequencies from 0 to "(sample rate)/2" are displayed.
Phase & Real - Creates a Frequency Response plot with phase vs. frequency on the top and
the real part of the Frequency Response function vs. frequency on the bottom.
Phase & Imaginary - Creates a Frequency Response plot with phase vs. frequency on the top
and the imaginary part of the Frequency Response function vs. frequency on the bottom.
Coquad - A plot of the imaginary part of the frequency response function vs. frequency on
the top and the real part of the frequency response function vs. frequency on the bottom.
Phase & Magnitude - Creates a Frequency Response plot with phase vs. frequency on the top
and magnitude of the Frequency Response function vs. frequency on the bottom.
Phase & Gain - Creates a Frequency Response plot with phase vs. frequency on the top and
gain in dB (20Log10) vs. frequency on the bottom.
Bode - Creates a Frequency Response plot with phase vs. frequency on the top and gain in dB
(20Log10) vs. frequency on the bottom.
Nyquist - The Nyquist plot is a rectangular/polar plot of the Frequency Response function of a
system. It can be used to extract phase and gain margin. The display tab of the Nyquist plot
properties dialog has a check box which enables display of a unit circle. Phase and gain
margin will be displayed if the unit circle is enabled.

213
Managing and Creating Parameters

Octave Band - Creates a Frequency plot that provides the capability to divide portions of the
frequency spectrum. The center frequency of each band is twice the center frequency of the
adjacent lower band.
1/3 Octave Band - Creates a Frequency plot that provides the capability to divide portions of
the frequency spectrum into one-third octaves. The center frequency of each band is 1.26
times the center frequency of the adjacent lower band.
Excitation Signal – If you drop a parameter into a Frequency Response or Nyquist Plot,
IADS will prompt you for an excitation parameter (signal) if one is not specified in the
Parameter Defaults table within the Configuration Tool. The excitation is an input, and the
parameter you dropped is the output. The relationship between the two is what is plotted.
Window Type - Windowing is a method of multiplying time domain data by a weighting
function to force the signal to become periodic within a block. Windowing improves
amplitude and frequency accuracy in the frequency domain by reducing leakage created by
taking a FFT on non-periodic data within a block.
Blackman - A Blackman window is similar to a Hanning window. It uses two cosine terms to
minimize ripple while keeping the window reasonably narrow.
Hamming - A Hamming window is a bell-shaped weighting curve similar to the Hanning
window. The end points of the window do not taper all the way to 0.0, so the curve differs
slightly along with resultant main lobe width and ripple (scalloping loss).
Hanning - This Hanning window is a bell-shaped weighting curve applied (Pre-FFT) to
reduce spectral leakage. It is normally applied to signals with a length greater than the FFT
block size in order to force both ends of each block to 0.0.
Kaiser-Bessel - The Kaiser-Bessel window allows the user to adjust the compromise between
main lobe width and amplitude accuracy by varying its x parameter. The ends of the window
are forced toward 0.0 like a Hanning window to reduce spectral leakage.
Flat Top - A Flat Top window is similar to a Hanning window. It uses four cosine terms to
nearly eliminate ripple. Ripple (scalloping loss) is so low for this window that it can be used
for accurate amplitude measurements and calibration.
Rectangular - The Rectangular window (A.K.A. Boxcar) can be selected when no weighting
of data blocks is desired before the FFT process. Note: Choosing Rectangular means that NO
Windowing will be applied.
Alpha – For Kaiser Bessel windowing you must specify the alpha: 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, or 3.5.
Averaging Method - This setting applies to real-time displays only. Fixed block calculations
always use frequency averaging and all results from beginning to end are averaged.
Frequency - Choose this if you want averaging.
None - Choose this if you do not want averaging.
Overlap - This number specifies a percentage of overlap to use for successive FFT
computations. An overlap of 75% with a 64 point block size will produce a new FFT every
16 points (the other 48 points are previous values). An overlap of 0% would wait for 64 new
data points for each new FFT. Overlap works whether averaging is on or off.
Blocks Per Average – This setting applies to real-time displays only. Fixed block
calculations use the same technique as the "0" setting.
0 - Enter 0 for a running average from startup or from last averaging reset.

214
 IADS User Manual

1-5 - Enter 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 computations. A setting of 1 is the same as using no averaging and

is allowed for convenience. Entries greater than 5 will cause the algorithm to assert a 5 block
moving average.
Block Size - Specifies the number of samples processed in on FFT. Available choices are: 64,
128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8192, 16384, 32768, 65536.
String Lookup Table - In an Alphanumeric, the value in the display window is matched to
the same value in the String Look-up table, that string value is then displayed in the window.
For example, 0 On, 1 Off (this string is space sensitive including the space after the OFF).
Unique ID String - For IADS development internal use only. Should not be edited by the
user.

31.2. The Parameter Defaults State Table

The primary purpose of this table is to set the state of a "set" of parameters to active, or
inactive. Each parameter in the Parameter Defaults table has an associated ParameterDefaults
name, the very first entry. When a ParameterDefaults name is set to active in the Parameter
Defaults State table, all parameters that have this same ParameterDefaults name will be
active and available for selection in the Parameter Tool.
Parameters that are grayed out in the Parameter Defaults table have an inactive
ParameterDefaults setting in the Parameters Defaults State table or no setting at all, and are
not visible in the Parameter Tool. This can be the case when importing parameter
information. A new entry will have to be added to this table or the ParameterDefaults name
changed to an existing active name.

To add a new ParameterDefaults entry to the table:

1. Click the Configuration button on the Dashboard.
2. Click the Data folder, Parameter Defaults State table.
3. Click in the cell of the first empty row and add the new Parameter Defaults name.
4. Click in the IsActive cell to set the active state to True or False. Parameters that are not
set to Active will display a grayed out state in the Parameter Defaults table.

31.3. Creating Derived Parameters

There are several options you can use to add derived parameters to the Parameter Defaults
Table. It is easiest to copy and paste an existing row of data for a parameter that is similar to
the one you are creating. The system will automatically rename the copied parameter
Copy(1)_of_... based on the original parameter's name. Each parameter name is unique.
Any parameters used in the Data Source Argument (equation) must exist in the Parameter
Defaults Table.
After adding or modifying equations you must click a Save option to apply the changes. In
some cases you will need to re-drop the parameter into the display to view the changes.

215
Managing and Creating Parameters

Note: It is easier to copy and paste a row of data for a parameter that is similar to the one you
are creating than to enter all the information by hand; the system will automatically rename
the copied parameter (based on the original parameter's name). Either way, you must 1) enter
an unique name for the new parameter, 2) select a Data Source Type, and 3) enter a Data
Source Argument.
To create a derived parameter:
1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. In the Parameter column, type in a unique name for the new derived parameter. See
parameter naming rules.
4. In the ParamType column, select the return type of the parameter/function.
5. In the Data Source Type column, select Derived.
6. In the Data Source Argument column, type in the derived equation (all parameters and
operators/functions required). Equation operators use normal mathematical precedence.
For example, multiplication is performed before addition, etc. When in doubt use
parentheses, i.e., (A+B)*C to force desired precedence.
7. Type in the information for the rest of the columns as required.
8. Click a Save option.
Note: A derived equation that contains a parameter name exclusively of numbers (or a
parameter name that has the same name as a function in IADS) must have { } around the
name. For example, Avg({1234}, 100)
To add a derived equation from an outside source:
1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. Right click to bring up the menu, select Import Equations.
4. Navigate to the drive that contains the equations.
5. The system will complete the import and prompt you to select OK in the message box.
Note: Equations must adhere to the following: Imported data must be in a csv format
(comma, space or tab delimited). The csv file must contain both the parameter name and the
equation. For example, ABCC001,PWXZ01/1.876+AKUR88+10. The parameter name and
equation should be separated by a comma, space or tab. For each equation imported, that
parameter name must already exist in the current configuration file. The data source type
must be set to Derived for that parameter name in the current configuration file.
Is a derived parameter not displaying data?
 Is the system processing data for that parameter? Data must be coming into the system
for each variable (parameter) that is used in a derived equation. If one variable has no
data, the derived will not update in the displays.
 Is the derived equation correct? The system will check the equation for errors and the
equation text will appear red if there is so. Click in the Data Source Argument cell, then
click into any other cell while holding down the left mouse button to read the error
message box.
 Are you using the correct config file? You can use any configuration file with a set of
data, if the parameters in your derived equation do not match those parameters in the data

216
 IADS User Manual

set, the displays containing the derived parameters will not update.
 Do all the base parameters exist in the Parameter Defaults Table? If you try and add a
derived equation with a parameter name that does not exist in the Parameter Defaults
Table, you will get an error and the display will not update until you add the applicable
parameter.
 Error "Invalid Function Arg Value: Sample rate of input parameter is illegal (=0.0)" - The
reason for this error is that the input parameter is aperiodic. (A telltale sign is that the
TPP parameter UpdateRate = 0.) A number of derived operators that accept nPoints as a
property value are not supported with aperiodic parameters at this time. Due to the nature
of the data it is often impossible to know when the value changes and that can affect the
results of certain equations. IF however you know that the frequency of the data can be
represented in a static value over a given period of time, then you can create a derived
equation that uses the SetEquationUpdateRate(Rate) function to force a static sample
rate. For example, "SetEquationUpdateRate(Rate), Avg({Parameter],100" and the
UpdateRate would be the value you used for rate. You just have to be aware of the fact
that you are going to either be upsampling (Last Good Value) or downsampling
(dropping values) to match that forced update rate and it will have an impact on the
quality of the resulting data. If it's about 10Hz over 100 points (and you pick 10Hz) then
it may work fine, but if it can be anything from 3Hz to 20Hz over 100 points (and you
pick 10hz) then it may not give you the results you are looking for. Currently, the
alternative would be to write a custom function.

31.4. Parameter Naming Rules

Characters allowed follow the same characters as a valid Microsoft filename .... thus \ / : * ?
\" < > | are not allowed; and no leading or trailing spaces or tabs are allowed (basically any
character that cannot be used to create a file name in NTFS or FAT file system).
Additionally, each character in the name is checked against the "isprint" function to insure
that the character is 'printable' this eliminates common control characters such as EOF,
Carriage Return, Bell, etc.
Arithmetic characters are highly discouraged (* / + - =) because when combine in a derived
equation will cause parsing errors. Example: ParameterName = A+B Equation = A+B+1.
The derived equation parser is going to interpret A+B as a parameter named A plus a
parameter named B. There are ways around this by bracketing the confusing parameter name
({A+B}+1) in the equation, but it is messy and this type of usage is not recommended.
Another issue along the arithmetic line is an all numeric parameter name. Example:
ParameterName = 135356 Equation = 135356 + 10. If your parameter names are primarily
numeric, it is best to prefix them with a letter: A135356.
It is recommended to use a "." (period) as a separator character
(dir.medium.system.message.struct.field) or underscore
(dir_medium_system_message_struct_field). A word of caution, long parameter names do
not fit nicely into display titles. Often these names run off the display and get clamped. Many
customers start out with long parameter names and then get frustrated... removing the scheme
to a short and simple eight character parameter code. To further identify the parameter, the
full name is used as the long name (and/or short name) field in the ParameterDefaults table.
On many displays, the long name is a title option. It is suggested to use a small number of
parameters with their full name, and build up some windows with displays. Make sure the
name length is not going to be a problem before committing in full to this scheme.

217
 Managing and Creating Parameters

31.5. Creating IADS Custom Derived Functions

The following custom derived functions, and tutorials to create custom derived functions can
be downloaded from the SYMVIONICS website at:
http://iads.symvionics.com/programs.html
Custom Derived Functions:
1. Helicopter Functions
2. IADS UDP Reader
3. Malibu Antenna Controller
Custom Derived Function Tutorials:
1. Creating a Custom Derived Function using C++ VS2005
2. Creating a Custom Derived Function using Visual C++ 6.0
3. Creating a Custom Derived Function in Visual Basic
4. Custom Derived Function Helper Classes
You can also search for additional information on these subjects on the IADS Google group
at: http://groups.google.com/group/iads

31.6. Using Set Functions in Derived Equations

Parameter defaults are not active by default for input parameters in a derived equation. You
can use a Set function to apply parameter defaults to input parameters.
To use a Set function in a derived equation:
1. Create the derived parameter.
2. Enter the Set function(s), comma separated, prior to the main equation (output).
Filtering derived parameters
You can define (set) in advance default filtering for source parameters, those with noise, in
the Parameter Defaults table. To use these filtered parameters in a derived equation, the
function must include SetFilterActive( Parameter, 1 ) to enable the filter(s). This must be in
every DataSourceArgument field where the filtered parameter is directly used. Alternately,
the entire filter may be defined in the derived parameter's DataSourceArgument with the
setFilter functions shown in the table below.
For example, MyDerivedParameter = ParamA + ParamB
To enable filtering for ParamA, the equation (DataSourceArgument) will look like:
SetFilterActive(ParamA,1), ParamA + ParamB
To enable filtering for both parameters, the equation will look like:
SetFilterActive(ParamA,1), SetFilterActive(ParamB,1), ParamA + ParamB
If the filtered parameter is used in a lot of equations, you could create a 'proxy' parameter
with a different name that always has active filtering, for example:
MyDerivedParameter_Filtered and set the DataSourceArgument (equation) to:
SetFilterActive(MyDerivedParameter, TRUE ), MyDerivedParameter

218
IADS User Manual

Then substitute the new filtered parameter name into each derived equation you wish to have
the filtered output of MyDerivedParameter.
Note: Setting default filter settings in the Parameter Defaults table will change the output of a
"freshly" dropped parameter; but these settings do not get automatically update an existing
parameter in a display. You will need to re-load the Desktop (click the ChangeDesktop
button) to change the output of displays that already have data/parameters; or re-drop the
parameter into the display(s).

SetFilterActive(Parameter, FilterState) Filter State: 0 = Off, 1 = On

SetFilterAlgorithm(Parameter, FilterType) Filter Type: 0 = none, 1 = Butterworth, 2
= Elliptical
SetFilterHighCutoff(Parameter, HighHz) Filter High Cut-Off Frequency
SetFilterLowCutoff(Parameter, LowHz) Filter Low Cut-Off Frequency
SetFilterOrder(Parameter, FilterOrder) Filter Order: 1- 8
SetFilterType(Parameter, FilterPassType) Filter Pass Type: 0 = Low pass, 1 = High
pass, 2 = Band pass
Applying Null corrections to derived parameters
Setting up Null corrections is slightly different than the filtering example. The options for the
NullCorrection field in the Parameter Defaults Table entry for derived parameters consist of
Equation Result or Equation Inputs; the null biases can either be applied to the result of the
equation or to all the parameters that are inputs to the derived equation. Equation Inputs will
apply Null correction on all of the equation’s input parameters with the bias based on the
associated NullBias field of each input parameter’s Parameter Defaults Table entry. Derived
input parameters within derived parameters will apply Equation Inputs to all subsequent
derived parameters at each level of the equation. When using Equation Inputs one can also
selectively change the Null correction state for any input parameter. For example, if you set
the MyDerived parameter to use Equation Inputs for Null correction but want to disable Null
correction on ParamB, the equation would look as follows: SetFilterActive(ParamA,1),
SetFilterActive(ParamB,1), SetNullCorrection(ParamB,0), ParamA+ParamB (0 sets the null
correction to Off for ParamB). This equation applies Null corrections for ParamA (and all of
its input parameters if ParamA is a derived parameter) but will not apply null corrections to
ParamB.
All Parameter Default SET Functions
SetAlpha(Parameter, AlphaId) Kaiser-Bessel Alpha if used (alphaId:
0=2.0, 1=2.5, 2=3.0, 3=3.5)
SetAThreshRangeMax(Parameter, Value) Alarm Threshold Max
SetAThreshRangeMin(Parameter, Value) Alarm Threshold Min
SetAveragingMethod(Parameter, AverageId) Frequency Averaging Method (aveId:
0=None, 1=Frequency)
SetBlockSize(BlockSize) Size of Block for Frequency Calculation:
0=64, 1=128, 2=256, 3=512, 4=1024,
5=2048, 6=4096, 7=8192
SetBlocksPerAverage(Parameter, Value) Number of Frequency Blocks to Average
SetFilterActive(Parameter, ActiveId) Filter State (activeId: 0=Off, 1=On)
SetFilterAlgorithm(Parameter, AlgorithmId) Filter Algorithm Type (aldId: 0=none,
1=Butterworth, 2=Ellipitical)

219
 Managing and Creating Parameters

SetFilterHighCutoff(Parameter, HighHz) Filter High Cut-Off Frequency

SetFilterLowCutoff(Parameter, LowHz) Filter Low Cut-Off Frequency
SetFilterOrder(Parameter, FilterOrderNumber) Filter Order (1...8)
SetFilterType(Parameter, PassId) Filter Pass Type: (PassId: 0=Lowpass,
1=Highpass, 2=Bandpass)
SetFScaleMax(Parameter, Value) Default Freq Domain ScaleMax
SetFScaleMin(Parameter, Value) Default Freq Domain ScaleMin
SetLLNegative(Parameter, Value) Negative Load Limit
SetLLPositive(Parameter, Value) Positive Load Limit
SetNullCorrection(Parameter, CorrectionId) Null correction applied to parameter value
(corrId: 0=No, 1=Yes, 2=yes equation
inputs, 3=yes equation result)
SetOverlap(Parameter, Overlap) Overlap portion of previous block to
produce next block (0..<1)
SetSignChange(Parameter, InvertId) Invert sign of parameter value (invertId:
0=No, 1=Yes)
SetSpikeChangeLimit(Parameter, Value) Spike Change Limit Value
SetSpikeCorMethod(Parameter, CorrectionId) Spike Correction Method (corrId: 0=None,
2=Last Value)
SetSpikeDetectionMethod(Parameter, Spike Detection Method (Id: 1=Absolute
DetectionId) change, 2=Slope change)
SetTScaleMax(Parameter, Value) Default Time Domain ScaleMax
SetTScaleMin(Parameter, Value) Default Time Domain ScaleMin
SetWildCorMethod(Parameter,CorrectionId) Wild Point Correction Method (corrId:
0=none, 1=Default value, 2=Last value)
SetWildCorValue(Parameter, Value) Wild Point Value if Correction Method = 1
SetWildPointRangeMax(Parameter, Value) Wild Point Range Max
SetWildPointRangeMin(Parameter, Value) Wild Point Range Min
SetWindowType(Parameter, TypeId) Frequency Analysis Window Type
(TypeId: 0=Rectangular, 1=Hanning,
2=Hamming, 3=Blackman,
4=KaiserBessel)
SetWThreshRangeMax(Parameter, Value) Warning Threshold Max
SetWThreshRangeMin(Parameter, Value) Warning Threshold Min

31.7. Creating an IAP Derived Parameter

IAP Derived parameters can receive and create data in real time and act the same as a TPP
parameter. An IAP Derived parameter is created using the same technique as a "regular"
derived parameter, using an in-line equation or a COM based add-in function as the Data
Source Argument. The IADS Server creates .iadsData files for each IAP Derived parameter.
You can change any derived parameter into an IAP Derived parameter and have it computed
on any machine (on the network) you designate as the Derived Parameter Server IAP, or the
default Derived Parameter Server (DPS) which is created by the system automatically.
Note: If you change a derived parameter to an IAP parameter in playback mode, you will see
no data for that parameter in a display (a data file will not be created for that IAP parameter
until you run the configuration in real time).

220
IADS User Manual

To create an IAP Derived parameter:

1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. In the Parameter column, type in a unique name for the IAP Derived parameter.
4. In the Data Source Type column, select IAP.
5. In the Data Source Argument column type in the equation or COM function.
6. Enter information in the remaining columns as required.
7. Click a Save option.
Depending on the equations it might actually be better to process the equations on the clients.
This is the case most of the time. Generally, the derived processing is only a small fraction of
the processing that the client PC has to endure. The main load is usually graphics and actually
data handling. The rule of thumb is to only use the IAP processing if absolutely necessary.
Advantages to running an equation on the Client:
1. The processing and storage requirements on the IADS Server are greatly reduced. In
some extreme cases, the storage and processing requirements are reduced by a factor of
10 or more (i.e. 1 gb vs 10 gb, 2 megs/second vs 20, etc).
2. Functions are processed on a "as needed" basis so what is being viewed on the Client at
that specific moment is calculated. This helps to keep the derived processing requirement
very low.
3. It gives the user more flexibility to correct the equation and have those changes take
effect "instantly" (and apply to all past data as well). Because the results of the equations
are not saved to disk, correction can be made at any time without the need to correct and
rewrite an entire data file.
4. Computations are in essence "parallelized" amongst the user PCs. Only users with a huge
amount of derived equations are strapped with the computational expense (an thus only
their display runs slower).
Disadvantages of running an equation on the Client:
1. It is possible to overload a single PC with derived equations, but this is extremely rare. It
generally only occurs when "heavy hitting" custom COM functions are being used (i.e.
non IADS developed).
2. Running an equation as an IAP can actually slow the client down because now it is forced
to get more data from the IADS Server. It's a fine balance and depends on the number of
parameters and their sample rate.
Advantages to running an equation on the IAP processor:
1. If you are developing a custom COM function (or derived equation for that matter) based
on an algorithm that does not tolerate time jumps or reversals, it is best to run it as an
IAP. On the client, the time for computation follows the user wherever they
jump/scroll/etc.
2. Again regarding custom COM functions... if ran on an IAP processor you no longer need
to distribute the custom dlls to each workstation. This helps with configuration control.

221
 Managing and Creating Parameters

3. If you develop an equation that takes a large amount of processing horsepower, you can
isolate this function to an IAP processor. As mentioned earlier, in most cases this is
usually a result of running a custom COM function and not an equation developed by the
IADS standard functions.
4. If your customer requires data files for these parameters due to some post test restriction
or otherwise, you can supply them a data file using this mechanism.
Disadvantages to running an equation on the IAP processor:
1. Single point of failure for derived calculations. It is rare, but if the IAP processor goes
down, all of your derived equations computed by that IAP will stop. Usually, this occurs
when you're running a custom COM function (non IADS). Of course the IAP processor
can be restarted.
2. Performance issues... If the IAP processor cannot compute the derived equations within a
given time frame (20 ms), this could cause misalignment of data or "blocked requests".
Of course, you can "load balance" the equation processing among several computers or
CPUs but this adds more complexity and testing time. In essence, the whole process
becomes more complex.
There is simply more complexity, risk, and work to run derived parameters as IAPs. It is a
great tool and absolutely needed in some instances; forced by one of the conditions above. It
is recommended to run without IAPs first and then evaluate the Client PCs. If you want to
press on with a comparison study, you can use the "Perf" button on the dashboard to bring up
a performance tool on the client PCs and check the "Updates per second" statistic. If it is not
acceptable, you can experiment by switching the parameters to IAP and running the test again
(noting the before and after update rate).
Note: The Operator Console will control and monitor the Derived Parameter Server IAP but
not individual IAP Derived parameters. If a Derived Parameter Server IAP stops running, all
the displays using the IAP Derived parameters within it will stop receiving data and no longer
update. When the IAP is restarted, the displays will start updating with data and back fill any
missing data for all the IAP Parameters.

31.8. Processing IAP Derived Parameters in Post Test

Generates .iadsData files for all IAP derived parameters in the configuration file; not
applicable to Order Arrival (OA) IAP parameters that contain the SetTriggerParameter()
function.
When the program starts, you will see the IAP processor window appear. It will compute all
the IAP equations (without SetTriggerParam) and create data files for each parameter. After
the process is complete, you can run the IADS Playback Client and examine the data (and
modify the equations if the data looks incorrect). You will have to re-run the shortcut each
time you change the equations to recalculate.
Command Line Entry
/iapDerived /local
To write out data files for IAP parameters:
1. Create a shortcut from the IADS Playback Client icon (not the Post Test Data Server
icon).
2. Rename the shortcut to Recompute IAP Equations.
3. Right-click on the shortcut > Properties.

222
 IADS User Manual

4. At the end of the Target line add /iapDerived /local ( "C:\Program

Files\IADS\ClientWorkstation\Iads.exe" /iapDerived /local ).
5. Click on the Recompute IAP Equations icon to start the program. Note: The program
will overwrite all your existing (non SetTriggerParam) IAP parameter data files within
the directory.
6. Select the config file that defines the IAP parameters to be computed. Again, the data
files within the directory will be overwritten during the computation.

31.9. Derived Equation Update Tool

This tool is used to replace existing derived equations in the Parameter Defaults Table.
Parameters in the Parameter Defaults table will be compared against the parameter name in
the imported text or csv file. If a match is found, the corresponding derived equation will
write over the existing derived equation in the table. This import process does not append
new derived parameters/equations to the table; to do this use the Table Import dialog.
Note: Displays will update with the new equations after a desktop re-load. To verify the new
derived equations, use the Validation Tool.
To replace existing derived equations:
1. On the Dashboard, click Configuration.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. Right-click with the cursor inside the table, then click Import Equations.
4. In the Import New Derived Equations dialog, navigate to the text or CSV file of interest.
5. Click Open.
To create an import text file:
1. Open Notepad on your computer.
2. For each replacement enter existing parameter name, new equation. Only one
replacement per line (see example).
3. Save the file.

To create an import csv file:

1. Open Excel on your computer.
2. For each replacement enter the existing parameter name in column one, and the new
equation in column two. Only one replacement per row.
3. Save as a CSV file.

223
 Managing and Creating Parameters

31.10. Enabling TPP Parameters

You can enable individual TPP parameters during real time using the Configuration Tool.
Enabling Parameters in the Configuration Tool, Parameter Defaults List:
1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. Select a row number of the TPP parameter that most closely resembles the parameter you
want to add.
4. Right-click Copy.
5. Right-click Paste.
6. Edit any fields as necessary for that parameter (remember to change the parameter name
to the parameter you want to add).
7. Save the Table.
Note: After you add a parameter it will only show data from the time it was dropped and
forward.

31.11. IADS Server Archiving and Nulling

Data Archiving
IADS starts archiving data to the output directory immediately (Persist is ON). If the test is
delayed you may want to reset the output files to keep the amount of data to be compressed to
a minimum. You can turn archiving off without affecting the workstations real time ability;
however, they will only have approximately 2.5 minutes of scroll back capability. If
archiving is reset, you should ALWAYS watch your Operator Console to make sure that the
buffer size of the drives decreases. If it does not, click the Reset button again.
Data Archive Status:

The Data Archive Status button on the IADS Server object indicates the current
archive status: green for On and red for Off. Clicking the button will bring up only the Data
Archive Status and Control portion of the this dialog. You can use the Server Archiving
dialog to Start, Stop or Reset archiving.
To reset data archiving:

1. At the Operator Console toolbar click the Server Archiving and Nulling button or

click the Data Archive Status button on the IADS Server object.
2. In the Server Archiving and Nulling dialog click the Reset button.
3. Do you want to append the existing data? Click Yes to append or No to discard.
4. Click Close.
Note: If time was moved forward prior to reset and you choose to append the existing data
files, any time gaps will be filled with the last good value in IADS. If time was moved
backwards prior to reset, a split data directory will be created automatically
(iadsOutputFilesRestored).

224
IADS User Manual

To turn on/off data archiving for a single parameter (TPP parameters only):
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder > ParameterDefaults.
3. Find the row of the parameter of interest.
4. In the DataSourceArgument field enter Archive=Off (to re-enable archiving enter
Archive=On).
5. Save the table.
6. Restart the server (CDS). Processing options are applied only during server startup.
To turn off ALL data archiving:
 Click the Off button.

Nulling
An unlimited number of null groups can be added to IADS and sampled simultaneously
during a test. Sampling can occur for 1-30 seconds starting at the time the Start button is
clicked, or backwards from that time when the Start button is clicked. A status message is
displayed in the dialog each time nulling is started. The operator is required to start the
nulling at the Operator Console. Once applied, it can take up to a minute before the user will
see the data adjustment. The workstation may pause momentarily and then the nulled data
will be displayed.
Nulling is set by the user in the Parameter Defaults table. The system will take the null
average of all null baseline equation values calculated during the nulling period and apply the
result to the Null Bias value. The start time and end time of the Null Bias correction period is
stamped in the Null Corrections table in the Configuration Tool. A nulling report with this
information and more is generated by clicking the Nulling Report button in the dialog and is
saved to the Logs folder in the IADS data output directory as iadsNullReportLog.txt.

225
 Managing and Creating Parameters

Note: If the Group Selection list is empty in the dialog, or a null group is "missing" in the list,
parameters in the Parameter Defaults Table have not been assigned a null group.
To start nulling:

1. At the Operator Console toolbar click the Server Archiving and Nulling button. If

the button is grayed out click the Allow Access to All Tools button to allow access
to all tools.
2. Click on one or more nulling groups in the Group Selection box to select them. Null
groups that do not have any assigned parameters will not show up in the list.
3. Select the sampling period 1-30 seconds.
4. Select a sampling direction. Sampling can start at the time the Start button is clicked, or
go backwards from that time when the Start button is clicked.
5. Click the Start button. The nulling process will complete after the allotted time and
update as so in the message window.
6. Click Close.
To generate a nulling report:
 Click the Nulling Report button. The report file is available in the IADS data output
directory Logs folder as iadsNullReportLog.txt.
To automatically add Event Markers at the beginning and end of the nulling session:
 At the Operator Console click the Settings drop down menu > Create Event Marker on
Nulling.

31.12. Sign Change

You can change the sign of your data in the Parameter Defaults Table. Sign change simply
multiplies your data by –1.
To Change the Sign of your Data:
1. On the Dashboard, click Configuration.
2. Open the Data Folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. Select the Sign Change cell and select Yes.
4. Save the table and re-drop the parameter to see the changes.

226
 IADS User Manual

32. Functions and Equation

32.1. Equation Operators and Functions
Note: A derived equation that contains a parameter name exclusively of numbers (or a
parameter name that has the same name as a function in IADS) must have { } around the
name. For example, Avg({1234}, 100)

To view the function list in the Configuration Tool, press Shift+F3 or click the Tools drop
down menu > Function Lookup Dialog.
Functions
Avg(Parameter, nPoints, [Optional] The range to average (nPoints: 0 = running)
Reset)
AvgDev(Parameter, nPoints) Average Deviation
Choose(Index, ChoiceForValue1, If Index = 1, returns 1st value; if index = 2, returns 2nd
ChoiceForValue2, value, etc...
...ChoiceForValueN)
Clamp(Parameter, Min, Max) Returns a value limited to range >= min and <= max
ConfigQuery("Select name of item Returns the value from a selected cell in the table. For
from table name where Parameter = example ConfigQuery("Select UpdateRate from
'Parameter Name'") ParameterDefaults where Parameter = 'AOA'")
Decom(BlobParameter, ByteOffset, Arg6 - Data type to return: Int = 0, IEEEFloat = 1,
NumBytes, StartBit, StopBit, 1750Float = 2, CharString = 3, Array = 4
DataType, Signed, ReverseBytes) Arg7 - Signed: True, False or False = 0, True = 1
Example: Decom(MyParameter, 0, 4, Arg8 - Reverse Bytes: True, False or False = 0, True = 1
0, 31, 1, True, False) To extract ASCII values, set the ParamType to ascii in
the Parameter Defaults table
FirstDerivative(Parameter) Calculates the rate at which the parameter changes per
data point (velocity)
GetConstant("ConstantName") Returns the constant for the corresponding name from
the Constants Table in the Configuration Tool
GetData("Parameter", Value) Returns the value of a parameter
GetDataStatus("Parameter") Return values: iadsStatusOk = 0; iadsNoDataAvailable
= 1; iadsDataNotYetAvailable = 2; iadsEquationError =
3;
Example: GetDataStatus( param ) == 0 ? TRUE :
FALSE
Add to the Visible property of the control

227
Functions and Equation

GetDecomStatus(Parameter) Returns the decom status of a parameter

GetMissionAttribute("AttributeName For example: GetMissionAttribute("ProjectID")
")
GetStreamDecomStatus("StreamNa Returns decom status given the stream name input
me")
GetStreamName(Parameter) Returns the name of the PCM stream that the parameter
is in
GetStreamNumber(Parameter) Returns the number of the PCM stream that the
parameter is in
GetTestPointActive( ) Returns the state of the test point button (start/stop)
GetTestPointInfo("TableName", Return test point information from Actual Flutter or
"ColumnName", Time) Loads Test Points Logs tables
GetTestPointInfoEx("UserGroup", Return test point information from PlannedTestPointEx
"ColumnName", table
ValueToReturnIfNotExists) Value to return if one does not exist can be string or
number
GetTimePerSample(Parameter) Time Per Sample (1/sr)
GetUpdateRate(Parameter) Sample/Update rate per second
GetUserInput("OutputName") Returns the value of the input object (calls the
OutputName property)
GetValue("AnalysisWindowName.D Returns the value of the display property. For example
isplay GetValue("Flutter.Circle1", "TransparencyFactor") will
Name", "PropertyName") return the current value of the transparency for the circle
GetValue("DisplayName","Property on the Flutter Analysis Window
Name")
GetValueAtTime(Parameter, Time) Returns the value of the parameter at the specified time
If Then Else Expr1 ? Expr2 : Expr3 If Then Else Statement
IF(Expression, ValueIfTrue, If Statement
ValueIfFalse)
IfThen(BooleanExpression1,Value1, Compound IfThen Statement
....BooleanExpressionN,ValueN )
InRange(Parameter, Value, Returns True if the value falls between the negative and
Deviation) positive deviation
Integral(Parameter, nPoints, Numerical integration using rectangular rule method
[Optional] Reset) (nPoints: 0 = running)
Interpolate1D(Parameter, "Series of One dimensional data interpolation (table lookup):
comma separated X/Y pairs with a InterpId: 0=Nearest neighbor, 1=Floor, 2=Ceil,
comma separating each value or 3=Linear Interp, 4=Spline Interp
CSV path and file name", InterpId)
Interpolate2D(RowParameter, Two dimensional data interpolation (table lookup).
ColumnParameter, "Excel or CSV Arguments 4-6 are optional.
path and file name", [Optional]
InterpId, [Optional] Clamp,
[Optional] OutofBounds)
Interpolate3D(RowParm, The algorithm finds the four bounding cells defined by
ColumnParm, TableParm, the row parameter and the column parameter, in the
"C:\Path\Filename", [Optional]

228
IADS User Manual

InterpId, [Optional] Clamp, specified table (Z), and performs a bilinear

[Optional] OutOfBounds) interpolation.
IsValidFloat(Parameter) Returns a 1 if the float is valid; 0 if not
Kurtosis(Parameter, nPoints) Kurtosis
Latch(Parameter, Condition, Hold a parameter's value for "nSeconds" when a given
nSeconds) condition is true. If nSeconds < 0 for example, -1 then
infinite.
LoadLimit(Parameter) One dimensional load limit
LoadLimit2d("EnvelopeName", Two dimensional load limit
Parameter1, Parameter2, OriginID, OriginID: 0 = From origin, 1 = Vertical from Y =0, 2 =
[Optional] EnvGroup, [Optional] Horizontal from X =0; Envelope Group and SubGroup
EnvSubGroup) are optional
MakeAscii(NumberOfCharsPerPara Creates an ascii string out of one or more parameters
meter, Parameter1, Parameter2, .... Verify the ParamType entry in the Parameter Defaults
ParameterN) Table for this derived parameter is ascii

MakeBlob(NumberOfBitsPerParame Concatenate multiple words into a "blob" (packet). To

ter, Parameter1, Parameter2, .... use the function to recreate the original packet, trigger
ParameterN) off the last parameter in the PCM map:
MakeBlob(NumberOfBitsPerParame SetTriggerParam(ParameterN), MakeBlob(nBits,
ter, "DataGroupName") Parameter1, Parameter2, ... ParameterN).
Verify the ParamType entry in the
Parameter Defaults Table for this
derived parameter is set to Blob.
MakeBlob2(NumberOfBitsPerParam Concatenate multiple consecutive words from a single
eter1, Parameter, nPoints) parameter into a 'blob' packet. For best results, set the
SetEquationUpdateRate(0), equation output to aperiodic:
MakeBlob2(NumberOfBitsPerParam SetEquationUpdateRate(0), MakeBlob2(nBits,
eter1, Parameter, nPoints) Parameter, nPoints).
Verify the ParamType entry in the
Parameter Defaults Table for this
derived parameter is set to Blob.
Max(Parameter, nPoints, [Optional] Maximum (nPoints: 0 = running)
Reset)
MaxN(Parameter1,Parameter2, ... Maximum value across the list of parameters
ParameterN)
MeanRemove(Parameter, nPoints, Mean Removal (nPoints: 0 = running)
[Optional] Reset)
Median(Parameter, nPoints) Median
Min(Parameter, nPoints, [Optional] Minimum (nPoints: 0 = running)
Reset)
MinN(Parameter1, Parameter2, ... Minimum value across the list of parameters
ParameterN)
ParmEU(Parameter, Gain1, Offset1, Performs an EU conversion using the following
Gain2, Offset2) equation: ((parameter x gain 1) + offset 1) / (parameter
x gain 2)+ offset 2))
PearsonsR(Parameter1, Parameter2, Pearsons Linear Correlation
nPoints)

229
Functions and Equation

PercentDistance(Value, MinRange, Percent Distance ID

ZeroPoint, MaxRange)
PercentDistance2d(X, Y, "Series of Percent Distance 2D
comma separated XY pairs with a
comma separating each value",
OriginX, OriginY)
PolyN(Parameter, Order, Compute a Nth degree polynomial given coefficients
Coeff(DegN), Coeff(DegN-1), ...,
Coeff(Deg0))
Prev(Parameter, nPoints) Previous value n points back
Rand( ) Random Pseudo (0..1)
Randn( ) Random Normal (0..1)
Randu( ) Random Uniform (0..1)
Rms(Parameter, nPoints) Root Mean Square
Say("Text to speak", Minimum Speech Synthesis - Requires SpVoice libraries
number of seconds between repeat)
SecondDerivative(Parameter) Calculates the change in the rate of the parameter per
data point (acceleration)
SetDataOutputSize(MaxLengthOfStr Default ascii derived output is 40 characters. Set the
ing), OriginalAsciiEquation MaxLengthOfString to any number; may increase
memory usage.
SetEquationUpdateRate(Rate) Sets the update (sample) rate: sample and hold for
SetEquationUpdateRate(Rate), upsample, or decimation for downsample. No
Parameter resampling filters are applied (note: prior to decimation,
an anti-aliasing low pass filter is recommended).
SetParameterDelay(Parameter, Shifts a parameter's value in time by nPts (positive
nPoints) value = future,
negative value = past); affects every instance of the
parameter within the entire equation. A positive value
will not display correctly in real time because the
equation cannot go into a future time that doesn't exist
SetTriggerParam(Parameter1), For Example: SetTriggerparam(X),(X + A + D)
MyEquation(Parameter1,
Parameter2, etc...)
Skew(Parameter, nPoints) Skew
Sprintf("C String Format", Returns a value in the specified format preceded by the
Parameter) string
SScanf(Ascii parameter or "Quoted Returns a value from a string with the specified format
text", "C String Format")
StdDev(Parameter, nPoints) Standard Deviation
StrCmp("String1", "String2") Compares two strings and returns 0 if both strings are
identical
StrCmpi("String1", "String2") Compares two strings and returns 0 if both strings are
equal; ignores case
StrStr("String1", "String2") Locates the first identical occurrence of string2 in
string1 and returns a pointer to the first occurrence; null
if no sub-string exists

230
IADS User Manual

StrStri("String1", "String2") Locates the first occurrence (ignores case) of string2 in

string1 and returns a pointer to the first occurrence; null
if no sub-string exists
Sum(Parameter, nPoints, [Optional] Summation (nPts: 0=running)
Reset)
Switch(SwitchValue,CaseValue,Retu "C" Switch Statement
rnValue,
....,CaseValueN,ReturnValueN )
This
TrackingBandPassFilter(Parameter1, Applies a tracking Band Pass filter to the specified
Parameter2, BandwidthPercentage, parameter; Parameter2 is the center frequency parameter
Order, nPointsBetweenFilterRecalc)
ValueRepeats(Parameter, Reset, Determines if any value repeats within a sequence; a
StartThreshold) new sequence can be started with the reset flag
Variance(Parameter, nPoints) The Variance function is used to determine if a
parameter has changed during a given range of time or
number of data points

Bitwise: In IADS the Least Significant Bit is Bit 0.

Bit_Pick(Parameter, StartBit, nBits) Extract bits from a discrete number. Assign a Ulong
ParamType for 64 bit words (re-drop parameter if
necessary)
Bit_Pick_Ones(Parameter, StartBit, Bit Pick with ones complement
nBits)
ByteSwap16(Parameter) Byte swaps a 16 bit value
ByteSwap32(Parameter) Byte swaps a 32 bit value
ByteSwap64(Parameter) Byte swaps a 64 bit value
Concat(UpperBitsParameter, Concatenates two arbitrary sized values give bit
StartBit, StopBit, positions
LowerBitsParameter, StartBit,
StopBit)
Concat16(UpperByte, LowerByte) Concatenates two 8 bit values into a single 16 bit value
Concat32(UpperByte, LowerByte) Concatenates two 16 bit values into a single 32bit value
Concat64(UpperByte, LowerByte) Concatenates two 32 bit values into a single 64 bit
value. Set the ParamType in the Configuration Tool to
Ulong (re-drop parameter if necessary)
LSB(Parameter) Returns the least significant byte
LSDW(Parameter) Returns the least significant double word
LSW(Parameter) Returns the least significant word
MSB(Parameter) Returns most significant byte
MSDW(Parameter) Returns the most significant double word
MSW(Parameter) Returns the most significant word
OB2F(Parameter, nBits, LowerLimit, Offset binary to float
[Optional]UpperLimit)
ReverseBits(Parameter, nBits) Reverses the bit order
Rotl(Value, nBits, WordSize) Bitwise Rotate Left (word size is optional) see Bitwise
topic

231
Functions and Equation

Rotr(Value, nBits, WordSize) Bitwise Rotate Right (word size is optional) see Bitwise
topic

Conversions:
AtoF(Parameter) Converts a string to a float
AtoI(Parameter) Converts a string to an integer
BCDtoValue(Parameter, StartBit, Converts a BCD (binary coded decimal) to a float value
StopBit, Scale,... StartBitN,
StopBitN, ScaleN)
Cart2Polar_R(Value1, Value2) Cartesian to Polar; return R (length)
Cart2Polar_Theta(Value1, Value2) Cartesian to Polar; return Theta (radians angle)
Cart2Sph_Az(Value1, Value2) Cartesian to spherical coordinates; return azimuth
Cart2Sph_El(Value1, Value2, Cartesian to spherical coordinates; return elevation
Value3)
ConvertToFloat(Parameter) Re-interprets the bits of the parameter as floating point.
ConvertToFloat32(Parameter) Converts data format to 32-bit float [type: 0=IEEE,
1=1750] Set the ParamType in
the Configuration Tool to Float (re-drop parameter if
necessary)
ConvertToFloat64(Parameter) Converts data format to 64-bit float. Set the ParamType
in the Configuration Tool
to Double (re-drop parameter if necessary). For
example,
(ConvertToFloat64(Concat64(Concat32(Parm4,Parm3),
Concat32(Parm2,Parm1)))
ConvertToInt(Parameter, StartBit, Converts data format to integer from start bit to stop bit
StopBit)
ConvertToInt16(Parameter) Reinterprets the bits of the parameter as integer.
ConvertToInt32(Parameter) Converts data format to 32-bit integer. Set the param
type to Int.
ConvertToInt64(Parameter) Converts data format to 64-bit integer. Set the param
type to Int.
ConvertUnits(Parameter, Uses entries in the Unit Conversions table
"SourceUnits", "DestUnits")
Deg2Minutes(Degrees) Converts lat/long degrees to minutes
Deg2Rad(AngleInDegrees) Converts degrees to radians angle
Deg2Seconds(Degrees) Converts lat/long degrees to seconds
LatLonAlttoX(GeoId, Units, Lat, Converts geodetic coordinates to return X
Lon, Alt) Geoid; Units: 0 = Meters, 1 = Feet
LatLonAlttoY(GeoId, Units, Lat, Converts geodetic coordinates to return Y
Lon, Alt) Geoid; Units: 0 = Meters, 1 = Feet
LatLonAlttoZ(GeoId, Units, Lat, Converts geodetic coordinates to return Z
Lon, Alt) Geoid; Units: 0 = Meters, 1 = Feet
NormalizedAz(Az, El, Roll, Pitch, Returns normalized azimuth
Yaw, Heading)
NormalizedEl(Az, El, Roll, Pitch, Returns normalized elevation
Yaw, Heading)

232
IADS User Manual

Polar2Cart_X(Radius, ThetaRadians) Polar to Cartesian; return X

Polar2Cart_Y(Radius, ThetaRadians) Polar to Cartesian; return Y
Rad2Deg(AngleInRadians) Converts radians to degrees angle
Sph2Cart_i(Azimuth, Elevation) Spherical to Cartesian; return i
Sph2Cart_j(Azimuth, Elevation) Spherical to Cartesian; return j
Sph2Cart_k(Azimuth, Elevation) Spherical to Cartesian; return k
XYZtoAlt(GeoId, Units, X, Y, Z) Converts ECEF coordinates to return altitude
Geoid; Units: 0 = Meters, 1 = Feet
XYZtoLat(GeoId, Units, X, Y, Z) Converts ECEF coordinates to return latitude
Geoid; Units: 0 = Meters, 1 = Feet
XYZtoLon(GeoId, Units, X, Y, Z) Converts ECEF coordinates to return longitude
Geoid; Units: 0 = Meters, 1 = Feet

Signal Generation:
LogSweep(Amplitude, MinFreq, Example: LogSweep(2,1,10,10)
MaxFreq,
SlewRateDecadesPerSecond)
SawtoothWave(MinAmp, MaxAmp, Example: SawToothWave(0,1,0.5)
FreqHz)
SineWave(FreqHz, Amplitude, DC Example: SineWave(1,1,0,0)
Offset, PhaseShiftRadians, Sine Fi = phase shift in radians; Damping Factor (0 by
[Optional] Damping Factor, default) and Damping Time are optional
[Optional] DampingTimeSeconds
SquareWave(MinAmp, MaxAmp, Example: SquareWave(0,1,0.5) returns a value of 0 or 1
FreqHz)
Sweep(Amplitude, MinFreq, Example: Sweep(10.0,0.5,35.0,0.5)
MaxFreq, SlewRateHzPerSec)
WhiteNoise(MinAmp, MaxAmp) Example: WhiteNoise(-Rand(), Rand())

Time & Date: When used in a text primitive, "t" or "T" added to the
value format property increases/decreases time
precision (%0.T)
CurrentDay( ) Returns Dashboard day
CurrentTime( ) Returns Dashboard time hh:mm:ss; seconds since
Midnight
CurrentTimeOfYear( ) Returns Dashboard time ddd:hh:mm:ss; seconds since
New Year
CurrentTimeOfYearWall( ) Returns PC time ddd:hh:mm:ss; seconds since New
Year
CurrentYearWall( ) Returns PC year
EndTime( ) Stop time of test/data hh:mm:ss; seconds since Midnight
EndTimeOfYear( ) Stop time of test/data ddd:hh:mm:ss; seconds since New
Year
StartTime( ) Start time of test/data hh:mm:ss; seconds since
Midnight
StartTimeOfYear( ) Start time of test/data ddd:hh:mm:ss; seconds since New
Year

233
Functions and Equation

IRIGTimeToIADSTime(highTime, Takes IRIG time words and converts them to IADS

lowTime, microTime, isBCD, time. isBCD = True or False.
[Optional] bcdDays)
AcraTimeToIADSTime(highTime, Takes ACRA time words and converts them to IADS
lowTime, microTime , [Optional] time.
bcdDays)

Display:
GetBValue(ColorValue) Returns the B (RGB) color value
GetCursorPosX( ) Returns the cursor position at X coordinate
GetCursorPosY( ) Returns the cursor position at Y coordinate
GetGValue(ColorValue) Returns the G (RGB) color value
GetKey( ) Returns the key (keyboard) state
GetPixel(X, Y) Returns pixel at the X/Y coordinates
GetRValue(ColorValue) Returns the R (RGB) color value
GetThresholdsActive( ) Returns the state of the threshold enable button
(enable/disable)
HitTest("DisplayName", X, Y) Returns a 1 if true or a 0 if false
RGB(RedValue, GreenValue, Returns a RGB Color Value (0...255)
BlueValue)

Parameter Defaults Table GET/SET Functions:

GetAlpha(Parameter) If using KaiserBessel, Alpha is used: 0=2.0, 1=2.5,
SetAlpha(Parameter, AlphaID) 2=3.0, 3=3.5
GetAThreshRangeMax(Parameter) Alarm Threshold Max
SetAThreshRangeMax(Parameter,
Value)
GetAThreshRangeMin(Parameter) Alarm Threshold Min
SetAThreshRangeMin(Parameter,
Value)
GetAveragingMethod(Parameter) Frequency Averaging Method: 0=None, 1=Frequency
SetAveragingMethod(Parameter,
AverageID)
GetBlockSize(Parameter) Size of Block for Frequency Calculation: 0=64, 1=128,
SetBlockSize(BlockSize) 2=256, 3=512, 4=1024, 5=2048, 6=4096, 7=8192
GetBlocksPerAverage(Parameter) Number of Frequency Blocks to Average
SetBlocksPerAverage(Parameter,
Value)
GetFilterActive(Parameter) Filter State: 0=Off, 1=On
SetFilterActive(Parameter, ActiveId)
GetFilterAlgorithm(Parameter) Filter Algorithm Type: 0=None, 1=Butterworth,
SetFilterAlgorithm(Parameter, 2=Elliptic
AlgorithmId)
GetFilterHighCutoff(Parameter) Filter High Cut-Off Frequency
SetFilterHighCutoff(Parameter,
HighHz)
GetFilterLowCutoff(Parameter) Filter Low Cut-Off Frequency

234
IADS User Manual

SetFilterLowCutoff(Parameter,
LowHz)
GetFilterOrder(Parameter) Filter Order (1...8)
SetFilterOrder(Parameter,
FilterOrderNumber)
GetFilterPassType(Parameter) Filter Pass Type: 0=LowPass, 1=HighPass, 2=BandPass
SetFilterType(Parameter, PassId)
GetFScaleMax(Parameter) Default Freq Domain Scale Max
SetFScaleMax(Parameter, Value)
GetFScaleMin(Parameter) Default Freq Domain Scale Min
SetFScaleMin(Parameter, Value)
GetLLNegative(Parameter) Negative Load Limit
SetLLNegative(Parameter, Value)
GetLLPositive(Parameter) Positive Load Limit
SetLLPositive(Parameter, Value)
GetLongName(Parameter) Returns Long Name
GetNullAverage(Parameter) Null Average value
GetNullBaseline(Parameter) Null Baseline value
GetNullBias(Parameter) Null Bias being applied if Null Correction = Yes
GetNullCorrection(Parameter) Null Correction Applied to Parameter Value: 0=No,
SetNullCorrection(Parameter, 1=Yes, 2=yes equation inputs, 3=yes equation result
CorrectionId)
GetOverlap(Parameter) Overlap portion of previous block to produce next block
SetOverlap(Parameter, Overlap) (0..<1)
GetParamName(Parameter) Returns Parameter
GetShortName(Parameter) Returns Short Name
GetSignChange(Parameter) Invert Sign of Parameter Value: 0=No, 1=Yes
SetSignChange(Parameter, InvertId)
GetSpikeChangeLimit(Parameter) Spike Change Limit Value
SetSpikeChangeLimit(Parameter,
Value)
GetSpikeCorMethod(Parameter) Spike Correction Method: 0=None, 2=Last Value
SetSpikeCorMethod(Parameter,
CorrectionId)
GetSpikeDetectionMethod(Paramete Spike Detection Method: 1=Absolute Change, 2=Slope
r) Change
SetSpikeDetectionMethod(Parameter
, DetectionId)
GetTScaleMax(Parameter) Default Time Domain Scale Max
SetTScaleMax(Parameter, Value)
GetTScaleMin(Parameter) Default Time Domain Scale Min
SetTScaleMin(Parameter, Value)
GetUnits(Parameter) Returns Units
GetWildCorMethod(Parameter) Wild Point Correction Method: 0=None, 1=Default
SetWildCorMethod(Parameter,Corre Value, 2=Last Value
ctionId)
GetWildCorValue(Parameter) Wild Point Value if Correction Method = 1
SetWildCorValue(Parameter, Value)

235
Functions and Equation

GetWildPointRangeMax(Parameter) Wild Point Range Max

SetWildPointRangeMax(Parameter,
Value)
GetWildPointRangeMin(Parameter) Wild Point Range Min
SetWildPointRangeMin(Parameter,
Value)
GetWindowType(Parameter) Frequency Analysis Window Type: 0=Rectangular,
SetWindowType(Parameter, TypeId) 1=Hanning, 2=Hamming, 3=Blackman, 4=KaiserBessel
GetWThreshRangeMax(Parameter) Warning Threshold Max
SetWThreshRangeMax(Parameter,
Value)
GetWThreshRangeMin(Parameter) Warning Threshold Min
SetWThreshRangeMin(Parameter,
Value)

Math and Trig Functions:

Abs(Value) Absolute value
Cbrt(Value) Cube root
Ceil(Value) Ceiling - The integer >= the data value
Exp(Value) Exponential e^x
Fix(Value) Round towards zero
Floor(Value) Floor - The integer <= the data value
FMod(Value1, Value2) Floating point remainder of value1/value2 (value1 must
be greater than value2)
Ln(Value) Logarithm of base e
Log10(Value) Logarithm of base 10
Logn(Base, Value) Logarithm of arbitrary base
Neg(Value) Negate
Pow(Value1, Value2) Power of arbitrary base (value1^value2)
Round(Value) Round to nearest integer
Sqrt(Value) Square root
Trigonometric:
sin(Value) Sine of the input angle in radians
cos(Value) Cosine of the input angle in radians
tan(Value) Tangent of the input angle in radians
cotan(Value) Cotangent of the input angle in radians
sec(Value) Secant of the input angle in radians
cosec(Value) Cosecant of the input angle in radians
asin(Value) Inverse sine of the input angle in radians
acos(Value) Inverse cosine of the input angle in radians
atan(Value) Inverse tangent of the input angle in radians
atan2(Value1, Value2) Inverse tangent of the input angles in radians
acotan(Value) Inverse cotangent of the input angle in radians
asec(Value) Inverse secant of the input angle in radians
acosec(Value) Inverse cosecant of the input angle in radians
Hyperbolic:

236
 IADS User Manual

sinh(Value) Hyperbolic sine of the input angle in radians

cosh(Value) Hyperbolic cosine of the input angle in radians
tanh(Value) Hyperbolic tangent of the input angle in radians
cotanh(Value) Hyperbolic cotangent of the input angle in radians
sech(Value) Hyperbolic secant of the input angle in radians
cosech(Value) Hyperbolic cosecant of the input angle in radians
asinh(Value) Inverse hyperbolic sine of the input angle in radians
acosh(Value) Inverse hyperbolic cosine of the input angle in radians
atanh(Value) Inverse hyperbolic tangent of the input angle in radians
acotanh(Value) Inverse hyperbolic cotangent of the input angle in
radians
asech(Value) Inverse hyperbolic secant of the input angle in radians
acosech(Value) Inverse hyperbolic cosecant of the input angle in radians

32.2. Derived Function Lookup Tool

The purpose of the tool is to lookup a derived function in IADS.

To lookup a derived function:

1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Click the Tools drop down menu > Function Lookup Dialog (Shift+F3).
3. Click on a Function Category on the left side of the tool. To view the entire list of
functions click All.
4. Click on a Function Name on the right side of the tool to view the return type (if
applicable) and the derived function syntax.
5. Click Copy to copy the Function Name to the Clipboard.
6. Click OK to close the dialog.
Table of Functions
Note: Click on a Function Category or Function Name in the tool and use the up and down
arrow keys to scroll through the list. You can also press a keyboard key to jump to that letter
in the list.

237
Functions and Equation

238
 IADS User Manual

32.3. Derived Equations FAQ

 Can IADS assign a value of one parameter to another parameter?
Yes you can assign the value of one parameter to another parameter: Parameter B =
Parameter A. You cannot however set another parameters value within your derived equation:
Parameter B = Parameter A = 30 (error)
 Can IADS perform "pseudo-calculations", defined as calculation in which the result is
put back into the same parameter. Basically a self-modifying parameter that retains the
same parameter Id?
Yes for example: Parameter B = Parameter A + 1 or Parameter B = Rand()*3.1415
As the result is calculated, the value of "B" is updated and retains the same parameter ID. If
you use the name of your own derived parameter inside of the equation, it will update to the
"last corrected value".
 Can IADS perform calculations involving one or more input parameters and outputting
one or more resultant (new) parameters. The available derivation calculations will be pre-
defined during software development, but may include configurable constant value inputs
in the equations?
Yes the equations will be "always configurable" as IADS uses a just in time parser/interpreter
for all equations. Also, there are functions such as GetConst that allow your equation to
remain static while allowing you to modify the constant's value through a table called
Constants. Regarding the "output of more than one resultant new parameters". Each derived
equation is slated to output only a single parameter's value. There are techniques to get
around this limitation.
 Can IADS define a sequence of calculations, where outputs of one calculation can be fed
into the inputs of subsequent calculations?
Yes: Parameter A = Rand()*3.1415
Parameter B = Avg(Parameter A, 20)
 Can IADS perform calculations in a user defined order?
It is generally not necessary to define a specific order of derived parameter calculation. Iads
calculates a "dependency tree" and thus maintains the correct order of calculation depending
on the equation and it's input parameters. There are, however, advanced situations where this
might be appropriate. IAP parameters are calculated in the order that they are defined in the
parameter defaults table (top to bottom). The dependency tree rule from above is still in
effect; if you define the incorrect order, Iads will correct it (if possible). Some advanced user
defined equations without input parameters may need to be ordered manually (if necessary).
 Can IADS perform calculations that are "time" based. For example calculating the
average value for a parameter in a given time amount of time?
Yes: Avg(Param, NumPts) or Avg(Param, GetUpdateRate(Param)*NumSeconds)
 Can IADS perform calculations types that are "event" based. For example calculating the
calibrated airspeed when all the required input parameters arrive?
If you're asking "can IADS perform order arrival based calculations" vs a time aligned
calculation. If so, the answer is yes. Please refer to the SetTriggerParam function.
 Can IADS performing calculations types that are the "sample rate" based. For example a
digital filter that runs whenever a certain number of samples have been accumulated?

239
 Functions and Equation

Yes this is an inherent capability inside of IADS. Any parameter can be filtered. This extends
into all of the Frequency displays, and most of the other time domain calculations available in
IADS.
 Can IADS perform calculations based on its qualification state, for example, perform a
calculation if one or more of its inputs are not available?
Yes see the "GetData" function. The GetData function allows you to create a conditional
parameter, basically, "if the parameter is available then use its value, otherwise, use a
predefined value (0 in the example below).
GetData("A", 0) * 3.14
There's also a variant of GetData called "GetDataStatus"
GetDataStatus("A")
Here's the return values:
StatusOk = 0,
NoDataAvailable = 1,
DataNotYetAvailable = 2,
EquationError = 3
So you can build an equation like so:
GetDataStatus("A") == 0 ? A*3.14 : AlternativeAParameter * 3.14
Also, if you have "stale" information available for a parameter, you can simply add that
condition to your derived equation to achieve a point by point result:
AIsStale ? Prev(A,1)*3.14 : A * 3.14
 Does IADS allow the incorporation of new calculation definitions in the future?
Yes you can add custom functions to the system, and add new equations or change any
existing equations at any time (while testing in fact). We can also add new functions as user
request (as long as they are useful to everyone).

32.4. 1D Interpolation
One-dimensional data interpolation (table lookup). The most common usage of the
interpolation function is of the numeric type; an example of an ASCII setup is also detailed
below. 2D Interpolation and 3D interpolation functions are also available.

Syntax
Interpolate1D(Parameter, "C:\Path\Filename", InterpID)
Input Arguments Description
Arg1 Parameter or value

240
IADS User Manual

Arg2 Path and name of CSV file in quotations; or "Comma separated X/Y
pairs" (enter all values in the table from left to right, top to bottom,
removing white spaces/blanks)
Arg3 InterpID: 0 = Nearest neighbor, 1 = Floor, 2 = Ceiling, 3 = Linear, 4
= Natural Spline, 5 = Exact
Example equations in the Parameter Defaults table (references Excel files below)

To create a csv file for the Interpolate1D function:

Input (x,y) pairs into an excel file; the first column holds x values and the second column y
values. Save as CSV.
Numeric

Note: y values must be of the same type, e.g., numeric or ascii; not both.
Ascii

To use the Interpolate1D function to trigger messages:

1. Create a csv file (see shown above).
2. Create an Interp1D derived parameter and set the ParamType to ascii.
3. Create a Text object, for example.
4. Drag and drop the Interp1D derived parameter onto the text object and click Text.
- Or -
1. Drop the parameter onto the Text property of a Text object.
2. Click the in the Text property to bring up the Dynamics Wizard.
3. Click the Numerical Equation (Advanced) button > Next.
4. Under Condition enter True.
5. Under Value Equation enter Interpolate1D(Parameter, "path/filename.csv", 0)
6. Click Finish.
This example returns the desired border color of a text control when dropped onto the
BorderColor property:
Interpolate1D(Parameter1, "10, 0xFF0000, 20, 0x00FF00, 30, 0xFF00FF", 0)

241
 Functions and Equation

32.5. 2D Interpolation
IADS has a method for two-dimensional interpolation (given X and Y, find Z). The algorithm
finds the four bounding cells defined by the row parameter and the column parameter and
performs a bilinear interpolation. The return value is Z. Data input can either be an Excel or
CSV file. Values of X and Y in the spreadsheet must increase sequentially from top to
bottom, and left to right. Derived parameters can be used as inputs and must be of type
numeric.
Note: It is recommended to input data into Excel and save as a CSV file.
Syntax
Interpolate2D(RowParameter, ColumnParameter, "C:\Path\Filename", [Optional] InterpID,
[Optional] Value, [Optional] OutOfBounds)
Note: In order to use Arg6, Arg4 and Arg5 must be included.
Input Description
Arguments
Arg1 Row (x) parameter.
Arg2 Column (y) parameter.
Arg3 Path and name of Excel or CSV file in quotations (csv
recommended), or define the entire table within the equation. To do
so, enter all values in the table from left to right, top to bottom,
removing white spaces (blanks). See the example below that reflects
those values shown in the diagram.
Arg4 [Optional] InterpID: 3 = Linear (This function currently supports
Linear interpolation only)
Arg5 [Optional] Value unused; kept for backwards compatibility. Set to
zero if Arg6 is used.
Arg6 [Optional] OutOfBounds: Enter a constant to return if input(s) go
outside the table; “Table” to return an interpolated value based on
table edge (see the example below). If no argument is present, the
function will output 0.0 for off-table inputs.
For Example:
Interpolate2D(RowParameter, ColumnParameter, "D:\Test\2DInterp.xls", 3, 0, "Table")
Interpolate2D(RowParameter, ColumnParameter,
"5,3,10,20,30,1950,150.697,199.592,187.625,1960,....", 3, 0, "Table")
Note: The equation uses "Table" for Arg6 which tells the algorithm to use the edge values
250.287 and 322.767 (shown below) for interpolation of the result.

242
 IADS User Manual

32.6. 3D Interpolation
IADS has a method for three-dimensional interpolation (given X, Y and Z, find W). The
algorithm finds the four bounding cells defined by the row parameter and the column
parameter, in the specified table (Z), and performs a bilinear interpolation. Values of X, Y
and Z in the spreadsheet must increase sequentially from top to bottom, and left to right.
Derived parameters can be used as inputs and must be of type numeric.
Note: It is recommended to input data into Excel and save as a CSV file.
Syntax
Interpolate3D(RowParm, ColumnParm, TableParm, "C:\Path\Filename", [Optional]
InterpID, [Optional] Value, [Optional] OutOfBounds)
Note: In order to use Arg7, Arg5 and Arg6 must be included.
Input Arguments Description
Arg1 Row (x) parameter.
Arg2 Column (y) parameter.
Arg3 Table (z) parameter.
Arg4 Path and name of Excel or CSV file in quotations (csv recommended),
or define the entire table within the equation. To do so, enter all values
in the tables (starting with the first table) from left to right, top to
bottom, removing white spaces (blanks). See the example below that
reflects those values shown in the diagram.
Arg5 [Optional] InterpID: 3 = Linear (This function currently supports
Linear interpolation only)
Arg6 [Optional] Value unused; kept for backwards compatibility. Set to zero
if Arg7 is used.
Arg7 [Optional] OutOfBounds: Enter a constant to return if input(s) go
outside the table; “Table” to return an interpolated value based on table
edge. If no argument is present, the function will output 0.0 for off-
table inputs.
For an example of "Table" usage in Arg7 please see the 2D
Interpolation help topic diagram.

For example:
Interpolate3D(xParameter, yParameter, zParameter, "D:\Test\3DInterpolationTable.csv")
Interpolate3D(xParameter, yParameter, zParameter,
"5,3,3,1,10,20,30,1950,150.697,199.592,187.625,1960,....")

243
 Functions and Equation

Note: A blank line is required between each dimension of the tables. (In the CSV file this is
represented as a comma.)

32.7. Aero Functions

The primary purpose of the AeroFuncs Custom Derived Function is to monitor aircraft flight
conditions and altitude parameters from measured values. The IADS AeroFuncs.dll is
included in IADS and registers automatically upon installation of the IADS application.

To create an AeroFuncs derived parameter:

1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder > click Parameter Defaults.
3. Copy and paste an existing row of data for a parameter that is similar to the one you are
creating.
4. In the Parameter column enter a unique parameter name.
5. In the Data Source Type column, select Derived.
6. Enter the desired AeroFuncs function in the Data Source Argument column, for example:
AeroFuncs.Airspeed(Dynamic Pressure parameter)
7. Click the Save button.

244
IADS User Manual

Note: For quick setup, run and test all of your equations as type Derived (try to refrain from
scrollback usage) and then transition to type IAP before flight test or data playback tests.
Velocity Functions
Airspeed
Description: Calculates speed in KNOTS given dynamic pressure.
Syntax: AeroFuncs.Airspeed(Dynamic Pressure)

Equivalent Airspeed
Description: Calculates equivalent airspeed in KNOTS given static pressure and MACH
number.
Syntax: AeroFuncs.EquivalentAirspeed(Static Pressure, Mach)

Mach
Description: Calculates MACH number given dynamic pressure and static pressure.
Syntax: AeroFuncs.Mach(Dynamic Pressure, Static Pressure)

Mach Error
Description: Calculates MACH number error given indicated MACH and corrected MACH
Syntax: AeroFuncs.MachError(Indicated Mach, Corrected Mach)

True Airspeed
Description: Calculates true airspeed in knots given equivalent airspeed and ambient density
ratio.
Syntax: AeroFuncs.TrueAirpseed(Equivalent Airspeed, Ambient Density Ratio)

Velocity Error

245
Functions and Equation

Description: Calculates velocity error in knots given indicated airspeed and corrected
airspeed.
Syntax: AeroFuncs.VelocityError(Indicated Airspeed, Corrected Airspeed)

Pressure Functions (all pressures are in Hg)

Total Pressure
Description: Calculates total pressure given static pressure, dynamic pressure and total
pressure source position error.
Syntax: AeroFuncs.TotalPressure(Static Pressure, Dynamic Pressure, Position Error)

Static Pressure
Description: Calculates calibrated static pressure given static pressure, dynamic pressure,
position error correction and angle of attack (AOA) correction.
Syntax: AeroFuncs.StaticPressure(Static Pressure, Dynamic Pressure, Position Error, AOA
Correction)

Differential Pressure
Description: Calculates calibrated differential (dynamic) pressure given total pressure and
calibrated static pressure.
Syntax: AeroFuncs.DifferentialPressure(Total Pressure, Static Pressure)

Incompressible Dynamic Pressure

Description: Calculates incompressible dynamic pressure given static pressure and MACH
number.
Syntax: AeroFuncs.IncompressibleDynamicPressure(Static Pressure, Mach)

Incompressible Dynamic Pressure (PSF)

Description: Calculates incompressible dynamic pressure in pounds per square foot given
static pressure and MACH number.
Syntax: AeroFuncs.IncompressibleDynamicPressure_PSF(Static Pressure, Mach)

Stagnation Pressure
Description: Calculates stagnation pressure (free stream total pressure) given calibrated
static pressure and MACH.
Syntax: AeroFuncs.StagPressure(Static Pressure, Mach)

246
IADS User Manual

Indicated Pressure Ratio

Description: Calculates indicated pressure ration given indicated static pressure.
Syntax: AeroFuncs.IndPressureRatio(Static Pressure)

Ambient Pressure Ratio

Description: Calculates ambient pressure ratio given calibrated static pressure
Syntax: AeroFuncs.AmbPressureRatio(Static Pressure)

Altitude Functions
Pressure Altitude
Description: Calculates altitude in FEET given static pressure.
Syntax: AeroFuncs.PressureAltitude(Static Pressure)

Altitude Error
Description: Calculates altitude error given indicated pressure altitude and corrected pressure
altitude (output is the same units as the two inputs).
Syntax: AeroFuncs.AltitudeError(Indicated Pressure Altitude, Corrected Pressure Altitude)

Air Functions:
Static Air Temperature
Description: Calculates static air temperature in degrees C given static air temperature ratio.
Syntax: AeroFuncs.StaticAirTemp(Static Air Temperature Ratio)

Static Air Temperature Ratio

Description: Calculates static air temperature ratio given measured total temperature, MACH
number and K factor (K factor is set at 0.99 if the argument is left blank).
Syntax: AeroFuncs.StaticAirTempRatio(Total Temperature, Mach, K factor)

247
 Functions and Equation

Total Air Temperature

Description: Calculates total air temperature in degrees C given static air temperature ratio
and MACH number.
Syntax: AeroFuncs.TotalAirTemp(Static Air Temperature Ratio, Mach)

Ambient Density Ratio

Description: Calculates ambient air density ratio given ambient pressure ratio and ambient
temperature ratio.
Syntax: AeroFuncs.AmbDensityRatio(Ambient Pressure Ratio, Ambient Temperature Ratio)

Miscellaneous Functions:
Speed of Sound
Description: Calculates the speed of sound in knots given ambient air temperature in degrees
Fahrenheit.
Syntax: AeroFuncs.SpeedOfSound(Temperature in Degrees Fahrenheit)

32.8. Bitwise Operations

Bitwise operators and functions are available in IADS to manipulate the internal bits of a
particular parameter word. In IADS the Least Significant Bit is Bit 0.

Bitwise Operators Example (uses ParamABC and ParamXYZ from

above)
& Bitwise And - Compares each ParamABC & ParamXYZ 0x1900
pair of corresponding bits in two
values; In each pair, the result is 1
only when both bits are 1,
otherwise 0.
| Bitwise inclusive Or - Compares ParamABC &| ParamXYZ 0x5F1C
each pair of corresponding bits in
two values; In each pair, result is
1 if either bit is 1, otherwise 0.
!& Bitwise exclusive Or - ParamABC !& ParamXYZ 0x461C
Compares each pair of
corresponding bits in two values;

248
IADS User Manual

In each pair, result is 1 if either

bit is 1, but not both, otherwise 0.
~ Bitwise one's complement - ~ParamABC 0xFFFFA6E3
"Flips" each bit in the value; the
complement of 1 is 0 and the
complement of 0 is 1.
<< Bitwise Shift Left - Shifts the ParamABC << 2 0x16470
bits of a given value to the left;
the bits that are shifted out are
discarded, and zeroes are shifted
in.
>> Bitwise Shift Right - Shifts the ParamABC >> 2 0x1647
bits of a given value to the right;
the bits that are shifted out are
discarded, and zeroes are shifted
in.

Bitwise Functions Example (uses ParamABC from above)

Bit_Pick(param, startBit, Bit_Pick(ParamABC, 8, 5) 0x19
nBits) Bit Pick - Specific bits of a
parameter word are extracted
Bit_Pick_Ones(param, startBit, Bit_Pick_Ones(ParamABC, 8, 5) 0x6
nBits) Bit Pick one's complement
- Specific bits of a parameter
word are extracted with the values
"flipped"
Rotl(param, nBits, wordSize*) Bitwise rotate left - Rotates the bits of a given value to the
left. *Word size is optional; must be greater than nBits; valid range is 0-32. Note: Derived
Parameter Type must be discrete (32 bit) or ulong (64 bit) to function correctly.

Rotr(param, nBits, wordSize*) Bitwise rotate right - Rotates the bits of a given value to the
right. *Word size is optional; must be greater than nBits; valid range is 0-32. Note: Derived
Parameter Type must be discrete (32 bit) or ulong (64 bit) to function correctly.

Note: A "Bitwise" operation in IADS is performed on the value of the argument, not the
actual bit format representation of the data. For example, the floating point source argument
is cast to an unsigned int, the bit pick performed, and then it's cast back to a floating point
value.
To check the results of a raw bit value:
1. Create a Text Object.
2. Drop a data parameter onto the Text Object and select the Value property.
3. Right-click on the Text Object and click Properties.

249
 Functions and Equation

4. Change the ValueFormat property to %b (binary) or %x (hex).

5. Double click in the Text object to "auto-size" so you can see all the bits.
Computer terms for different size units of data
Bit - A bit is a binary digit, taking a value of either 0 or 1. Binary digits are a basic unit of
information storage and communication in digital computing and digital information theory.
Byte - A byte virtually always consists of eight bits.
Word - Two bytes put together is called a word. The real definition of a "word" is a little
more ambiguous, and could mean 2,4, or more bytes depending on your system (be aware
that the size in number of bytes may change with each system).

32.9. IADS Bus Functions

The IadsBus.dll is included in IADS Version 8.1.1 or greater and registers automatically upon
installation of the IADS application. Full bus capture is an option for 1553 that allows any or
all of a bus to be captured into one parameter; then a derived function in the IADS Client
"decodes" the data using the IadsBus.* functions described below.
Function Description
Iadsbus.Mil1553 Returns a measurement (integer, float, etc)
Iadsbus.Mil1553RTByCmd Return the entire RT-RT message as a blob parameter
Iadsbus.Mil1553ByCmd Returns the entire message as a blob parameter
Iadsbus.MakeCmdWord Returns the 16 bit command word given its component pieces
Iadsbus.CmdWord Returns the 16 bit command word from a blob message
Returns the remote terminal address from a blob message or
Iadsbus.RTA
command word
Returns the subterminal address from a blob message or command
Iadsbus.STA
word
Iadsbus.TR Returns the transit mode from a blob message or a command word
Returns the data word count from a blob message or a command
Iadsbus.DWC
word
Iadsbus.Arinc Bulk ARINC message parser
Iadsbus.CAN Acra CAN message parser
Iadsbus.SerialText ASCII serial decoder

To create an IadsBus derived parameter:

1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder > click Parameter Defaults.
3. Copy and paste an existing row of data for a parameter that is similar to the one you are
creating.
4. In the Parameter column enter a unique parameter name.
5. In the Data Source Type column, select Derived.
6. Enter the desired IadsBus function in the Data Source Argument column, for example:
IadsBus.MIL1553(Channel01_Bulk144, 1, 23)

250
IADS User Manual

7. Click the Save button.

Iadsbus.Mil1553
This function will return a measurement (integer, float, etc) if the user fills out at least the
first five arguments; if the user fills out less than the first five arguments, this function will
return a messages that meet that criteria in a blob data type (e.g. all messages from remote =
1)
Arguments:
* Indicates optional arguments. If the user does not provide values for these arguments,
default will be used. Note: Arg5 (data byte offset) needs to be specified in order for
parameters to be returned; otherwise blob data will be returned.
Arg0 - Name of 1553 blob parameter to pass in (this will represent all messages on this
channel)
Arg1 - Remote terminal number
Arg2* - Subterminal number
Arg3* - Data word count
Arg4* - Transmit or receive (1 = transmit, 0 = receive)
Arg5* - Data byte offset in bytes from command word (needs to be specified in order for
parameters to be returned; otherwise blob data will be returned)
Arg6* - Number of bytes
Arg7* - Start bit (default = 0)
Arg8* - Stop bit (default = number of bytes -1)
Arg9* - Data type (0 = unsigned int, 1 = integer, 2 = unsigned 64 bit int, 3 = 64 bit int, 4 =
float, 5 = double, default = 0)
Arg10* - Swap data bytes (1 = true, 0 = false, default = 0)
Arg11* - Swap command word bytes (1 = true, 0 = false, default = 0)
Arg12* - Command word offset in bytes from start of blob (default = 0)
Examples:
First data word on remote 1, subterminal 13:
IadsBus.MIL1553(Channel01_Bulk1553, 1, 13, 32, 1, 0, 2)
Second data word as float on remote1, subterminal 13:
IadsBus.MIL1553(Channel01_Bulk1553, 1, 13, 32, 1, 0, 4, 0, 31, 4)
All messages from remote = 1 and subterminal = 23:
IadsBus.MIL1553(Channel01_Bulk144, 1, 23)
Acra Parser Aligned Block (please note the command word offset, byte-swapping and the
fact the parameter name is escaped with parentheses)
First data word on remote 2, subteriminal 2:
IadsBus.MIL1553({IENA_KAD_MBM_101_4MIL-STD-1553-In-PrimaryPackage_Block},
2,2,24,0,0,2,0,15,0,1,1,2)

251
Functions and Equation

Iadsbus.Mil1553RTByCmd
This function will return the entire RT-RT message as a blob parameter if the user provides
just the receive and transmit command words; if the user provides more arguments, this
function will return a particular measurement (data word) from an RT-RT message. Using the
IadsBus.MakeCmdWord function can assist in creating the command word from the remote
number, subterminal, data word count and transmit mode (see below).
Arguments:
* Indicates optional arguments. If the user does not provide values for these arguments,
default will be used.
Arg0 - Name of 1553 blob parameter to pass in (this will represent all messages on this
channel)
Arg1 - Receive command word. If this is hexadecimal, please precede with "0x" (e.g.
0x0804)
Arg2 - Transmit command word. If this is hexadecimal, please precede with "0x" (e.g.
0x0804)
Arg3* - Data byte offset in bytes from transmit command word (default = 0)
Arg4* - Number of bytes (default = 2)
Arg5* - Start bit (default = 0)
Arg6* - Stop bit (default = Number of bytes -1)
Arg7* - Data type (0 = unsigned int, 1 = integer, 2 = unsigned 64 bit int, 3 = 64 bit int, 4 =
float, 5 = double, default = 0)
Arg8* - Swap data bytes (1 = true, 0 = false, default = 0)
Arg9* - Swap command word bytes (1 = true, 0 = false, default = 0)
Arg10* - Command word offset in bytes from start of blob (default = 0)
Examples:
Entire message for receive command 0x4008 and transmit command 0x202C:
IadsBus.MIL1553RTByCmd({IENA_KAD_MBM_101_0MIL-STD-1553-In-
PrimaryPackage_Block}, 0x4008, 0x202C)
First data word as integer for receive command 0x4008 and transmit command 0x202C
(please note status word is skipped here):
IadsBus.MIL1553RTByCmd({IENA_KAD_MBM_101_0MIL-STD-1553-In-
PrimaryPackage_Block}, 0x4008, 0x202C, 2, 2, 0, 15, 1)

252
IADS User Manual

Iadsbus.Mil1553ByCmd
This function will return the entire message as a blob parameter if the user provides just the
receive and transmit command words; if the user provides more arguments, this function will
return a particular measurement (data word) from a message. Using the
IadsBus.MakeCmdWord function can assist in creating the command word from the remote
number, subterminal, data word count and transmit mode (see below).
Arguments:
* Indicates optional arguments. If the user does not provide values for these arguments,
default will be used.
Arg0 - Name of 1553 blob parameter to pass in (this will represent all messages on this
channel)
Arg1 - Command word. If this is hexadecimal, please precede with "0x" (e.g. 0x0804)
Arg2 - Data byte offset in bytes from command word
Arg3* - Number of bytes
Arg4* - Start bit (default = 0)
Arg5* - Stop bit (default = Number of bytes -1)
Arg6* - Data type (0 = unsigned int, 1 = integer, 2 = unsigned 64 bit int, 3 = 64 bit int, 4 =
float, 5 = double, default = 0)
Arg7* - Swap data bytes (1 = true, 0 = false, default = 0)
Arg8* - Swap command word bytes (1 = true, 0 = false, default = 0)
Arg9* - Command word offset in bytes from start of blob (default = 0)
Examples:
Entire message for command word 0x4008:
IadsBus.MIL1553ByCmd({IENA_KAD_MBM_101_0MIL-STD-1553-In-
PrimaryPackage_Block}, 0x4008)
Second & third data words as float for command word 0x4008:
IadsBus.MIL1553ByCmd({IENA_KAD_MBM_101_0MIL-STD-1553-In-
PrimaryPackage_Block}, 0x4008, 2, 4, 0, 31, 4)
Iadsbus.MakeCmdWord
This function will return the 16 bit command word (in decimal) given its component pieces
(remote serial number, subterminal number, data word count and transmit mode). If you
prefer to view this as hexadecimal, please drop this into an IADS display and change the
display format. It is not necessary to change the output to use this with the
MIL1553RTByCmd and MIL1553ByCmd functions.
Arguments:
* Indicates optional arguments. If the user does not provide values for these arguments,
default will be used.
Arg0 - Remote terminal number
Arg1 - Subterminal number

253
Functions and Equation

Arg2 - Data word count

Arg3 - Transmit or receive (1 = transmit, 0 = receive)
Arg4* - Swap command word bytes (1 = true, 0 = false, default = 0)
Iadsbus.CmdWord
This function will return the 16 bit command word (in decimal) from a blob message. If you
prefer to view this as hexadecimal, please drop this into an IADS display and change the
display format. It is not necessary to change the output to use this with the
MIL1553RTByCmd and MIL1553ByCmd functions.
Arguments:
* Indicates optional arguments. If the user does not provide values for these arguments,
default will be used.
Arg0 - Name of 1553 blob parameter to pass in (this will represent all messages on this
channel)
Arg1* - Swap command word bytes (1 = true, 0 = false, default = 0)
Arg2* - Command word offset in bytes from start of blob (default = 0)
Iadsbus.RTA
This function will return the remote terminal address from a blob message or command word.
Arguments:
* Indicates optional arguments. If the user does not provide values for these arguments,
default will be used.
Arg0 - Name of 1553 blob parameter to pass in
Arg1* - Swap command word bytes (1 = true, 0 = false, default = 0)
Arg2* - Command word offset in bytes from start of blob (default = 0)
Iadsbus.STA
This function will return the subterminal address from a blob message or command word.
Arguments:
* Indicates optional arguments. If the user does not provide values for these arguments,
default will be used.
Arg0 - Name of 1553 blob parameter to pass in
Arg1* - Swap command word bytes (1 = true, 0 = false, default = 0)
Arg2* - Command word offset in bytes from start of blob (default = 0)
Iadsbus.TR
This function will return the transit mode (1 = transmit, 0 = receive) from a blob message or a
command word.
Arguments:
* Indicates optional arguments. If the user does not provide values for these arguments,
default will be used.
Arg0 - Name of 1553 blob parameter to pass in

254
IADS User Manual

Arg1* - Swap command word bytes (1 = true, 0 = false, default = 0)

Arg2* - Command word offset in bytes from start of blob (default = 0)
Iadsbus.DWC
This function will return the data word count from a blob message or a command word.
(Please note that DWC = 0 can mean DWC = 32 depending on the message type.)
Arguments:
* Indicates optional arguments. If the user does not provide values for these arguments,
default will be used.
Arg0 - Name of 1553 blob parameter or command word to pass in
Arg1* - Swap command word bytes (1 = true, 0 = false, default = 0)
Arg2* - Command word offset in bytes from start of blob (default = 0)
Iadsbus.Arinc
Arguments:
* Indicates optional arguments. If the user does not provide values for these arguments,
default will be used.
Arg0 - Name of parameter that represents serialized ARINC bus
Arg1 - Octal label
Arg2 - SDI (0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 = All)
Arg3 - Start bit
Arg4 - Stop bit
Arg5* - Data type (0 = unsigned int, 1 = integer, 2 = float, default = 0)
Arg6* - Bus ID (ID instrumentation has given this bus, must match whatever number
convention it uses, default = match to any)
Examples:
Octal label 230, SDI 1, bits 13 - 29, BNR:
IadsBus.Arinc( BusA_Param, 230, 1, 13, 29, 1 )
Octal label 34, SDI 0, bits 13 - 28, unsigned int, bus id = 6
IadsBus.ARINC( BusA_Param, 34, 0, 13, 28, 0, 6 )
Iadsbus.CAN
Arguments:
* Indicates optional arguments. If the user does not provide values for these arguments,
default will be used.
Arg0 - Name of CAN blob parameter to pass in
Arg1 - SID
Arg2 - EID
Arg3 - Data type (0 = unsigned int, 1 = integer, 2 = unsigned 64 bit int, 3 = 64 bit int, 4 =
float, 5 = double)
Arg4* - Swap bytes
Arg5* - 0-based byte offset. Offset is taken from DLC.

255
Functions and Equation

Arg6* - Number of bytes

Arg7* - 0-based start bit (lsb)
Arg8* - 0-based stop bit (msb)
Examples:
Default 64 bit integer parameter:
IadsBus.CAN({IENA_MyKAD_CBM_105CAN-In(0)Package_Block},0,0x22,3)
Unsigned integer parameter with mask and byte swapping applied:
IadsBus.CAN({IENA_MyKAD_CBM_105CAN-In(0)Package_Block},0,0x22,0,1,0,2,0,15)
Iadsbus.SerialText
SerialText() allows you to parse a block of ASCII serial data that can have a starting sync
pattern and a delimiter. (If your serial data is binary, please see our DECOM function.)
Arguments:
* Indicates optional arguments. If the user does not provide values for these arguments,
default will be used.
Arg0 - Name of blob parameter to pass in (for Acra data this is the "block" parameter from
the UBM card)
Arg1 - Field delimiter: quoted text. Use "" for no delimiter
Arg2 - 0-based number of which field to look for after sync pattern OR number of bytes to
offset from sync if delimiter is blank
Arg3 - Starting sync pattern (quoted if text or a number - use "" for no sync pattern)
Arg4* - Data type (0 = unsigned int, 1 = integer, 2 = float, default = 0)
Arg5* - Number of bytes for sync pattern (use this if non-text sync has leading zeroes) OR
number of bytes for data field, if delimiter is blank
Arg6* - Text type. Currently only ASCII is supported. Defaults to 0.
Arg7* - Blob includes IADS header (1) or not (0). Default is 1.
Examples:
For data that looks like this:
$GPZDA,115559,15,07
If you select sync pattern = "$GPZDA" then
Field 0 =
Field 1 = 115559
Field 2 = 15
Field 3 = 07
Because when the sync pattern is removed, data looks like this: ,115559,15,07
Consequently Iadsbus.SerialText(TEST_BLOB,",",3,"$GPZDA",0,1,0,0,0) will return 7.
If you select sync pattern = "$GPZDA," then
Field 0 = 115559
Field 1 = 15
Field 2 = 07
When the sync pattern is removed, data looks like this: 115558,15,07
Consequently Iadsbus.SerialText(TEST_BLOB,",",2,"$GPZDA,",0,1,0,0,0) will return 7.
(Sometimes the sync pattern runs directly into the data, with no delimiter.)

256
 IADS User Manual

32.10. ByteSwap
ByteSwap Functions Example
ByteSwap16(param) - Byte swaps a 16- ByteSwap16(Param)
bit value
ByteSwap32(param) - Byte swaps a 32- ByteSwap32(Param)
bit value
ByteSwap64(param) - Byte swaps a 64- ByteSwap64(Param)
bit value

ByteSwap32 function example:

ByteSwap16 function example (using the same parameter):

32.11. Choose Function

Allows you to choose a switch or selector to choose between sources.
Syntax
Choose( Index, ChoiceForValue1, ChoiceForValue2, ...ChoiceForValueN )
For example:
SPARAMETER = Choose( STM, S1PARAMTER, S2PARAMTER, S3PARAMTER )
STM = GetValue("Selector","Value")
For this example there is a measurement called PARAMETER for both TM sources. The
front end is set up to assign and append stream number to individualize the data, so the source
parameters for IADS are now S1PARAMTER, S2PARAMTER, etc...

257
 Functions and Equation

To create a Choose derived parameter:

1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. Copy and paste an existing parameter.
4. In the Parameter column, enter a unique name for the new derived parameter (Invalid
parameter name characters are \ / : * ? " < > | and no leading or trailing spaces, or tabs
allowed).
5. In the Data Source Type column, select Derived.
6. In the Data Source Argument column enter the equation.
7. Enter/change information in the remaining columns as required.
8. Click a Save option.

32.12. Conversion Functions

Function Example
BCDtoValue(Parameter, StartBit, StopBit, Scale, StartBit, BCDtoValue(ParamABC, 14,
StopBit, Scale,....) - Converts a BCD (binary coded 12, 10.0, 11, 8, 1.0, 7, 4, 0.1)
decimal) to a float value that is multiplied by n
Cart2Polar_R(x, y) - Cartesian to Polar return R (length) Cart2Polar_R(10, 20)
Cart2Polar_Theta(x, y) - Cartesian to Polar return Theta Cart2Polar_Theta(10, 20)
(radians angle)
Cart2Sph_Az(i, j) - Cartesian to spherical coordinates Cart2Sph_Az(i, j)
return azimuth
Cart2Sph_El(i, j, k) - Cartesian to spherical coordinates Cart2Sph_El(i, j, k)
return elevation
ConvertToFloat(Parameter) - Reinterprets the bits of ConvertToFloat(ParamABC)
the parameter as floating point make sure you set the param
type to "float"
ConvertToFloat32(Parameter) - Converts data format ConvertToFloat32(ParamABC)
to 32-bit float Set the param type to float.
ConvertToFloat64(Parameter) - Converts data format ConvertToFloat64(ParamABC)
to 64-bit float Set the param type to float.
ConvertToInt(Parameter, StartBit, StopBit) - ConvertToInt(ParamABC, 8,
Reinterprets the bits of the parameter as integer 13)
ConvertToInt16(Parameter) - Converts data format to ConvertToInt16(ParamABC)
16-bit integer Set the param type to Int.
ConvertToInt32(Parameter) - Converts data format to ConvertToInt32(ParamABC)
32-bit integer Set the param type to Int.
ConvertToInt64(Parameter) - Converts data format to ConvertToInt64(ParamABC)
64-bit integer Set the param type to Int.
ConvertUnits(Parameter, "SourceUnits", DestUnits") - ConvertUnits(TempConversion,
Uses entries in the Unit Conversions table. "C", "F")
Deg2Minutes(lat/long degrees) - Converts Lat/Lon Deg2Minutes(34.906030)
degrees to minutes
Deg2Rad(degrees angle) - Converts degrees to radians Deg2Rad(180)
angle

258
IADS User Manual

Deg2Seconds(lat/long degrees) - Converts Lat/Lon Deg2Seconds(34.906030)

degrees to seconds
LatLonAlttoX(GeoId, Units, Lat, Lon, Alt) - Converts LatLonAlttoX(4.0, 0.0,
geodetic coordinates to return X; Geoid; Units: 0 = 35.27524, -117.33409, 3048)
Meters, 1 = Feet
LatLonAlttoY(GeoId, Units, Lat, Lon, Alt) - Converts LatLonAlttoY(4.0, 0.0,
geodetic coordinates to return Y; Geoid; Units: 0 = 35.27524, -117.33409, 3048)
Meters, 1 = Feet
LatLonAlttoZ(GeoId, Units, Lat, Lon, Alt) - Converts LatLonAlttoZ(4.0, 0.0,
geodetic coordinates to return Z; Geoid; Units: 0 = 35.27524, -117.33409, 3048)
Meters, 1 = Feet
NormalizedAz(Az, El, Roll, Pitch, Yaw, Heading) - NormalizedAz(Az, El, Roll,
Returns normalized Azimuth Pitch, Yaw, Heading)
NormalizedEl(Az, El, Roll, Pitch, Yaw, Heading) - NormalizedEl(Az, El, Roll,
Returns normalized Elevation Pitch, Yaw, Heading)
Polar2Cart_X(r, theta) - Polar to Cartesian return X Polar2Cart_X(22.3607,
1.10715)
Polar2Cart_Y(r, theta) - Polar to Cartesian return Y Polar2Cart_Y(22.3607,
1.10715)
Rad2Deg(radians angle) - Converts radians to degrees Rad2Deg(3.142)
angle
Sph2Cart_i(Azimuth, Elevation) - Spherical to Sph2Cart_i(Azimuth, Elevation)
Cartesian; return i (cos, cos)
Sph2Cart_j(Azimuth, Elevation) - Spherical to Sph2Cart_j(Azimuth, Elevation)
Cartesian; return j (cos, sin)
Sph2Cart_k(Azimuth, Elevation) - Spherical to Sph2Cart_k(Azimuth,
Cartesian; return k (sin) Elevation)
XYZtoAlt(GeoId, Units, Lat, Lon, Alt) - Converts XYZToAlt(4.0, 0.0, 35.27524, -
geodetic coordinates to return X; Geoid; Units: 0 = 117.33409, 3048)
Meters, 1 = Feet
XYZtoLat(GeoId, Units, Lat, Lon, Alt) - Converts XYZToLat(4.0, 0.0, 35.27524, -
geodetic coordinates to return Y; Geoid; Units: 0 = 117.33409, 3048)
Meters, 1 = Feet
XYZtoLon(GeoId, Units, Lat, Lon, Alt) - Converts XYZToLon(4.0, 0.0, 35.27524,
geodetic coordinates to return Z; GeoId; Units: 0 = -117.33409, 3048)
Meters, 1 = Feet

259
 Functions and Equation

32.13. Coordinate Transformation Functions

The primary purpose of the CoordinateTransformationFuncs Custom Derived Function is to

assist flight test engineers with position, distance and bearing calculations. The WGS84
Ellipsoid is used for these functions.
The IADS TerrainFuncs.dll is included in IADS Version 8.0 (or greater) and registers
automatically upon installation of the IADS application. The dll contains the following
internal functions:
 Convert ECEF coordinates to Geodetic coordinates. Provided as three separate functions
that return Latitude, Longitude, and Altitude MSL given X, Y, Z coordinates.
 Convert Geodetic coordinates to ECEF coordinates. Provided as three separate functions
that return X, Y, and Z given Latitude, Longitude, and Altitude MSL coordinates.
 Calculate look angles using two positions’ ECEF or geodetic coordinates. Provided as
three separate functions that return Azimuth, Elevation and Range given two positions’
X, Y, Z (ECEF) coordinates. Three additional functions are provided to return Azimuth,
Elevation and Range given two position’s Latitude, Longitude and Altitude.
 Calculate look angles using two positions’ geodetic coordinates. Provided as two separate
functions that return Azimuth and Elevation given two positions’ Latitude, Longitude and
Altitude and the first position’s Roll, Pitch and Heading.

To create a CoordinateTransformationFuncs derived parameter:

1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder > click Parameter Defaults.

260
IADS User Manual

3. Copy and paste an existing row of data for a parameter that is similar to the one you are
creating.
4. In the Parameter column enter a unique parameter name.
5. In the Data Source Type column, select Derived.
6. Enter the desired Coordinate Transformation function (see list below) in the Data Source
Argument column, for example:
CoordinateTransformationFuncs.ECEFtoLLA_Alt(X,Y,Z,0)
7. Click the Save button.
Note: For quick setup, run and test all of your equations as type Derived (try to refrain from
scrollback usage) and then transition to type IAP before flight test or data playback tests.
Coordinate Transformation Functions
The following functions use Earth-Centered, Earth-Fixed, (ECEF) X,Y,Z coordinates and
geodetic latitude, longitude and altitude coordinates as function inputs. ECEF is a Cartesian
coordinate system; sometimes known as a conventional terrestrial system. It represents
positions as an X, Y, and Z coordinate. The point (0,0,0) denotes the mass center of the earth.
The X axis intersects the sphere of the earth at the 0°
latitude, 0° longitude (passes through the equator at the prime meridian). The Y axis can be
determined by the right-hand rule to be passing through the equator at 90° longitude. The Z
axis is defined as being parallel to the earth rotational axes, pointing towards north. This
means the ECEF rotates with the earth around its Z axis. Therefore, coordinates of a point
fixed on the surface of the earth do not change.

ECEF to Geodetic Coordinate Functions

Syntax
CoordinateTransformationFuncs.ECEFtoLLA_Lat(X, Y, Z, 0)
CoordinateTransformationFuncs.ECEFtoLLA_Lon(X, Y, Z, 0)
CoordinateTransformationFuncs.ECEFtoLLA_Alt(X, Y, Z, 0) Altitude above Mean Sea
Level
CoordinateTransformationFuncs.ECEFtoLLA_AGL_Alt(X, Y, Z, 0) Altitude Above Ground
Level
Where X = X Coordinate, Y = Y Coordinate, Z = Z Coordinate, 0 = meters/1 = feet.
Note: These functions also currently exist in IADS as XYZtoLat, XYZtoLon, and XYZtoAlt.

Geodetic to ECEF Coordinate Functions

Syntax
CoordinateTransformationFuncs.LLAtoECEF_X(Lat, Lon, Alt, 0)

261
Functions and Equation

CoordinateTransformationFuncs.LLAtoECEF_Y(Lat, Lon, Alt, 0)

CoordinateTransformationFuncs.LLAtoECEF_Z(Lat, Lon, Alt, 0)

Where Lat = Latitude in degrees, Lon = Longitude in degrees, Alt = Altitude in meters, 0 =
meters/1 = feet.
Note: These functions also currently exist in IADS as LatLonAlttoX, LatLonAlttoY, and
LatLonAlttoZ.

ECEF to Azimuth, Elevation, and Range Look Angle Functions

Syntax
CoordinateTransformationFuncs.ECEFLookAngles_Az(X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, Z2, 0)
CoordinateTransformationFuncs.ECEFLookAngles_EL(X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, Z2, 0)
CoordinateTransformationFuncs.ECEFLookAngles_Range(X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, Z2, 0)

Where X1 = Observer (origin) point X coordinate, Y1 = Observer (origin) point Y

coordinate, Z1 = Observer (origin) point Z coordinate, X2 = Interest point X coordinate, Y2 =
Interest point Y coordinate, Z2 = Interest point Z coordinate, 0 = meters/1 = feet.
LLA to Azimuth, Elevation, and Range Look Angle Functions
Syntax
CoordinateTransformationFuncs.LLALookAngles_Az(Lat1, Lon1, Alt1, Lat2, Lon2, Alt2, 0)
CoordinateTransformationFuncs.LLALookAngles_EL(Lat1, Lon1, Alt1, Lat2, Lon2, Alt2, 0)
CoordinateTransformationFuncs.LLALookAngles_Range(Lat1, Lon1, Alt1, Lat2, Lon2,
Alt2, 0)

Where Lat1 = Observer (origin) point latitude, Lon1 = Observer (origin) point longitude, Alt1
= Observer (origin) point altitude, Lat2 = Interest point latitude, Lon2 = Interest point
longitude, Alt2 = Interest point altitude, 0 = meters/1 = feet.

LLA to Azimuth and Elevation with Rotations Look Angle Functions

Syntax
CoordinateTransformationFuncs.LLALookAnglesWithRotations_Az(Lat1, Lon1, Alt1, Lat2,
Lon2, Alt2, Roll, Pitch, Heading, 0, RotationOrder)
CoordinateTransformationFuncs.LLALookAnglesWithRotations_El(Lat1, Lon1, Alt1, Lat2,
Lon2, Alt2, Roll, Pitch, Heading, 0, RotationOrder)

Where Lat1 = Observer (origin) point latitude, Lon1 = Observer (origin) point longitude, Alt1
= Observer (origin) point altitude, Lat2 = Interest point latitude, Lon2 = Interest point
longitude, Alt2 = Interest point altitude, Roll = Roll in Degrees, Pitch = Pitch in Degrees,
Heading = Heading in Degrees, 0 = meters/1 = feet, RotationOrder = 0=HPR / 1=HRP /
2=PHR / 3=PRH / 4=RHP / 5=RPH.

GTOPO30 Terrain Elevation Function

Syntax
CoordinateTransformationFuncs.LLtoTerrainHeight(Lat, Lon, Units, “Terrain Data Path”,
InterpId)

262
 IADS User Manual

For example: CoordinateTransformationFuncs.LLtoTerrainHeight(34.6002, -117.8335, 0,

“D:\Test\TerrainData”, 0)
Where Lat1 = Observer (origin) point latitude, Lon1 = Observer (origin) point longitude,0 =
meters/1 = feet, Terrain Data File Path, InterpId = 0=bilinear / any other number=nearest.
To download the GTOPO30 Terrain Data:
GTOPO30 is available electronically through an Internet anonymous File Transfer Protocol
(FTP) account at the EROS Data Center (at no cost).
1. Navigate to ftp://edcftp.cr.usgs.gov/pub/data/gtopo30/global
2. Download the following files: w100n40.tar.gz, w140n40.tar.gz, w100n90.tar.gz and
w140n90.tar.gz. Double click on the file name to select a directory on your machine to
save the file. If you do not have access to Gzip, you can leave off the .gz extension and
the FTP server will decompress the tar file as it is downloaded. You will still have to run
the tar command to extract separate files. Please view the README.TXT file for
information on extracting the tar files.
3. Extract the .DEM file from each tar file into the same folder.
4. Use the path to this folder as the Terrain Data File Path in the derived equation above.

32.14. Decom Function

The Decom function can be used to crack-apart (parameterize) blob data.
Syntax
Decom(Parameter, ByteOffset, NumBytes, StartBit, StopBit, DataType, Signed,
ReverseBytes)
Example: Decom( Parameter, 0, 4, 0, 31, 1, 0, 0 )
Example: Decom( BlobParameter, 0, 255, 0, 255*8, 3, FALSE, FALSE )
To create a Decom derived parameter:
1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.

263
 Functions and Equation

2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.

3. Copy and paste an existing row of data for a parameter that is similar to the one you are
creating.
4. In the Parameter column, enter a unique name for the new derived parameter (Invalid
parameter name characters are \ / : * ? " < > | and no leading or trailing spaces, or tabs
allowed).
5. To extract ASCII values, set the ParamType to ascii. Note: If you change the ParamType
to Float or Double of the derived parameter performing the ascii extraction, IADS will
automatically convert it to numerical form (no need to do SScanf or AtoF function).
6. In the Data Source Type column, select Derived.
7. In the Data Source Argument column, enter: Decom( Arg1, Arg2, Arg3, Arg4, Arg5,
Arg6, Arg7, Arg8 ) see example above.
8. Enter/change information in the remaining columns as required.
9. Click a Save option.

Input Arguments Description

Arg1 The Input Data Parameter
Arg2 Byte Offset
Arg3 Number of Bytes
Arg4 Start Bit
Arg5 Stop Bit
Arg6 Data Type to Return: Int = 0 , IEEEFloat = 1, 1750Float = 2,
CharString = 3, Array = 4
Arg7 Signed: False = 0, True = 1
Arg8 Reverse Bytes: False = 0, True = 1
Note: The sum of the Byte Offset (Arg2) and the Number of Bytes (Arg3) cannot be more
than the size in bytes of the input data parameter.

32.15. IADS Decom Status

The purpose of the IADS Decom Status parameters is to identify decom status for each
physical PCM stream. Incoming values will be translated from data source specific decom
status patterns into standardized sync lock/loss states. An IADS decom status parameter is
created by the system for each PCM stream identified from the upstream data source coming
off the front end and added to the Parameter Defaults table under the Group name
IadsSystemSupport. The naming convention for these parameters is _iadsDecomStatus0_,
_iadsDecomStatus1_, etc.
Lock/loss states: Lock = 0, Check = 1, Verify = 2, Search = 3
To monitor decom status:
1. Create a display (Stripchart or Alphanumeric for example).
2. Click the Parameter Tool button on the Dashboard.
3. Click in the blank box at the top of the Parameter Tool and type in _iadsDecomStatus0_
4. Drag the _iadsDecomStatus0_ parameter into the display.

264
 IADS User Manual

5. Repeat step 1-4 for each decom status parameter.

To view a loss status:
1. Create a Text Object.
2. Drop the decom status parameter onto the Text Object and select the Value property.
3. Right-click on the Text Object and click Properties.
4. Change the ValueFormat property to %b (binary).
5. Double click in the Text object to auto-size so you can see all the bits.
Frame status will be located in the 2 least significant bits and each level of subframe status
will occupy the next 2 least significant bits available. The number of levels is dependent on
data source type.

IADS decom derived equations:

GetStreamNumber(param)
GetStreamName(param)
GetDecomStatus(param)
GetStreamDecomStatus("StreamName")

32.16. GetConstant
Returns the constant (value) for the corresponding name in the Constants table of the
Configuration Tool for all users who need access to it.
Syntax
GetConstant("ConstantName")
Example: GetConstant("AirspeedCheck")
For example:
Set your threshold airspeed to a constant AirspeedCheck, then use
GetConstant("AirspeedCheck") in your equation to get the value of it. You can manually
change the AirspeedCheck value in the Constants table or use a Text Input Object to populate
the constant with an Action Object as follows:
1. Create a new constant in the Constants table called AirspeedCheck and give it a value;
save the table. See more detailed instructions below.
2. Drop a Text Input Object onto the Analysis Window.
3. Drop an Action Object onto the Analysis Window.

265
 Functions and Equation

4. Press the Shift key and drag the Text Input Object onto the Action Object and click
ActionArgument2. Right-click on the Action Object and you will see that the value of
ActionArgument2 is TextInput1.Value.
5. Set the ActionArgument Property to AirspeedCheck. This is the name of the constant
that will hold the value for your input.
6. Click the drop down at ActionType and set to SetConstant.
7. Create a derived equation Text2Change = GetValue("TextInput1", "Value") this will get
the text input from the user value.
8. Create a derived equation DidTextChange = Prev(Text2Change, 1) != Text2Change this
will check to see if the user changed the value.
9. Drag the DidTextChange parameter onto the Action Object's ExecuteAction property (if it
changes then the Constants table updates).
10. You can now use the GetConstant("AirspeedCheck") in your equation for dynamic input.
Note: [Optional] Change the DataSourceType of the derived parameters you create to IAP to
create a data file for that parameter.
To add an entry to the constants table:
1. Click the Configuration button on the Dashboard.
2. Open the Test folder, then click Constants.
3. Add an entry in the ConstantName column, for the example AirspeedCheck.
4. Select a Type from the drop down menu.
5. Add an entry in the Value column.
6. Add an entry in the Units (optional).
7. Save the table.

32.17. GetData
The Get Data function returns the value of a parameter if defined; If the parameter does not
exist in the data stream, it will return the value you specify. This feature is used in displays
with parameters that do not always have data. Using the GetData function, the display would
return a value you define instead of being blank.
For example, in situations where multiple TM sources are started and then drop off during
testing, the GetData function can be used to substitute a value when the data stream no longer
exits:
Choose( TM, GetData("S1PARAM",0), GetData("S2PARAM",0), GetData("S3PARAM",0))
Syntax
GetData("Parameter", Value)
To create a GetData derived parameter:
1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. Copy and paste an existing parameter.

266
 IADS User Manual

4. In the Parameter column, enter a unique name for the new derived parameter (Invalid
parameter name characters are \ / : * ? " < > | and no leading or trailing spaces, or tabs
allowed).
5. In the Data Source Type column, select Derived.
6. In the Data Source Argument column enter: GetData("Parameter", desired value) for
example, GetData("AB_1234", 100)
7. Enter/change information in the remaining columns as required.
8. Click a Save option.
To add a parameter to a control:
1. On the Dashboard click Parameter Tool.
2. Using the Parameter Tool, select the parameter with the mouse.
3. Drag the parameter into the display.
4. Select a property to which the parameter is assigned.
Note: Displays with GetData parameters will update a change in status at logon or after a
desktop re-load.
If the value is filtered with high pass or band pass filters, the result may be zero (not the
defined value) at data loss.

32.18. GetTestPointActive
The state of a Test Point can be used to drive a primitive's control.
To create the GetTestPointActive derived parameter and control:
1. Click the Configuration dashboard button.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. Copy and paste an existing parameter.
4. Change the Parameter name to GetTestPointActive.
5. Type GetTestPointActive() in the Data Source Argument Cell.
6. Click the Save button.
7. Click the Display Builder dashboard button.
8. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
9. Drag and drop a control onto the Analysis Window.
10. Using the Parameter Tool, select the GetTestPointActive parameter with the mouse.
11. Drag the parameter into the primitive control.
12. Select the property you want to attach the parameter to (activated when the "Start/Stop
Test Point" button is clicked, for example, Fill Color).
13. Click the Start Test Point on the dashboard.

32.19. Test Point Import Wizard - PlannedTestPointsEx(UserName) Table

The purpose of the wizard is to import planned test point auxiliary information to a test point
such as flight conditions, aircraft configuration, and predicted results. Allows multiple
disciplines/groups to have their own separate table to include any piece of information related

267
Functions and Equation

to a Test Point/Flight Card. Information imported using the wizard is saved to an entirely new
table PlannedTestPointsExUserGroup in the Configuration Tool.
Using the derived parameter GetTestPointInfoEx function, you can populate your displays
and other functions with vital test point information pertaining to the currently active Test
Point.

To import auxiliary test point information into the PlannedTestPointsExUserGroup

table:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Click the Tools drop down menu > Test Point Import Wizard...
3. Select a User Discipline from the drop down menu and click Next.
4. Select the CSV file to import and click Next. Note: The first column name in the CSV
file must be defined as "TestPoint".
5. Click Finish.
Note: It may be necessary to copy some data (columns) from the PlannedTestPoints table
into your new PlannedTestPointsEx table.
To create a GetTestPointInfoEx derived parameter:
1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. Copy and paste an existing parameter.
4. In the Parameter column, enter a unique name for the new derived parameter, for
example: GetTestPointInfoEx
5. In the Data Source Type column, select Derived.
6. In the Data Source Argument column enter: GetTestPointInfoEx("UserGroup",
"ColumnName", ValueToReturnIfNotExists) for example:
GetTestPointInfoEx("Loads", "N", 0)
7. Enter/change information in the remaining columns as required.

268
 IADS User Manual

8. Click a Save option.

Note: Set the derived parameter's ParamType to ascii if you are retrieving ascii data.

To use the GetTestPointInfoEx derived function to retrieve information in the table:

1. Drop the new GetTestPointInfoEx derived parameter into a display (see example below).
2. Click the Test Point drop down arrow to select the desired test point. In this example, the
value that will be displayed will be at: ColumnName "N" and selected TestPoint "4.3".

Troubleshooting
 The value in the display does not update when you select a different test point? Solution:
Open the CurrentTestPointChoice table in the System directory of the Configuration
Tool. Delete all entries and save the table.

32.20. Get User Input - Distributing User Inputs

The GetUserInput function is used to assign an 'output name' to an IADS Input Object
(Button, Dial, Drop Down, Slider, Spin Box, Text Input object, Toggle Switch), and use the
function GetUserInput( 'OutputName' ) to access the value. This value is saved to the
UserInputValues table in the Configuration Tool. If the value in the input object is changed,
all displays using that GetUserInput function will update and reflect the new value. These
equations are accessible across all Desktops in the room.

Syntax
GetUserInput("OutputName")
Example: GetUserInput("FuelTankInput1") will return the value of the text object.

269
Functions and Equation

To save an entry to the User Input Values table:

1. Create an input object: Button, Dial, Drop Down, Slider, Spin Box, Text Input or Toggle
Switch (not applicable to the Action Object).
2. Right-click on the object > Properties.
3. At the OutputName property enter a name for the output value, for example,
FuelTankInput1. This property in the User Input Values table reflects the current value
of the input object. When you change the value in the input object the table is updated by
the system.
To create a Get User Input derived parameter:
1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. Copy and paste an existing derived parameter into a new row.
4. In the Parameter column, enter a unique name for the new derived parameter (Invalid
parameter name characters are \ / : * ? " < > | and no leading or trailing spaces, or tabs
allowed).
5. In the Param Type column, click the drop down to select the correct type. If you are
using an output value that is ascii, make sure you select ascii as the ParamType.
6. In the Data Source Type column, select Derived (or IAP to create an IADS data file for
use in playback).
7. In the Data Source Argument column enter: GetUserInput("OutputName"). For example,
GetUserInput("FuelTankInput1"). Click the UserInputValues table in the
Configuration Tool to verify you are entering the correct Output Name.
8. Enter/change information in the remaining columns as required.
9. Save the table.
10. Drop the GetUserInput derived parameter onto a display.
Quick Steps
1. From the Display Builder’s ActiveX Controls Tab drop an IadsTextInput object onto an
Analysis Window.
2. Right click on the text object and click Properties.
3. Rename the Text object to something unique based on your needs. [FuelTankInput1]
4. Set the OutputName property to something unique based on your needs.[FWDFuelTank]
5. Create a IAP Parameter:
Parameter = FWDFuelTank
ParamType = float
DataSourceType = IAP
DataSourceArguement = GetUserInput(“FWDFuelTank”)
6. Save the table.

270
 IADS User Manual

32.21. Get Value - Using an ActiveX Property as a Parameter

The purpose of this function is to use an item in a property sheet as a parameter. You would
use this feature to allow you to make changes in one ActiveX display and use the value it
returns as a parameter.
Note: An export of a parameter involving GetValue will always show a zero value for the
entire length of the data export; there is currently no inherent storage of a zero input
parameter.
Syntax
GetValue("displayname","propertyname")
Example: GetValue("Circle1","FillColor") returns the RGB value that is displayed in
circle1's fill color.
To create a Get Value derived parameter:
1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. Copy and paste an existing parameter.
4. In the Parameter column, enter a unique name for the new derived parameter (Invalid
parameter name characters are \ / : * ? " < > | and no leading or trailing spaces, or tabs
allowed).
5. In the Data Source Type column, select Derived.
6. In the Data Source Argument column enter:
GetValue("displayname","propertyname").
7. Enter/change information in the remaining columns as required.
8. Click a Save option.
To add a parameter to a control's property sheet:
1. On the Dashboard click Parameter Tool.
2. Using the Parameter Tool, select the parameter with the mouse.
3. Drag the parameter into the display.
4. Select a property to which the parameter is assigned.
Note: If the original property is changed, that change will then propagate to every display
where the GetValue parameter is displayed.

271
 Functions and Equation

32.22. Helicopter Functions

The primary purpose of the HelicopterFuncs Custom Derived Function is to assist in analysis
of rotary machines. The IADS HelicopterFuncs.dll is included as of IADS Version 8.0 and
registers automatically upon installation of the IADS application.

To create a HelicopterFuncs derived parameter:

1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder > click Parameter Defaults.
3. Copy and paste an existing row of data for a parameter that is similar to the one you are
creating.
4. In the Parameter column enter a unique parameter name.
5. In the Data Source Type column, select Derived.
6. Enter the desired helicopter function (see list below) in the Data Source Argument
column, for example: HelicopterFuncs.Minimum(RotorAZ, RotorBlib)
7. Click the Save button.
Note: For quick setup, run and test all of your equations as type Derived (try to refrain from
scrollback usage) and then transition to type IAP before flight test or data playback tests.
Helicopter Functions
The helicopter functions calculate the Min, Max, Average, Alternating Load (Oscillatory) and
Average Load per rotor turn given an input parameter and a “rotor blib” parameter. The first
argument within each function “InputParam” can be any measurement you would like to
analyze within the cycle. The cycle (period of time) for each calculation is defined by the
second parameter “RotorBlibParam”. For a more in depth discussion of how the blib input
parameter defines a calculation cycle, see the remarks section below.
Min
Syntax: HelicopterFuncs.Minimum(InputParam, RotorBlibParam)
Description: Calculates the minimum of all data points in InputParam during a cycle.
Max
Syntax: HelicopterFuncs.Maximum(InputParam, RotorBlibParam)
Description: Calculates the maximum of all data points in InputParam during a cycle.
Average
Syntax: HelicopterFuncs.Average(InputParameter, RotorBlibParam)

272
IADS User Manual

Description: Calculates the average of all data points in InputParam during a cycle.
AlternatingLoad (Oscillatory)
Syntax: HelicopterFuncs.AlternatingLoad(InputParam, RotorBlibParam)
Description: Calculates the average of the difference between the maximum and minimum
of all data points in InputParam during a cycle.
AverageLoad
Syntax: HelicopterFuncs.AverageLoad(InputParam, RotorBlibParam)
Description: Calculates the average of the sum between the maximum and minimum of all
points in InputParam during a cycle.
Note: In previous version of the functions, there was a third argument attached to each
function called “BlibTransitionDefinesStartOfCycleVsEnd”. In this latest version of the dll
the argument was removed. At the time it was recommended that you set the value to TRUE.
To keep backward compatibility, its value is still allowed to be used, but it will default to
TRUE if not supplied. Setting this value to FALSE is not recommended as it will cause the
shift of the values in cycle calculation by one data point. Both settings produce nearly the
same output, but they are not identical.
Remarks:
The rotor blib is simply a parameter that toggles between 0 and 1 for each complete rotor
turn. For instance, if you watched the rotor blib parameter in a Stripchart, you would see it
transition from 0 to 1 to 0 and continue this pattern indefinitely, where each transition point
marks the next complete rotor turn. A number of groups have rotor blib output parameters
that do not fit this profile. In that case, you will need to create a derived parameter which
converts your rotor blib equation into a 0..1..0 transition type. Once the derived parameter is
created you can use it as your blib input to the equations; this is not a problem in most cases
and has been done for a number of test programs. If you need some assistance on converting
your blib parameter please contact customer support or post the question to our Google
group: http://groups.google.com/group/iads. Also, if you wish to compute the results at rates
faster then the normal blib transition (i.e. more than once per rotation or say at each 15 degree
increment), use this same technique and create a derived blib parameter that calculates the
higher transition frequencies based of the original blib signal.
Comments on previous versions:
During previous versions of the Helicopter Function dll there was growing discussion and
confusion among a number of groups regarding the exact interpretation of the blib parameter.
The question was posed: Did the exact data point at the transition of the blib value mark the
start of a new cycle (thus we should include it’s value in the current cycle’s calculation) or
did it mark the end of the previous cycle (thus we should not include its value in the current
cycle)?
The consensus developed as we began testing different systems and starting examining the
results. Also, everyone involved had more time to discuss the issues and view the input
parameter data, blib transitions, and output results side by side. The consensus was that all the
values of the input parameter that occurred on a given RotorBlib value will be used in the
same calculation.
The bottom line is that if you have a blib signal like this:
000000 111111 000000

273
 Functions and Equation

And input parameter values like this:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Because the first six values of the blib signal are all zeros -> the first six values of the input
parameter will be used to calculate the results of that particular “cycle” of the rotor. Likewise,
because the next six values of the blib signal are all ones -> the next six values of the input
parameters will define the second cycle (and so on). In other words, the blib parameter
doesn’t actually define the “transition” between cycles as much as it defines the inclusion
identification. Values that line up in time (or ordinal number if the sample rate of the blib
parameter is equal to the sample rate of the azimuth parameter) and numeric content belong
together in the same calculation. 1..6 belong in the same calculation cycle, 7..12 in the next
cycle, and 13..18 the last cycle.

32.23. iadsread
This topic documents the usage of the IADS Matlab Executable (MEX) iadsread function.
The iadsread.mexw32 and iadsread.mexw64 MEX-files are included as part of the IADS
installation at \ProgramFiles\Iads\MatlabExtention. The iadsread function allows you to
programmatically access your IADS archive data so you can write Matlab programs to read
in and process the IADS flight data.
To set the path in Matlab to your IADS Matlab Extension directory:
1. Run Matlab.
2. Click the File drop down > Set Path...
3. In the Set Path dialog, click the Add Folder button.
4. Navigate to C:\ProgramFiles\Iads\MatlabExtention and click OK.
5. Click the Save button.
6. Click the Close button.
To verify the iadsread function is available in MATLAB:
 In Matlab, enter iadsread in the Command Window. It should respond: ??? iadsread:
Minimum four inputs required. This is correct! The error occurs because the function call
arguments are not complete; follow the instructions below to setup the iadsread function.
If ??? Undefined function or variable 'iadsread' is returned, verify the path you have set
and saved in Matlab is the MatlabExtention directory that contains your
iadsread.mexw32/64 or the iadsread.dll. If the error still occurs, the version of Matlab
you are using (pre 7.1) does not recognize the iadsread.mexw32 file. Rename the
iadsread.mexw32 to iadsread.dll. For more information on this subject go to:
http://www.mathworks.com/access/helpdesk/help/techdoc/rn/f26-998197.html
To use the iadsread function:
 In Matlab, enter the iadsread function with a required minimum of four inputs (with the
exception of the iadsread( 'DataDirectory' )
Syntax
Variable = iadsread( 'DataDirectory or ServerName$PortId', 'IrigStartTime', 'IrigEndTime' or
NumSeconds, 'ParameterNameList (Comma Separated)', [optional arguments..] )
Examples
Data = iadsread('D:\PostTestData\TestSet','001:00:05:05',5,'AB1001X,AB1002X,AB1003X')

274
IADS User Manual

Data =
iadsread('D:\PostTestData\TestSet','001:00:05:05',5,'AB1001X,AB1002X,AB1003X','Decima
tionFactor',4,'ReturnTimeVector',1)
Notice that all 5 parameters are combined into 1 matrix called Data. That is because only 1
variable was assigned to the result of iadsread, Data = iadsread(...). To create 3 separate
vectors, define the left hand side of the equation as such: [AB1001X,AB1001X,AB1001X] =
iadsread(...)
Syntax Example Result
Note: If you assign the output to a variable, for example, Data = iadsread(...) it will return
the results in a structure ('struct array'). You can then use the Plot function in Matlab to plot
the data, for example, plot (Data)
iadsread('DataDirectory') Data=iadsread('D:\ Returns test data such as
PostTest Start/Stop Time, Test, Date,
Data\TestSet') etc...

iadsread 'DataDirectory', ' ', Data=iadsread('D:\ Returns a list of the parameters

0, '?') PostTest in the archive by putting a '?'
Data\TestSet', ' ', 0, '?') question mark in argument 4.
iadsread ignores the contents of
arguments 2 & 3.
Iadsread Data=iadsread('D:\ Returns a list of the parameters
('DataDirectory|ConfigFile') PostTest from the specified config file
, ' ', 0, '?') Data\Folder1|D:\ by putting a '?' question mark in
PostTestData\Folder12\ argument 4. iadsread ignores
fpConfig1','',0,'?') the contents of arguments 2 &
3.
iadsread( 'DataDirectory', ' Data=iadsread('D:\ Returns all the information for
', 0, 'Parameter' ) PostTestData\TestSet', ' ', the parameter in argument 4.
0, 'AB1001X' )
iadsread( 'DataDirectory', ' Data=iadsread('D:PostTest Returns any piece of
', 0, 'Select Value1 from Data\TestSet', ' ', 0, 'Select information in the configuration
Table/Log where [Optional] Time from file through the use of an SQL
Value2 = Value3') EventMarkerLog where statement. To use a wild card
Comment = Takeoff') match, place asterisks around
the wild card.
Note: Incorrect spacing can cause errors.
Input arguments
Argument 1 - 'DataDirectory or ServerName$PortId (required)'
This string defines the directory of the IADS data archive. Use your 'Explorer' to locate the
directory of your choice. Copy the directory from the top of explorer into Matlab.
Another option is to specify a server name and port id in the format 'ServerName$PortId' to
connect iadsread directly to a real time data stream in the IADS Server. If you wanted to
stream through the entire flight while connected to the IADS Server. Leave the 'IrigStartTime'
field as an empty string and you'll set the 1st argument (DataDirectory or
ServerName$PortId) to the IADS Server machine name and portId. Don't forget to separate
the ServerName and PortId by a $ (dollar sign). The default portId of the IADS Server is
58000 (unless this setting has been modified this should work).

275
Functions and Equation

For example: Alt = iadsread( 'IADSServer$58000', '', 20, 'SineWave0-250' )

Argument 2 - 'IrigStartTime' (required)
This string defines the start time of the data that you want to import. The Irig time string
format is DDD:HH:MM:SS.MS That is a 3 digit day (0-364), a two digit hour (0-23), a two
digit minute (0-59), a two digit second (0-59), and a partial second (MS) up to 9 digits long.
This time will most likely be obtained from the Iads Event Marker or Test Points Logs.
Argument 3 - 'IrigEndTime' or NumberOfSeconds (required)
This string defines the end time of the data that you are interested in. The Irig time string
format is DDD:HH:MM:SS.MS Another alternative is to specify a "scalar" number of
seconds from the start time.
Argument 4 - 'Parameter(s) or SQL statement (required)'
This string defines a list of parameter(s), comma separated (with no spaces between the
commas) that you want to import data from. The Parameter name is that defined in the
Parameter Defaults Table.
SQL Statement - 'select <ColumnName or Comma Separated ColumnNames> from
<TableName> where <Conditional Statement>'
The "where <Conditional Statement>" statement is Optional. In this format, the
<ColumnName> and <TableName> refers to the name of the column in any IADS log or
table in the Configuration Tool.
Optional Arguments - Start of Matlab Style (optional settings)
1. 'DecimationFactor', factor 1..N (Defaults to 1 which denotes no decimation). This gives
you the ability to reduce the amount of data from the actual parameter's update rate. If not
defined, it defaults to 1 (no decimation). The decimation is always based on the largest
sample rate of the parameters defined in Argument 4. For example, if you wanted a
matrix of data that represents half of the original data, you would enter 2. Decimation
only removes data points using a "Decimal Sub-Sample' of your original data (i.e. skips
every N points). No other interpolation method (such as linear or bspline interpolation ) is
currently used. Be aware, if you use this option, you do have the possibility of removing
data that is important to your analysis. This argument used in the example is:
'DecimationFactor',4
2. 'OutputSampleRate', sampleRate (Defaults to highest sample rate of parameters chosen.
Trumps DecimationFactor). Similar to Decimation factor above, but specifies the exact
output sample rate desired. For example, 'OutputSampleRate',50
3. 'ReturnDataAtSameSR', 0=False 1=True (Defaults to True) Controls whether the data is
interpreted to same sample rate as defined by DecimationFactor or OutputSampleRate.
By default, the iadsread function "squares off" the data to same sample rate making it
easier to analyze. If this option is set to 0 (False) then each vector is output at its native
sample rate and thus the lengths of each vector may vary. In this state, the
interpolation/correlation is left to the user code.
4. 'ReturnTimeVector', 0=False 1=True (Defaults to False) Controls whether a time vector
is returned along with the data vector(s). The vector contains current time for each
element of the corresponding data vector elements.
5. 'ExceptionOnNoData', 0=False 1=True (Defaults to True). Determines whether iadsread
throws an error/exception if it's unable to get data for a given parameter. If False, returns
empty Vector or if Matrix fills column with NaN.

276
 IADS User Manual

Note:For additional information on the iadsread function see the Howto.m file at
\ProgramFiles\Iads\MatlabExtention.

32.24. IfThenElse
Adding an If/Then or conditional statement to your derived parameter allows you to embed
"logic", "rules", or "intelligence" into your equation. The basic if then else using the ? and :
operators allows you to return different values (affecting a whole range of other logic).
The general form of the equation is:
Expr1 ? Expr2 : Expr3
This can be thought of as: Condition ? WhatValueToReturnIfConditionIsTrue :
WhatValueToReturnIfConditionIsFalse
The expression to the left of the question mark is evaluated to a Boolean result. If this result
is non-zero, then the derived parameter is assigned the value of expression to the right of the
question mark. Otherwise, the derived parameter is assigned the value of the right most
expression.
It is possible to nest IfThenElse equations by replacing any of the original three expressions
with another IfThenElse expression. Please use parenthesis around each nested else
statement. For example, replacing the third expression with another IfThenElse expression:
Expr1 ? Expr2 : (Expr3a ? Expr3b : Expr3c)
Choices for data (condition) comparison are:
< Is less than == Is equal to && Logical And
> Is greater than != Is not equal to || Logical Or
<= Is less than or equal >= Is greater than or equal to ! Logical Not
Some examples of condition equations:
FlapPosition >= -1 && FlapPosition <= 1 ? TRUE : FALSE
Avg(Airspeed, 10) < 200.0 || FlapPosition > 50 ? TRUE : FALSE
FlapPosition > 20 && Airspeed < 200 ? TRUE : FALSE
An example of a compound IfThenElse statement:
((ParamABC == 0) && (ParamXYZ == 0) ? 0 : ((ParamABC == 1) && (ParamXYZ == 1) ?
0 : 2))
An example of a IfThen statement:
IfThen(x==1, getValue("textinput1","value"), x==0, 0)

32.25. Make Blob Function

The MakeBlob function is used to concatenate multiple words into a blob (packet). To use the
function to recreate the original packet, trigger off the last parameter in the PCM map.
Syntax
MakeBlob(NumberOfBitsPerParameter, Parameter1, Parameter2, .... ParameterN)
MakeBlob(NumberOfBitsPerParameter, "DataGroupName")
SetTriggerParam(ParameterN), MakeBlob(numBits, Parameter1, Parameter2, ... ParameterN)
SetTriggerParam(ParameterN), MakeBlob(NumberOfBitsPerParameter, "DataGroupName")

277
 Functions and Equation

Note: Verify the ParamType entry in the Parameter Defaults Table for this derived parameter
is set to Blob.
To create a Make Blob derived parameter:
1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. Copy and paste an existing row of data for a parameter that is similar to the one you are
creating.
4. In the Parameter column, enter a unique name for the new derived parameter (Invalid
parameter name characters are \ / : * ? " < > | and no leading or trailing spaces, or tabs
allowed).
5. In the ParamType column, select blob.
6. In the Data Source Type column, select Derived or IAP.
7. In the Data Source Argument column, enter: MakeBlob( Arg1, Arg2, .... ArgN)
8. Enter/change information in the remaining columns as required.
9. Click a Save option.
Input Arguments Description
Arg1 Number of Bits Per Parameter
Arg2 - ArgN Parameter(s)

32.26. Make Blob2 Function

The MakeBlob2 function is used to concatenate multiple consecutive words from a single
parameter into a 'blob' packet. For best results, set the equation output to aperiodic.
Syntax
MakeBlob2(NumberOfBitsPerParameter1, Parameter, nPoints)
SetEquationUpdateRate(0), MakeBlob2(NumberOfBitsPerParameter1, Parameter, nPoints)
Note: Verify the ParamType entry in the Parameter Defaults Table for this derived parameter
is set to Blob.
To create a Make Blob2 derived parameter:
1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. Copy and paste an existing row of data for a parameter that is similar to the one you are
creating.
4. In the Parameter column, enter a unique name for the new derived parameter (Invalid
parameter name characters are \ / : * ? " < > | and no leading or trailing spaces, or tabs
allowed).
5. In the ParamType column, select blob.
6. In the Data Source Type column, select Derived or IAP.
7. In the Data Source Argument column, enter: SetEquationUpdateRate(0), MakeBlob2(
Arg1, Arg2, Arg3)
8. Enter/change information in the remaining columns as required.
9. Click a Save option.

278
 IADS User Manual

Input Arguments Description

Arg1 Number of Bits Per Parameter1
Arg2 Parameter
Arg3 Number of Points

32.27. Malibu Antenna Control Functions

The Malibu Antenna Control custom derived function is provided as a Dynamic Link Library
(DLL) which contains two internal functions, IadsMalibuControl.ACUServer and
IadsMalibuControl.ACUStatus for interface and control of the Malibu Antenna Control Unit
(ACU). Both functions use Ethernet via the UDP protocol to send and receive data. The
ACUServer and ACUStatus functions are created as IADS derived parameters in the
Configuration Tool (as shown below).
Note: A separate derived function must be entered for each ACU Status value needed for
display (refer to the ACU Status Function section below).

To create an Malibu Antenna Control derived parameter:

1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder > click Parameter Defaults.
3. Copy and paste an existing row of data for a parameter that is similar to the one you are
creating.
4. In the Parameter column enter a unique parameter name.
5. In the DataSourceType column, select Derived.
Note: It is recommended to convert this function to an IAP derived parameter for real
time operation. This is accomplished by changing its type to IAP in the DataSourceType
drop down in the Configuration tool.
6. Enter the desired Malibu Antenna Control function in the Data Source Argument column,
for example: IADSMalibuControl.ACUServer(10000, Target1_lat, Target1_lon,
Target1_alt*100.0,1)
7. Click the Save button.
ACU Server Function
The purpose of this function is to send data to the ACU from IADS during a real time test
using an Ethernet/UDP communication protocol. It receives Latitude, Longitude and Altitude
in floating point format from the test vehicle via the ground station and sends that data to the
Malibu ACU.
ACU Server Input Arguments and Return Values
Input arguments are required in the proper order to properly run the function. If not entered
properly IADS will red flag a syntax error.

279
Functions and Equation

Input Arguments Description

Arg1 PortId - Identifies the Port ID that the Malibu ACU is expecting to
receive the data on.
Arg2 Latitude - Vehicle latitude in degrees as a floating point value.
Arg3 Longitude - Vehicle longitude in degrees as a floating point value.
Arg4 Altitude - Vehicle altitude in 1/100 of a meter as a floating point
value.
Arg5 Byte Swap - Data order sent to the Malibu ACU, 1 = Big endian, 0 =
Little endian.
Return Value Description
-1 The required five arguments were not passed into the function. This
most likely occurred because the entry in the DataSourceArgument
field of the parameter is incorrect.
-2 One or more of the input arguments was not passed in as a floating
point value.
-3 The ACUServer was unable to connect the Malibu ACU on the
specified port.
0 Normal Operation - Packet not sent.
1..n Normal Operation - Each incremental value denotes a packet sent to
the Malibu ACU.

Run-time Operation
The ACUServer function expects latitude and longitudinal data in floating point degrees. This
data is then converted to integer using the following equation: (latitude*5965232.3555555).
Altitude is sent as a floating point and uses the value passed into the equation without
alteration. Any scaling, for example conversion from feet to meters, will need to be
completed within the derived equation.
For verification, drop the ACUServer Parameter onto a Stripchart (as shown below) and look
for increasing integer values. This heartbeat denotes when a packet is sent to the Malibu
ACU, which is gated and will occur approximately 2 times per second.

ACU Status Function

The purpose of this function is used to make IADS parameters from the Status values
returned from the Malibu ACU for display within the IADS system during real time
operation. Data is collected via an Ethernet UDP connection to the ACU on the requested
PortId of the ACUStatus derived parameter. For example:
Required to receive the ACU Status packet → IadsMalibuControl.ACUStatus(4390, 0)
Return Azimuth Pedestal Position → IadsMalibuControl.ACUStatus(4390, 1)
ACU Status Input Arguments and Return Values

280
IADS User Manual

Input Arguments Description

Arg1 PortId - Identifies the Port ID that the Malibu ACU is sending status
data on.
Arg2 Variable Request Number - Integer number that identifies which ACU
Status variable to return: 0 = ACU Status Packet, 1 = Azimuth
Pedestal Position, 2 = Azimuth Commanded Position, 3 = Elevation
Pedestal Position, 4 = Elevation Commanded Position.
Return Value Description
-1 Internal Error - Memory pointer error.
-2 Internal Error - Memory type error.
-3 Incorrect number of input arguments were passed in.
-4 Input arguments were not passed-in as floating point values.
-5 Unable to open the UDP port as requested by the PortId argument.
-6 Internal Error - Unable to set Socket property.
-7 Internal Error - Error with Socket Receive.
-8 Packet received is not a Malibu status packet which is identified by the
4 byte as the ‘B’ character.
th

-9 Successful return code, this code is only returned from the function
that passes in (0) as its variable request number.
-10 Unknown Variable Request Number (Arg2). Legal values are 0 - 4.

Run Time Operation

The ACUStatus function must be called with a variable request number of zero (0) as in order
to receive the Status packet from the Malibu ACU and therefore receive status data for any
other variable request numbers. During real time operation all the other ACUStatus functions
can be use within any IADS display (see Figure 3-3 for an example of using these parameters
in a Stripchart display).

281
 Functions and Equation

32.28. Manual Nulling

The purpose of this exercise is to establish the baseline value based off an average over the
last "N" points. Essentially, the results of these equations would always return a torque
difference from the established baseline. For this example the result is calculated upon a
button press.
To create the button object:
1. Click the Display Builder Dashboard button.
2. Click the ActiveX Controls tab.
3. If the Button object does not exist add the IadsInputObjects.IadsButton control to the
ActiveX Controls tab.

4. Drag and drop a Button object onto the Analysis Window.

5. Right-click and select Properties.
6. At the Name property enter NullButton.
To create the derived equations:
1. Click the Configuration Dashboard button > ParameterDefaults.
2. Create a derived parameter named NullButtonValue. In the DataSourceArgument field
enter GetValue("NullValue", "Value"). Set the UpdateRate to 100.
3. Create a derived parameter named NullBaselineValue. In the DataSourceArgument field
enter:
Prev(NullButtonValue, 1) == 0 && NullButtonValue ! = 0 ?
AVG(StrainParameter,GetUpdateRate(StrainParameter)*5) : NullBaselineValue
Notice that the equation in #3 above checks for the transition of the button from unpressed to
pressed. When the event occurs (button pressed), it calculates the average of the strain
parameter over a given amount of seconds (in this case 5) and then 'holds' that averaged value
until the next button press (by returning its own value when the condition is not true). If you
drop this parameter on a text object, you should be able to test its operation. Once it works
properly, you can use this parameter to create your 'StrainDeviation' parameter:
4. Create a derived parameter named StrainDeviation. In the DataSourceArgument field
enter StrainParameter - NullBaselineValue.
Now that you have the StrainDeviation, you can use that parameter to calculate if each range
is 'tripped':
WasOutsideRange5 = = InRange( StrainParameter, StrainDeviation, 5 ) ? FALSE : TRUE
WasOutsideRange10 = = InRange( StrainParameter, StrainDeviation, 10 ) ? FALSE : TRUE
Note: After you have built these parameters, you could use the Event Monitor display to
monitor all of the ranges. Just check for any of these range values to become 1 (true) and
output the appropriate message. Likewise, you could put the parameters into the same
StripChart and use the traditional threshold system.

282
 IADS User Manual

32.29. Mission Attributes

IADS uses mission attribute information in displays and also as a parameter if desired. For
example, you can add an entry for wind speed and then use that entry as part of a derived
equation. This information can be entered at any time during the test at the Operator Console
or an IADS Client.
To enter mission attribute information at the Operator Console:

1. At the Operator Console Toolbar click the Modify Mission Attributes button.
Note: This button will be grayed out if the Start Server and Start Data Gather have not
been activated (first two buttons on the toolbar - top left). You can also use the Edit menu
to bring up the dialog.
2. In the Flight Info box, type in the Flight Number, Tail Number and Test Number.
3. Select OK.
- Or -
1. Click the Edit menu button and select Mission Attributes.
2. Edit or add the entries in the dialog.
3. Click OK.
To create a Mission Attributes derived parameter in IADS:
1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Test folder, click Mission Attributes.
3. Input an entry in the table
4. Click a Save option.
5. Click on the row number of the desired mission attribute (the entire line should be
highlighted).
6. At the Configuration Tool Toolbar click Tools > Create Mission Attribute Parameters.
7. Click OK. Check the Parameter Defaults Table to view the new mission attribute
parameters.
To verify a Mission Attributes derived parameter in IADS:
1. Create a Text display.
2. On the Dashboard, click the Parameter Tool button.
3. Click the Mission Group folder > Attributes Subgroup folder.
4. Drag the mission attribute parameter into a TEXT display and drop onto the Text
property at the top.
To add test, tail, flight, flight date, or today's date to a label display:
1. Create a Label display.
2. Right-click > Edit Label.
3. Type in a script: $Test$ $Tail$ $Flight$ $FlightDate$ $Today'sDate$
4. Press Enter; the data is dynamically entered with information from the Configuration
Tool Mission Attributes table.

283
 Functions and Equation

To use the GetMissionAttribute function:

1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder, click Parameter Defaults.
3. Copy and paste an existing parameter.
4. In the Parameter column, enter a unique name for the new derived parameter (Invalid
parameter name characters are \ / : * ? " < > | and no leading or trailing spaces, or tabs
allowed).
5. In the Data Source Type column, select Derived.
6. In the Data Source Argument column enter: GetMissionAttribute("AttributeName")
for example, GetMissionAttribute("ProjectID")
7. Enter/change information in the remaining columns as required.
8. Click a Save option.
To edit the Mission Attributes table in the Configuration File:
1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Click the Test folder, Mission Attributes table.
3. Input an entry in the table
4. Click a Save option.

32.30. Previous Function

The Previous function allows you to get the previous value of any parameter, N points back
in time.
Syntax
Prev(Parameter, nPoints)
Param != Prev( Param, 1 ) ? TRUE : FALSE
For example:
When a parameter changes from 1 to 0 ("TriggerParam") I what to store some parameters,
variables, and use them in an equation as constants. For example, weapon release: when a
pickle is pressed, store the lat + long data of the A/C and use them (now as constant values)
in order to calculate distance.
LatAtPickle -> Prev( TriggerParm, 1 ) == 0 && TriggerParam = 1 ? Lat : LatAtPickle
LonAtPickle -> Prev( TriggerParm, 1 ) == 0 && TriggerParam = 1 ? Lon : LonAtPickle
In other words, if the previous value of TriggerParam is zero, and the current 1, then return
the Lat/Lon value... otherwise return "my own value". Using your own parameter name in an
equations returns your last known value. This will essentially "hold" the value.
To compare a value to its previous value:
Param = You data parameter
Param != Prev( Param, 1) ? TRUE : FALSE
This equates to "if the parameter is not equal to the previous value then return TRUE (is
changing) else FALSE (is not changing)". Drop that equation on the Visibility property of a
display.

284
 IADS User Manual

Note: You may want to run these "hold" parameters as type IAP; the IADS server will create
a data file for the parameter(s) to view the history in playback mode. If you do not use type
IAP, you may get unexpected results while scrolling the data, or jumping around in time. If
you are not concerned with the data in playback, use type Derived.
To create a Prev derived parameter:
1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. Copy and paste an existing parameter.
4. In the Parameter column, enter a unique name for the new derived parameter (Invalid
parameter name characters are \ / : * ? " < > | and no leading or trailing spaces, or tabs
allowed).
5. In the Data Source Type column, select Derived or IAP.
6. In the Data Source Argument column enter: Prev(Parameter, nPoints).
7. Enter/change information in the remaining columns as required.
8. Click a Save option.
To add a parameter to a control's property sheet:
1. On the Dashboard click Parameter Tool.
2. Using the Parameter Tool, select the parameter with the mouse.
3. Drag the parameter into the display.
4. Select a property to which the parameter is assigned.

32.31. Set Trigger Parameter

You can use a trigger parameter to fire off the update of a function based on the PCM frame
occurrence of a parameter, every time the trigger parameter appears in the processing stream.
This is typically used in equations involving aperiodic parameters.
Syntax
SetTriggerParam(Trigger Parameter), MyEquation(Parm1, Parm2, etc...)
Example: SetTriggerParam( ParameterN ), MakeBlob( NumBits, Parameter1, Parameter2,
......, ParameterN )
To create a Set Trigger Parameter derived parameter:
1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. Copy and paste an existing parameter.
4. In the Parameter column, enter a unique name for the new derived parameter (Invalid
parameter name characters are \ / : * ? " < > | and no leading or trailing spaces, or tabs
allowed).
5. In the Data Source Type column, select Derived or IAP.
6. In the Data Source Argument column enter: SetTriggerParam(Parm1),
MyEquation(Parm1, Parm2, etc...)
7. Enter/change information in the remaining columns as required.
8. Save the table.

285
 Functions and Equation

Note: The sample rate is re-calculated based on the trigger parameter which sets the entire
equation's update rate; automatically updated in the Parameter Defaults Table. If you don't
specify the "target sample rate", then the derived engine will default to the highest sample
rate of all its input parameters.
Sync Lock processing is not supported for trigger parameters.

32.32. String Compare Function

The purpose of this function is to compare two strings and returns 0 if both strings are
identical.
Syntax
StrCmp(Function( "RequiredArguments", "Value" )
Examples
StrCmp(GetUserInput( "DropDownOutputName" ), "Open" ) returns zero if the
GetUserInput (DropDownOutputName) value is identical to the value you define in the
equation "Open".
StrCmp(GetValue( "DropDown1","Value" ), "ON" ) returns zero if the object's
(DropDown1) property (value) is equal to "ON".
StrCmp(GetKey(), "K" ) returns zero when the "K" keyboard key is held down.
StrCmp(GetTestPointInfoEx( "Group", "Altitude", "5000" ), "5000" )
To create a String Compare derived parameter:
1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. Copy and paste an existing parameter.
4. In the Parameter column, enter a unique name for the new derived parameter (Invalid
parameter name characters are \ / : * ? " < > | and no leading or trailing spaces, or tabs
allowed).
5. In the Data Source Type column, select Derived.
6. In the Data Source Argument column enter: StrCmp(GetValue( "DropDown1","Value" ),
"ON" )
7. Enter/change information in the remaining columns as required.
8. Click a Save option.
To add a parameter to a control's property sheet:
1. On the Dashboard click the Parameter Tool button.
2. Using the Parameter Tool, select the parameter with the mouse.
3. Drag the parameter onto the display.
4. Select the applicable property.

286
 IADS User Manual

32.33. Terrain Functions

The primary purpose of the TerrainFuncs Custom Derived Function is to assist flight test
engineers with position, distance and bearing calculations. The IADS TerrainFuncs.dll is
included in IADS Version 8.0 (or greater) and registers automatically upon installation of the
IADS application.

To create a TerrainFuncs derived parameter:

1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder > click Parameter Defaults.
3. Copy and paste an existing row of data for a parameter that is similar to the one you are
creating.
4. In the Parameter column enter a unique parameter name.
5. In the Data Source Type column, select Derived.
6. Enter the desired Terrain function (see list below) in the Data Source Argument column,
for example: TerrainFuncs.GreatCircleAzimuth(latitude1, longitude1, latitude2,
longitude2)
7. Click the Save button.
Note: For quick setup, run and test all of your equations as type Derived (try to refrain from
scrollback usage) and then transition to type IAP before flight test or data playback tests.
Terrain Functions
Earth Radius at Latitude
Syntax: TerrainFuncs.EarthRadiusAtLat(Latitude, zero_if_meters)
Description: Calculates the radius of the Earth at a Geodetic Latitude given the WGS84 Earth
Model. Inputs are Geodetic Lat, 0.0 if Meters.
Earth Radius at Geocentric Latitude
Syntax: TerrainFuncs.EarthRadiusAtGeocentricLat(latitude, zero_if_meters)
Description: Calculates the radius of the Earth at a Geocentric Latitude given the
WGS84Earth Model. Inputs are Geocentric Lat, 0.0 if Meters.
Great Circle
Syntax: TerrainFuncs.GreatCircle(latitude1, longitude1, latitude2, longitude2,
zero_if_meters, [Optional] Earth Radius)
Description: Calculates the shortest distance between two points on the Spherical Earth
Model. Inputs are Lat1, Lon1, Lat2, Lon2, 0.0 if Meters and an optional Earth Radius from
WGS84 Ellipsoid entry. If this option is not used, the default Earth Radius is the Mean as
defined on Wikipedia: 6371008.7714.
Great Circle Azimuth
Syntax: TerrainFuncs.GreatCircleAzimuth(latitude1, longitude1, latitude2, longitude2)

287
Functions and Equation

Description: Calculates the bearing in degrees of a Great Circle Route using a Spherical Earth
Model. Inputs are Lat1, Lon1, Lat2, Lon2.
Great Circle Haversine
Syntax: TerrainFuncs.GreatCircleHav(latitude1, longitude1, latitude2, longitude2,
zero_if_meters, [Optional] Earth Radius)
Description: Calculates the shortest distance between two points on the Spherical Earth
Model using the Haversine Formula. Inputs are Lat1, Lon1, Lat2, Lon2, 0.0 if Meters and an
optional Earth Radius from WGS84 Ellipsoid entry. If this option is not used, the default
Earth Radius is the Mean as defined on Wikipedia: 6371008.7714.
Great Circle Vincenty
Syntax: TerrainFuncs.GreatCircleVin(latitude1, longitude1, latitude2, longitude2,
zero_if_meters, [Optional] Earth Radius)
Description: Calculates the shortest distance between two points on the Spherical Earth
Model using the Spherical special case of the Vincenty Formula. Inputs are Lat1, Lon1, Lat2,
Lon2, 0.0 if Meters and an optional Earth Radius from WGS84 Ellipsoid entry. If this option
is not used, the default Earth Radius is the Mean as defined on Wikipedia: 6371008.7714.
Great Circle Reckon Latitude
Syntax: TerrainFuncs.GreatCircleReckonLat(Start Latitude, Azimuth, Range,
zero_if_meters, [Optional] Earth Radius)
Description: Calculates the latitude of a destination point on the Spherical Earth Model.
Inputs are Starting Lat, Azimuth, Range, 0.0 if Meters and an optional Earth Radius from
WGS84 Ellipsoid entry. If this option is not used, the default Earth Radius is the Mean as
defined on Wikipedia: 6371008.7714.
Great Circle Reckon Longitude
Syntax: TerrainFuncs.GreatCircleReckonLon(Start Latitude, Start Longitude, Azimuth
,Range, zero_if_meters, [Optional] Earth Radius)
Description: Calculates the longitude of a destination point on the Spherical Earth Mode.
Inputs are Starting Lat, Starting Lon, Azimuth, Range, 0.0 if Meters and an optional Earth
Radius from WGS84 Ellipsoid entry. If this option is not used, the default Earth Radius is the
Mean as defined on Wikipedia: 6371008.7714.
Vincenty Direct Latitude
Syntax: TerrainFuncs.VincentyDirectLat(Start Latitude, Start Azimuth, Range,
zero_if_meters)
Description: Calculates the latitude of a destination point using the Vincenty Formula. Inputs
are Starting Lat, Starting Azimuth, Range, 0.0 if Meters.
Vincenty Direct Longitude
Syntax: TerrainFuncs.VincentyDirectLon(Start Latitude, Start Longitude, Start Azimuth,
Range, zero_if_meters)
Description: Calculates the longitude of a destination point using the Vincenty Formula.
Inputs are Starting Lat, Starting Lon, Starting Azimuth, Range, 0.0 if Meters.
Vincenty Direct Az2

288
 IADS User Manual

Syntax: TerrainFuncs.VincentyDirectAz2(Start Latitude, Start Azimuth, Range,

zero_if_meters)
Description: Calculates the ending azimuth in degrees of a route using the Vincenty Formula.
Inputs are Starting Latitude, Starting Azimuth, Range, 0.0 if Meters.
Vincenty Inverse
Syntax: TerrainFuncs.VincentyInverse(Latitude1, Longitude1, Latitude2, Longitude2,
zero_if_meters)
Description: Calculates the shortest distance between two points on the WGS84 Earth Model
using the Vincenty Formula. Inputs are Lat1, Lon1, Lat2, Lon2, 0.0 if Meters.
Vincenty Inverse Az1
Syntax: TerrainFuncs.VincentyInverseAz1(Latitude1, Longitude1, Latitude2, Longitude2)
Description: Calculates the ending azimuth of a route using the Vincenty Formula. Inputs are
Lat1, Lon1, Lat2, Lon2.
DTED0 Elevation
Syntax: TerrainFuncs.DTED0_Elevation(Latitude, Longitude, zero_if_meters, “terrain file
path”, interp method)
Description: Calculates DTED0 elevation using Latitude, Longitude, 0.0 if Meters, terrain
file path, interp method (0 =bilinear, any other number = nearest).
GTOPO30 Elevation
Syntax: TerrainFuncs.GTOPOP30_Elevation(Latitude, Longitude, zero_if_meters, “terrain
file path”, interp method)
Description: Calculates GTOPO30 elevation using Latitude, Longitude, 0.0 if Meters, terrain
file path, interp method (0 =bilinear, any other number = nearest).

32.34. Time in derived Equations

Obtaining the current time in a derived equation
These equations can help you quickly set up a "time" display by dropping it into an
Alphanumeric or ActiveX text object. In a Text object you can set the value format to "t" or
"T" to increase/decrease the precision on the time that is returned.
CurrentTime() - Returns a floating point number representing the current time of day
(seconds since midnight) in the format seconds.nanoseconds.
CurrentTimeOfYear() - Returns the current time of year (seconds since new year), if you
need the extra resolution. Set the ParamType to double vs float to avoid rounding issues.
Note: The equations shown in the examples below are in the form Parameter Name =
Equation. To create a derived parameter, remove the Parameter Name = portion.
Determining "how much time" (and accessing the previous value of your "own" equation)
You can determine "how much time" a parameter stayed in a given range or "how much
time" it has sustained any condition. For example, to count the number of seconds that the
aircraft's g-meter has stayed in the range of -0.1 to 0.1g
GMeterInRange = Parameter >= -0.1 && Parameter <= 0.1 ? TRUE : FALSE

289
Functions and Equation

You can develop a derived equation that tests for the condition: "increments" itself by the
"time per data point" when the condition is true, and resets itself to zero when the condition
failed
TimeGMeterInRange = GMeterInRange == TRUE ?
TimeGMeterInRange+1.0/GetUpdateRate(GMeterInRange) : 0
If GMeterInRange increments by the amount of time in one data point
(1.0/GetUpdateRate(GMeterInRange)), otherwise return "0" and reset the equation. The trick
here is that you accessed the previous value by using TimeGMeterInRange (your "own"
parameter), in the equation. In other words, you could easily create a ramp function using the
equation Ramp = Ramp + 1
Capturing the exact time an event occurred
You can determine when a specific condition (for instance the G meter from the previous
example) went out of range:
LastTimeGMeterNotInRange = GMeterInRange == FALSE ? CurrentTime() :
LastTimeGMeterNotInRange
In the equation above, the condition is tested using the derived parameter GMeterInRange.
When the condition fails (value is FALSE), the current time is captured by returning the
value of the CurrentTime() function; otherwise the previous value of your "own" equation is
returned (example above.) This technique allows us to "hold" the time value until the next
GMeterInRange == FALSE condition occurs. Likewise, It can be used to "hold" any value
for a predetermined amount of time or until a condition occurs.
Accessing data from a parameter at a specific time (using an embedded time to access data)
You can use an actual "time" value to extract data from a parameter:
GetValueAtTime(Parameter, BusMessageTime)
First, convert the bus message time parameter (for example, B2035) into the format seconds
since midnight:
BusMessageTime = fmod(B2035, 60*60*24) Note: Remove "days" portion of time
- Or -
DifferenceBetweenEmbededTimeAndIadsTime = CurrentTime() - BusMessageTime
CorrectedBusMessageTime = BusMessageTime +
DifferenceBetweenEmbededTimeAndIadsTime
Or, using the GMeter time we obtained above:
GetValueAtTime(Parameter, LastTimeGMeterNotInRange + CorrectedBusMessageTime)
To capture display data at a certain point in time (latch)
The Prev function allows you to get the previous value of any parameter, n points back in
time.
Where Ramp is an incrementing integer:
Error = Ramp - 1 == Prev(Ramp, 1) ? False : True
If you want to hold the result for 10 seconds:
Error_Latch = Latch(Error, Error == True, 10)

290
IADS User Manual

To show the value of certain parameters at the point a discrete signal goes off, develop a
series of derived equations to latch the value given a certain condition. You will need to
create a derived parameter for each parameter you want to latch.
ParameterName = MyLatch1
Equation = Prev(TouchDown,1) == 0 && TouchDown == 1 ? GrossWeight : MyLatch1
In other words, "if the touchdown parameter is making a transition between off and on then
return the value of GrossWeight, otherwise, return my equations last know value". This will
in essence "latch" the value of GrossWeight at exact transition of touchdown. Note that in the
equation above the last variable listed in the else statement (MyLatch1) must match exactly
the name of your output derived equation.
To count the actual time directly based on each data point:
Param = Your data parameter
TimeAboveThresh = Param > SomeThreshold ?
(TimeAboveThresh+1/GetUpdateRate(TimeAboveThresh)) : 0 Trigger = TimeAboveThresh
> SomeTimeLength ? TRUE : FALSE
To measure the time between two successive peaks
1. Create a derived parameter equation that will return 1 when it detected a peak, and zero
otherwise. Defining a peak can be a bit tricky, especially if you have noisy data. In this case I
assume the data is perfect and locate a positive value that was a 'maxima'. I did that by
checking if the value was > 0 (only focusing on positive value peaks), and if the data value
two points previous was less than the value of the previous [point.... combined with fact that
the previous value was greater than the current. In other words, the values two back were
growing, and then there was a drop in the current point's value.
The equation: Param1 > 0 && Prev( Param1, 2 ) < Prev( Param1, 1 ) && Prev( Param1, 1 )
> Param1
When I dropped this parameter (I named it IsPeak) into a Stripchart, I could see a little spike
that aligned to the peak of the input parameter (Param1). So far so good.
2. Now that I had a peak detector equation, I used that to capture the current time at the peak.
For that purpose, I created another derived parameter equation: IsPeak ? CurrentTime() : this
Notice the use of 'this' in the equation. "This" essentially returns the last value of your
equation, so essentially the equation is saying 'if there is a peak detected then return the
current time of the clock.... and if not, hold my last value. I called this parameter
TimeAtPeak. When I dropped this parameter into a Stripchart I could see it output the current
time (in seconds.nanoseconds since midnight) each time the peak occurred. Now it's pretty
close.
3. Once I had the TimeAtPeak parameter, I again used the "Prev" function to get the value of
the last two peaks and subtract. That's it. Bingo, it worked. Here's the final equation: IsPeak?
(TimeAtPeak - Prev( TimeAtPeak, 1 )) : this
The equation uses the same IsPeak parameter to detect the peak, and when this occurred I
subtracted the two times... otherwise I returned my last value. The result is that this parameter
outputs the time between the last two peak continuously. I called this parameter
TimeBetweenPeaks.

291
 Functions and Equation

32.35. Unit Conversions

The Unit Conversion table in the Configuration Tool is predefined with a list of common unit
conversions. Users can add conversion factors/expressions to the table for use in derived
equations.
Syntax
ConvertUnits(parameter, "SourceUnits", "DestUnits")
To add an entry to the Unit Conversions table:
1. Click the Configuration button on the Dashboard.
2. Open the Test folder, then click UnitConversions.
3. Scroll down to the first empty row.
4. Add an entry in the FromUnits column.
5. Add an entry in the ToUnits column.
6. Add an entry in the ConversionFactor column.
7. Save the table.
Celsius to Fahrenheit conversion example
Unit Conversion Table entry:

Derived Parameters in Parameter Defaults Table

32.36. Variance Function

The variance is the square of the standard deviation, so it gives you an estimate of how
distributed the values are within the range. A variance of '0' denotes that the value didn't
change over the entire period measured. 0.1 indicates small differences. If you want to
measure "absolute staleness" of a data, compare Variance to the value of 0 (zero). That will
tell you that the value remained constant over the period measured.
This could also be accomplished using the FirstDerivative function also, but Variance is
based on the average of the data values that it's calculating over, so it is easier to "tune" the
threshold to get consistent results.
Syntax
Variance(Parameter, nPoints)
For example:
You could use this function to determine if the pilot held the aileron/flap/elevon position (or
airspeed) steady for a given amount of time. We could also use this function to detect the
point at which the weapons doors (or landing gear) opened or closed (or detect whenever they
are in motion).
IsParameterChanging = Variance(Param, GetUpdateRate(Param)*Ns ) > 0.1 ? TRUE :
FALSE Where Ns is the number of seconds to detect change over.. For example,

292
 IADS User Manual

Is_ParmA_Changing = Variance(ParmA, GetUpdateRate(ParmA)*0.25 ) > 0.1 ? TRUE :

FALSE
DidPilotHoldAirpeedSteadyForLastNSeconds = Variance(Param,
GetUpdateRate(Param)*Ns) < 0.1 ? TRUE : FALSE Where Ns is the number of seconds
IsWeaponDoorPositionChanging = Variance(Param, GetUpdateRate(Param)*0.25) > 0.1 ?
TRUE : FALSE
DidWeaponDoorStop = IsWeaponDoorPositionChanging == FALSE &&
Prev(IsWeaponDoorPositionChanging, 1) == TRUE ? TRUE : FALSE
DidWeaponDoorStart = IsWeaponDoorPositionChanging == TRUE &&
Prev(IsWeaponDoorPositionChanging, 1) == FALSE ? TRUE : FALSE
To create a Variance derived parameter:
1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. Copy and paste an existing parameter.
4. In the Parameter column, enter a unique name for the new derived parameter (Invalid
parameter name characters are \ / : * ? " < > | and no leading or trailing spaces, or tabs
allowed).
5. In the Data Source Type column, select Derived or IAP.
6. In the Data Source Argument column enter: Variance(Parameter, nPoints).
7. Enter/change information in the remaining columns as required.
8. Click a Save option.

33. Time Domain Analysis

33.1. IADS Data Analysis
The time domain is one of the two standpoints from which to view a signal in IADS the other
is the frequency domain. A signal can be converted from the time to the frequency domain
using a Fourier Transform. Any given signal can be fully represented in either of these
domains.
The Time Domain

In the time domain signals are displayed so that one axis is a time variable and the other axis
is the amplitude of the signal. Time domain analysis refers to damping calculation methods
performed in Stripcharts. Log decrement, log decrement Averaging, and log amplitude
picking are the time domain analysis methods provided by IADS.

293
 Time Domain Analysis

The Frequency Domain

Frequency Plots, Octave Band Plots, Frequency Response Plots, and Nyquist Plots display
frequency domain data.
These displays are driven by calculations of real time, time history data or by calculations
made from frozen time history data (fixed block frequency analysis).
Frequency domain analysis methods exist to measure the frequency, amplitude, damping,
phase and coherence of measured modal data. These analysis methods allow the user to easily
analyze multiple-degree-of-freedom systems and to observe the relative dominance of
structural modes.

33.2. Averaging Data Using Real Time Randomdec (RTRD)

To apply Real Time Randomdec to time history data:

1. Select the Stripchart containing the data you want to analyze.
2. Right-click the mouse in the Stripchart and select Compute > Real Time Randomdec.
3. In the RTRD Stripchart, right-click and select RTRD Settings ...
4. In the Real Time Randomdec dialog, enter the Threshold. The Threshold you set
determines at what level the system will look for blocks of data to average. Every point
where the signal crosses the threshold level will be the beginning of a block. Therefore,

294
 IADS User Manual

the threshold you specify will ultimately determine the number of blocks calculated by
the system.
5. Enter the Block Size. The system only uses full blocks in its Averaging calculation. The
final block in a signal segment will be dropped if it is shorter than the length you specify.
6. Select the Transition Type. Blocks are at positive or negative crossings of the activation
level. If you specify Positive, the system will select crossings that begin on the negative
side and end on the positive side of the activation level. If you specify Negative, the
reverse is true: the system will select crossings that begin on the positive side and end on
the negative side.
7. Select the Analysis Type.
8. Click Apply or OK.
To calculate Frequency and Damping Results in Real Time Randomdec Display:
1. Complete Steps 1-5 above.
2. Make two point selections in the signature.
3. Right click and select Compute > LogDec, LogDecAvg, LogAmpPick or THCF (Time
History Curve Fit).
To log the Frequency and Damping Results from a Real Time Randomdec Display:
1. Freeze the Analysis Window.
2. Right click in the Frequency Plot, and select Log Data, Log RTRD Analysis Results.
To shorten or lengthen the results (box) shown on the display:
 With your cursor in the display, press the T key.

33.3. Averaging Data Using Manual Auto Correlation

Auto Correlation is used to reduce the random noise present in a signal while maintaining the
original modal information. After an Auto Correlation has been performed on a signal, the
Log Decrement, Log Decrement Averaging, Log Amplitude Picking, or Time History Curve
Fit methods can be used on the Auto Correlation overlay to estimate frequency and damping.
If modal information is present in the original signal, this information will be brought out in
the resultant signal by the reduction of the random noise. In many situations the resultant
signal will be distorted from the original in both phase and amplitude.
You may apply Auto Correlation to any signal comprised of floating point data. It is intended
to be used on data where modal information is present.
To manually apply Auto Correlation to time history data:
1. Freeze the Analysis Window containing the data you want to analyze.
2. Select the Stripchart.
3. Select exactly two points to define the signal segment you want to average.

4. On the Toolbar, click the AC button.

Note: The averaged data will appear as a green overlay on the Stripchart parameter trace.

295
 Time Domain Analysis

33.4. Averaging Data Using Manual Pseudo Randomdec

Pseudo Randomdec can be used to average out noise in data, leaving only the response of the
mode of interest. The data must be of successive bursts with the same frequency, amplitude
and duration.

To apply Pseudo Randomdec to time history data:

1. Freeze the Analysis Window containing the data you want to analyze.
2. Select the Stripchart.
3. Select exactly two points to define the signal segment you want to average.

4. On the Toolbar, click the PRD button.

5. In the Pseudo Randomdec dialog, select an Activation option.
6. Select the FES frequency in hertz. If you select the Auto option, the FES frequency field
is grayed out and the system uses the FES frequency parameter for the frequency.
7. Select the User Factor. This field is not applicable for Activation Options 1 and 2 and
will be grayed out.
8. Click Apply or OK.
Note: The averaged data will appear as a green overlay on the parameter data trace.

33.5. Selecting a Signal Segment for Pseudo Randomdec

To select a signal segment:
 Click two points on the parameter trace.
When selecting the first point:
 If you select the first point in a burst or its free response, then the start point of the
analysis segment will be at the beginning of that free response.
When selecting the second point:
 If you select the second point in a burst section, then the end point of the analysis
segment will be at the beginning of that burst section.
- Or -
 If you select the second point in a free response, then that point itself defines the end of
the analysis segment.

296
 IADS User Manual

Note: Do not put both the first and second points in the same excitation-response pair, the
analysis will not be performed.

33.6. Activation Option Table for Pseudo Randomdec

To is the signal on-to-off transition point.

A is the User Factor.
PPC is the points per cycle, or, the samples per second divided by the Frequency.
Activation Options:
Option #1 is the default. The beginning of the block is taken at the on-to-off transition point
with no delay.
Option #2: The first block is taken at the on-to-off transition point with no delay. The second
and all subsequent blocks are taken with a delay equal to the transition point plus one FES
cycle.
Option #3: The first block is taken at the on-to-off transition point with no delay. The second
and all subsequent blocks are taken with a delay equal to the transition point plus the user
factor times one FES cycle.
Option #4: The first block is taken at the on-to-off transition point with no delay. The second
block is taken with a delay equal to the transition point plus the user factor times one FES
cycle. The third and all subsequent blocks are taken with a delay equal to the transition point
plus (1 + user factor/2) times one FES cycle.
Option #5: The first block is taken at the on-to-off transition point with no delay. The second
block is taken with a delay equal to the transition point plus the user factor times one FES
cycle. The third block is taken with a delay equal to the transition point plus one FES cycle.

297
 Time Domain Analysis

The fourth and all subsequent blocks are taken with a delay equal to the transition point plus
(1+ user factor) times one FES cycle.
Option #6: The first block is taken at the on-to-off transition point with no delay. The second
block is taken with a delay equal to the transition point plus the user factor times one FES
cycle. The third block is taken with a delay equal to the transition point plus one FES cycle.
The fourth block is taken with a delay equal to the transition point plus (1+ user factor) times
one FES cycle. The fifth and subsequent blocks are taken with a delay equal to the transition
point plus (2+ user factor/2) times one FES cycle.
Option #7: The first block is taken at the on-to-off transition point with no delay. The second
block is taken with a delay equal to the transition point plus the user factor divided by two
time one FES cycle. The third block is taken with a delay equal to the transition point plus the
user factor times one FES cycle. The fourth block is taken with a delay equal to the transition
point plus one FES cycle. The fifth block is taken with a delay equal to the transition point
plus (1+ user factor) times one FES cycle. The sixth and subsequent blocks are taken with a
delay equal to the transition point plus (2+ user factor/2) times one FES cycle.
Note: For all activation options, if the analysis segment contains more than six bursts, the
activation point for the seventh and subsequent bursts is the same as the sixth activation
point.

33.7. Averaging Data Using Manual Randomdec

To apply Randomdec to time history data:

1. Freeze the Analysis Window containing the data you want to analyze.
2. Select the Stripchart.
3. Select exactly two points to define the signal segment you want to average.

4. On the Toolbar, click the RD button.

5. In the Randomdec dialog, enter the Activation Level. Determines at what level the
system will look for blocks of data to average. Every point where the signal crosses the
threshold level will be the beginning of a block. Therefore, the threshold you specify will
ultimately determine the number of blocks calculated by the system.
6. Enter the Block Size. The system only uses full blocks in its Averaging calculation. The
final block in a signal segment will be dropped if it is shorter than the length you specify.
7. Select the Transition Type. Blocks are at positive or negative crossings of the activation
level. If you specify Positive, the system will select crossings that begin on the negative
side and end on the positive side of the activation level. If you specify Negative, the
reverse is true: the system will select crossings that begin on the positive side and end on
the negative side.
8. Click Apply or OK.

298
 IADS User Manual

Note: The averaged data will appear as a green overlay on the parameter data trace. The pink
bar can be moved left or right to adjust the results.

33.8. Deleting a Data Overlay

Data overlays show the results of analyses or averaging techniques performed on time history
data. They appear as colored segments on the Stripchart parameter trace. You can delete the
overlays to repeat the analysis on the same data.
To delete a data overlay:
1. Right-click on the Stripchart.
2. Select Delete.
3. Click Data Overlay.

33.9. Calculating Frequency and Damping Using Log Decrement

The Log Decrement algorithm is used to extract frequency and damping from a decaying
sinusoidal time history where one mode is present.
The manual Log Decrement algorithm requires only two selections encompassing the data to
be analyzed. If the selections are not on peaks, IADS goes to the nearest available peak
automatically. After calculation is complete, a results bar and a pink wave overlay are
displayed. The results bar shows frequency and Damping. The overlay is an ideal decay for
comparison that shows where the calculated start and stop times are (these values are also in
the Analysis Log).
To calculate Frequency and Damping using Log Decrement:
1. Freeze the Stripchart containing the data you want to analyze.
2. Select the Stripchart.
3. Select the two points that encompass the data you want to analyze. There must be at least
one zero crossing between the picks.

4. On the Toolbar click the LDec button.

To move a peak point:
1. Move the cursor onto the peak point (it should appear red).
2. left-click select and drag the pick to the desired location. Using the <Shift> key will put
the selected point on a peak. Using the <Ctrl> key will allow the selected point to be
placed off the data line.
Note: The overlay and log entries will dynamically update as a point is moved.

299
 Time Domain Analysis

To edit the result bar:

1. Move the cursor onto the result bar in the Stripchart (it should appear red).
2. Right click > Edit Overlay.
3. Type in desired information.
4. Press the Enter key to close the edit function.
To move the result bar:
1. Move the cursor onto the result bar in the Stripchart (it should appear red).
2. Left click then select and drag the result bar to the desired location. The results in the
Analysis Log will update to display the current result bar value.
Note: In IADS, damping values are structural (twice the exponential damping coefficient). If
you are working in another discipline and wish to know the damping coefficient, divide by
2.0.

33.10. Calculating Frequency and Damping Using Log Decrement Averaging

The Log Decrement Averaging algorithm is used to extract frequency and damping from a
decaying sinusoidal time history where one mode is dominant, but there is enough variation
in the decay of adjacent peaks to warrant averaging.
The Log Decrement algorithm requires only two selections encompassing the data to be
analyzed. If the selections are not on peaks, IADS goes to the nearest available peak
automatically. The peaks between the two end selections are found automatically. After the
calculation is complete, a results bar and pink wave overlay are displayed. The overlay is an
ideal decay for comparison that shows where the calculated start and stop times are (these
values are also in the Analysis Log).
To Calculate Frequency and Damping using Log Decrement Averaging:
1. Freeze the Analysis Window containing the data you want to analyze.
2. Select the Stripchart.
3. Select the two points that encompass the data you want to analyze. There must be at least
one zero crossing between the picks.

4. On the Toolbar, click the LDA button.

To move a peak point:
1. Move the cursor onto the peak point (it should appear red).
2. left-click select and drag the pick to the desired location. Using the <Shift> key will put
the selected point on a peak. Using the <Ctrl> key will allow the selected point to be
placed off the data line.
Note: The overlay and log entries will dynamically update as a point is moved.
To edit the result bar:
1. Move the cursor onto the results bar on the Stripchart (it should appear red).
2. Right click > Edit Overlay.
3. Type in desired information.
4. Press the Enter key to close the edit function.

300
 IADS User Manual

To move the result bar:

1. Move the cursor onto the results bar on the Stripchart (it should appear red).
2. Left click then select and drag the result bar to the desired location. The results in the
Analysis Log will update to display the current result bar value.
Note: In IADS, damping values are structural (twice the exponential damping coefficient). If
you are working in another discipline and wish to know the damping coefficient, just divide
by 2.0.

33.11. Calculating Frequency and Damping Using Log Amplitude Picking

The Log Amplitude Picking algorithm is used to extract frequency and damping from a
decaying sinusoidal time history that does not display a clean exponential damping envelope.
This is the most versatile of the three time domain single mode damping algorithms. The
user “picks” a string of consecutive peaks on a decay and the algorithm performs a straight
line fit on the natural log of the peak’s magnitudes.
To calculate Frequency and Damping using Log Amplitude Picking:
1. Freeze the Stripchart containing the data you want to analyze.
2. Select the Stripchart.
3. Select the signal peaks you want to analyze. At least two point picks and a pick every half
cycle is required for a good fit. The picks can be made of the data line (see "To move a
peak point" below). IADS does not fit the data; it fits the picks. The peak picks do not
have to be in time order as they are sorted automatically.

4. On the Toolbar click the LAmp button. After calculation is complete, a results bar
and a pink wave overlay are displayed. The results bar shows frequency and damping.
To move a peak point:
1. Move the cursor onto the peak point (it should appear red).
2. left-click select and drag the pick to the desired location. Using the <Shift> key will put
the selected point on a peak. Using the <Ctrl> key will allow the selected point to be
placed off the data line.
Note: The overlay and log entries will dynamically update as a point is moved.
To edit the result bar:
1. Move the cursor onto the result bar in the Stripchart (it should appear red).
2. Right click > Edit Overlay.
3. Type in desired information.
4. Press the Enter key to close the edit function.
To move the result bar:
1. Move the cursor onto the result bar in the Stripchart (it should appear red).
2. Left click then select and drag the result bar to the desired location. The results in the
Analysis Log will update to display the current result bar value.
Note: In IADS, damping values are structural (twice the exponential damping coefficient). If
you are working in another discipline and wish to know the damping coefficient, divide by
2.0.

301
 Time Domain Analysis

33.12. Calculating Frequency and Damping Using Time History Curve Fit (THCF)
Use Time History Curve Fitting to analyze a multi-modal impulse response. The Chirp Z
Transform is now used in the PSD plot to improve frequency domain resolution; modal peaks
are also easier to select.
The Time History Curve Fit algorithm uses the data overlay if present. If there is an overlay
on the Stripchart from Autocorrelation, Randomdec, or Pseudo Randomdec analysis, the
THCF will use the overlay values. The user may want to avoid crossing from raw data to
overlay data for the THCF analysis.
To calculate frequency and damping using Time History Curve Fit:
1. Freeze the Analysis Window containing the data you want to analyze.
2. Zoom and scroll data until decay is within full view inside of a Stripchart(s).
3. Select the Stripchart(s).

4. On the Toolbar, click the THCF button. The Time History Curve Fit dialog will
then appear displaying the data of interest in a Stripchart as well as a Power Spectral
Density Plot (PSD).
5. Define the time segment you want to analyze on the Stripchart in the THCF dialog box
by selecting the "start" and "stop" times with the "peak mode" active (Shift key held
down). The algorithm converges on an answer quicker if the "start" selection is on the
largest peak of the decay and the "stop" selection is on a significantly damped peak of
decay.
6. Select only the dominant modes/peaks on the Power Spectral Density (PSD) Plot in the
THCF dialog box (up to 10). With your cursor in the display press the Shift key to assist
you in peak finding. The number of dominant modes/peaks selected will determine how
many Frequency/Damping pairs will be produced and also the complexity of the curve
fit.
7. In the Time History Curve Fit dialog box, enter the maximum number of iterations you
want and the % tolerance. By default, the maximum iterations is large and % tolerance
small. This will cause the algorithm to calculate for a significant time, attempting to find
the most accurate answers (It can be stopped at any time). Use the THCF display toggle
button or the “E” keyboard key to toggle the error criterion between “Max Normalized
Standard Deviation (NSD)” and “Max %Delta” (your cursor must be in the THCF
display but cannot be in the Stripchart or Frequency Plot; you cannot change while a
multi-curve fit is in progress).
8. Click the Curve Fit Button. As the algorithm iterates, it periodically updates an overlay
on the Stripchart with its current curve fit results, as well as the results matrix with the
current frequency and damping for each mode selected. (For multiple
Parameters/Stripcharts click Multi).
9. When the overlay and frequency/damping pairs are acceptable, click the Stop Curve Fit
button or wait until either the max iterations or % tolerance are satisfied (may take a long
time), click Accept. The results will be written to the Analysis Log.

302
IADS User Manual

Dialog Descriptions
Stripchart and PSD Plot:
The curve fit is presented by a pink data overlay on the original data, or an overlay result
from an Autocorrelation, Randomdec, or Pseudo Randomdec calculation. If multiple
parameters were used, the overlay will remain when switching between parameters.
A PSD is used to help identify modes. Select the point’s peaks to be curve fit. The system
allows up to ten selections. Once the points are selected, the Frequency and Amplitude are
displayed in the Initiation Info table.
Initiation Info:
Parameter - Shows the active parameter in the THCF display.
Maximum Iterations - The number of times the curve fit algorithm is run. If the algorithm
does not converge before the set iteration amount or the tolerance is met, the system will
warn you. The field to the right of Max Iterations will update to show, the number of
iterations before curve fit was achieved, the error tolerance was reached, or max iterations
was reached.
Error Criterion:
Use the THCF display button or the "E" keyboard key to toggle between Max NSD and Max
%Delta. Your cursor should be in the THCF display but not in the Stripchart or PSD plot
when using the function key. The toggle will not work while a curve fit is in process. The
table updates to show the Frequency and Amplitude of each point selected in the Frequency
Plot.

303
 Time Domain Analysis

Max NSD (Normalized Standard Deviation) - Iteration continues until the normalized
standard deviation is less than the user specified value. Use this when fit accuracy is more
important than convergence time. The NSD field is updated after each iteration.
Max %Delta - Iteration continues until the Frequency, Damping, Amplitude and Phase value
of all mode selections are changing less than the user specified value. This method will
terminate iteration faster than the Max NSD, and is recommended for multi-curve fits.
Curve Fit - Once you have all the desired points selected, the maximum iterations and
tolerance set, press this button to begin the curve fit process. This button also stops the curve
fit if it is in process.
Multi Curve Fit - If you have multiple parameters in the Stripchart you selected, the Multi
Curve Fit button curve fits all of the parameters before stopping. Each Stripchart will get an
overlay which can be seen by selecting the desired parameter in the Stripchart title drop-
down. Note: For a multi-curve fit, it is strongly recommended that you use the "Max %Delta"
error criterion.
Reset - Resets all the point selections in the Frequency Plot, all the Frequency and Amplitude
results and any curve fit result within the dialog box.
Results:
When a curve fit is complete, the results are displayed in the table. If the curve fit was
performed on multiple parameters, all sets of results will be displayed.
Note: In IADS, damping values are structural (twice the exponential damping coefficient). If
you are working in another discipline and wish to know the damping coefficient, just divide
by 2.0.
The Time History Curve Fit is quite capable of identifying closely coupled and highly
damped modes.

33.13. Calculating Frequency and Damping Using Damping Ratio

The Damping Ratio is used to determine the level of damping in a system. The damping
algorithm requires two point selections in the Stripchart data to be analyzed. If the selections
are not on peaks, IADS goes to the nearest available peak automatically. After calculation is
complete, a results bar and a pink wave overlay are displayed. The results bar shows
frequency and Damping. The overlay is an ideal decay for comparison that shows where the
calculated start and stop times are (these values are also in the Analysis Log).
Damped Ratio Formula Undamped Natural Frequency

To calculate Frequency and Damping using Damping Ratio:

1. Freeze the Stripchart containing the data you want to analyze.
2. Select the Stripchart.
3. Select the two points that encompass the data you want to analyze. There must be at least
one zero crossing between the picks.
4. Right-click on the Stripchart > Compute > Damping Ratio.
8.

304
 IADS User Manual

To move a peak point:

1. Move the cursor onto the peak point (it should appear red).
2. left-click select and drag the pick to the desired location. Using the <Shift> key will put
the selected point on a peak. Using the <Ctrl> key will allow the selected point to be
placed off the data line.
Note: The overlay and log entries will dynamically update as a point is moved.
To edit the result bar:
1. Move the cursor onto the result bar in the Stripchart (it should appear red).
2. Right click > Edit Overlay.
3. Type in desired information.
4. Press the Enter key to close the edit function.
To move the result bar:
1. Move the cursor onto the result bar in the Stripchart (it should appear red).
2. Left click then select and drag the result bar to the desired location. The results in the
Analysis Log will update to display the current result bar value.

33.14. Calculating Time Domain RMS (Root Mean Square) on a Vertical Stripchart
IADS offers two ways to calculate and display a parameter's RMS value on a Stripchart:
1. Quick-look Text RMS display on a Stripchart border. This RMS function computes an
RMS value using one second of data, and is available on vertical Stripcharts only.
2. Derived Parameter RMS Waveform.
To display Quick-look RMS:
1. Create a vertical Stripchart.
2. Add a parameter.
3. With your cursor in the display press the R key. The RMS text will display on the
Stripchart border. Press the R key again to delete the RMS display.
To create a Derived Parameter RMS Waveform:
1. Create a derived parameter.
2. Enter RMS(parm, nPts) in the Data Source Argument cell (see Equation Operators and
Functions). "parameter" is your original parameter, and the new derived parameter is the
RMS value.
3. Create a Stripchart.
4. Add the derived parameter. The waveform displayed is the RMS of the original
parameter.

33.15. Calculating the Time Above Threshold

To calculate the time above a threshold:
1. Select one or more Stripcharts.
2. With your cursor in the display, right-click.
3. Select Properties.

305
 Frequency Domain Analysis

4. Select the Threshold tab.

5. Set the threshold levels for each Stripchart.
6. Press the H key to display the 'Time Above Warning' value in the Stripchart (vertical
Stripcharts only).
7. Press the G key to reset the 'Time Above Warning' value.
The system calculates and logs a complete threshold break (if the warning is broken, the
border color of the Stripchart changes but the threshold log does not update until the data
goes below the warning threshold again). A calculated total of the time that the data spent
above the warning or alarm threshold is displayed on the bottom of the Stripchart.
Note: After a threshold is broken, the Threshold Log will continue to update, but the
Stripchart border will retain the warning or alarm color until reset.

34. Frequency Domain Analysis

34.1. Calculating Frequency and Damping Using the Half Power Method
The Half Power Damping algorithm is used to extract frequency and damping from frequency
domain data. Sweep response data and random excitation response data can be evaluated with
this algorithm.
The Half Power bar (which can be edited by the user) and a theoretical overlay curve are
provided as visual aids to help improve initial estimates.

To calculate frequency and damping using the Half Power Damping method:
1. Freeze the Analysis Window.
2. Select the Frequency Plot or Frequency Response Plot; or create a fixed block plot by
selecting a data range within a Stripchart, then right-click > Compute > PSD, Auto
Spectrum, Phase & Magnitude, Phase & Gain or Bode.

3. Click the HPD Toolbar button or press the H key (your cursor must be within the
drawing area of the display). "Half Power Enabled" should appear in the PSD/Auto
Spectrum title or the Magnitude subplot title of the Frequency Response plot.
4. On the selected display, move the cursor (hint) to the center frequency of each mode of
interest and click the left mouse button. If the Half Power analysis succeeds, a complete

306
 IADS User Manual

Half Power bar and an overlay will appear. If the analysis fails, a Half Power Bar with
only a vertical line will appear and text will indicate the failure (see editing instructions
and illustration below).
5. If the Half Power Damping results are acceptable press the L key to log the results to the
Analysis Log.
6. To remove a damping bar, move the mouse onto the bar (the bar will turn red) and press
the D key. To remove all bars at once, unfreeze the Analysis Window or toggle Half
Power Damping off with the H key.
Note: In IADS, damping values are structural (twice the exponential damping coefficient). If
you are working in another discipline and wish to know the damping coefficient, just divide
by 2.0.
To edit the half power damping analysis:
1. Right-click on one end of the horizontal damping bar and drag, to resize it symmetrically.
The overlay and turbo hint will update automatically.
2. Left-click on the desired end of the horizontal damping bar and drag, to resize it anti-
symmetrically. The overlay and turbo hint will update automatically.
3. Left-click and drag a point peak (top of the Half Power Bar) to move it. IADS will try to
find the left and right data intercepts for a new horizontal bar and recalculate frequency
and damping. The overlay and turbo hint will update automatically.
To log the half power damping analysis results:
 With the cursor inside the display, click the L keyboard button.
Note: If you try and calculate the half power damping below the axis line, the system will
display the point with a “Failure”.
To change the mathematical model for the overlay (the default model is Receptance):
 With your cursor in the drawing area of the display, press the O key to cycle through
Displacement/Receptance, Velocity/Mobility, and Acceleration/Accelerance models. A
text box in the upper right corner of the display indicates the current overlay model.

34.2. Calculating Phase and Gain Margin

Phase and gain margin information can be displayed on Frequency Response Plots and on the
Nyquist plot. Phase margin is the angular difference from the critical phase frequency at the 0
dB (unity gain) frequency. Gain margin represents the amount by which the gain can be
increased while stability is maintained. In IADS, Gain Margin is calculated either as a
difference in dB from 0 dB (0.0-Gain in dB) or as a gain factor (1/Gain) at a critical phase
frequency (where the phase goes through …540, 180, -180, -540…Degrees; on a Nyquist
plot, these all look like –180).
The margins work for real-time operation or fixed block. The mechanisms differ between the
two plot types, so they are explained separately.
To calculate the phase and gain margin in a Nyquist Plot:
1. Create a Nyquist plot.
2. With the cursor in the plot area press the U key; check the "Show" box on the Display tab
of the Nyquist plot properties sheet or select "Show Unit Circle" on the right-click pop-

307
Frequency Domain Analysis

up menu to bring up the Unit Circle Overlay. If the data meets the proper criteria, the
following will appear on the plot:
a. Blue gain margin Line - If the data crosses the negative horizontal axis, a visual
indicator will appear from (-1,0) to the closest crossing.
b. Red phase margin Line - If the data crosses the unit circle, a visual indicator will
appear from the crossing to (0,0).
c. Gain margin (blue) text box - Linger over this text box for the frequency where
the Gain margin occurs. With your cursor in the plot area, right- click and select
"Show GM in dB" to show dB units in the gain margin text box.
d. Phase margin (red) text box - Linger over this text box for the frequency where
the phase margin occurs. With your cursor in the plot area, pressing the D key or
selecting "Show PM in Degrees" on the right-click pop-up menu toggles
between degrees and radians for the hint and the phase Margin text overlay.
e. Pressing the S key toggles "square units". The axis limits are the same for
positive/negative and horizontal/vertical.
Note: The Nyquist phase margin/gain margin algorithm displays one phase margin and/or one
gain margin. If there are multiple margin frequencies in the displayed data range the
frequency of the closest margin is used. If the displayed margin identified is not the margin of
interest, adjust the min and max frequency on the Display tab of the Nyquist Plot properties
sheet.

To calculate the phase and gain margin in a Frequency Response Plot (FRP):
1. Create a Frequency Response plot. To show the margins, phase & magnitude, phase &
gain, or bode must be used.
2. With the cursor in the plot area press the M key toggles the margin display on and off.
The following will appear on the plot:
a. Blue gain margin Line(s) and vertical and horizontal reference lines.

308
 IADS User Manual

b. Red phase margin Line(s) and vertical and horizontal reference lines.
c. Phase margin (red) and gain margin (blue) text boxes are attached to the
appropriate vertical reference line. Linger over these lines for the frequency
where the margin occurs.
Note: The FRP phase margin/gain margin algorithm identifies up to ten of each type of
margin. If the text boxes overlay, they are stacked as specified by the user. The text boxes are
transparent so the data under them is visible.
To define the phase margin and gain margin detection frequency range:
1. Click inside the magnitude sub-plot to create one or two frequency window selectors (red
vertical bars with the frequency at the top).
2. Drag the bar(s) to the desired frequency. The margin detection will occur between the
bars if both are present. If only one bar is present, it sets the lower limit. If there are no
bars, the entire frequency range is searched.

3. To remove a bar, linger the cursor over it (it will turn bright red) and press the D key.
To adjust the stacking level of the margin text boxes:
1. Press the Shift + K keys to increase the allowable number stacked text boxes.
2. Press the K key to decrease the allowable number stacked text boxes.
To adjust the transparency of the phase/gain margin text boxes:
1. Press the Shift + T key to increase the transparency.
2. Press the T key to decrease the transparency.

34.3. Calculating Frequency and Damping Using RFP Curve Fit

Use the Rational Fraction Polynomial (RFP) Curve Fit to analyze a MDOF frequency
response. The RFP Curve Fit algorithm takes a user specified range of frequency response
data as input and synthesizes phase and magnitude arrays from the frequency and damping
results it computes. The frequency and damping data is provided in a table on the display and
the phase and magnitude arrays are displayed as an overlay for visual comparison.

309
 Frequency Domain Analysis

To calculate the Phase and Gain margin:

1. Create a Frequency Response plot. Phase & magnitude, phase & gain, or Bode must be
used.
2. With your cursor in the plot area press the U key to toggle the Curve Fit, or activate using
the right-click popup menu.
3. Click twice inside the FRP Magnitude sub-plot to create two frequency window selectors
(red vertical bars). These bars define the frequency range on which the fit will be
attempted (see note below).
4. Click on the red bars to adjust the curve fit frequency range.
5. [Optional] With the cursor in the plot area press the C key to toggle on the FRP
Coherence subplot.
Note: The curve fit will be most accurate in frequency ranges where the coherence is at or
near 1.0. The curve fit is not active for Coquad, Phase & Imaginary, and Phase and Real Plots
at the present. The number and location of the frequency bars is retained in memory from
previous RFP or phase and gain margin analyses. If you cannot create one or both bars, zoom
out on the frequency axis until you find the bar(s) and drag them to the desired frequency.
To increase/decrease the Curve Fit Degrees of Freedom (DOF):
 With your cursor in the FRP, press the up/down arrow keys to increase or decrease the
DOF. The maximum allowable DOF is 10.

34.4. Calculating the Selective Area RMS and Selective Area Peak
The Selective Area Root Mean Square (RMS) algorithm computes the RMS of a parameter
over a specified frequency range. It can be used to exclude static loads from RMS
computations (without using filters) and can help determine the true magnitude of a "leaky"
frequency component. In addition, the algorithm provides a running peak value over the same
frequency range.
To compute the RMS and Peak:
1. Create a Frequency Plot (PSD) or Auto Spectrum.
2. Add a parameter.
3. With your cursor in the display press the S key, or right-click > Compute > Selective
Area RMS.
4. With your cursor in the display press the K key, or right-click > Compute > Selective
Area Peak.
A Stripchart is created under the Frequency Plot with two parameters, RMS and Peak. The
hint tracks the active parameter. The K and S keys will toggle the parameters on and off. The
parameters can also be deleted using the display's right-click menu > Delete > Active
Parameter.
To set the Selective Area Range:
1. Left click once or twice in the Frequency Plot. The Boundary bar(s), red in color, will
appear.
2. Click on the bar(s) and drag to the desired frequency.
3. To remove a bar, linger the cursor over it (it will turn bright red) and press the D key.

310
 IADS User Manual

Note: 2 boundary bars set upper and lower limits. 1 boundary bar sets lower limit. No
boundary bars causes the algorithm to use as the limits.

34.5. Calculating Indirect Frequency Response Functions

Indirect Frequency Response Functions (FRF) are used to evaluate the stability and gain of a
system with feedback. Provisions for the calculation of indirect FRFs are included in the
Frequency Response and Nyquist Plots.
To calculate an indirect FRF:
1. Create a Frequency Response Plot or Nyquist Plot.
2. Add a parameter.
3. Both plot types require an input (excitation) parameter. If the excitation is defined in the
Parameter Defaults Table the display will update, if not, you will see a message box
prompting you to drag and drop a second (excitation) parameter.
4. With your cursor in the display right-click and select Properties.
5. On the Analysis tab, select the desired indirect function in the Feedback drop-down
menu. A selection of "none" (default) will cause the normal direct FRF to be used.
Note: Once familiar with the feedback choices, the user can use the "i" key to cycle through
the different functions. Linger over the title of the plot to check the feedback setting.

34.6. Sharing Spectral Data in Frequency Displays

For lengthy data segments, fixed block computations (Frequency Plots, Frequency Response
Plots and Nyquist Plots) can take a lot of time to process. To lesson this burden, IADS stores
spectral data so subsequent computations can use it instead of recalculating. For example:
1. Select two points on a Stripchart and create a fixed block Frequency Response Plot.
2. IADS calculates the result, stores off spectral data, and displays the result.
3. Create a Nyquist Plot using the same selections.
4. IADS references the spectral data, conditions it for Nyquist Plots, and displays the
results.
The following attributes must be identical to those of an existing data set for spectral data to
be shared
 Data Start and Stop Time
 Chirp Z Status
 Frequency Axis Minimum and Maximum (if Chirp Z is active)
 Block Size
 Window Type
 Compute Type (see note below)
 Overlap
Suggested Uses
 Comparison of a Frequency Response Plot with a Nyquist Plot; see Universal Cursor.
 Translating or zooming back and forth with Chirp Z transform active.

311
 Frequency Domain Analysis

 Concurrent recalculation of a set of different frequency domain analyses.

Note: Frequency Response Plots and Nyquist Plots cache enough data to share with each
other and with Frequency Plots. Frequency Plots only cache enough data for subsequent
Frequency Plots.
Octave Band Plots are not included in Spectral Data Sharing in this version.

34.7. Viewing Spectral Data

Spectral data is displayed in Waveform by default. You also have the option to display your
data in Filled Waveform, Spectral Lines, Single Waterfall or Multiple Waterfall plot types.
Multiple parameters can be viewed simultaneously in the Multiple Waterfall plot.
To select a Frequency Plot Type:
1. Right-click on the Frequency Plot > Properties.
2. Set the PlotType property to Normal - Waveform, Normal - Filled Waveform, Normal -
Spectral Lines, Waterfall - Single Parameter Waveform or Waterfall - Multiple Parameter
Waveform (or by pressing the W keyboard key with your cursor in the plot area). See an
example of each plot type below.
Normal - Waveform

Normal - Filled Waveform

Using a filled waveform can aid the user in identifying transient events by making waveform
movement more visible. When chosen, the software fills in the area under the waveform.

Normal - Spectral Lines

Spectral lines aids the user in evaluating the frequency resolution of frequency domain data.
When chosen, the software draws a spectral line from a zero magnitude to the calculated
point magnitude for each frequency point.

312
IADS User Manual

Waterfall - Single Parameter Waveform

A single parameter Waterfall Plot shows a series of consecutive spectral computations
allowing the user to see a time-varying frequency spectrum. With effective block size,
averaging, and overlap settings, the user can view the relationship between critical modes as
aircraft state conditions change. The horizontal and vertical axes represent frequency and
magnitude (like the default display), and the "Z" axis represents time (scale-able by the user
via sample rate, block size and overlap). The "front" waveform is the most current. The
number of previous computations to be displayed can be set by the user.

Waterfall - Multiple Parameter Waveform

A multiple parameter waterfall shows the most current computational result of multiple
parameters. This can be used to view several structures simultaneously and determine relative
sensitivity to a given excitation or maneuver. Also, for multiple parameter overview, this
option can be used to free up the Desktop area. A drop-down title list is used to allow the user
to choose which parameter is up front (frequency domain analyses like Half Power Damping
only work on the front parameter).

To view a Waterfall plot from the top down:

 With the cursor in the plot area press the "4" or "5" keyboard key (shown below with a
Filled Amplitude Rainbow plot color scheme). To return to the plot to its original state,
press the "2" or "3" keyboard key with your cursor in the plot area.

To select a plot color scheme:

1. Right-click on the Frequency Plot > Properties.
2. Set the PlotColorScheme to Normal, Time Contrast, Amplitude Rainbow or Filled
Amplitude Rainbow (or by pressing the C keyboard key with your cursor in the plot area).

313
 Frequency Domain Analysis

Additional features:
 3-D Rotation - Left-click drag on the display.
 Scaling - Right-click and drag up & down to scale the displays contents.
 Parameter peak hold - An E key hit toggles the peak hold extension which draws a peak
hold "surface" (single waterfall) or enables peak hold on all parameters. Peak hold must
be enabled in the property sheet.
 Tail length adjustment - A T key hit decreases tail length (number of previous spectra
data).

34.8. Editing Spectral Data

Averaging techniques are used to reduce the influence of non-linearities and noise effects.
Windowing improves amplitude and frequency accuracy in the frequency domain by
reducing leakage aberrations in the FFT output that are introduced by sudden changes in the
data, at the start and end of data.
To apply or change Frequency Averaging:
1. Right-click on the frequency display.
2. Select Properties.
3. Select the Analysis tab.
4. Under Averaging Method, click Frequency or Time (not implemented).
5. Enter a % Overlap (1-95).
6. If your data is real time (not frozen), under Total Blocks click Defined or Undefined (a
running average).
7. If you clicked Defined, enter the total number of blocks in the Max field.
8. Click Apply or OK.
To reset Frequency Averaging:

 On the Toolbar click the Reset Averaging button.

Note: If no displays on the Analysis Window are selected then All applicable displays will be
reset. If one or more displays are selected, only those chosen will be reset.
To reset the Frequency Averaging for a single display from the keyboard:
 With the cursor in the display press the R key (real time).
To apply or change a window type:
1. Right-click on the Frequency Plot.
2. Select Properties.
3. Select the Analysis tab.
4. Select an option from the Window drop-down list.
5. Click Apply or OK.

314
 IADS User Manual

34.9. Setting/Resetting Peak Hold in Frequency Displays

The Peak Hold function holds the maximum amplitude for each frequency increment. This
function is available in Frequency Plots, Frequency Response Plots and Octave Band Plots.
To set the Peak Hold function in a Frequency Plot:
1. Select the display.
2. Right-click and select properties.
3. Click the Display tab.
4. Under Peak Hold, click Show.
5. Click OK to apply changes and close the Property Sheet.
To reset Peak Hold:
1. Select the display.

2. On the Toolbar, click the Reset Peak Values button.

Note: If no displays on the Analysis Window are selected then all applicable displays will be
reset. If one or more displays are selected, only those chosen will be reset.
To reset the Peak Hold for a single display form the keyboard:
 With the cursor in the display press the P key (real time).
Note: Pressing the SHIFT key with the cursor in the display, shows the point of the largest
peak of either the hold or data trace.
To change the color of the Peak Hold line:
1. Right-click on the display.
2. Select Properties.
3. Select the Display tab.
4. Under Peak Hold, click the Color button.
5. In the Color Selection dialog box, select or create a color.
6. In the Color Selection dialog box, click OK to apply changes and close the Property
Sheet.
7. In the display's property sheet, click Apply to preview the changes.
8. Click OK to apply changes and close the Property Sheet.

34.10. Calculating an Inverse Fourier Transform (IFT)

The IFT produces the Impulse Response Function for a system. Currently, IADS supports
IFT on fixed block (frozen) data.
To calculate an IFT:
1. Freeze the Analysis Window.
2. Select two or more points in a Frequency Plot.
3. Right-click inside the plot and select Log Data > Log Input Data to Stripchart.
Note: When the Analysis Window is unfrozen the Stripchart that is created will be removed.

315
 Frequency Domain Analysis

34.11. Applying the Chirp Z Transform (CZT) within a Frequency Display

The Chirp Z transform can be used in place of the FFT to increase X Axis resolution in a
Frequency Plot or Frequency Response Plot. Using a normal Fast Fourier Transform (FFT),
resolution is limited to (block size/2) bins distributed equally from 0 Hz to the Nyquist
frequency. The Chirp Z, as we have implemented it, distributes (block size) bins equally
between the display's lower and upper visible range, for example, if your display shows 20
Hz to 50 Hz, (Block size) bins will be displayed between 20 Hz and 50 Hz.

To activate the CZT:

 With your cursor in a Frequency Plot or Frequency Response Plot press the Z key.
Alternately, "Use Chirp Z Transform" can be set to "Checked" via the right-click menu.
Advantages of CZT
1. User can select a smaller block size and obtain comparable resolution. This can lower the
load on the CPU and/or allow faster updates.
2. Half Power Damping and Phase/Gain margin calculations can be much more accurate.
3. Close modal peaks are easier to differentiate and mode shapes are easier to identify.
4. CZT Frequency Plots can deliver much better frequency domain data from short time
histories. For this reason the Time History Curve Fit uses the CZT by default.
Disadvantages of CZT
1. The CZT is less computationally efficient than the FFT for a given block size (the CZT
calls the FFT three times in the course of one computation).
2. In Fixed block mode, each translate or zoom on the X Axis requires a complete re-
computation (see note below).
3. In real time, each translate or zoom on the X Axis clears out the averaging and peak hold
buffers. This can be especially disconcerting if the plot is frozen and some form of
averaging was used to create the data displayed before the translate or zoom command.
Note: On a Frequency Plot or Frequency Response Plot that uses the Chirp Z transform, a
change in frequency axis display limits changes the location of frequencies in the data array
(see graphic below). Because of this, averaging buffers and the peak hold array must be reset
for a frequency axis translate or zoom.

316
 IADS User Manual

34.12. Recalculating Frequency Data That Has Been Scrolled Back in Time
When you scroll data back in time, any frequency domain data displayed will remain fixed at
the time you froze the data. This is because the calculations required to continuously update
frequency data as it is scrolled back in time are not performed. The recalculation function,
however, allows you to perform a calculation on frequency domain data at the point in time
you scroll back to.
To recalculate frequency domain data that has been scrolled back in time:
1. Select the frequency display that contains the data to be recalculated.

2. On the Toolbar, click the Recalculate Frequency Analysis button.

Note: The system uses whatever settings are currently in the Frequency Plot Analysis dialog
box to analyze the frequency data.

34.13. Automated Frequency Domain Analysis

The automated frequency domain analysis calculates the frequency modes in a sweep. Up to
ten curve fit degrees of freedom can be displayed in the plot; and up to five past (previous)
automated analysis results.

To setup an automated frequency domain analysis:

1. Setup automated analysis options in a Stripchart.
2. Create a Frequency Response Plot (FRP).
3. Add the parameter in the Stripchart (put your cursor on the Stripchart title-bar, hold down
the Shift key, hold down the left mouse button and drag the parameter) to the FRP as the
Response parameter.
4. Add the Excitation parameter (FES frequency generator signal parameter) to the FRP.

317
 Frequency Domain Analysis

5. Attach the FRP to the Stripchart. Hold down the Ctrl key to select both displays, right-
click in the Analysis Window title-bar > Attachment > Attach (the FRP and Stripchart
will flash green when they attach).
6. On the Dashboard, click the Automated Analysis button; Automated Analysis Enabled is
displayed.
To enable Curve Fitting:
1. With your cursor in the Frequency Response Plot, press the U key to enable Curve
Fitting.
2. Use the keyboard up/down arrows to increase/decrease the Curve Fit Degrees of Freedom
(DOF) results on the display; up to 10.
3. Click twice in the Magnitude (lower) area of the FRP plot to add bounding bars.
4. Put your cursor on the bars to adjust them accordingly in the plot.
5. Curve Fit results, one for each DOF are automatically saved to the IADS Analysis Log
(curve fit values beyond Nyquist frequency are not logged).
To show past auto-analysis results on the display:
 With your cursor in the Frequency Response Plot, press the Q key.

34.14. Frequency Domain Integration (FDI)

To compute the integration:

1. Create a Frequency Plot.
2. Add a parameter to the display with Units defined in the Parameter Defaults Table that
are valid for integration (see table below).
3. Select the display and click the Freq Toolbar button.
4. In the Frequency Analysis Dialog, click the Analysis drop down and select Auto
Spectrum. The plot type and units are displayed in the plot, for example, Auto
Spectrum (in/sec^2 vs. Hz).
5. Click OK. The Frequency Plot title will update to show Auto Spectrum.
6. With your cursor in the display, press the G key to un-square the data (squared by
default). [Optional] Press the A key to auto-scale the data.
7. Right-click on the Frequency Plot > Compute > Enable Single Integration or Enable
Double Integration.

318
 IADS User Manual

To view the FDI information in the display's popup hint:

 Right-click on the Frequency Plot > Compute > Enable Integration in Hint.

Single Integration Units Double Integration Units

g g
ft/sec ft/sec^2
ft/sec^2 in/sec^2
in/sec m/sec^2
in/sec^2
m/sec
m/sec^2

35. Import and Export

35.1. Data Export from a Stripchart
Export data to a CSV file, Excel, or Matlab directly; or use the Data Export Wizard to extend
export options such as parameter filtering, sample rate, etc.
You can define a data group in advance that allows you to export data for multiple parameters
without having to add those parameters to a Stripchart. In this case, the Stripchart is used only
to select the data range and access the export feature. Data will only be exported for those
parameters defined in the data group; whether they are/are not in the Stripchart.
Note: When using the group data export group capability, data settings (filtering, editing, etc)
are taken directly from the parameter defaults table. When exporting data from selected
displays, data settings are taken directly from the parameters in the displays (what you see in
the display is what you get).

319
 Import and Export

To export data in selected displays only:

1. Stop the Analysis Window (click the Stoplight).
2. Select the Stripchart(s) containing the data you want to export.
3. Pick two points in the Stripchart(s) to define the range of data to be exported (if no points
are selected the visible range on the Stripchart are the start and end times). You can select
more than one set of ranges to export. Each set of points will create its own worksheet in
Excel, a separate header in a CSV file, and in Matlab it will append an identifier on the
end of the variable name, for example, parameter_G1, parameter_G2, etc.
4. With your cursor in the Stripchart, right-click to bring up the pop-up menu.
5. Select Data Export > (Export to CSV File, Export to Excel, Export to Matlab) >
Selected Displays (Excel and Matlab are only available if that application is installed on
the machine your using).
To export a Data Group:
1. Stop the Analysis Window (click the Stoplight).
2. Select any Stripchart. Pick two points in the Stripchart to define the range of data to be
exported (if no points are selected the visible range on the Stripchart are the start and end
times). You can select more than one set of ranges to export. Each set of points will
create its own worksheet in Excel, a separate header in a CSV file, and in Matlab it will
append an identifier on the end of the variable name, for example, parameter_G1,
parameter_G2, etc.
3. With your cursor in the Stripchart, right-click to bring up the pop-up menu.
4. Point to Data Export > (Export to CSV File, Export to Excel, Export to Matlab) > Data
Group (Excel and Matlab are only available if that application is installed on your
machine).
Note: Exporting to Excel automatically brings up an Excel spreadsheet containing all the
selected data. The first row of the spreadsheet will show the parameter name and the second
row the sample rate, followed by the data (excel has a data size limitation of 64k rows). If
you do not need to see the data in Excel immediately you can export to CSV and open this
file in Excel later. You will be prompted to select a destination directory or accept the default
location at Program Files\IADS\ClientWorkstation. To add an exact path for the output file
you can set an option in the property bag file of the data group, for example,
\\DefaultExportDirectory = C:/Temp/myExportDirectory. Exporting to Matlab opens the
application; click a parameter name in the workspace area (upper left-hand corner) to view
the data.

35.2. Data Export Wizard

The IADS Data Export Wizard provides a convenient step-by-step method for exporting
parameter data to EXCEL, Matlab or to a CSV text file. The wizard allows you to easily add
and change the parameters and times slices you want to export. It also simplifies the process
of exporting Data Groups, allowing you to create and save new Data Group table entries
without having to edit the table by hand. The wizard is available from the Configuration Tool
or from any Stripchart; the Stripchart allows you to predefine parameters and / or time slices.
If you have parameters in the Stripchart (or time slices selected) this information is populated
in the wizard automatically.

320
IADS User Manual

Note: If you do not need the file to open automatically in Excel after using the wizard, CSV is
the recommended format.

To export data using the Data Export Wizard:

1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Click the File drop down menu > Export > Data Export Wizard...
To open the Data Export Wizard from a Stripchart:
1. Stop the Analysis Window.
2. [Optional] Pick two points in the Stripchart to select a time segment.
3. Right click > Data Export > Data Export Wizard...
Data Export Wizard Page
Select the desired export: "Export parameters in the selected display", "Enter parameters or
choose from list" or "Select or create a Data Groups table entry".
Select the desired output format: "Export a csv file", "Open the data in Excel" or "Open the
data in Matlab" or "Export to Matlab file (Matlab not Installed)".
Data Options Wizard Page
Start and Stop Times - Click the Add button to add one or more time segments. Highlight a
row to use the Edit or Delete buttons.
Sampling options - Use the default settings or edit as desired.
Filtering - Select a filtering option. Override with this filter - To correctly enter the filter
settings, first apply the desired filter settings (using the Filter toolbar button) to a Stripchart
with data. Hint on the title to view the filter, for example, BW,BP,1.0-10.0,2 and use that
string as the input.

321
Import and Export

Parameters - Click in the field to add parameters manually, or click the ... button to open the
Parameter Selection dialog and add multiple parameters quickly.
Data Group Wizard Page (available if Data Group was selected as the export)
Data Groups - Click the My Group or Blank Groups or All Groups option to display those
data group names in the window. Click on a data group name in the list, or click the New...
button to create a new data group. Data group properties (Name, Group, etc...) will update to
reflect the data group selected.
Excel Options Page (available if Excel was selected as the output)
Max Rows - Enter the number of max rows for the Excel worksheet 1-65535.
Rows Method - Click the drop down to select Limit Output to Max Rows or Append New
File.
Append Method - Click the drop down to select New Worksheet or New Workbook.
Command - Executes any valid Excel macro.
Matlab Options Wizard Page (available if Matlab was selected as the output)
Export Method - Click the drop down to select Load into Matlab or Export to File.
Export Shape - Click the drop down to select Row-wise or Column-wise.
Export Type - Click the drop down to select Vector or Matrix.
Extended Info - On by default; outputs a more detailed export string with time and sample
rate.
Max Rows - By default there is no set limit; otherwise, enter the Max Rows and select the
Row Method (below).
Row Method - Specifies an action when max rows export is exceeded. Click the drop down to
select Append to File or Limit output to max value.
Output Name - If the Export to File option is selected, enter an output file name.
Command - If the Load into Matlab option is selected, enter any valid Matlab command.
Additional Options Wizard Page
Time Format - Click the drop down to select None, Seconds since Midnight, Seconds since
New Year, IRIG String or Nanos since New Year.
Name Format - Click the drop down to select Do not Modify, All Upper Case or All Lower
Case.
Name Method - Click the drop down to select Parameter Name, Short Name or Long
Name.
Header Format - Click the drop down to select None, Parameter Names or Quoted
Parameter Names (only applicable to Excel).
Header Rows - Enter header row names such as Parameters, Units, DataSourceType or
Filtering.
Nan Text - If active check for _finite and then output specific text.
Export file is delimited with: (CSV Only) Select Comma, Tab, Other, Space or Vertical
Bar.

322
 IADS User Manual

35.3. Data Groups

Defining a data group in advance allows you to export data for multiple parameters without
having to add all those parameters to a Stripchart; the Stripchart is only used to select the data
range and access the export feature. Data will only be exported for those parameters defined
in the data group whether they are in the Stripchart or not.
Note: Data group export options do not apply for HDF export.

To setup a data group:

1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Click the Data folder < Data Groups.
3. [Optional] Enter a Group name (SubGroup and User are not currently implemented).
This Group name must be the same as your Desktop Group name and only those in that
group will be able to see the data group. Leaving the Group field empty allows all users
to see the data group.
4. Enter a unique identifier in the Name column, for example, DataGroup1.
5. Enter the parameters that you want to export as a group in the Parameters column. The
Parameter Selection Tool is useful for this purpose.
6. [Optional] Enter data group export options in the Property Bag (see the table below).
7. Save the table.
To export a defined data group from a Stripchart
1. Select and Freeze any Stripchart.
2. Pick 2 points in a Stripchart to define the range of data to be exported.
3. With your cursor in the Stripchart, right-click and select Data Export > Export to CSV
File, Export to Excel or Export to Matlab > Data Group, for example, DataGroup1 or
DataGroup2 ( Excel and Matlab are only available if that application is installed on
your machine).
To add or change an Export Default Option:
1. On the Dashboard, click Configuration.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Data Groups.
3. In the Name column enter ExportDefaults.
4. In the PropertyBag column of this row, enter one or more options (see table below).
5. Separate one or more entries in the PropertyBag column with double slashes \\ for
example, \\TimeFormat=IrigString\\DataPrecision=2
6. Save the table.
[Example] To add a ‘decimation factor’ export option to a DataGroup:
1. Click the Data folder > DataGroups table.
2. On the row containing the data group, in the PropertyBag column, enter
\\DecimationFactor=2 (substitute 2 with your own factor). The decimation factor value
determines how many point will be skipped from the highest sample rate in the Data
Group. For example, 1 = every data point, 2 = every second data point, etc... If the largest

323
Import and Export

sample rate of all parameters with the Data Group was 1000 samples per second and the
decimation factor was 2, the data export would produce a value every 1/500 of a second
(Note: An anti-aliasing Low Pass filter is recommended prior to decimation).
3. Save the table.
Note: Export options applied to a data group apply to all the parameters defined in that data
group (export).
Export Options
Option Name and Option Value Option Default Option Example
Purpose
Decimation Factor Integer >1 1 \\DecimationFactor=3
Allows decimation of
exported data by a given
factor.
DefaultExportDirectory A valid directory name CurrentDirectory \\DefaultExportDirectory=
Specifies directory of with backslash C:/Temp/Directory
output data files. characters converted to
forward slashes
DisableFilters True or False False \\DisableFilters=True
Disables filtering.
HeaderFormat None, ParamNames, ParamNames \\HeaderFormat=None
Specifies the format type QuotedParamNames
of the header.
HeaderRows Any ParameterDefaults None \\HeaderRows=Parameter,
Specifies multiple header table column heading Units, DataSourceType
rows. name(s)
HideMissingParams True or False False \\HideMissingParams=
When FALSE, if an Note: This changes the True
invalid parameter is default behavior of the
detected on export it will export with this
include it in the output property. Before this
file, and fill it with the property was added
following values: (9.1), IADS would
Excel - Blank cells for ignore missing
the entire column parameters and not
CSV - Blank, unless show them in the
NoDataText property set output export files.
Matlab - #NAN for the Now by default they
entire column are included in the file.

Filter BW (Butterworth), None \\Filter=BW,BP,1.0-10.0,2

Specifies a filter that is Pass Type, FC1, FC2 \\Filter=BW,LP,30.0,2
applied to all the (not for low pass), \\Filter=EL,BP,0.8-1.0,1.5-
parameters in the data Order; EL (Elliptic), 5.0,0.01,2
group on export. Pass Type, Stop-Pass,
Note: To correctly enter Pass-Stop, Ripple,
the \\Filter.... in the Order
property bag cell, apply
the desired filter settings

324
IADS User Manual

to a Stripchart with data,

hint on the title to view
the filter.

NameModification None, None \\NameModification=

Modifies name. AllCharsToUpper, AllCharsToUpper
AllCharsToLower
NamingMethod ParameterName, ParameterName \\Namingmethod=
Uses various naming ShortName, ShortName
methods. LongName
SampleRate Floating Point Value Highest sample \\SampleRate=21.1052
Specifies a target or >0.0 rate of data
parameter sample rate group
(overrides decimation
factor). Note: prior to
downsampling, an anti-
aliasing low pass filter is
recommended.
TimeFormat None, IrigString \\TimeFormat=
Specifies format of time. IrigString, (For Matlab, SecondsSinceNewYear
SecondsSinceMidnight, SecondsSince
SecondsSinceNewYear Midnight)
NanosSinceNewYear
TimePrecision 0-9 3 \\TimePrecision=5
Specifies number of -1 (automatically None \\TimePrecision=-1
digits past decimal point calculates the level of
for time output. precision from 3-9
based on the highest
sample rate of the
export.)
TriggerParam Trigger parameter None \\TriggerParam=
Sets the export sample name * ParameterName
rate for the data group * - Aperiodic data \\TriggerParam=*
based on the trigger export that triggers on
parameter specified. If all parameters; every
not specified the periodic time point is exported
parameter with the for every parameter, at
highest sample rate will the rate it occurs in the
be used; If no periodic data file - no sampling.
parameters the SPS is 50.
Excel Only:
ExcelAppendMethod AppendNewWorksheet AppendNew \\ExcelAppendMethod=
Specifies an append AppendNewWorkbook Worksheet AppendNewWorkbook
action in Excel.
ExcelMaxRows 1-65535 65535 \\ExcelMaxRows=10000
Specifies maximum
number of rows To
export to Excel.

325
Import and Export

ExcelMaxRowsMethod LimitToMax, LimitToMax \\ExcelMaxRowsMethod=

Specifies an action when AppendNewWorksheet AppendNewWorksheet
maximum rows exported AppendNewWorkbook
to Excel is exceeded.
ExcelStatementToRun Any valid Excel macro None \\ExcelStatementToRun=
Executes this Excel MacroToRunAfterExport
macro after Data Group
has been exported.
CSV Only:
DataPrecision 0-16 6 \\DataPrecision=3
Specifies number of
digits past decimal
point for floating point
values
FillMethod None, Sparse None \\FillMethod=Sparse
When you sample and
hold all parameters to a
higher sample rate, do
not output duplicate
values; leave column
entry blank.
NanText If Nan None \\NanText=Nan
active check for _finite
and then output specific
text.
SeparatorChar Any ascii character , \\Separatorchar=;
To allow alternative
separator characters such
as “;”
NoDataText Any text/string Blank \\NoDataText=String
To replace an cell with (Empty String)
'no data' to the specified
text/string.
Matlab Only:
MatlabExportMethod MatlabFile, DirectlyToMatlab \\MatlabExportMethod=
Specifies that the export DirectlyToMatlab MatlabFile
to Matlab will create a
"Mat" file or be sent
directly to the Matlab
application.
Name Set Any valid Matlab None \\Name=
s the exported Matlab variable name MatlabMatrixName
matrix name when
MatlabExportType=
Matrix.
ExtendedInfo None, Minimal Minimal \\ExtendedInfo=None
Adds export string with
information such as time,

326
 IADS User Manual

sample rate, and

parameter names.
MatlabExportType Vector, Matrix Matrix \\MatlabExportType=
Produces either a Matrix Vector
of all Data Group
parameters or separate
vectors.
MatlabStatementToRun Any valid Matlab None \\MatlabStatementToRun=
Executes this Matlab command Surf(MatlabMatrixName)
command after Data
Group has been exported.
MatlabExportShape Columnwise, Columnwise \\MatlabExportShape=
Outputs the vectors and Rowwise Rowwise
matrices in a column
wise format.
MatlabMaxRows Integer number of max 0 \\MatlabMaxRows=100000
Specifies Max Number of rows > 0 (limited only by
Rows To Export to memory)
Matlab.
MatlabMaxRowsMethod LimitToMax LimitToMax \\MatlabMaxRowsMethod=
Specifies an action when AppendNewFile AppendNewFile
max rows export is
exceeded.

35.4. The Parameter Selection Tool

The Parameter Selection Dialog automates the tedious task of hand entering lists of parameter
names into various IADS tables and dialogs, for example, the Parameters field of the
DataGroups table. You can choose the parameters from a list of all the active parameters; this
subset will be copied into Windows Clipboard for pasting, or in some cases it is automatically
copied into the active dialog or window. This dialog can be opened from several IADS
controls, or directly from the Configuration Tool.

327
 Import and Export

To open the Parameter Selection Dialog:

1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Click the Tools drop down menu > Parameter Selection Dialog.
3. Use the Group and Subgroup drop-down menus to define parameters for selection.
4. Select one or more (hold down Shift key) parameters to copy.
5. Click the right arrow button.
6. Repeat steps 3-5 to add parameters from multiple groups/subgroups.
7. Click OK.
8. Paste into the IADS table, Notepad, etc. (if this is not accomplished automatically).
To search for a parameter name in the dialog:
1. Define the parameter Group and Subgroup using the drop-down menus.
2. Click anywhere in the left pane and type one or more letters of the parameter name.

35.5. Advanced Import Wizard

The advance import wizard allows you to import IADS Analysis Windows (.iadsAw) and
Desktops (.iadsDt). The advantage of using the import wizard versus importing a file directly
into IADS is the ability to manage configuration file conflicts during the import process that
occur in the following tables in the Configuration Tool:
Parameter Defaults Table, Envelopes Table, Data Groups Table, Constants Table, Mission
Attributes Table, Moving Map Overlays Table, ICAW Definitions Table and the Event
Monitor Definitions Table.
Unlike a direct import from file you can also choose to exclude specific tables (those listed
above) from the import process. For example, if you exclude the Parameter Defaults Table
(PDT) from the import process, imported displays that contain parameters that do not
currently exist in your PDT will not show an entry in the PDT after the import. This is useful
if you are interested only in the Analysis Window display layout and not the associated
parameters.
Importing information to the ICAW and Event Monitor Tables
Multiple options may exist to resolve a conflict in the ICAW or Event Monitor table import
process. In this case, you may select one or more entries in the list, new and/or existing, by
selecting the check box next to the items in the "conflict group". Existing entries in the table
(original rows) that are unchecked will highlight in red and will be permanently removed
from the table when you complete the import process.
Note: In the Parameter Defaults Table conflicts are based solely on the Parameter name field;
conflicts in other tables are determined on a combination of key fields. At any time in the
Import Wizard the user has the option to revert to the beginning of the process or cancel the
import entirely with no adverse consequences.

328
IADS User Manual

To Import a file:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Click the File drop down menu > Import > Configuration Import Wizard...
3. In the Import Wizard, select an import type: Desktop Import (.iadsDt) or Analysis
Window (.iadsAw) Import.
4. Click the to navigate to the applicable import file(s).
5. Double-click on the file, or select it and click the Open button.
6. Click the Next button.
7. Select an import option: Never Overwrite, Always Overwrite or Show Conflict Dialog. If
you select the Always Overwrite or Show Conflict Dialog, you have the option to “Create
copies of modified rows”. The copied rows will appear in the Parameter Defaults Table
as Backup, Copy_Of_Parameter.
8. Click the Next button.
9. [Optional] To exclude any tables in the list from the import process select them.
10. Click the Next button.
11. [Optional] To back up your config file or create a log file with your changes, select the
option.
12. Click the Finish button.
To manage conflicts (Show Conflict Dialog option selected in the wizard):
Configuration conflicts are shown in red for the parameter in the existing configuration and
the same parameter in the import file. Clicking the drop down arrow at the top of the dialog
will offer the following filtering options:
Select all new (parameters)
Select all original (parameters)
Select all new TPP parameters
Select all new Derived parameters
Select all new IAP parameters
1. [Optional] Select a filtering option from the drop down menu to narrow down the
selection process.
2. Click check boxes to mark selections as desired. Note: Multiple options may exist to
resolve a conflict in the ICAW or Event Monitor table import process. In this case, you
may select one or more entries in the list, new and/or existing, by selecting the check box
next to the item(s) in the "conflict group". Existing entries in the table (original rows) that
are unchecked will highlight in red and will be permanently removed from the table when
you complete the import process.
3. Click the green arrow.

329
 Import and Export

4. Repeat steps 2-3 as necessary.

5. When complete the dialog will close and the system will ask you if you want to "Update
your configuration now?".
6. Click OK to complete the import.

35.6. Importing and Exporting information in the Configuration Tool

To import items from an Excel CSV file into one of the Configuration Tool tables you should
first export the existing table to Excel, update the information in Excel, and then import the
Excel file back into IADS.
The Smart Import option in the tool is used only to replace information in a table. You can
make large changes and also set up wild card edits.
Note: Invalid parameter name characters are \ / : * ? " < > | and no leading or trailing spaces
or tabs allowed.

Table Import dialog options

Input File Delimiter - This is the format of the input file. You can use input files from Excel
or a text file.
Beginning Line - If the information you are importing has header information, or you want
to disregard rows, you can use this box to type in the start line. The table below will then
update.
Alignment Options - Each row in your input file can become its own row in the IADS table,
each row in your input file can become one column in the IADS table, or each row is
combined into a single cell in the IADS table.
Import Type - These buttons allow you to replace the entire table, append your input file to
the existing table or use the smart import (which searches the table and replaces only those
controls defined in a specially formatted file.)

330
IADS User Manual

To import or export information in the configuration tool:

1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Open the table containing the data of interest.
3. Select the block of data (or rows) you want to export; or select the first row you want to
import to (click the row numbers to select them).
4. Right-click with the cursor inside the table, then click Import or Export.
5. Navigate to the file of interest and double-click it.
6. If importing, set the desired delimiter, alignment and import type option in the Table
Import dialog, click OK.
To use the Smart Import option to replace information in a table:
1. Click on the Configuration dashboard button.
2. Open the table of interest.
3. Right-click the mouse inside the table.
4. Click Import.
5. Navigate to the file of interest and double-click it (to select a text file, select Text Files
from the Files of type drop-down menu).
6. Click Smart Import.
7. Preview the layout of changes and click OK.
To setup a Smart Import CSV or text file (See the examples below):
1. Open Excel, Word Pad or Note Pad.
2. Define the first column as the "unique item" (what is used to define the search).
3. Define the second (and subsequent) column(s) as the replacement criteria.
4. Define what items will be changed in each row.
5. Save the file.
In the example below, the Parameter is the unique item that will be used to search on. When
Parameter PKSD01 is located in the table, three items will be replaced: the
DataSourceArguement (derived equation), the Units, and the Parameter name itself. The
unique item can be any entry in the table. Wild cards can be used to define unique items, for
example: ABC** would replace all the units for parameters that begin with ABC and **XYZ
would replace all the units in parameters that end in XYZ.
Parameter DataSourceArguement Units Parameter
PKSD01 TTT1001x-10+TTT1002x*15*TTT1003x Ft PKSD01_Ft
ABC** Sec
**XYZ Deg
For example, in Notepad enter:
Parameter, DataSourceArguement, Units, Parameter
PKSD01, TT1001x-10+TT1002x*15*TTT1003x, FT, PKSD01_FT
ABC**,,sec
**XYZ,,Deg

331
 Import and Export

Note: This tool is not used for Envelope X/Y coordinates. In the Table Import dialog preview
layout, you can move column headings by placing your cursor in the column heading,
holding down the left mouse button and dragging the column to the desired location.

35.7. Importing and Exporting Analysis Window, Desktops and Config Information
Analysis Windows, Desktops, and configuration information can be imported and exported in
IADS. You can import one or more Analysis Windows or Desktops into your current IADS
environment (config file) directly from a file, or by using the Advanced Import Wizard to
manage configuration conflicts during the process. When you import Analysis Windows and
Desktops, parameters that do not exist in the Parameter Defaults Table will be automatically
added during the import (you can choose to exclude changes to the Parameter Defaults Table
during the import process if you use the Advanced Import Wizard).
Information in Configuration Tool tables can be imported from and exported to Excel CSV
files. The Table Import tool is used define alignment options, import types and to preview the
layout of the table before you do the import. The Smart Import option in the tool is used to
replace particular information within a table and has a wild card replacement capability.
To Import an Analysis Window or Desktop directly from a file:
1. Click the Configuration Dashboard button.
2. Click the File menu item and select Import > Desktop (or Analysis Window).
3. Choose the Desktop (or Analysis Window) name in the navigation box.
4. Click Open.
5. Click OK in the message box.
Note: If you are importing an Analysis Window, the window will be added to the current
Desktop. If the Analysis Window has the same name as another window (within the
Configuration File) the system will prompt you to make a copy of the window (provided you
are not on the same Desktop where the window already exists). If you are importing an
Analysis Window to the same Desktop it was created on, the system will assume you want to
overwrite your current window with the saved version.
To Export an Analysis Window or Desktop:
1. Click the Configuration Dashboard button.
2. Click the File menu item and select Export > Desktop (or Analysis Window).
3. Select the desired Desktop (or Analysis Window) name from the drop down display.
4. Click OK.
5. Choose the media (or hard drive) area in which you want to save the file.
Note: To duplicate an Analysis Window, create a new Analysis Window using the Display
Builder and paste the contents of the desired window into the new one. You cannot export
and Analysis Window and import it back into the same Desktop; the system will assume you
want to replace the window.

332
 IADS User Manual

35.8. Data File Import Dialog

You can import data at startup of the IADS Playback Client. This process will create a new
configuration file from a data export csv file (such as when you select two points in an IADS
Stripchart and Export to CSV File), or merge into an existing configuration file.

To import data at startup of the IADS Playback Client:

1. Click the IADS Playback Client icon on the Desktop or click Start > All Programs >
IADS > IADS Playback Client.
2. At the Startup dialog, click the New tab.
3. Click on Import Data > Open.
4. Navigate to the directory that contains your CSV file and select it > click Open.
5. Select an IADS data output directory > click OK.
6. Review the selections in the Data File Import Dialog > click OK.
7. Log On to IADS.
Options:
Input File is delimited with: - Comma (default). If the input file is delimited with something
other than a comma, select the appropriate option. View the preview window to see if the
option (data) is correct.
Read from file beginning at line: - Use the up/down arrows to select the first line of the file to
import. The preview window will update to show that data.
Data file Start Time defined in column - If checked, use the up/down arrows to select the row
number that time is defined in.
Set Time and Rate for All - Opens the Sample Rate and Start Time dialog box to enter those
values.

333
 Import and Export

Preview Window - Displays the data in the file as options are selected. De-select rows to
exclude that information from the import.

35.9. Data Export from a Frequency Plot

Export PSD or Auto Spectrum data from selected Stripcharts or Frequency Plots directly to
Excel.
You can define a data group in advance that allows you to export data for multiple parameters
without having to add those parameters to a Stripchart or Frequency Plot. In this case, the
Stripchart is used only to select the data range and access the export feature. Data will only be
exported for those parameters defined in the data group whether they are in the display or not.
To export data in a selected Frequency Plot only:
1. Freeze the Analysis Window.
2. Select one or more frequency displays containing the data you want to export.
3. With your cursor in the Frequency Plot, right-click to bring up the pop-up menu.
4. Select Data Export > Export to Excel (Excel is only available if that application is
installed on your machine).
To export a group of data that has been previously defined:
1. Freeze the Analysis Window.
2. Select any Stripchart.
3. Pick 2 points in the Stripchart(s) to define the range of data to be exported.
4. With your cursor in the Stripchart, right-click to bring up the pop-up menu.
5. Select Data Group Compute > PSD, or Auto Spectrum > Data Group, for example,
Test1 or Test2.
6. A Frequency Plot is created with all the parameters you have defined in the Data Group.
7. With your cursor in the Frequency Plot, right-click to bring up the pop-up menu.
8. Select Data Export > Export to Excel (Excel is only available if installed on the
machine your using).
Note: Exporting to Excel automatically brings up an Excel spreadsheet containing all the
selected data. The spreadsheet will show the all the pertinent header information i.e.,
parameter name, block size, windowing, etc. Data settings (filtering, editing, etc) are taken
directly from the parameter defaults table. When exporting data from selected displays, data
settings are taken directly from the parameters in the displays (what you see in the display is
what you get).

334
 IADS User Manual

35.10. Test Point Export Dialog

Test Point data can be exported directly from an IADS Log, by row, into a csv file or excel.

To export specific test point data:

1. On the Dashboard, click the IADS Logs button.
2. Click the Test Points tab.
3. Click on one or more rows containing (click on the row number) the test points to export
(hold down the Ctrl key to select multiple rows).

4. At the top of the IADS Logs dialog box, click the Export Selected Rows button.
5. In the Test Point Export Dialog, click the Data Group drop down to select one.
6. Click the Export Type drop down to select one.
7. Click the Browse Button to select a destination directory.
8. Click the Export button.
Note: If duplicate test points exist in the log, only the last time slice will be exported. IADS
assumes each Test Point name is unique.

35.11. Telemetry Attributes Transfer Standard (TMATS)

The purpose of TMATS is to provide a common definition and format to facilitate the
transfer of information between the user and the test range. The IADS TMATS Import and
Validation option imports parameters from a standard IRIG 106-09 file into IADS. The
purpose of the TMATS validation in the IADS Configuration Tool is to populate a
configuration file with the TMATS information to create a starting point towards building a
functional configuration file or to validate/update an existing IADS configuration file.

335
Import and Export

To open the TMATS file:

1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Click the Tools drop down menu > TMATS Import and Validation.
3. In the TMATS Import Utility dialog, click the File > Open to select the TMATS file.
4. Select a range of parameters from the list, or click the select all button.
5. Click the Next button.
6. Set the options in the TMATS Defaults dialog.
7. Click Apply.
8. Click Done.
Dialog Descriptions
Update entries already existing in IADS with information from - If checked, IADS entries
with matching measurement names may be updated with information either from the TMATS
file, or from selected default settings. If this option is not checked, matching entries will not
be altered.
Add new entries (not found within IADS) with the following settings - If checked, new
rows will be added to IADS when no matching measurement name is found. You may fill in
the new rows with select information such as ParameterDefaults name, Group name, and
Subgroup name. Also, you have the option to make the Group active, and fill those cells that
do not contain TMATS specific information with default values.
Parameter Defaults - Identifies a set of parameters. If this "SetName" is set to True in the
IsActive cell of the Parameter Defaults State Table, all parameters that belong to this set will
be available for selection in the Parameter Tool.

336
 IADS User Manual

If you are importing parameter default information, such as an excel file, check to see that the
ParameterDefaults cell naming convention(s) are the same as you are currently using in
IADS, or add the new name to the Parameter Defaults State table and set to True (save table).
Parameter Group and SubGroup - The Parameter Tool contains all of the parameters you
have defined here; organizing them by parameter group, for example, A/C STATE; and more
specifically subgroup, such as FQSC/VMS.
Make this new group active - Checking this box will not only add the parameters to the
parameter defaults table, but will also make them available for immediate use.
Fill new rows using defaults - Checking this box will use default values in the cells within
the parameter defaults table. If you uncheck the box the cells will remain empty
Create derived parameters that do EU conversion - Engineering Unit conversion is
usually performed by the Telemetry Pre Processor (TPP). If you require IADS to do it, this
option can be used to create derived parameters for these data conversion types:
Pair Sets: Data from TMATS is used to create a linear interpolation equation.
Coefficients: Data from TMATS is used to create a univariate polynomial equation.
Newly created derived parameters will be identified with the measurement name from the
TMATS file. Unique names for TPP entries made from the same TMATS file can be created
by appending or pre-pending a sub-string to the measurement name. It is this name that will
be used to build the derived equations.

36. Filtering, Nulling and Data Editing

36.1. Filtering Parameters in IADS
A Digital Filter is a computational process or algorithm that transforms a discrete sequence of
numbers (input) into another discrete sequence (output) having a modified frequency
spectrum. IADS offers discrete IIR filters, Butterworth, Elliptic and Bessel, with Low Pass,
Band Pass, High Pass and BandStop responses.

To apply a filter from the Toolbar:

1. Select one or more displays containing the data you want to filter.

2. On the Toolbar, click the Filter button.

3. Set the filter options in the dialog.
4. Click Apply or OK.

337
Filtering, Nulling and Data Editing

Note: Applying filtering using the Filter Dialog applies to all parameters in the selected
display. To apply filtering to a particular parameter in a display, right-click on the display >
Properties. Select the applicable parameter in the property sheet and apply the desired filter
options.
Filtering Descriptions
Algorithm:
Butterworth filters are a commonly used when absolute pass band flatness and ease of use are
required. This algorithm takes a corner frequency (or two for band pass) and an order, and
provides simple filtering.
Elliptic filters are commonly used when sharper transitions than a Butterworth filter can
deliver are required. These filters have a ripple in the pass band and stop band that is
controlled by the user. This algorithm takes critical frequencies, order and ripple from the
user, and optimizes stop band attenuation.
Bessel filtering is a type of analog linear filter with a maximally flat group/phase delay
(maximally linear phase response), which preservers the wave shape of filtered signals in the
passband.
Type:
The Band Pass filter passes signals at frequencies between the "FC1" and "FC2" or "Pass1"
and "Pass2"frequencies and attenuates signals below the "FC1" or "Pass1" frequency and
above the "FC2" or "Pass2".
The Low Pass filter passes signals at frequencies below the "FC" or "Pass" frequency and
attenuates signals above the "FC" or "Pass" frequency.
The High Pass filter passes signals at frequencies above the "FC" or "Pass" frequency and
attenuates signals below the "FC" or "Pass" frequency.
The BandStop (Notch) filter passes most frequencies unaltered, but attenuates those in a
specific range to very low levels. It is the opposite of a Band Pass filter. Useful to reduce or
prevent audio feedback while having little noticeable effect on the rest of the frequency
spectrum
Order: Enter a integer from 1 to 8. A higher order number will result in a steeper response
curve.
Frequency (in Hertz): Any Real number between zero and half the sample rate.
Stop/Pass - Represents the endpoints of the transition band for the Elliptic high pass filter.
Also represents the endpoints of the lower transition band for the Elliptic band pass filter.
Pass/Stop - Represents the endpoints of the transition band for the Elliptic low pass filter.
Also represents the endpoints of the upper transition band for the Elliptic band pass filter.
FC1 represents the corner frequency for Butterworth low pass and high pass filters. Also,
represents the lower corner frequency for the Butterworth band pass filter.
FC2 represents the upper corner frequency for the Butterworth band pass filter.
Ripple(dB): Represents the allowable pass band ripple for Elliptic filters in Decibels.

338
IADS User Manual

To apply filtering to a parameter in a display:

1. Right-click on the display containing the data you want to filter.
2. Select Properties.
3. Select the Data tab.
4. If the display contains more than one parameter, click the drop down arrow to select the
desired parameter.
5. Set the filter options.
6. Click Apply to preview the changes.
7. Click OK to apply changes and close the Property Sheet.
Note: Filtering applied to a parameter via the property sheet, will override any default
filtering for that parameter in that display only. After you apply filter settings, if you freeze
and scroll backwards with respect to time, you will not see when the filter setting became
active; the data will be filtered in the history to handle phase shifting.
To specify the default filter for a parameter:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. Find the row containing the parameter of interest.
4. In the Filter Active column, select Yes. (Click within the field to show the drop-down
list.)
5. In the Filter Algorithm column, select Butterworth, Elliptic or Bessel.
6. In the FilterPassType column, select Band Pass, Low Pass, High Pass or BandStop.
7. In the FilterLowCutoff column, enter the low cutoff frequency if you selected Low Pass
in Step 5.
8. In the FilterHighCutoff column, enter the high cutoff frequency if you selected High Pass
in Step 5.
9. Click a Save option at the top of the box.
To apply filtering to a data group on export:
1. On the Dashboard, click Configuration.
2. Open the Data folder > Data Groups.
3. On the row containing the data group, in the PropertyBag column enter the filter setting.
To correctly enter the \\Filter information in the property bag cell, apply the desired filter
settings to a Stripchart with data, hint on the title to view the filter and enter the
information in the field. For example:
\\Filter=BW,BP,1.0-10.0,2
Note: A filter setting applied to a data group will apply to all the parameters in the data group
on export and override the individual parameter filter settings or display filter settings.

339
 Filtering, Nulling and Data Editing

36.2. Using Set Functions in Derived Equations

Parameter defaults are not active by default for input parameters in a derived equation. You
can use a Set function to apply parameter defaults to input parameters.
To use a Set function in a derived equation:
1. Create the derived parameter.
2. Enter the Set function(s), comma separated, prior to the main equation (output).
Filtering derived parameters
You can define (set) in advance default filtering for source parameters, those with noise, in
the Parameter Defaults table. To use these filtered parameters in a derived equation, the
function must include SetFilterActive( Parameter, 1 ) to enable the filter(s). This must be in
every DataSourceArgument field where the filtered parameter is directly used. Alternately,
the entire filter may be defined in the derived parameter's DataSourceArgument with the
setFilter functions shown in the table below.
For example, MyDerivedParameter = ParamA + ParamB
To enable filtering for ParamA, the equation (DataSourceArgument) will look like:
SetFilterActive(ParamA,1), ParamA + ParamB
To enable filtering for both parameters, the equation will look like:
SetFilterActive(ParamA,1), SetFilterActive(ParamB,1), ParamA + ParamB
If the filtered parameter is used in a lot of equations, you could create a 'proxy' parameter
with a different name that always has active filtering, for example:
MyDerivedParameter_Filtered and set the DataSourceArgument (equation) to:
SetFilterActive(MyDerivedParameter, TRUE ), MyDerivedParameter
Then substitute the new filtered parameter name into each derived equation you wish to have
the filtered output of MyDerivedParameter.
Note: Setting default filter settings in the Parameter Defaults table will change the output of a
"freshly" dropped parameter; but these settings do not get automatically update an existing
parameter in a display. You will need to re-load the Desktop (click the ChangeDesktop
button) to change the output of displays that already have data/parameters; or re-drop the
parameter into the display(s).

SetFilterActive(Parameter, Filter State: 0 = Off, 1 = On

FilterState)
SetFilterAlgorithm(Parameter, Filter Type: 0 = none, 1 = Butterworth, 2 = Elliptical
FilterType)
SetFilterHighCutoff(Parameter, Filter High Cut-Off Frequency
HighHz)
SetFilterLowCutoff(Parameter, Filter Low Cut-Off Frequency
LowHz)
SetFilterOrder(Parameter, Filter Order: 1- 8
FilterOrder)
SetFilterType(Parameter, Filter Pass Type: 0 = Low pass, 1 = High pass, 2 = Band
FilterPassType) pass

340
IADS User Manual

Applying Null corrections to derived parameters

Setting up Null corrections is slightly different than the filtering example. The options for the
NullCorrection field in the Parameter Defaults Table entry for derived parameters consist of
Equation Result or Equation Inputs; the null biases can either be applied to the result of the
equation or to all the parameters that are inputs to the derived equation. Equation Inputs will
apply Null correction on all of the equation’s input parameters with the bias based on the
associated NullBias field of each input parameter’s Parameter Defaults Table entry. Derived
input parameters within derived parameters will apply Equation Inputs to all subsequent
derived parameters at each level of the equation. When using Equation Inputs one can also
selectively change the Null correction state for any input parameter. For example, if you set
the MyDerived parameter to use Equation Inputs for Null correction but want to disable Null
correction on ParamB, the equation would look as follows: SetFilterActive(ParamA,1),
SetFilterActive(ParamB,1), SetNullCorrection(ParamB,0), ParamA+ParamB (0 sets the null
correction to Off for ParamB). This equation applies null corrections for ParamA (and all of
its input parameters if ParamA is a derived parameter) but will not apply null corrections to
ParamB.
All Parameter Default SET Functions:
SetAlpha(Parameter, AlphaId) Kaiser-Bessel Alpha if used (alphaId:
0=2.0, 1=2.5, 2=3.0, 3=3.5)
SetAThreshRangeMax(Parameter, Value) Alarm Threshold Max
SetAThreshRangeMin(Parameter, Value) Alarm Threshold Min
SetAveragingMethod(Parameter, AverageId) Frequency Averaging Method (aveId:
0=None, 1=Frequency)
SetBlockSize(BlockSize) Size of Block for Frequency Calculation:
0=64, 1=128, 2=256, 3=512, 4=1024,
5=2048, 6=4096, 7=8192
SetBlocksPerAverage(Parameter, Value) Number of Frequency Blocks to Average
SetFilterActive(Parameter, ActiveId) Filter State (activeId: 0=Off, 1=On)
SetFilterAlgorithm(Parameter, AlgorithmId) Filter Algorithm Type (aldId: 0=none,
1=Butterworth, 2=Ellipitical)
SetFilterHighCutoff(Parameter, HighHz) Filter High Cut-Off Frequency
SetFilterLowCutoff(Parameter, LowHz) Filter Low Cut-Off Frequency
SetFilterOrder(Parameter, FilterOrderNumber) Filter Order (1...8)
SetFilterType(Parameter, PassId) Filter Pass Type: (PassId: 0=Lowpass,
1=Highpass, 2=Bandpass)
SetFScaleMax(Parameter, Value) Default Freq Domain ScaleMax
SetFScaleMin(Parameter, Value) Default Freq Domain ScaleMin
SetLLNegative(Parameter, Value) Negative Load Limit
SetLLPositive(Parameter, Value) Positive Load Limit
SetNullCorrection(Parameter, CorrectionId) Null correction applied to parameter value
(corrId: 0=No, 1=Yes, 2=yes equation
inputs, 3=yes equation result)
SetOverlap(Parameter, Overlap) Overlap portion of previous block to
produce next block (0..<1)
SetSignChange(Parameter, InvertId) Invert sign of parameter value (invertId:
0=No, 1=Yes)
SetSpikeChangeLimit(Parameter, Value) Spike Change Limit Value

341
 Filtering, Nulling and Data Editing

SetSpikeCorMethod(Parameter, CorrectionId) Spike Correction Method (corrId: 0=None,

2=Last Value)
SetSpikeDetectionMethod(Parameter, Spike Detection Method (Id: 1=Absolute
DetectionId) change, 2=Slope change)
SetTScaleMax(Parameter, Value) Default Time Domain ScaleMax
SetTScaleMin(Parameter, Value) Default Time Domain ScaleMin
SetWildCorMethod(Parameter,CorrectionId) Wild Point Correction Method (corrId:
0=none, 1=Default value, 2=Last value)
SetWildCorValue(Parameter, Value) Wild Point Value if Correction Method = 1
SetWildPointRangeMax(Parameter, Value) Wild Point Range Max
SetWildPointRangeMin(Parameter, Value) Wild Point Range Min
SetWindowType(Parameter, TypeId) Frequency Analysis Window Type
(TypeId: 0=Rectangular, 1=Hanning,
2=Hamming, 3=Blackman,
4=KaiserBessel)
SetWThreshRangeMax(Parameter, Value) Warning Threshold Max
SetWThreshRangeMin(Parameter, Value) Warning Threshold Min

36.3. Null Corrections

You can calibrate any parameter to actual A/C condition in IADS by applying Null
corrections. IADS recalculates Null Bias values when sensing updates to the Null Baseline
field of the Parameter Defaults table in both real time and playback modes. In real time when
Nulling is started at the Operator Console, IADS will take the Null Average of all Null
Baseline equation values calculated during the nulling period (1-30 seconds) and apply the
result in the calculation to the Null Bias value. This value can be edited by the user after the
nulling session. The start time and end time of the Null Bias correction period is stamped in
the Configuration Tool, Null Corrections Info table. Thereafter, null corrections applied or
updated in the Parameter Defaults Table for any parameter in that null group(s) is
instantaneous. An unlimited number of null groups can be sampled simultaneously during a
test.
Note: Custom COM functions (derived and IAP) cannot be nulled.
To add a null group:
1. In IADS, on the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder and click Parameter Defaults.
3. Click the row number of the parameter of interest. Scroll to the right to the Null Group
cell.
4. Click the drop down arrow and type the new null group name into the blank field.
5. Click out of the cell when finished to accept the entry.
To apply system null bias corrections to a parameter:
1. On the Dashboard, click Configuration.
2. Open the Data folder and click Parameter Defaults.
3. Click the row number of the parameter of interest. Scroll to the right to the Null
Correction cell.
4. Click the drop down arrow in the cell and select:

342
 IADS User Manual

Yes - TPP parameters only

Equation Result - Null bias applied to the result of the calculation in the derived equation
Equation Inputs - Null bias applied to each input parameter in the derived equation using
each parameters specified value.
5. In the Null Baseline cell enter the correction value, a parameter name or an equation.
Derived parameter equation rules apply, for example, a parameter name with all numbers
would have to be entered with curly brackets {1234}.
6. In the Null Group cell click the drop down arrow to make a selection.
7. Click a save option.
To edit a null bias value after the nulling session:
1. On the Dashboard, click Configuration.
2. Open the Data folder and click Parameter Defaults.
3. Click the row number of the parameter of interest. Scroll to the right to the Null Bias cell.
4. Enter the null bias value.
5. Click a save option.
To disable the nulling of one or more parameters in a derived equation:
The options for the NullCorrection field in the Parameter Defaults Table entry for derived
parameters consist of Equation Result or Equation Inputs; the null biases can either be
applied to the result of the equation or to all the parameters that are inputs to the derived
equation. Equation Inputs will apply Null correction on all of the equation’s input parameters
with the bias based on the associated NullBias field of each input parameter’s Parameter
Defaults Table entry. Derived input parameters within derived parameters will apply
Equation Inputs to all subsequent derived parameters at each level of the equation. When
using Equation Inputs one can also selectively change the Null correction state for any input
parameter.
1. Verify that the derived parameters Null Correction field (of the Parameter Defaults table
in the Configuration Tool) is set to Equation Inputs.
2. Add the following function to the beginning of the derived parameter's Data Source
Argument field: SetNullCorrection(parameter, 0). For example:
SetNullCorrection(AT0002X, 0),AT0001X+AT0002X+AT0003X
The SetNullCorrection function accepts one parameter per function call. Make sure each
expression in the equation is delineated by a comma.
To start nulling in real time:

 At the Operator Console, click the Server Archiving and Nulling button.

36.4. Data Editing Overview

When IADS detects spikes or bad data it can be difficult to pinpoint the source and correct
the problem. There are many areas in the overall test "pipeline" that could cause the problem;
from sensors to collection, transmission to receiver, calibration and EU conversion, to actual
display and analysis. Most often this situation occurs because of the remote connection to the
test vehicle. The test vehicle can be potentially many miles away from the receiving station
(or worse behind an obstruction), and the communication fails between the test vehicle and

343
Filtering, Nulling and Data Editing

control room at an alarming rate. When the communication system fails, bad data will make
its way to your screen/analysis. At this point in time it is very difficult to eliminate 100% of
bad data due to remote transmission.
The following data editing options are available in IADS
Spike Detection and Correction - Spike Detection and Correction checks for a rate change
from the previous data value using an Absolute Value Change or Slope Change comparison.
Sync Lock Processing - The Sync Lock processing option is on a per-parameter basis to
reduce the inclusion of noisy data into data processing. This option is dependent on decom
status words (_IadsDecomStatus_ ) that must be available in your setup.
Wild Point Correction - A Wild Point is a data dropout or spike that might adversely affect
the analysis and comparisons of the data to test limits. The methods of wild point
identification supported in IADS are subframe status checking and amplitude checking.
Path of data between the aircraft and the ground
Here is a general and simplistic overview of the path of the data between the aircraft and the
ground:
1. Logically, data flows from aircraft to the ground PCM system "row by row". Each row of
data of data is referred to as "minor frame" or "sub-frame". "N" number of these minor
frames make up a "major frame".
2. Each minor frame (row) is bounded by two "bad data" indicators. Usually, at the start of
the minor frame is a complex bit pattern or "sync pattern". At the end of the minor frame
is an item called a sub-frame ID (which is just an integer counter + 1 each subframe, 0 at
first subframe).
3. The way the system detects bad data is if one of these markers (sync pattern or subframe
id) is bad. This "status" is reflected in IADS as the Decom Status parameters
(_IadsDecomStatusN_ and their corresponding system based parameters).
Now here's the real problem:
1. Data corruption can occur anywhere within a "minor frame" (subframe) but it will not be
detected by the "bad data indicators". Let's say that the minor frame has 100 words in it.
If the first word (sync) and the last word (subframe id) are good, then the whole minor
frame is considered good. That means the whole entire payload of the minor frame can be
absolute garbage and still be deemed "good". That scenario is not likely, but what is very
likely is that some percentage of the data within the minor frame is bad.
2. In addition to these issues, each TPP (PCM processing system) has its own inherent
quirks. Some systems don't show bad data through Decom Status until *after* it has
occurred, while others show before or during. There is also other issues of alignment and
timing between the data and these indicators.

344
 IADS User Manual

36.5. Spike Detection and Correction

You can use Spike Detection and Correction Data Editing to check for a rate change from the
previous data value using an Absolute (Value) Change or Slope Change comparison.
Absolute Change
In Absolute Change spike detection, if the absolute difference between the current value and
previous value is greater than the spike data limit, data editing is performed using last good
value.
For example, If data streaming in has a value of 1.2 and you have selected a value of 10 as
the Spike Change Limit, the data would have to spike to a value of 11.3 before data editing
would be performed and last value applied.
To apply Absolute Change Spike Detection/Correction:
1. On the Dashboard, click Configuration.
2. Open the Data folder and click Parameter Defaults.
3. Select the SpikeDetectionMethod cell and select AbsoluteChange.
4. Select the SpikeCorrectionMethod cell and select LastValue.
5. Select the SpikeChangeLimit cell and enter a value.
6. Save the table and re-drop the parameter into the display.
7. On the Dashboard, click the Data Edit button; Data Edit Enabled is displayed.
Slope Change
Slope Change spike detection performs a pseudo curve fitting algorithm to determine
spurious data points. A container of slope values of up to five data points is maintained and
used as a comparator to the current slope. Since the delta time between data points is
constant, the slope is computed as the difference between the value of the current data point
and the value of the previous data point for a single parameter. This current delta is compared
to the average delta of the comparison container. If the ratio between the two is greater than
the maximum allowable ratio specified in the configuration (Spike change limit), then
correction is performed on the current data point.
If the Spike Change Limit is set to 10, the system looks for a slope change that is 10 times
greater than the current data.
To apply Slope Change Spike Detection/Correction:
1. On the Dashboard, click Configuration.
2. Open the Data folder and click Parameter Defaults.
3. Select the SpikeDetectionMethod cell and select SlopeChange.
4. Select the SpikeCorrectionMethod cell and select LastValue.
5. Select the SpikeChangeLimit cell and enter a value.
6. Save the table and re-drop the parameter into the display.
7. On the Dashboard, click the Data Edit button; Data Edit Enabled is displayed.
Sync Lock
To turn off Data Editing:
 Click the Disable Data Editing Dashboard button (Enable Data Editing).

345
 Filtering, Nulling and Data Editing

36.6. Sync Lock Processing

The Sync Lock processing option is on a per-parameter basis to reduce the inclusion of noisy
data into data processing. A parameter is considered sync locked, when the PCM minor cycle
a parameter occurs in, begins and end with a valid (in lock) sync pattern condition. When
Sync Lock processing is active and the system senses a sync loss condition, the parameter
will output Last Good Value.
Frequency based displays will skip blocks of data that contain any out of sync occurrences.
The display will show the number of skipped blocks and total blocks (only if applicable),
next to the time at the bottom of the display (when Sync Lock processing is activated).
Note: Sync Lock processing is dependent on IADS decom status parameters (
_IadsDecomStatus_ ) that the IADS system creates in real time if decom status words are
defined upstream at the data source (in a PRN file or XidML file for example). Sync Lock
processing is not supported for IAP derived parameters, trigger parameters or nulled
parameters.
To set Sync Lock processing for a parameter:
1. On the Dashboard, click Configuration.
2. Open the Data folder and click Parameter Defaults.
3. Find the row of the parameter of interest.
4. Click the drop down in the SpikeDetectionMethod cell and select SyncLock.
5. Click the drop down in the SpikeCorMethod cell and select LastValue.
6. Save the table and re-drop the parameter into the display.
7. On the Dashboard, click the Data Edit button; Data Edit Enabled is displayed.
To turn off Data Editing:
 Click the Disable Data Editing Dashboard button (Enable Data Editing).

36.7. Wild Point Correction

You can edit data using an absolute value range (min/max values) within the Configuration
file. If your data falls outside of the min/max value range it is edited based on the correction
method specified: Last (Good) Value, Default Value or None. Previous knowledge on the
possible range of the data being edited is necessary to establish logical limits.
An option, if decom status words are available in your setup, would be to create a derived
equation that utilizes the _IadsDecomStatus_ parameters to sense when sync loss conditions
occur where you could then output something like Last Good Value.
To set an amplitude range for Wild Point Correction using Last Good Value:
1. On the Dashboard, click Configuration.
2. Open the Data Folder and click Parameter Defaults.
3. Find the row of the parameter of interest.
4. In the WildPointRangeMin and WildPointRangeMax cells, enter the minimum and
maximum amplitude threshold.
5. In the WildPointCorMethod column, click LastValue.
6. Save the table and re-drop the parameter into the display.
7. On the Dashboard, click the Data Edit button; Data Edit Enabled is displayed.

346
 IADS User Manual

To set an amplitude range for Wild Point Correction using a Default Value:
1. On the Dashboard, click Configuration.
2. Open the Data Folder and click Parameter Defaults.
3. Find the row with the parameter of interest.
4. In the WildPointRangeMin and WildPointRangeMax cells, enter the minimum and
maximum amplitude threshold.
5. In the WildPointCorMethod column, click Default Value.
6. Select the WildPointCorValue cell and enter in a number.
7. Save the table and re-drop the parameter into the display.
8. On the Dashboard, click the Data Edit button; Data Edit Enabled is displayed.
To turn off Data Editing:
 Click the Disable Data Editing Dashboard button (Enable Data Editing).

37. Color Thresholds

37.1. Color Thresholds
A color threshold is a visual alert that a parameter has exceeded a limit. Color thresholds
apply to parameters displayed in Stripcharts, Annunciators, Cross Plots, Alphanumeric and
Alphanumeric Table displays. You can set two levels: warning and alarm. When a parameter
reaches one of these limits, the border of the display changes color. As an additional visual
cue, “Warning” with a yellow border or “Alarm” with a red border is displayed on the
Dashboard. You must enable the Thresholds on the Dashboard in order for the border color to
change.
You set the default color thresholds for parameters in the Parameter Defaults table. You can
edit the default list at any time. You can also change the color thresholds for a parameter in a
single display by setting options in that display’s property sheet.
Note: If Sync Lock Protection is active, data could exceed the threshold line but not register.
In this case, an equation based on Decom Status determines if data is good or bad. If it
registers as bad data according to the equation, it does not trip the threshold alarms. You can
confirm this by right clicking on the Threshold panel on the dashboard and see if the
UseSyncLockProtection option is checked.
To enable or disable Thresholds (applies to all displays on the Desktop):

 Click the Threshold Enabled/Disabled Dashboard button. Once the button is selected,
the button face shows the current state of the thresholds.
To reset the border color of the display:
 Select the display.

347
 Color Thresholds

To reset the Dashboard Alarm/Warning box:

 Click the red (alarm) or yellow (warning) area of the Threshold Dashboard button.

To remove all threshold Warning and Alarms and Dashboard Alarm/Warning box:
 Click the Enable Threshold button (to disable it).
To use sync lock protection
1. Right click on the Threshold panel of the Dashboard.
2. Click UseSyncLockProtection.

37.2. Setting Thresholds

Color thresholds apply only to parameters that will be displayed in Stripcharts, Annunciators,
Alphanumeric Tables, Cross Plots and Alphanumeric displays. You can set two thresholds:
warning and alarm. Once you set the default color thresholds for a parameter, each time you
drop that parameter into a display those thresholds will be applied but not enabled. To enable
the parameter you must select the Threshold Disable/Enable dashboard button. You can
override the default for a single display however, by setting options in that display's property
sheet.
To set the default warning and alarm thresholds for a parameter:
1. On the Dashboard, click Configuration.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.
3. Find the row containing the parameter of interest.
4. In the WThreshRangeMin and WThreshRangeMax columns, type in a low and high
activation value for the warning color.
5. In the WThreshColor column, select a color from the color selection dialog box.
6. If the display is an Annunciator, in the WThreshLabel column, type in the display label.
7. In the AThreshRangeMin and AThreshRangeMax columns, type in a low and high
activation value for the alarm color.
8. In the AThreshColor column, select a color from the color selection dialog box.
9. If the display is an Annunciator, in the AThreshLabel column, type in the display label.
10. Click a Save option.
To setup color thresholds for a single display:
1. Right-click on the display.
2. Select Properties.
3. Select the Thresholds tab.
4. In the Thresholds drop-down box, select Warning.
5. Set the threshold options for the Warning level.
6. In the Thresholds drop-down box, select Alarm then set the threshold options.

348
 IADS User Manual

7. Click Show (Stripcharts only).

8. Click Apply to preview the changes.
9. Click OK to close the Property Sheet.
To turn color thresholds off:
1. Right-click on the display.
2. Select Properties.
3. Select the Thresholds tab.
4. Clear the Show check box.
5. Click Apply to preview the changes.
6. Click OK to apply changes and close the Property Sheet.
Note: You must enable the thresholds (click the Enabled button under Threshold: Alarm! on
the dashboard) in order for the border color to change. For more information about setting the
threshold options, click the Help button on the Property sheet, then click the Threshold tab on
the graphic.

37.3. The Threshold Log

The Threshold log captures the times and values of parameters displayed in Stripcharts,
Annunciators, Cross Plots, Alphanumeric and Alphanumeric Table displays if those
parameters exceed their Threshold limits. IADS treats both real threshold breaks and breaks
from TM dropouts in the same manner, unless Sync Lock Protection is activated. In some
cases you may want to disable your threshold logging.
The threshold logging function is disabled by default.
To view the Threshold Log:

 Click the Threshold Log button on the Dashboard.

To enable/disable your Threshold Log:

 Select the Threshold Enabled/Disabled button on the

dashboard. Once the button is selected, the button face shows the current state of the
thresholds.
Note: The panel that contains the Threshold Log button displays the threshold status of the
displays on the Analysis Window: Normal, Warning, or Alarm.

37.4. Sync Lock Protection

Sync Lock Protection prevents IADS from registering a threshold break in the IADS Logs
when data is determined to be bad (for example, TM dropouts). In order to allow Sync Lock
Protection, first create the IsIadsDataGood derived parameter - see below.
To create the IsIadsDataGood derived parameter:
1. On the Dashboard click the Configuration button.
2. Open the Data folder, then click Parameter Defaults.

349
 Envelopes

3. Locate the Parameter _iadsDecomStatus0_ and copy/paste the entire row.

4. In the Parameter column enter IsIadsDataGood.
5. In the Data Source Type column, select Derived.
6. In the Data Source Argument column enter: !_iadsDecomStatus0_
7. Click a Save option.

To activate Sync Lock Protection:

1. Click the upper arrow at the Threshold box on the Dashboard.
2. Click UseSyncLockProtection.

38. Envelopes
38.1. Envelopes Overview

IADS allows the user the option of defining a series of envelopes that appear on Cross Plots,
Frequency Plots and Frequency Response Plots. You can create multiple envelopes for the
same parameter pair and quickly change envelopes during testing without having to re-drop
parameters. Envelopes are created using the Envelope Properties Dialog or entering them
directly into the Configuration Tool Envelopes Table.
The z order of envelopes cannot be explicitly specified in a display and is not strictly
determined by the order in which they are created. The z order is also a function of the order
in which the particular EnvGroup and EnvSubGroup were created. The envelope order in the
display from back to front is actually determined by the oldest EnvGroup, then the oldest
EnvSubGroup in that EnvGroup, then the oldest EnvName in that EnvSubGroup.

350
IADS User Manual

Load Limit Envelopes (Cross Plots only) - IADS calculates the percent load limit for
envelopes and displays how close the current data is to a specified limit. The user can specify
in the display setup that the percent design load limit for the current real time data be
displayed numerically in a corner of the plot. The system simultaneously keeps a running
total of the maximum load achieved and displays this figure as well for the active envelope.
Peak values are plotted with a special symbol that remains until reset by the user.
Reference/Aircraft Operating Limits (AOL) Envelopes - Reference envelopes are visual
markers that verify limits are not exceeded. Reference envelopes DO NOT perform % load
limit calculations and will not log threshold breaks if the data value crosses the reference line.
Envelope Dynamics (Cross Plots only) - The Envelope Properties Dialog allows the user to
create Cross Plot envelopes that are defined by real time parameters or derived parameters
where the user defines each point of the envelope as a function of an independent variable.
Each of the envelope's X,Y points can be defined as either a fixed location, or can be tied to a
specific parameter. Parameters of any type and equations will be allowed as Parameter Value
Pairs entries. Any valid IADS equation can be used to supply data to any envelope data point,
for example: Sinewave(0), SquareWave(0), InterpolateID(0).
To view/show one or more envelopes using the right-click menu:
1. Right-click in the Display.
2. Select Envelopes.
3. Select the envelope name, a check will appear next to that name. Press down the Ctrl key
and repeat steps 1 & 2 to add additional envelopes, or to deselect a envelope. If you select
an envelope without pressing the Ctrl key, only that envelope will show on the display
and all others will be de-selected. Selecting the "Show All" from the right-click menu
will show all envelopes available for the parameter (or parameter pair) on the display.
4. Click the Reload Envelopes option to update (reload) the envelope selections on the
display.

To view one or more envelopes using the properties sheet:

1. Right-click in the Display.
2. Select Properties.
3. Click the Envelope Tab.
4. All envelopes available for selection are displayed in the window. If these envelopes are
categorized by group and or subgroup, you will need to expand the selection by clicking
on the plus sign(s). Locate the envelope of interest and click on its name. If there is a plus
sign next to its name, open it. Click on desired envelope you wish to edit.
5. Click Apply to view and OK to save.
To add a secondary (inner) envelope to a primary envelope in a Cross Plots:
1. Press the E key to activate the secondary envelope (see note below).
2. Press the Shift+E key to increase the size of the secondary envelope.
3. Press the E key to decrease the secondary envelope.

351
 Envelopes

Note: Once activated, secondary envelopes will be viewable unless de-selected via the Cross
Plot's properties.
To switch between multiple envelopes in a Cross Plot:
 Press the [ or ] key. The active envelope will flash briefly.
To clamp the data in a Cross Plot to the min/max of the axes:
1. Right-click in the Cross Plot.
2. Click Clamp data to axes.
To plot connected points:
1. Right-click in the Cross Plot.
2. Click Plot connected points.

38.2. Creating or Modifying Envelopes using the Envelope Properties Dialog

The purpose of this tool is to aid the user in creating and modifying envelopes. Envelopes
created or modified using the dialog updates the Configuration Tool Envelopes Table.
Envelope Dynamics (Cross Plots Only) - This dialog allows the user to create Cross Plot
envelopes that are defined by real time derived parameters where the user defines each point
of the envelope as a function of an independent variable. Each of the envelope's X/Y points
can be defined as either a fixed location, or can be tied to a specific parameter. Parameters of
any type and equations will be allowed as Parameter Value Pairs entries. Any valid IADS
equation can be used to supply data to any envelope data point, for example: Sinewave(0),
SquareWave(0), and InterpolateID(0).
Note: After modify an envelope and saving, you have to re-drop the parameters into the
display to see the change.
To modify an envelope:
1. On the Dashboard, click Configuration.
2. Open the Data folder and click Envelopes.
3. Click the row number of the envelope of interest.

4. Click the Envelope Properties Dialog button on the Toolbar.

5. Enter changes as necessary.
6. Click OK.
7. Click a save option on the Configuration Tool Toolbar.
8. Re-drop the parameter(s) into the display.
Note: You can click on any row in the Envelopes Table while the Envelope Properties dialog
is open to switch to that envelope (changing the Envelope Name field will not take you to
another envelope). You must click Apply before changing to another envelope for changes to
update in the table; click a Configuration Tool save option when complete.
To create an envelope:
1. On the Dashboard, click Configuration.
2. Open the Data folder and click Envelopes.

352
IADS User Manual

3. Click the Envelope Properties Dialog button on the Toolbar.

4. Enter the name of the X Axis parameter in the Parameter 1 field (required).
5. Enter the name of the Y Axis parameter in the Parameter 2 field (required). If you are
creating an envelope in a Frequency display enter Magnitude (reference curve in a
magnitude plot), Phase (reference curve in a phase plot), or FreqPlot (reference curve in
a Frequency Plot).
6. Enter an Envelope Name (required). Envelope names should be unique for each
envelope group and envelope subgroup.
7. Enter the Envelope Group and Envelope Subgroup names (if applicable).
8. Select an envelope Color from the Drop-down.
9. Enter an envelope line Width from 1-10.
10. Select a Line Style from the drop-down menu.
11. Select a Calculation Type from the drop-down menu (Load Limit envelopes only; for
reference envelopes enter None).
12. Select a Transparency % if desired.
13. Enter the X and Y values of the envelope into the Parameter Value Pairs columns; or
enter an envelope equation. To create a closed envelope, the first and last pair of points
entered must be the same. You can also define a line, square, curve, or a polygon with an
open side. To add more rows hit the Enter key after entering a Y value or click the
button. To delete a row(s), select the row(s) and then click the button.
14. Click OK.
15. Click a save option on the Configuration Tool Toolbar.
16. Create a Cross Plot, Frequency Plot or Frequency Response Plot.
17. Drop the parameter(s) into the display (for Cross Plots keep in mind the order of the XY
value pairs).

353
 Envelopes

38.3. Creating Envelopes directly in the Envelopes Table

Load limit (Cross Plots only) and reference envelopes can be created or modified directly in
the Envelopes Table.

To create an envelope:
1. On the Dashboard, click Configuration.
2. Open the Data folder and click on Envelopes.
3. Enter the name of the X Axis parameter in the Parameter 1 field.
4. Enter the name of the Y Axis parameter in the Parameter 2 field. If you are creating an
envelope in a Frequency display enter Magnitude (reference curve in a magnitude plot),
Phase (reference curve in a phase plot), or FreqPlot (reference curve in a Frequency
Plot).
5. Enter an Envelope Name. Envelope names should be unique for each envelope group and
envelope subgroup.
6. Enter the Envelope Group and Envelope Subgroup names (if applicable).
7. Enter the X and Y values of the envelope into the Parameter Value Pairs column; or
enter an envelope equation. You can define a closed polygon, entering the points in a
clockwise manner. To create a closed envelope, the first and last pair of points entered
must be the same. For example: -58482 -58482 -58482 54957 54957 54957 54957 -
58482 -58482 -58482. You can also define a line, curve, square, or a polygon with an
open side. You can also copy/paste directly from Excel columns or specify an envelope
from a CSV file (see instructions below).
8. Select an envelope Color from the Drop-down.
9. Enter an envelope line Width from 1-10.
10. Select a Line Style from the drop-down menu.
11. Select a Calculation Type from the drop-down menu (Load Limit envelopes only; for
reference envelopes enter None).
12. Select a Transparency % if desired.
13. Click a save option.
14. Create a Cross Plot, Frequency Plot or Frequency Response Plot.
15. Drop the parameter(s) into the display (for Cross Plots keep in mind the order of the XY
value pairs).
To copy two columns of XY data from Excel into the Parameter Value Pairs field:
1. Select the data (cells) in Excel and copy.
2. Right-click in the Parameter Value Pairs cell and click Paste.
To specify an envelope from a CSV file (two columns and header row):
 In the Parameter Value Pairs cell enter LoadEnvelope( Envelope file name and path ) for
example, LoadEnvelope(D:\Envelopes\Env1.csv)

354
 IADS User Manual

38.4. Envelope Function

The envelope function allows you to use a single equation, in place of the parameter value
pairs, to define an envelope.
Syntax
EnvelopeFunc("Equation", [Optional] MinValue, [Optional] MaxValue, [Optional]
IntervalValue)
Note: In order to use Arg4, Arg2 and Arg3 must be included.
Input Arguments Description
Arg1 Equation in quotes. The equation must include either
Parameter1 or Parameter2 (not both) as the independent
parameter (AB1001X in the example below). The dependent
parameter's value is calculated based on the defined equation.
Arg2 [Optional] Min - The minimum drawing area on the Cross Plot
for the independent parameter's axis. If not specified, the
minimum axis value of the independent parameter is used.
Arg3 [Optional] Max - The maximum drawing area on the Cross
Plot for the independent parameter's axis. If not specified, the
maximum axis value of the independent parameter is used.
Arg4 [Optional] Interval - The number of points plotted on the
envelope line. The higher the value the smoother the curve (if
applicable). This value is clamped at 1000 (default is 50).
For example:
EnvelopeFunc("AB1001X^2*Sinewave", -7, 7, 50)
Envelope Table entry:

38.5. Changing the Line Color and Thickness of an Envelope

To change the line color and thickness using the advanced property dialog:
1. Right-click on the display < Properties.
2. Change the EnvelopeColor, EnvelopeLineStyle and EnvelopeLineWidth as desired.

355
 Envelopes

To change the line color and thickness using the classic property sheet:
1. Right-click on the display containing the Envelope.
2. Select Properties.
3. Select the Envelope tab.
4. All envelopes available for selection are displayed in the window. If these envelopes are
categorized by group and or subgroup, you will need to expand the selection by clicking
on the plus sign(s). Locate the envelope of interest and click on its name. If there is a plus
sign next to its name, open it. Click on Primary, Secondary, Phase, or Magnitude.
5. Click the Color button.
6. In the Color Selection dialog box, select or create a color.
7. In the Color Selection dialog box, Click OK to apply changes and close the dialog box.
8. On the display's properties dialog box, click the Width increment/decrement buttons to
change the width of the Envelope line.
9. Repeat steps 4-8 as necessary.
10. Click Apply to preview the changes.
11. Click OK to apply changes and close the Property Sheet.

38.6. Cross Plot Load Limit Algorithms

You can calculate the Load Limit Envelope in a Cross Plot three ways: from origin (0,0),
horizontally from x=0, and vertically from y=0. In the examples below the red area is the
envelope, the blue triangle the data. The load limit is calculated by dividing the length of the
vector from the specified origin to the current data point (area in green), by the full length of
the vector from the specified origin through the current data point to the envelope intersection
(entire dotted black line). When a line fails to intersect the envelope, the load limit is 0.
To change the Load Limit Algorithm:
1. Right-click on the display.
2. Select Properties.
3. Select the Envelope tab.
4. All envelopes available for selection are displayed in the window. If these envelopes are
categorized by group and or subgroup, you will need to expand the selection by clicking
on the plus sign(s). Locate the envelope of interest and click on its name. If there is a plus
sign next to its name, open it. Click on Primary.
5. Click an option in the Load Limit Algorithm Drop-down, From Origin, Horizontally
from x=0 or vertically from y=0.

6. Repeat steps 4 & 5 as necessary.

356
 IADS User Manual

7. Click Apply to preview the changes.

8. Click OK to apply changes and close the Property Sheet.

38.7. Cross Plot Load Limit Symbol

To change the Load Limit symbol on a Cross Plot using the advanced property dialog:
1. Right-click on the display < Properties.
2. Change the LoadLimitSymbolColor, LoadLimitSymbolSize and LoadLimitSymbolType
as desired.
To change the Load Limit symbol on a Cross Plot using the classic property sheet:
1. Right-click on the display < Properties.
2. Select the Envelope tab.
3. All envelopes available for selection are displayed in the window. If these envelopes are
categorized by group and or subgroup, you will need to expand the selection by clicking
on the plus sign(s). Locate the envelope of interest and click on its name. If there is a plus
sign next to its name, open it. Click on Primary.
4. Click the Color button.
5. In the Color Selection dialog box, select or create a color.
6. Select a Symbol and Size.
7. Repeat steps 4-8 as necessary.
8. Click Apply to preview the changes.
9. Click OK to apply changes and close the Property Sheet.
To reset the max Load Limit symbol on a Load Limit envelop
1. Select the Cross Plot.

2. On the toolbar select the Reset Peak Values button.

38.8. Capturing Load Values on Cross Plots

To record the maximum % Load Limit on a Cross Plot:

 On the Toolbar, click the Capture Max %LL button. The maximum %Load Limit
and the values of the data at that point will be recorded in the Loads Summary log if the
current Test Point is a Loads Test Point.

To reset the % Load Limit:

1. Select the Cross Plot display.

2. On the toolbar click the Reset Peak Values button.

To determine the percent Load Limit at a point on an Envelope:
1. Freeze the Cross Plot.
2. Move the cursor into the plot vertically along the y-axis. A pointer will begin to track the
tail” of the data or, hold down the Ctrl key for absolute value.

357
 IADS Logs / Event Marking

3. At the desired point, click the mouse. The % Load Limit will appear next to a selection
number.
4. On the Toolbar, click the % Load Limit button. The % Load Limit and the values of the
data at that point will be recorded in the Loads Summary log.
Note: The system will calculate the Load Limit data point on a frozen plot Cross Plot. (You
do not need to have a data "tail" (past data) present on the envelope to pick X-Y.)
To log point selections:
1. Freeze the Cross Plot.
2. Move the cursor into the plot vertically along the y-axis. A pointer will begin to track the
tail” of the data or, hold down the Ctrl key for absolute value.
3. At the desired point, click the mouse. The % Load Limit will appear next to a selection
number.
4. Right-click and select Log Selections.
Note: The selections are written to the IADS Logs.

39. IADS Logs / Event Marking

39.1. IADS Logs
Information from analyses and other operations are automatically recorded in the IADS Logs.
Each log is a table that can be edited and filtered.
To open the IADS Logs:
 On the Dashboard click the IADS Logs Dashboard button.

Log Descriptions
The Event Marker Log records the time that you marked an event and the event number for
the current mission. Comments typed into the log are displayed (Stripcharts only).
The Test Point Logs are the master lists of Test Points from which the points for the current
mission are taken.
The Threshold Log captures the times and values of parameters displayed in Stripcharts,
Annunciators, Cross Plots, Alphanumeric Tables or Alphanumeric displays if those
parameters exceed their threshold limits.
Time Segments Log - Records time breaks in IADS. Displays the start and end time for each
segment. The application will not automatically jump to the next segment when it encounters
the end of one segment. You have to manually go to that time using the scrollbar or “Play
from Here” (or wait).

358
IADS User Manual

The Data Edit Log lists removed Wild-Points, decimated parameters, and some other editing
functions that have been performed during the current mission.
The Selections Log contains all user defined point selections.
The Analysis log contains information about analyses performed during the current mission
including start and stop times, the type of analysis, the frequency and damping value results,
and data tags. Results checked for saving in this log are written to the Summary log.
The two Summary logs, Loads and Flutter, are living logs that contain predicted frequency
and damping and load results saved from the Analysis logs. They contain data from all
missions including a large amount of supporting information such as aircraft state parameter.
Data for the Loads and Flutter Summary Plots are taken directly from the Summary logs.
The Modal Definitions Log contains descriptions and criteria of the structural modes, for the
vehicle under test that IADS uses to compare to analysis results. If the results of the
comparisons fall within the established criteria, the analysis results are sent to the Summary
log. If multiple entries exist for the same mode the system will calculate an “average” entry
for the multiple modes. Each time an additional mode is added to the log the averaged entry
will be automatically updated. This allows the user to plot both the modes of interest and the
averaged data.
The Loads Test Points Log contains the Loads test point information from the configuration
file.
The Flutter Test Points Log contains the Flutter test point information from the
configuration file.
IADS LOGS TOOLBAR BUTTONS
Save changes to the log Undo a change to the log
Go to time of selected row Brings up the Logs Filter dialog
Prints the visible log Build All Averages for the
Summary Plot
Transfers the selected row's information Go to time of selected row then
to the Test Point table advance to the next row
Exports the selected row's information Opens the Test Point Export
to the TDR dialog dialog
Play from selected time (PT only) Make the log visible on any
change
Auto-save new log entries

To set the IADS log behavior:

This is particularly helpful with reviewing analysis results immediately, or so all users will
see the event markers that are set.
1. On the Dashboard, click the IADS Log button.
2. Click on the applicable tab, for example, Event Markers.

3. Click the Make Log Visible on Change and/or the Auto Save New Log Entries
toggle button. Active selections will show a check mark and highlighted.

359
 IADS Logs / Event Marking

39.2. Editing the IADS Logs

To edit data in a log:
1. Highlight the data in the cell or select the column (by clicking on the column heading)
you want to edit, or to apply an editing function to a whole row of data, click the row
number.
2. Right-click in the table.
3. Select an editing function.
4. At the top of the IADS Logs dialog box, click one of the save options below:
To save your changes:

 Click the Save button.

To undo all changes since the last save:

 Click the Revert to last Save button.

39.3. Filtering IADS Log Entries

Filtering hides any rows in the log that do not meet the criteria you defined in a filter created
using the IADS Filter dialog.
Note: An active filter in the IADS Logs is denoted by binoculars at the tab label. Also,
filtered results show the table row numbers highlighted in blue.
To clear a filter:
1. On the Dashboard, click the IADS Logs button.
2. Click on the applicable tab in the IADS Logs.

3. Click the Log Filter button on the Toolbar (not on the tab).
4. Click the Clear All button.
5. Click OK.
To create a filter:
1. On the Dashboard, click the IADS Logs button.

2. At the IADS Logs Toolbar, click the Log Filter Dialog button.
3. In the Filter dialog box, click a selection in the Keys list. The Keys list shows all of the
column headings in the current log.
4. Click an Operator button.
5. Click a selection in the Values list. The Values shows all of the options available for the
selected Key (column).
Note: For some queries there may be to many "values" to list. In this case you will need
to edit the query by hand after clicking the Add button. If you click on any text in the
Values field after selecting the Key and Operator, then Add, you will have a statement
you can edit.
To use a wild card, place asterisks around the value, for example (PropertyBag =
*GlobalTest*).

360
 IADS User Manual

6. Click Add. Click in the query to hand edit it if necessary.

7. To refine your search, repeat steps 3-5 as required by clicking And or Or to join
arguments.
8. Click OK.
To edit a filter:

1. Click the Log Filter Dialog button on the Toolbar (not on the tab).
2. Edit the statement and click OK.
To undo the last argument in a string:
1. In the Filter dialog box, click the Delete Last Query button.
2. Click OK.

39.4. Event Markers

You can mark data of interest and attach notes to data at specific times using the Event
Marker.
A green line and the event number (with/without a comment) will appear on the Stripchart.
Cross Plots must have a data history trail (tail) visible on the display to see the event markers.
A green square will mark the time event in the Cross Plot tail. The Event Marker Log records
the event number/comment and the time of the event.
To mark an event without a comment:

 On the Toolbar, click the Create Event Marker button or press F1.
To mark an event with a comment:

1. On the Toolbar, click the drop-down arrow next to the Event Marker button or
click Shift F1.
2. In the Predefined Comments dialog box, enter the desired statement.
3. Select the Pre-append Event Number check box to add an event number before the
comment.
4. Click OK.
To pre-define a comment for an Event Marker:
1. On the Dashboard, click Configuration.
2. Open the Test folder, then select Predefined Comments.
3. Enter your "comment" in the Comment cell. Entering values in the other cells is
optional.
4. Select the Save option.
To set an Event Marker when Nulling is turned initiated:
 At the Operator Console, Click the Tools drop down menu > Create Event Marker on
Nulling.
To recall an event:
1. On the Dashboard, click IADS Logs.

361
IADS Logs / Event Marking

2. Click the Event Marker tab.

3. Click the row number containing the time of the data you want to display.

4. At the top of the IADS Logs dialog box, click the Go-to Time button.
To "push" Event Markers to all users:

 Click the Auto Save New Log Entries toggle button. Active selections will
show a check mark and highlighted.
To hide (filter) Event Markers:
1. Click the IADS Logs button on the Dashboard.
2. Click the Event Marker tab.

3. Click the Log Filter Dialog button.

4. Set a view query on the Event Marker log.
5. Click OK.
To move an Event Marker on a Stripchart:
1. Move the mouse cursor over the Event Marker (it should appear red).
2. Hold down the left mouse button and move the Event Marker. The IADS Log will update
with the new time.
To edit an Event Marker directly on a Stripchart:
1. Select the Stripchart.
2. Move the cursor onto the Event bar (it should appear red).
3. Right click > Edit Overlay.
4. Type in desired information and press the Enter key.
5. Press the Enter key to close the edit function. The IADS Log will update with the new
comment.
To turn on/off Event Marker overlay text on a Cross Plot:
 Press the O keyboard key or right-click.
To allow Text Wrap on Event Markers:
1. On the Dashboard, right click on the IRIG time.
2. Click the Allow Text Wrap on Event Markers.
To edit an Event Marker in the IADS Logs:
1. On the Dashboard, click IADS Logs.
2. Click the Event Marker tab.
3. Click the row number containing the data you are interested in.
4. Change the time or comment entry (you can type in multiple lines of text).
5. Select a Save option.
Note: When you recall an event in a Cross Plot the event marker (green square) is behind the
data symbol (blue triangle by default) and is not seen.

362
 IADS User Manual

39.5. Defining Event Marker Group and Subgroups

IADS uses one Configuration File during a test. Event Markers when set, can be seen by
every user unless each user defines the Event Marker Groups.
IADS allows you to sort (filter) Event Markers so that you can see only the group/subgroup
of interest, in both the Event Marker Table and on the displays. In order to filter out undesired
Event Markers, the user must add an initial Event Marker so a query can be formed using
these entries in the Event Marker Log.

To initialize the process:

 Have each user or one person from each group set one Event Marker.

To define a user Group/SubGroup:

1. Click the IADS Logs button on the Dashboard.
2. Click the Event Marker tab.

3. Click the Filter button.

4. In the Filter dialog box, click a selection in the Keys list. The Keys list shows all of the
column headings in the current log.
5. Click an Operator.

363
 IADS Logs / Event Marking

6. Click a selection in the Values list. The Values shows all of the options available for the
selected Key (column).
7. Click Add.
8. To refine your search, repeat steps 3-5 as required by clicking And or Or to join
arguments.
9. Click OK.
To clear an event marker filter:
An Event Marker Log (tab) with binoculars on it indicates a filter is applied.
1. In the IADS Logs, click on the Event Marker tab.

2. Click the button > Clear All > OK.

Note: In this example, only the Vibro/Surface Event Markers will be displayed to Vibro
group members. Each time an Event Marker is set by anyone in the "Vibro" group, only those
Stripcharts will update with the green Event Marker line. Each user needs to define his/her
query initially, these settings will save in the Configuration File.

39.6. Recording a Value when an Event Marker is Triggered

You can set up the Event Marker Log to record the data value of a pre-selected parameter(s).
When an Event Marker is set, the logs will show the parameter(s) and their values in the
property bag column for that time entry.
To set up the Event Marker Log:
1. Click the IADS Log Dashboard button.
2. Click the Event Marker tab.
3. Drag and drop selected parameters from the Parameter Tool into the Log. You will not
see the Log update with new entries, it holds this information until an event marker is set.
To obtain data values after an Event Marker has been triggered:
1. Click the IADS Log Dashboard button.
2. Click the Event Marker tab. The property bag column will show the parameter(s) and
their values.

3. Highlight the row of interest and click the Go-to Time button to see that data on the
display.
To remove an event action that is automatically set via the Property Bag:
1. On the Dashboard, click the Configuration button.
2. Go to Groups > Users.
3. Find your User Name and click in the Property Bag cell > click on Edit Cell
4. Remove any values after \EMLogAug= up until the next \.
5. Save the table.
Note: You can move an event marker in a Stripchart and those (pre-selected parameter)
values will update in the event marker log (this is not applicable to Cross Plots).

364
 IADS User Manual

39.7. Displaying Logged Data and Events

You can display data in any log as long as that data has a time associated with it. When you
recall data, the Analysis Window will update to that time in a frozen state.
To display logged data:
1. On the Dashboard, click the IADS Logs button.
2. Click the log containing the data you want to display.
3. Click the row number containing the data you want to display.

4. At the top of the IADS Logs dialog box, click the Go-to Time button. The display
holding the pertinent data will flash.
To display logged data at a desired time:
1. On the Dashboard, click the IADS Logs button.
2. Click the log containing the data you want to display.

3. Click the drop-down arrow next to the Go To Time button at the top of the IADS
Logs.
4. Enter the desired time in the IRIG Time dialog box.
5. Click OK.
To filter data in the IADS Log:

 On the IADS Logs menu bar, click the Log Filter Dialog button. An IADS Log
(tab) with binoculars on it indicates a filter is applied. To clear a filter, click
the button > Clear All > OK.
Note: When recalled, time history data will be accurate. Frequency domain data must be
recalculated to be accurately displayed.

39.8. Log Data to File

You can log data to a file from Frequency Plots, Frequency Response Plots, Nyquist Plots,
Cross Plots and Stripcharts. Multiple "log to file" is available on like displays.
Multiple "Log To File" on Stripcharts will not work if Group Data Export is engaged.
To Save Logged Data to a File:
1. Freeze the Analysis Window.
2. Select the display(s).
3. Right click within the display of interest to display the menu.
4. Select Log Data > Log to File from the menu. The directory is displayed. Within the
dialog box, navigate to your desired directory (if one is not available, create it).
5. Enter a file name and save.
To Save Logged Data to the Clipboard:
1. Freeze the Analysis Window.
2. Select the display.

365
 Algorithms

3. Right click within the display of interest to display the menu.

4. Select Log Data > Log to Clipboard from the menu.
5. Open a text editor.
6. Select Ctrl+V on the keyboard.
To Save Logged Data to Window:
1. Freeze the Analysis Window.
2. Select the display.
3. Right click within the display of interest to display the menu.
4. Select Log Data > To a Window from the menu.
To Input Data to a Stripchart:
1. Freeze the Analysis Window.
2. Select the frequency display.
3. Right click within the display of interest to display the menu.
4. Select Log Data > Log Input Data to Stripchart from the menu.

40. Algorithms
40.1. Auto Correlation
Correlation functions provide a method of extracting useful modal data by averaging out
random noise much like the Randomdec method. Correlation functions are produced by
multiplying two time histories point-by-point, shifting one of the time histories, and then
multiplying again. Once this process is complete, all of the products are averaged, which
removes the purely random data and leaves the modal data that has significant energy
throughout the entire signal. An Auto Correlation results from using the same time history for
both time histories in the averaging method. The equation of the Auto Correlation for a
continuous signal is represented by

40.2. Auto Spectrum

The Auto Spectrum is used to display the power spectrum (periodogram) of a signal at
discrete frequency intervals from 0 Hz to the Nyquist frequency. The Auto Spectrum is
computed as follows:

366
 IADS User Manual

Note: Gxx is the unscaled Auto Spectrum. *Denotes complex conjugate.

Note: PNyquist is not currently displayed. Window summed and squared (Wss) is used as a
scaling factor. Contact an IADS representative if further clarification is needed.
The Auto Spectrum is also used internally to help compute the Frequency Response function:

Note: Gxy is also known as a Cross Spectrum.

Several scaling options exist for the Auto Spectrum:
1. (Default) EU2RMS (mean-square)
2. EURMS
3. EUpeak
Note: For convenience in estimating amplitudes of periodic signals, the Window Equivalent
Noise Bandwidth (WENBW) scaling factor can be applied. If WENBW is used, a sum of
mean square values in a frequency range must be divided by the WENBW for an accurate
value.

40.3. Coherence
The coherence function is used to determine how much of a response is due to a known
excitation. It is used when both the input and response functions are known, and is used often
in conjunction with Frequency Response functions. IADS provides two coherence
computations:

Coherence between a single input and a single output is known as an ordinary coherence. The
ordinary coherence function will always be between 0.0 and 1.0. At 1.0, the response is due
entirely to the input, and at 0.0 there is no correlation.

Note: The function is default to allow easier recognition in real time ("low" coherence
shows further from the "1.0" line.)

367
 Algorithms

40.4. Half Power Damping

The Half Power or Peak Picking method can be used on frequency domain data to obtain
reasonably accurate estimates of frequency and damping. This method requires an
assumption that contributions from modes other than the mode of interest can be ignored.
IADS calculates a damping estimate using the following formula:

Note: Half Power is (0.707) (Peak Magnitude) for Frequency Response plots and "non-
squared" Frequency plots; and (0.50) (peak magnitude) for "squared" Frequency plots.
Once a damping estimate is determined, an overlay is computed using the following general
formula:

Overlay Terminology (where F is the excitation force):

368
 IADS User Manual

40.5. Fixed Block Frequency Averaging

If the length of the data chosen for a fixed block Frequency Plot is less than half of the default
block size, the block size use for the computation is adjusted as shown on the following flow
chart:

Whether or not the block size is adjusted, the fixed block algorithm continues as shown
below:

Real Time Frequency Averaging

Overlap Frequency Averaging

369
 Algorithms

40.6. Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) and Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)
The DFT makes viewing of the frequency content of a discrete time domain sequence
possible. Given a sequence of length N, The DFT H can be obtained via the following
formula:

The FFT produces the same "H" but requires far fewer computations. The FFT algorithm is
well documented, an explanation is beyond the scope of this help system.

40.7. Feedback Systems and Indirect Frequency Response Functions

IADS provides an algorithm for handling simple feedback systems like the one shown below:

Given the measured input and output, IADS will compute T provided that the user chooses
the correct indirect function. The four functions presently offered are shown below:

The indirect Frequency Response Functions are available for Nyquist and Frequency
Response Plots.
Note: The four indirect functions above can be used for other system topologies. Contact an
IADS representative for more information.

40.8. Imaginary
The imaginary part of a Frequency Response function can be plotted versus frequency [Hz].
These plots show resonant peaks and can be used to extract frequency and damping. They are
best used to distinguish two modes with frequencies that are very close. The imaginary
magnitude alternates signs with each mode. Therefore, when two modes are spaced close
together, they will appear on opposite sides of the zero of the y-axis. The figure below
describes how this plot might look for a single mode.

370
 IADS User Manual

40.9. Inverse Fourier Transform - IFT

The IFT produces the Impulse Response Function for a system.

40.10. Log Amplitude Picking

The Log Amplitude Picking is used to extract frequency and damping from a decaying
sinusoidal time history that does not display a clean exponential damping envelope. It is the
most versatile of the three time domain single mode damping algorithms. The user “picks” a
string of consecutive peaks on a decay and the algorithm performs a straight line fit on the
natural log of the peak’s magnitudes. The slope of this line is used in the following formula:

Frequency is calculated using the time between the two outermost peaks and the number of
peaks as shown below:

Note: In IADS, damping values are structural (twice the exponential damping coefficient). If
you are working in another discipline and wish to know the damping coefficient, just divide
by 2.0.

40.11. Log Decrement

The Log Decrement Algorithm is used to extract frequency and damping from a decaying
sinusoidal time history where one mode is present. Frequency (f) and total system damping
(g) are calculated using the following formulae:

371
 Algorithms

The automated Log Decrement algorithm chooses the greatest peak in the response signal
following termination on the flutter excitation signal as Astart. The last peak chosen (Astop)
is the first peak that satisfies the percent reduction requirement set by the user.
Note: In IADS, damping values are structural (twice the exponential damping coefficient). If
you are working in another discipline and wish to know the damping coefficient, just divide
by 2.0.

40.12. Log Decrement Averaging

The Log Decrement Averaging algorithm is used to extract frequency and damping from a
decaying sinusoidal time history where one mode is dominant, but there is enough variation
in the decay of adjacent peaks to warrant averaging. Frequency (f) and total system damping
(G) are calculated using the following formulae:

Note: In IADS, damping values are structural (twice the exponential damping coefficient). If
you are working in another discipline and wish to know the damping coefficient, just divide
by 2.0.

40.13. Magnitude
These plots show resonant peaks and can be used like PSD or Auto Spectrum plots to extract
frequency and damping. The magnitude can be found from the following relationship derived
from a frequency response function:

372
 IADS User Manual

40.14. Mean Removal

The correct syntax for the Mean Removal operator is all follows: MeanRemove(parm, nPts)
Given user-defined parameter name and point count, this function removes the mean and
creates a new parameter centered about 0.0. Each data point in the new derived time history is
calculated as follows:

40.15. Nyquist Plot

The Nyquist plot is a rectangular/polar plot of the Frequency Response function of a system.
The real and imaginary parts (rectangular) of the Frequency Response function are shown
directly, and magnitude and phase information (polar) can be obtained from the pop up hint.
The real/imaginary information and the magnitude/phase information are related by the
following formulae:
Real = (magnitude) (cos (phase))
Imaginary = (magnitude) (sin (phase))
Magnitude = the square root of the sum of Real2 + Imaginary2
Phase = Atan (Imaginary / real) Note: Atan2 is used to compute phase.

The Display tab of the Nyquist plot properties sheet has check boxes which enable a unit
circle and gain line overlays. The unit circle overlay must be displayed in order for phase and
gain margins to be displayed. The gain line overlay is a visual aid for magnitude
determination. The mouse vertical position in the display determines where the hint marker
will show up.

40.16. Octave Band

The system provides the capability to compute octave bands and 1/3 octave bands in near real
time. Octave bands provide the capability to view portions of the frequency spectrum in parts.
For an octave band, the upper frequency is twice the lower frequency. For a 1/3-octave band,
the upper frequency is 1.26 times the lower frequency.

40.17. Overlap Frequency Averaging

Overlap Frequency Averaging is calculated just like Frequency Averaging, except that the
beginning of each block is offset from the beginning of the previous block by a user specified
percent of the block size.
For example, if you specify a 75% overlap and the block size is 2048, the first block contains
the 1st point through the 2048th point, and the second block contains the 513th point through
the 2560th point.
Incomplete blocks are filled the same way as incomplete blocks for Frequency Averaging,
but blocks that are less than half full of data are not accepted. For Overlap Frequency
Averaging, there will be more than one incomplete block.

373
 Algorithms

Fixed Block Frequency Averaging

Real Time Frequency Averaging
Note: In real-time, the time between successive displays can be set using sample rate, block
size and overlap. For example: using data with a sample rate of 1024 samples per second, the
block size set to 1024, and the overlap set to 50% - the time between spectra would be 500
milliseconds.

40.18. Phase Reference

The upper display of a frequency response plot (except for Coquad) is phase angle (in degrees
or radians) versus frequency. IADS calculates phase angle with the following formula:

40.19. Power Spectral Density

As a means of retaining consistency between spectrums when the sample rates and block
sizes are not consistent, the amplitude can be divided by its frequency resolution to produce a
power spectral density plot. In equation form, this is represented by:

374
 IADS User Manual

40.20. Pseudo Randomdec

After a FES burst excitation, the structure and thus the transient response can be influenced
by atmospheric turbulence so that more than one mode appears in the data, or the turbulence
excites the mode of interest while the mode is decaying. An averaging technique (Pseudo
Randomdec) can be employed to average out any noise in the data, leaving only the response
of the mode of interest. The Pseudo Randomdec procedure shall be used to average the
transient response data from several successive burst excitations with the same frequency,
amplitude, and duration.

Like the Randomdec procedure, the Pseudo Randomdec procedure requires an activation
point. The difference is that Pseudo Randomdec analysis is not applied to randomly excited
data and the activation point can essentially be at the same point for each block of data taken
in the average. For this method, the activation points shall be tied to the points that are near
the excitation system cut-off.

40.21. Randomdec
A structural response time history produced by frequent random excitations would normally
display no discernible individual modes from which frequency and damping information
could be derived. The following figure illustrates this kind of time history.
Time History of a Response from Random Excitations

To extract frequency and damping information, averaging techniques can be employed to

average out the noise, leaving only the transient responses from modes that have sufficient
energy present in the time history. The Random Decrement (Randomdec) method requires an
activation level and data crossing that serves to represent an impulse excitation for a
subsequent structural response such that the averaged blocks of data begin with the same
phase. For example, initiation could be set so that a block of data is taken with every positive
or negative crossing of an activation level, and the activation level could be represented by a
percentage of the root mean square (RMS) value of the entire output signal. A block of data
beginning at the initiation point is then averaged with subsequent blocks of data beginning
with a similar initiation point. The resulting time history (one block) then would represent a
transient decay from an impulse excitation with incidental noise averaged out. The final
signature will be in the form of a sum of damped sinusoidal functions.

40.22. Real Reference

The real part of a Frequency Response function can be plotted versus frequency [Hz]. These
plots show resonant peaks and can be used to extract frequency and damping. The equation

375
 Algorithms

and figure below describe how to obtain damping from this kind of plot. For damping, the
user shall pick with the mouse the two peaks shown. The frequency can be displayed by
hinting on the zero crossing of the axis.

40.23. Real Time Frequency Averaging

Real-Time Frequency Averaging is similar to fixed block Frequency Averaging except that
the total number of blocks may be undefined. When the total number of blocks is undefined,
the averaging continues until it is reset by the user, and the system keeps a running
summation of the Frequency element amplitudes.
For example, the Frequency amplitudes for the second block are added to those of the first
block to create a running sum. The running sum is divided by the total number of blocks (in
this case, two) to display the Frequency averaged data.
When Frequency element amplitudes are calculated for a third block, they are added to the
running sum. The running sum is then divided by three to display the Frequency averaged
data. The running sum and number of blocks in the average continue to update until reset by
the user.
If the total number of blocks for Real-Time Frequency averaging is defined to be a fixed
number, say ten, the system performs as described in the previous paragraph until the
Frequency element amplitudes for the eleventh block are calculated. The system then
subtracts from the running sum the values for the first block before adding the values for the
eleventh block. The system divides by ten to obtain the frequency averaged data. This
continues until reset by the user.
Overlap Frequency Averaging
Fixed Block Frequency Averaging

376
 IADS User Manual

40.24. Rational Fraction Polynomial (RFP) Curve Fit

The Half-power damping method works well for estimating the frequency and damping for a
single, well isolated mode in the frequency domain. For multiple modes, the RFP Curve Fit is
much more effective.
The RFP Curve Fit uses the well documented rational fraction polynomial algorithm to fit a
set of frequency/damping pairs to frequency response data. The form of the polynomial is
shown below:

The algorithm is iterative much like the Time History Curve Fit. Once the error tolerance is
satisfied or the maximum iteration count has been reached, the results are displayed. These
values vary based on operational mode.
Mode: Max Iteration Count: Error Tolerance:
Real time 20 0.01
Frozen 100 0.0
Fixed Block 100 0.0
Note: An error tolerance setting of "0.0" virtually assures hitting the max iteration count.
During real-time operation, RFP curve fit calculations can cause the display to fall behind due
to heavy computational loads. Decreasing overlap will help to alleviate the delay. The
frozen/fixed block RFP Curve Fit algorithm returns the most accurate results due to its higher
iteration limit. Real-time convergence criteria are relaxed to ease the computational burden.

40.25. Selective Area RMS (Root Mean Square)

This function is available from the right-click compute menu of the Frequency Plot. The
function computes a RMS value by taking the square root of the summed are (PSD) or
summed values (Auto Spectrum) of a selected frequency range of a Frequency Plot.
Possible uses:
1. Exclude non-oscillatory energy from a band power estimation.
2. Accurately estimate amplitude of harmonic components by bounding leaked energy with
user-adjustable limits.
Given one array of PSD or Auto Spectrum data:

377
 Algorithms

40.26. Smoothing
3-Point
Array [0] = (1/2)( Array [0] + [1] )
Array [i] = (1/4)( Array [i -1] + Array [i+1] ) + (1/2) (Array [i] )
Array [Last] = (1/2)( Array [Last -1] + Array [Last] )
Where Last = (Blocklength/2) - 1
0 < i < Last
7-Point
Array [0] = (1/2)( Array [0] + Array [1] )
Array [1] = (1/4)( Array [0] + Array [2] ) + (1/2) (Array [1] )
Array [2] = (1/4)( Array [1] + Array [3] ) + (1/2) (Array [2] )
Array [i] = (0.03661)( Array [i -3] + Array [i+3] ) + (1/8) (Array [i-2] + Array [i+2] +
(0.21339)( Array [i -1] + Array [i+1] ) + (1/4) (Array [i] )
Array [Last-2] = (1/4)( Array [Last-3] + Array [Last-1] ) + (1/2) (Array [Last-2] )
Array [Last-1] = (1/4)( Array [Last-2] + Array [Last] ) + (1/2) (Array [Last-1] )
Array [Last] = (1/2)( Array [Last-1] + Array [Last] )
Where Last = (Blocklenght/2) -1
2 < i < (Last-2)

40.27. Time Domain RMS (Root Mean Square)

All Time Domain RMS calculations are based on the following formula:

The way data is counted and arranged in the computation differs slightly by algorithm.
Quick-look Time Domain RMS (vertical Stripchart only)
This function is used to compute and display an RMS of time domain data in text form. One
second of data is used in this calculation, and real-time results update every 250ms.

Note: This function is intended to be used for real-time, "quick look" purposes. The derived
equation RMS may be used for more precise needs.
Derived Equation Time Domain RMS
This derived equation generates a parameter that represents a running RMS of another
parameter. Given user inputs of parameter and number of points in the derived equation
RMS(parm, nPts):

378
 IADS User Manual

40.28. Time History Curve Fit

Log decrement and log amplitude picking damping calculation methods are useful for
impulse responses that are dominated by a single mode. The frequency response parameters
from multiple modes of data can be obtained by curve fitting the best equation of motion to
this response.

An equation that can be fit to free response data of any number of degrees of freedom is a
sum of damped sinusoids represented by:

Note: In IADS, damping values are structural (twice the exponential damping coefficient). If
you are working in another discipline and wish to know the damping coefficient, just divide
by 2.0.

40.29. Frequency Response Function

A Frequency Response function is a mathematical expression that characterizes a system in
terms of its input and output. This is the method IADS uses to determine the direct Frequency
Response function which is displayed by the Frequency Response plot and the Nyquist plot.
Gxy represents a Cross Spectrum of input and output, and Gxx represents an Auto Spectrum of
input.

Indirect Frequency Response Functions offered in IADS:

379
 Algorithms

Note: Pressing the "I" key with your cursor in a Nyquist or Frequency Response Plot will
change the feedback type.

40.30. Window Equivalent Noise Bandwidth (ENBW)

Window ENBW is a scaling factor calculated from Hanning, Hamming, Blackman, Kaiser-
Bessel and Flat Top Windows. It is used to scale the displayed amplitude of an Auto
Spectrum display and the user can choose to include it or not. It is particularly useful when
used in conjunction with the Flat Top Window to determine the amplitude of a harmonic
component of a signal.

Note: For computational efficiency, ENBW factors are read from a table and are not
recalculated for each FFT.

40.31. Window Type

Windowing improves amplitude and frequency accuracy in the frequency domain by
reducing leakage aberrations in the FFT output that are introduced by sudden changes in the
data, at the start and end of data.
Rectangular
This Rectangular (Boxcar) window can be selected when no weighting of data blocks is
desired before the FFT process.

380
IADS User Manual

Hamming
The Hamming window is a bell shaped weighting curve similar to the Hanning window
below. The endpoints of the window do not taper all the way to 0.0, so the curve differs
slightly along with resultant main lobe width and ripple (scalloping loss).

Hanning
This Hanning window is a bell-shaped weighting curve applied (Pre-FFT) to reduce spectral
leakage. It is normally applied to signals with a length greater than the FFT block size in
order to force both ends of each block to 0.0.

Blackman
A Blackman window is similar to a Hanning window. It uses two cosine terms to minimize
ripple while keeping the window reasonably narrow.

381
Algorithms

Flat Top
A Flat Top window is similar to a Hanning window. It uses four cosine terms to nearly
eliminate ripple. Ripple (scalloping loss) is so low for this window that it can be used for
accurate amplitude measurements and calibration.

Kaiser-Bessel
The Kaiser-Bessel window allows the user to adjust the compromise between main lobe
width and amplitude accuracy by varying its x parameter. The ends of the window are forced
toward 0.0 like a Hanning window to reduce spectral leakage.

382
41. IADS Data Manager
41.1. The IADS Data Manager Overview
The IADS Data Manager is a post test application that allows the user to access information
in IADS configuration files and archived data. The tool can be used in several ways: via a
command line (which is handy for scripting), or from a run file (when multiple commands are
desired) or using the GUI as described below.
To open an existing project:
1. Click Start > All Programs > IADS > Utilities > IADS Data Manager.
2. In the IADS Data Manger start dialog, double-click on a project name in the list, or click
the Open Project button and select the folder that contains the project to open.

To create a new project:

1. Click Start > All Programs > IADS > Utilities > IADS Data Manager.
2. In the IADS Data Manger start dialog click the New Project button.
3. An “IADS Data Manager” public folder is available in the Documents\Iads library on
your computer; this default location is suggested for all IADS Data Manager Projects.
Enter a project file name, for example, "Project1" and click the Save button.
4. Navigate to the directory that contains IADS configuration files and click the Select
Folder button. The IADS Data Manager will list all the config files in a tree structure, in
the left pane of the IADS Data Manager window.

383
IADS Data Manager

IADS Data Manager Dialog

The IADS Data Manager consists of three sections: the Configs (IADS Data) folder tree, the
Working area, and the Status window. The Configs tree displays IADS data archives within a
directory and the pfConfig files in those collections. The Working Area is a tabbed window
that organizes results (files) by command type: exported config table data, exported
parameter data, exported Analysis Windows and Desktops, and converted data.

Configs right-click menu options:

 Open a folder in the Configs tree and right-click on a pfConfig file:
Import or export table information (TestInfo) - Create various informational output files from
an IADS archive data set; to be imported into other config files. This file is saved to the
project folder and accessible in the Working Area, Config Tables.
Export Data - Output parameter data within user specified time segments. This file is saved to
the project folder and accessible in the Working Area, Data Export Files.
Search - The Search option is used to output data from one or more IADS archives. Any
conditional statement that is valid in IADS can also be used as an equation in the Search
command. Also, start and stop times can be specified to search a particular subset of data.
Import or export Analysis Windows or Desktops (Config) - Import or export IADS Analysis
Windows or Desktops from an IADS configuration file. The exported Analysis Window and
Desktop files are saved to the project folder and accessible in the Working Area, Config
AWs/Desktops.
Convert, Combine, Merge and Split Data (Archive) - Convert an IADS data file to or from an
IADS ASCII text file, combine multiple data directories into one large data set, Merge unlike
parameters (TPP and derived; including input parameters) from multiple data directories into

384
IADS User Manual

a single data set, and Split a time slice of data from an existing data archive and copy it to
a specified destination folder.
Import Data - Create an IADS data set from a csv file for use in the IADS Playback Client.
Note: You can double-click on a pfConfig file in the tree structure to view it in Windows
Explorer; or right-click > Open in Explorer.
To kill a command in progress:
 With your cursor in the IADS Data Manager window press Ctrl+Q.
To view the contents of a file (or folder) in the Working Area:
 Right-click on a file/folder in the working area window > Open File / Open Folder. This
can also be accomplished by double-clicking on the file/folder.
To delete a file (or folder) in the Working Area:
 Right-click on a file/folder in the working area window > Delete File; or press the
"Delete" key (Note: Converted data folders cannot be deleted).
To create a log files of all the messages in the current Status window:
 Right-click in the Status window area > Send to Log File. The Status window can be
cleared of all messages by right-clicking > Clear Window.
To review or edit a command using the Command History dialog (current session only):
All commands processed for the current session can be accessed using the Command History
dialog. Successful commands are denoted by a checked green circle (as shown below);
commands that fail are red.
1. Click the Command menu > Command History (Ctrl+H):
2. Double-click on the command in the Command History dialog to open the Command
Wizard, or right-click on the command > Edit Command.
3. Review the "processing command" message in the Status window for information on the
error.
4. Make the necessary corrections in the wizard and press Finish. The command will
execute automatically.

385
IADS Data Manager

Data Manager Main Menu

File:
New Project - Opens explorer at C:\Users\Name\Documents\IADS Data Manager to create a
new project. See the instructions above to "Create a new project".
Open Project - Opens explorer at C:\Users\Name\Documents\IADS Data Manager to select
an existing project (.iadsDMProject). See the instructions above to "Open an existing
project".
Close Project - Clears the project in the IADS Data Manager dialog.
Save Project - Saves changes to the open project.
Refresh Config Tree - Updates the config tree in the left pane.
Add Config Folder - Opens explorer to navigate to the desired folder of config files; to be
displayed in the config tree in the left pane. Note: This will replace an existing config tree in
the dialog.
Open Run File - Opens explorer to navigate to an IADS Batch Server run file. Opening a run
file will process all the commands in the file. Note: The IADS Data Manager has replaced the
IADS Batch Server.
Recent Projects - Lists your most recent projects.
Exit - Closes the IADS Data Manger.
Command:
Command Wizard - Opens the Command Wizard.
Command Line - Enter a single command.
Command History (Ctrl+H) - Opens the Command History window (see above).
Status:
Clear Window - Clears all entries in the Status window.
Send to Log File - Exports all entries in the Status window to a log (.txt) file.
Help:
About - The IADS Data Manager version.
Help Contents - Opens the IADS Data Manager overview topic in the IADS Help System.
Data Manager Key Hits
Ctrl+A Add a config folder to the tree.
Ctrl+H Open the Command History window.
Ctrl+N Create a new project.
Ctrl+O Open an existing project.
Ctrl+Q Kill a command in process.
Ctrl+R Refresh the config folder in the tree.
Ctrl+S Saves the open project.
Ctrl+W Open the command wizard.

386
 IADS User Manual

41.2. Data Manager - Import or Export Table (Test) Information

The Export Table option is used to output a variety of CSV files from data collected during a
test; that is contained in an IADS Configuration file. You can use the Import Table option to
import data from a csv file that is in the list of exported file, into another config file.
Note: You can double-click on a CSV file in the working window (or right-click > Open
File) to view its contents in Excel or Notepad.
To import table information:
1. Right-click on a pfConfig file in the Configs window of the IADS Data Manager >
Import Table.
2. Select a csv file from the list of (previously) exported tables.
3. The Status window will display the processing command information and result.
To export table information:
1. Right-click on a pfConfig file in the Configs window of the IADS Data Manager >
Export Table.
2. Select an export table option as shown in the table below.
3. The Status window will display the processing command information and result.

To export a table using the Command Wizard (Advanced):

1. Right-click on a config file in the Configs window of the IADS Data Manager > Import
Table / Export Table > Advanced...
2. In the Command Wizard, At the Table field, click the drop down select an export table
type. See the table below for a description of each table type.
3. At the Config File field, click the Browse button to select the IADS configuration file.
4. At the Output File field, click the Browse button to select the CSV output file name and
path.
5. Click Finish. The Status window will display the processing command information and
result. In the event of an error, open the Command History dialog (Ctrl+H) to
troubleshoot.

387
 IADS Data Manager

Table Description
Export the DataGroups table in the config to a DataGroups.csv file in the
DataGroups
"Config Tables" working area.
Export the EventMarkers table in the config to an EventMarkers.csv file
EventMarkers
in the "Config Tables" working area.
Export the MissionAttributes table in the config to a
MissionAttributes
MissionAttributes.csv file in the "Config Tables" working area.
Export the ParameterDefaults table in the config to a
ParameterDefaults
ParameterDefaults.csv file in the "Config Tables" working area.
Export the ParameterDefaultsState table in the config to a
ParameterDefaultsState
ParameterDefaultsState.csv file in the "Config Tables" working area.
Export the PlannedTestPoints table in the config to a
PlannedTestPoints
PlannedTestPoints.csv file in the "Config Tables" working area.
Export the Selections table in the config to a Selections.csv file in the
Selections
"Config Tables" working area.
Export the flight, test/tail Number, flight date, and the archive start and
TestInfo end times in the config to a TestInfo.csv file in the "Config Tables"
working area.
Export the TestPoints table in the config to a TestPoints.csv file in the
TestPoints
"Config Tables" working area.
Export the Thresholds table in the config to a Thresholds.csv file in the
Thresholds
"Config Tables" working area.
Export the TimeSegmentLog table in the config to a
TimeSegmentLog
TimeSegmentLog.csv file in the "Config Tables" working area.

41.3. Data Manager - Import or Export Analysis Window or Desktop

Import or export IADS Analysis Windows or Desktops to or from an IADS configuration file.
To import an Analysis Window or Desktop:
1. Right-click on a pfConfig file in the Configs window of the IADS Data Manager >
Import Analysis Window or Import Desktop.
2. Select a file from the list of exported Analysis Windows and Desktops.
3. The Status window will display the command and result.
To export an Analysis Window or Desktop:
1. Right-click on a pfConfig file in the Configs window of the IADS Data Manager >
Export Analysis Window or Export Desktop.
2. Select an Analysis Window or Desktop from the selected config file.
3. The Status window will display the command and result.

388
IADS User Manual

To import an Analysis Window or Desktop using the Command Wizard (Advanced):

1. Right-click on a config file in the Configs window of the IADS Data Manager > Import
Analysis Window or Import Desktop > Advanced...
2. Click the Type drop down to select AW (Analysis Window) or DT (Desktop).
3. At the Config File field, click the Browse button to select the config file that contains the
Analysis Window or Desktop you want to import.
4. For Desktop, browse to select .iadsDt file you want to import. For Analysis Window,
browse to select the .iadsAw file to import.
5. [Analysis Window import only] Enter the name of the Desktop to import the Analysis
Window into.
6. Click Finish. The Status window will display the processing command information and
result. In the event of an error, open the Command History dialog (Ctrl+H) to
troubleshoot.
To export an Analysis Window or Desktop using the Command Builder dialog
(Advanced):
1. Right-click on a config file in the Configs window of the IADS Data Manager > Export
Analysis Window or Export Desktop > Advanced...
2. Click the Type drop down to select AW (Analysis Window) or DT (Desktop).
3. At the Config File field, click the Browse button to select the config file that contains the
Analysis Window or Desktop you want to export.
4. Enter the Analysis Window or Desktop name to export.
5. At the Output Folder field, click the Browse button to select a location to save the export
file.
6. Click the Finish button. The Status window will display the processing command
information and result. In the event of an error, open the Command History dialog
(Ctrl+H) to troubleshoot.

389
 IADS Data Manager

41.4. Data Manager - Import Data

The Import Data option is used to create an IADS data set from a csv file for use with the
IADS Playback Client.
To import data into a data export file listed in the Data Manager "Working Area"
window (Data Export Files tab):
1. Right-click on a data export file > Import Data (ASCII) Files Only.
2. Select a directory in the popup menu list.

To import data using the Command Wizard (Advanced):

1. Right-click on a DIRECTORY in the Configs window of the IADS Data Manager >
Import Data...
2. At the Type drop down select CSV.
3. At the Input File field, click the Browse button to select the csv input file containing the
data to import.
4. At the Output Folder field, click the Browse button to select an output folder.
5. To add "Data Import Properties" (see options below) click the Properties button.
6. Click Finish. The Status window will display the processing command information and
result. In the event of an error, open the Command History dialog (Ctrl+H) to
troubleshoot.
Import Options:
Delimiter - Click the drop down to select SPACE or TAB, the delimiter used to parse the
file. The default delimiter if this property is not specified is a comma ",".
Number of Header Rows - The number of rows in the file header that will be skipped to get
to the data. Default is 0 if this property is not specified.
Sample Rate - The user specified sample rate of the output files. If not specified, the sample
rate will be calculated based on the times in the specified "Time Column" of the input file.
Time Column - The 1-based column index where time is present in the file. Default is 1 if
this property is not specified.

390
 IADS User Manual

StartTime - The user specified IRIG start time of the output files. If not specified, the start
time will be read from the input file based on the specified "Time Column".
Custom - Custom data import formats supported by the IADS Data Manager. Currently the
following formats are supported: DGPS (Differential Global Positioning System).

41.5. Data Manager - Export Data

The Export Data option is used to output parameter data within user specified time segments
from information contained in an IADS Configuration file.

To export data using the Command Wizard:

1. Right-click on a pfConfig file in the Configs window of the IADS Data Manager >
Export Data.
2. At the Config File field, click the Browse button to select the IADS configuration file.
3. At the Type drop down, select CSV, Matlab or CDF.
4. At the Parameters field, enter the parameters to export.
Option 1: The Data Group you want to export; and [optional] export options. The format
is <DataGroupName>|<Export options> (pipe-separated).
Option 2: A comma separated list of parameters; and [optional] export options. The
format is <Parm1,Parm2,...>|<Export options>.
Option 3: A 'TestInfo' DataGroup generated csv file (DataGroup.csv).
Export Option OverSample (for IADS data files only) - True or False. Parameters below
a specified sample rate will not be upsampled. For example,
DataGroupA|\OverSample=False.
5. At the Output file, click the Browse button to select the output file name and path; or
STDOUT. If you selected ‘IADS’ as the Export Type in arg2, enter a folder name (not
file name) for this argument; IADS data files will be created for each parameter in the
data group in the specified folder.
6. Click Next.
7. Select a time option.

391
 IADS Data Manager

Option 1: Input File - CSV file name and path - Processes more than one time segment
using IRIG start and stop times from a CSV file that was generated using the Data
Manager (table export file).
Option 2: Single Time Slice: The IRIG Start Time and IRIG End Time; or click the
Browse config file for time slice... button to make a time slice selection.

8. Click Finish. The Status window will display the processing command information; and
the successful export of the data or an error. In the event of an error, open the Command
History dialog (Ctrl+H) to troubleshoot.

41.6. Data Manager - Convert, Combine, Merge and Split IADS Data
Archive Type Brief Description
Convert Converts an IADS data file to or from an IADS ASCII text file.
Combine Combines same parameters from multiple data sets into a single data set.
Merge Merges unlike parameters from multiple data directories into a single data set.
Splits a time slice of data from an existing data archive and copies it to the
Split
specified destination folder.
Convert
Converts an IADS data file to or from an IADS ASCII text file. This may be useful for use in
other programs or for visual inspection of data values
To convert all IADS data files in an archive to ASCII:
 Right-click on a pfConfig file in the Configs window of the IADS Data Manager >
Convert Data to ASCII > All Parameters.

392
IADS User Manual

To convert data using the Command Wizard (Advanced):

1. Right-click on a config file in the Configs window of the IADS Data Manager > Convert
Data to ASCII > Advanced.
2. At the Input Folder field, click the Browse button to select the data to convert.
3. At the Parameters field, list of parameter files to convert. Only one option can be
specified: A comma separated list of parameter names; A 'DataGroup' CSV file created
by the Data Manager; or an asterisk * to denote all files in the specified folder.
4. At the Output Folder field, click the Browse button to select the output directory name
and path for the converted files.
5. Click Finish. The Status window will display the processing command information and
result. In the event of an error, open the Command History dialog (Ctrl+H) to
troubleshoot.
Combine
Combines the same parameters (TPP and derived; including input parameters) from multiple
data directories into a single data set (the Merge command combines unlike parameters from
multiple data sets). The process will combine Param1, Param2, Param3 in InputFolder1, with
Param1, Param2, Param3 in InputFolder2, and so on. Any data files that do not match, for
example ParamX, will get copied to the output directory as is. Please refer to the rules below.
Rules:
1. The first input folder is considered the "master" data set and all of the files from that
folder (config, auxiliary files, etc.) will get copied over to the output directory. The data
files in the resulting dataset will be aperiodic or multi-periodic files that reflect the data
from each input folder.
2. To get a valid multi-periodic data file for each parameter, the data in each input folder
must ‘match’; contain the same list of data files (parameters) in each input folder.
3. The time slices of data in each input folder must increase from input folder to input
folder. This means that the end time of the data in InputFolder1 must be less than the
start time of the data in InputFolder2, the end time of InputFolder2 must be less than the
start time of the data in InputFolder3, etc.

393
IADS Data Manager

To combine multiple data sets:

 Right-click on two or more pfConfig files in the Configs window of the IADS Data
Manager > Combine Data Into > Select a directory in the popup menu list.

To combine data using the Command Wizard (Advanced):

1. Right-click on two or more config files in directories that you want to combine in the
Configs window of the IADS Data Manager > Combine Data Into > Advanced.
2. At the Output Folder field, click the Browse button to select the output directory name
and path for the combined data. This directory should not contain any config files or data
(empty directory).
3. At the Master Dataset field, click the Browse button to select the directory and config
that will be the "master" input folder. All files from this folder (config file, auxiliary files,
etc.) will get copied to the Output folder that is defined above.
4. At the Input Datasets field, click the Browse button to select directory name and path of
InputFolderN (should contain the same data files/parameters as Folder1, Folder2, etc.).
5. Click Finish. The Status window will display the processing command information and
result. In the event of an error, open the Command History dialog (Ctrl+H) to
troubleshoot.
Merge
Merges unlike parameters (TPP and derived; including input parameters) from multiple data
directories into a single data set (the Combine command merges same parameters from
multiple data sets). This process will combine, for example, Param1 and Param2 from
InputFolder1 (or all of the parameters in the data set if \parameters is not defined), with
Param3 and Param4 from InputFolder2, and so on; into a designated output folder. It is
recommended to merge data with similar start and end times.
Note: The merge and combine commands have a similar setup in the Command Wizard. See
the graphic above.
To merge multiple data sets:
 Right-click on two or more pfConfig files in the Configs window of the IADS Data

394
IADS User Manual

Manager > Merge Data Into > Select a directory in the popup menu list.
To merge data using the Command Wizard (Advanced):
1. Right-click on two or more config files in directories that you want to combine in the
Configs window of the IADS Data Manager > Merge Data Into > Advanced.
2. At the Output Folder field, click the Browse button to select the output directory name
and path for the combined data. This directory should not contain any config files or data
(empty directory). The config files you specify in the following arguments will be
merged into a single config file, in this directory.
3. At the Master Dataset field, click the Browse button to select the directory and master
config that will be the "master" input folder. All files from this folder (config file,
auxiliary files, etc.) will get copied to the Output folder that is defined above.
4. Click the Master Properties... button to enter parameter options:
Option 1: Parameters - A comma separated list of parameter names. Note: If no
parameters are defined, ALL parameters will be copied to the output folder and master
config.
Option 2: Datagroup - A DataGroup name defined in the Parameter Defaults Table. Note:
If a DataGroup is not defined, ALL parameters will be copied to the output folder and
master config.
[Optional] Prefix - Prepends a string to the beginning of each parameter that you specify,
for example, 1_
[Optional] Suffix - Appends a string to the end of each parameter that you specify, for
example, _B
5. At the Input Datasets field, click the Browse button to select directory name and path of
InputFolderN (should contain the same data files/parameters as Folder1, Folder2, etc.).
6. Click Finish. The Status window will display the processing command information and
result. In the event of an error, open the Command History dialog (Ctrl+H) to
troubleshoot.

395
IADS Data Manager

Split
This command splits a time slice of data from an existing data archive and copies it to the
specified destination folder. The directory structure of the source archive is preserved; only
the length of time is changed.

To split an IADS data archive using the Command Wizard:

1. Right-click on a pfConfig file in the Configs window of the IADS Data Manager > Split
2. Data.
3. At the Config File field, click the Browse button to select the IADS configuration file.
4. At the Output Folder field, click the Browse button to select the output directory name
and path for the new data set.
5. Click the Browse config file for time slice... button to make a time slice selection.

3. Click the Properties... to enter parameter options:

Option 1: Parameters - A comma separated list of parameter names. Note: If no
parameters are defined, ALL parameters will be copied to the output folder.

396
 IADS User Manual

Option 2: Datagroup - A DataGroup name defined in the Parameter Defaults Table. Note:
If a DataGroup is not defined, ALL parameters will be copied to the output folder.
4. Click Finish. The Status window will display the processing command information and
result. In the event of an error, open the Command History dialog (Ctrl+H) to
troubleshoot.

41.7. Data Manager - Search

The Search option is used to output data from one or more IADS archives. Any conditional
statement that is valid in IADS can also be used as an equation in the Search command. Also,
start and stop times can be specified to search a particular subset of data.

To search data using the Command Wizard:

1. Select one or more pfConfig files in the IADS Data Manager "configs" tree in the left
hand window pane; right-click > Search Data.
2. The Config File field is updated to reflect the path of the config file or
<SELECTED_CONFIGS> if more than one config if selected. [Optional] Click the
Browse button to select a different configuration file.
3. At the Equation File field enter your equation. Multiple equations or those with spaces
must be enclosed in quotations. For example, "(C001_03 > 2305) && (IN001_10 > 0.25)
&& (C001_04 != 0)".
4. Click the Transitions drop down to select True, False or TrueFalse (True = One event for
each instance the equation is True, False = All events where the equation is True,
TrueFalse = The start and end times only of the condition)
5. At the Output file, click the Browse button to select the output file name and path; or
STDOUT in lieu of an output file.
6. Click the Properties button to enter parameter search options as described below > click
this text/string
7. Choose the time range you with to search within > click Finish.

397
 IADS Data Manager

41.8. Data Manager - Command Line and Run File Option

The IADS Data Manager has a unique set of commands for each type of function that is
performed; using the application command line, from a run file (when multiple commands
are desired) or using the GUI.
To execute a single command in the IADS Data Manager:
1. Click the Command menu > Command Line.
2. Enter a command line option and click Run.

To create a run file with multiple commands:

A run file has two halves separated by an equal “=” sign. The left side is the command name
and the right side has the arguments. An entry in the run file preceded by an asterisk * will be
commented out.
1. Open Notepad on your computer.
2. Enter command options per command type.
3. Save the file.

To execute a run file in the IADS Data Manager:

1. Click the File menu > Open Run File.
2. Navigate to the run file and click Open.

398
IADS User Manual

To execute a run file or command from the Command Prompt:

1. Launch the Command Prompt.
2. Navigate to the directory that contains the IADSBatchServer.exe ("C:\Program
Files\IADS\DataManager").
3. Type "IadsDataManager" and a single command; or /runfile and the path to the run file
(as shown in the graphic above).
4. Press Enter.
Click on a link below to see all command line and run file examples for that type
Import or export table information (TestInfo)
Create various informational output files from an IADS archive data set; to be imported into
other config files. This file is saved to the project folder and accessible in the Working Area,
Config Tables.
Test Information arguments:
Arg1 - TestInfo type: export or import.
Arg2 - Table type (see table above).
Arg3 - The IADS configuration file name and path.
Arg4 - The CSV input or output file name and path.
Arg5 - [Optional for TestInfo = DataGroup] MyGroupName
Arg5 - [Required for TestInfo = Parameters] True or False. ‘True’ adds three columns to the
output file: StartTime, EndTime and Valid, otherwise ‘False’.
Command line examples:
/TestInfo Export DataGroup c:\IadsPostTestData\pfconfig c:\DataGroup.csv DG1 (there is no
import option for TestInfo type: DataGroup)
/TestInfo Export DataGroups c:\IadsPostTestData\pfconfig c:\DataGroups.csv
/TestInfo Import DataGroups c:\IadsPostTestData\Import\pfconfig c:\DataGroups.csv
/TestInfo Export EventMarkers c:\PostTestData\pfconfig c:\EventMarkers.csv
/TestInfo Import EventMarkers c:\PostTestData\Import\pfconfig c:\EventMarkers.csv
/TestInfo Export MissionAttributes c:\IadsPostTestData\pfconfig c:\MissionAttributes.csv
/TestInfo Import MissionAttributes c:\IadsPostTestData\Import\pfconfig
c:\MissionAttributes.csv
/TestInfo Export Parameters c:\IadsPostTestData\pfconfig c:\Parameters.csv True (there is no
import option for TestInfo type: Parameters)
/TestInfo Export ParameterDefaults c:\IadsPostTestData\pfconfig c:\ParameterDefaults.csv
/TestInfo Import ParameterDefaults c:\IadsPostTestData\Import\pfconfig
c:\ParameterDefaults.csv
/TestInfo Export Selections c:\IadsPostTestData\pfconfig c:\Selections.csv
/TestInfo Import Selections c:\IadsPostTestData\Import\pfconfig c:\Selections.csv

399
IADS Data Manager

/TestInfo Export TestInfo c:\IadsPostTestData\pfconfig c:\TestInfo.csv (there is no import

option for TestInfo type: TestInfo)
/TestInfo Export TestPoints c:\IadsPostTestData\pfconfig c:\TestPoints.csv
/TestInfo Import TestPoints c:\IadsPostTestData\Import\pfconfig c:\TestPoints.csv
/TestInfo Export Thresholds c:\IadsPostTestData\pfconfig c:\Thresholds.csv
/TestInfo Import Thresholds c:\IadsPostTestData\Import\pfconfig c:\Thresholds.csv
/TestInfo Export TimeSegmentLog c:\IadsPostTestData\pfconfig c:\TimeSegmentLog.csv
/TestInfo Import TimeSegmentLog c:\IadsPostTestData\Import\pfconfig
c:\TimeSegmentLog.csv
Run file example:
Note: To change a command line entry to a run file entry, replace the “/” with an equal sign "
= " between the command type and the first argument; as shown below:
TestInfo = Export EventMarkers c:\IadsPostTestData\pfconfig c:\EventMarkers.csv

Export Data
Output parameter data within user specified time segments. This file is saved to the project
folder and accessible in the Working Area, Data Export Files.
Export data arguments:
Arg1 - IADS Config File - The IADS config file name and path.
Arg2 - Export Type - CSV (.csv) or IADS (.iadsData) file.
Arg3 - Parameters - Only one of the following options can be specified in the command:
Option 1: The Data Group you want to export; and export options [optional].
Option 2: A comma separated list of parameters; and export options [optional]. The format is
<Parm1,Parm2,...>|<CSV export options> (note the two are pipe-separated).
Option 3: A 'TestInfo' DataGroup generated CSV file (DataGroup.csv).
Arg4 - Time - Only one option can be specified in the command:
Option 1: IRIG Start Time and IRIG Stop Time of the data you want to export.
Option 2: The TestInfo CSV file name and path. Processes more than one time segment using
IRIG start and stop times from a CSV output file generated from one of the TestInfo
commands.
Option 3: A Search command generated CSV file, name and path.
Arg5 - Output File - The output (results) file name and path; or STDOUT. If you selected
‘IADS’ as the Export Type in arg2, enter a folder name (not file name) for this argument;
IADS data files will be created for each parameter in the data group in the specified folder.
Command line examples:
/DataExport c:\PostTestData\pfconfig CSV DataGroup 001:00:01:19.625
001:00:01:20.237 c:\DataExport
/DataExport c:\PostTestData\pfconfig CSV DataGroup c:\TestPoints.csv
c:\DataExportTestPoints.csv

400
IADS User Manual

/DataExport c:\PostTestData\pfconfig CSV Parm1,Parm2,Parm3|\TriggerParam=*

001:01:00:00.00 001:01:01:00.00 c:\DataExport
/DataExport c:\PostTestData\pfconfig IADS DataGroup 001:00:01:19.625 001:00:01:20.237
c:\DataExport
/DataExport c:\PostTestData\pfconfig IADS DataGroup c:\TestPoints.csv c:\DataExport
Run file example:
Note: To change a command line entry to a run file entry, replace the “/” with an equal sign "
= " between the command type and the first argument; as shown below:
DataExport = c:\PostTestData\pfconfig Matlab DataGroup c:\TestPoints.csv
c:\DataExportTestPoints.mat

Import or export Analysis Windows or Desktops (Config)

Import or export IADS Analysis Windows or Desktops from an IADS configuration file. The
exported Analysis Window and Desktop files are saved to the project folder and accessible in
the Working Area, Config AWs/Desktops.
Import and Export arguments:
Arg1 - Import/Export.
Arg2 - The IADS config file name and path that you want to import/export the Analysis
Window or Desktop.
Arg3 - Enter - AW (Analysis Window) or DT (Desktop).
Arg4 - The Analysis Window .iadsAw or Desktop .iadsDt file name and path.
Arg5 - [Only used if Arg3 = AW] The Desktop name that you want to import into the
Analysis Window or the CSV output (results) directory name and path for an export.
Command line examples:
/Config Import c:\PostTestData\pfconfig DT c:\Desktop1.iadsDt
/Config Export c:\PostTestData\pfconfig AW Status c:\Test
Run file example:
Note: To change a command line entry to a run file entry, replace the “/” with an equal sign "
= " between the command type and the first argument; as shown below:
Config = Import c:\PostTestData\pfconfig AW c:\status.iadsAw Desktop 1
Config = Export c:\PostTestData\pfconfig DT Flutter c:\Test

Convert, Combine, Merge and Split Data (Archive)

Convert an IADS data file to or from an IADS ASCII text file, combine multiple data
directories into one large data set, Merge unlike parameters (TPP and derived; including input
parameters) from multiple data directories into a single data set, and Split a time slice of data
from an existing data archive and copy it to a specified destination folder.

401
IADS Data Manager

Combine
Archive combine arguments:
This command combines multiple data directories into one large data set. The process will
combine Param1, Param2, Param3 in InputFolder1, with Param1, Param2, Param3 in
InputFolder2, and so on. Any data files that do not match, for example ParamX, will get
copied to the output directory as is. Please refer to the rules below.
Arg1 - Combine.
Arg2 - Output folder - The output directory name and path for all the combined data sets.
Arg3 - InputFolder1 with config - The directory name and path for the 'master' data set, for
example, c:\PostTestData\Folder1\pfconfig. All files from this folder (config file, auxiliary
files, etc.) will get copied to the Output folder.
Arg4 - InputFolder2 - The directory name and path of Folder2 (should contain the same data
files/parameters as Folder1).
Arg5 - InputFolderN - The directory name and path of InputFolderN (should contain the
same data files/parameters as Folder1, Folder2, etc.).
Rules:
1. The first input folder is considered the "master" dataset and all of the files from that
folder (config, auxiliary files, etc.) will get copied over to the output directory. The data
files in the resulting dataset will be aperiodic or multi-periodic files that reflect the data
from each input folder.
2. To get a valid multi-periodic data file for each parameter, the data in each input folder
must ‘match’; contain the same list of data files (parameters) in each input folder.
3. The time slices of data in each input folder must increase from input folder to input
folder. This means that the end time of the data in InputFolder1 must be less than the
start time of the data in InputFolder2, the end time of InputFolder2 must be less than the
start time of the data in InputFolder3, etc.
Archive combine command line example:
/Archive Combine c:\PostTestData\CombineData c:\PostTestData\Folder1\pfconfig
c:\PostTestData\Folder2 c:\PostTestData\Folder3
Archive combine run file example:
Note: To change a command line entry to a run file entry, replace the “/” with an equal sign "
= " between the command type and the first argument; as shown below:
Archive = Combine c:\PostTestData\CombineData c:\PostTestData\Folder1\pfconfig
c:\PostTestData\Folder2 c:\PostTestData\Folder3
Split
Archive split arguments:
This command splits a time slice of data from an existing data archive and copies it to the
specified destination folder. The directory structure of the source archive is preserved; only
the length of time is changed.
Arg1 - Split.
Arg2 - Data directory with config. The directory name and path for the data set, for example,
c:\PostTestData\pfconfig.

402
IADS User Manual

Arg3 - IRIG start time.

Arg4 - IRIG stop time.
Arg5 - Output folder - The output directory name and path for the new data set.
Archive split command line example:
/Archive Split c:\PostTestData\pfconfig 001:00:01:19.625 001:00:01:20.237 c:\NewDataSet
Archive combine run file example:
Note: To change a command line entry to a run file entry, replace the “/” with an equal sign "
= " between the command type and the first argument; as shown below:
Archive = Split c:\PostTestData\pfconfig 001:00:01:19.625 001:00:01:20.237 c:\NewDataSet
Convert
Archive convert arguments:
This command converts an IADS data file to or from an IADS ASCII text file. This may be
useful for use in other programs or for visual inspection of data values.
Arg1 - Convert.
Arg2 - The folder name and path containing the IADS data files to convert.
Arg3 - The list of parameter files to convert. Only one option can be specified in the
command:
Option 1: A comma separated list of parameter names
Option 2: A 'DataGroup' file created by the IadsBatchServer
Option 3: An asterisk * to denote all files in the specified folder
Arg4 - The conversion method. Only one option can be specified in the command:
Option 1: ToAscii - Convert an IADS data file to the equivalent IADS ascii file
Option 2: FromAscii - Convert an IADS ascii file to the equivalent IADS data file
Arg5 - Output folder - The output directory name and path for the converted files.
Arg6 - True or False - Enter True to verify the ASCII file by converting it back to an IADS
binary data file and doing a byte compare with the source IADS data file; otherwise False
(default).
Archive convert command line examples:
Convert some IADS data files to ASCII, then back to IADS data files (verification active
(True)):
/Archive Convert c:\SourceData Parm1,Parm2,Parm3 ToAscii c:\ASCIIData True
Convert a folder of data files to ASCII, then back to IADS data files (no verification (False)):
/Archive Convert c:\SourceData * ToAscii c:\ASCIIData True
Convert parameters specified in a TestInfo = DataGroup generated csv file to ASCII, then
back to IADS data files:
/Archive Convert c:\SourceData c:\Datagroup.csv ToAscii c:\ASCIIData False
Archive convert run file examples:

403
IADS Data Manager

Note: To change a command line entry to a run file entry, replace the “ / ” with an equal sign
" = " between the command type and the first argument; as shown below:
Archive = Convert c:\SourceData * ToAscii c:\ASCIIData True
Archive = Convert c:\ASCIIData * FromAscii c:\ASCIIData True
Merge
Archive merge arguments:
Merges any TPP or IAP parameters (not available for derived parameters) from multiple data
directories into a single periodic data set. The process will combine Param1, Param2 and their
PDT information from InputFolder1, Param3, Param4 and their PDT information from
InputFolder2, and so on; into a designated output folder. It is recommended to merge data
with similar start and end times.
Arg1 - Merge.
Arg2 - Output folder - The output directory name and path. This directory should not contain
any config files or data (empty directory). The config files you specify in the following
arguments will be merged into a single config file, in this directory.
Arg3 - Master config - The file name and path of the 'master' config. The config file and all
data in this 'master' directory will be copied to the specified output directory in Arg2. No
parameter options are allowed for this argument.
Arg4 - InputConfig1 - The file name and path of the first input config.
Note: Options can be combined. All options follow the command with a pipe separator (see
example below).
Option 1: \Parameters - A comma separated list of parameter names, for example,
\Parameters=Param1,Param2,Param3 (if no parameters are defined, all parameters (except
derived) will be copied to the output folder config)
Option 2: \Datagroup - A DataGroup name defined in the Parameter Defaults Table, for
example, \DataGroup=ABCD (if a datagroup is not defined, all parameters (except derived)
will be copied to the output folder config)
Option 3: \Prefix - Prepends a string to the beginning of each parameter that you specify, for
example, \Prefix=1_
Option 4: \Suffix - Appends a string to the end of each parameter that you specify, for
example, \Suffix=_B
Arg5 - InputConfigN - The file name and path of the Nth input config.
Parameter options: As defined in Arg4.
Archive merge command line example:
/Archive Merge "c:\PostTestData\MergeOutput" "c:\PostTestData\MasterSet\pfconfig"
"c:\PostTestData\Config1\pfconfig|\Parameters=Param1,Param2,Param3\Suffix=_1"
"c:\PostTestData\Config2\pfconfig|\DataGroup=ABCD\Suffix=_2"
Archive merge run file example:
Note: To change a command line entry to a run file entry, replace the “/” with an equal sign "
= " between the command type and the first argument; as shown below:

404
IADS User Manual

Archive = Merge "c:\PostTestData\MergeOutput" "c:\PostTestData\MasterSet\pfconfig"

"c:\PostTestData\Config1\pfconfig|\Parameters=Param1,Param2,Param3\Suffix=_1"
"c:\PostTestData\Config2\pfconfig|\DataGroup=ABCD\Suffix=_2"

Import Data
Create an IADS data set from a csv file for use in the IADS Playback Client.
Import data arguments:
Arg1 - File type - CSV is the only supported format at this time.
Arg2 - Input File - The file name and path of the input file and optional import options (the
input file and the export options are separated by a pipe “|”, see the run file examples shown
below). Valid options include:
\Delimiter - Determines what delimiter (single character) will be used to parse the file. Any
single character may be used as a delimiter. You may also specify a tab delimiter by using the
keyword “TAB”, or a space delimiter by using the keyword “SPACE”. The default delimiter
if this property is not specified is a comma (,).
\NumHeaderRows - The number of rows in the file header that will be skipped to get to the
data. Default is 0 if this property is not specified.
\TimeColumn - The 1-based column index where time is present in the file. Default is 1 if
this property is not specified.
\StartTime - User-specified IRIG start time of the output files. If this property is not
specified, the start time will be read from the input file based on the specified TimeColumn.
\SampleRate - User-specified sample rate of the output files. If this property is not specified,
the sample rate will be calculated based on the times in the specified TimeColumn of the
input file.
\Custom – Custom data import formats supported by the IADS Batch Server. Currently the
following formats are supported: DGPS (Differential Global Positioning System). For
example, c:\DataFileImport|\Custom=DGPS
Arg3 - Output folder - The output directory name and path.
Command line examples:
/DataImport CSV c:\MyInputFile.csv c:\IadsOutputFolder
/DataImport CSV c:\MyInputFile|\TimeColumn=2\NumHeaderRows=10 c:\OutputFolder
/DataImport CSV c:\MyInputFile|\Custom=DGPS c:\OutputFolder
Run file example:
Note: To change a command line entry to a run file entry, replace the “/” with an equal sign "
= " between the command type and the first argument; as shown below:
DataImport = CSV “c:\Data File Import|\TimeColumn=2\NumHeaderRows=10”
c:\OutputFolder

405
IADS Data Manager

Search Data
The Search option is used to output data from one or more IADS archives. Any conditional
statement that is valid in IADS can also be used as an equation in the Search command. Also,
start and stop times can be specified to search a particular subset of data.
Search command arguments:
Arg1 - The IADS configuration file name and path
Arg2 - Equation - The events returned when the equation is True. Multiple equations or those
with spaces must be enclosed in quotations. See the Search examples below.
Arg3 - Transition Only: True or False
True - One event for each instance the equation is True
False - All events where the equation is True
TrueFalse - The start and end times only of the condition.
Arg4 - Output File - the CSV output (results) file name and path; or STDOUT.
Arg5 - [Optional] TestInfo File - TestInfo generated csv file with start and stop times defined.
- Or -
Arg5 - [Optional] IRIG Start Time
Arg6 - [Optional] IRIG Stop Time
Note: When executing a multi-test search, enter the folder name for the IADS post test data,
not the IADS config file name. For example, Search = c:\IadsPostTestData C001_03<0 True
c:\Test\Search4.csv
Command line examples:
/Search c:\IadsPostTestData C001_03<0 True c:\Test\Search.csv
/Search c:\IadsPostTestData\pfconfig "C001_03>2305 && IN001_10>0.25 &&
C001_04!=0" True c:\Test\Search.csv
/Search c:\IadsPostTestData\pfconfig "(C001_03 > 2305) && (IN001_10 > 0.25) &&
(C001_04 != 0)" True c:\Test\Search.csv
/Search c:\IadsPostTestData\pfconfig C001_02>0 TRUEFALSE c:\Test\Search.csv
Run file example:
Note: To change a command line entry to a run file entry, replace the “ / ” with an equal sign
" = " between the command type and the first argument; as shown below:
Search = c:\IadsPostTestData\pfconfig "(C001_03 > 2305) && (IN001_10 > 0.25) &&
(C001_04 != 0)" True STDOUT

406
42. Calibration Tool
42.1. IADS Calibration Tool
The IADS Calibration Tool simplifies the process of sensor calibration by integrating the
components needed to generate EU equations directly into IADS. After calibration, all data
can be saved to a CSV file.

The calibration tool interface has four major components:

Raw Parameters Table – The table at the top of the dialog that contains a list of raw signal
parameter names and various parameter attributes.
Raw and EU Values Table – This table contains two columns, one showing the raw value of
the parameter as averaged over N points, and the equivalent EU value. These values can be
hand entered or imported from a text file.
Coefficient List – Up to six polynomial coefficients (C0 – C5), as determined by the Order
of Fit selection, are calculated. Note: Currently, only polynomial calibration is available.
Graph – Displays the curve fit of the Raw / EU values. The graph will update when the
Order of Fit is selected; and there are at least three valid point pair rows in the Raw / EU
table. Also, the number of ADC bits must be defined for the parameter in the table, either
manually or from importing metadata, to show the Error% and EU value in the graph.
To enable the calibration tool in IADS:
A command line configuration is used to activate the IADS Calibration Tool in IADS. When
editing the command line there must be a space before any forward slashes. Command entries
within the line are not order dependent.
1. Make a copy of the IADS icon (shortcut).
2. Rename the desktop icon to Calibration Tool.
3. Right-click on the IADS Client with Calibration Tool icon > Properties.

407
Calibration Tool

4. Click the Shortcut tab and in the Target field enter /calTool after the 'Iads.exe' file
location. Use this icon to access IADS in conjunction with the IADS Calibration Tool.
To open the IADS Calibration Tool:
1. Click the Configuration button on the Dashboard.
2. Select the Tools drop down menu > Calibration Dialog.
The calibration tool file menu:
Select Parameters - Opens the IADS Parameter Selection dialog to select parameters from
the IADS configuration for calibration.
Import:
Saved Calibration Data - Import parameters that have already been calibrated using the IADS
Calibration Tool and saved to a file. The calibration tool supports the import of comma-
separated text format .csv or .txt.
Metadata - Import user data for selected parameters. The calibration tool supports the import
of comma-separated text format .csv or .txt.
Export:
Calibration Data To File - Saves calibration data to a file. This data can be used to manually
create IADS EU derived parameters.
Create EU Parameters in Config - Appends the calibrated parameters to the Parameter
Defaults table.
Exit – Closes the IADS Calibration Tool dialog.
To add raw parameters to Raw Parameters table:
1. In the IADS Calibration Tool, select the File drop down menu > Select Parameters.
2. Select one or more parameters using the Parameter Selection dialog and click OK.
To calibrate a single parameter using end to end calibration:
1. In the Raw Parameters table, select a row number to highlight that parameter for
calibration.
2. Select the Calibration Type drop down and choose End to End.
3. In the Samples field enter the number of samples to average, when a value is added to the
Raw Value table (next step). For example, if the selected parameter has an update rate of
1 sample per second, and the Samples entry is 10, the process will require ten seconds to
retrieve all ten values to average.
4. Click the Capture button to enter a value in the Raw Value table. This is the averaged
result of N samples; based on the Sample field entry. The process uses the current time as
the start time.
5. Repeat as necessary to calculate all required points. Note: Any row in the Raw / EU Point
Pairs table can edited.
6. Click in the EU Value field to hand enter the EU values, or load the EU values from a file
by clicking the Import button. The calibration tool supports the import of comma-
separated text format .csv or .txt. Note: EU values can be edited or re-imported at any
time.

408
IADS User Manual

7. Select the Order of Fit drop down to change the order of the curve fit and update the
graph. The number of ADC bits must be defined for the parameter in the table, either
manually or from importing metadata, to show the Error% and EU value in the graph.
Note: Currently only Polynomial calibration is available.
8. Repeat the previous steps as necessary until you are satisfied with the results.
9. Select any other row in the Raw Parameters table to highlight it. If the parameter you just
worked on is green, the calibration was successful. Once a parameter has been calibrated
(green) you can select it at any time to show the data. If the parameter is red, the dialog
was unable to calibrate the parameter or obtain data.
To calibrate a single parameter using transducer calibration:
1. In the Raw Parameters table, select a row number to highlight that parameter for
calibration.
2. Select the Calibration Type drop down and choose Transducer.
3. Click the Import button to load both the raw and EU values. The calibration tool
supports the import of comma-separated text format .csv or .txt. Note: EU values can be
re-imported at any time.
4. Select the Order of Fit drop down to change the order of the curve fit and update the
graph. The number of ADC bits must be defined for the parameter in the table, either
manually or from importing metadata, to show the Error% and EU value in the graph.
Note: Currently only Polynomial calibration is available.
5. Repeat the previous steps as necessary until you are satisfied with the results.
6. Select any other row in the Raw Parameters table to highlight it. If the parameter you just
worked on is green, the calibration was successful. Once a parameter has been calibrated
(green) you can select it at any time to show the data. If the parameter is red, the dialog
was unable to calibrate the parameter or obtain data.
Note: The graph requires valid point pairs in at least the first three rows of the Raw / EU
Point Pairs table to plot the graph. To clear the Raw / EU Point Pairs table click the Clear
button.
To calibrate multiple parameters:
The process of calibrating multiple parameters is similar to calibrating a single parameter.
Hold down the Ctrl key to select individual rows or the Shift key to select a block of rows.
Importing the EU values will apply to all selected parameters (rows). Select each parameter
in the list to input the raw values and view the calibration results.
To edit parameter data values in the Raw / EU Point Pairs table:
1. Select a row (highlight) in the Raw / EU Point Pairs table.
2. Right-click on the selected row.
3. Choose Cut to remove a row, or Edit to bring up a dialog which displays all the point
values that were averaged to create the raw value (not available for Transducer
calibration type). If any points are removed, the average will be updated automatically.
Note: For End to End calibration only. Values in the Edit dialog are not saved; they are
available for the current session only. After import, a raw value can be re-calculated in
the Raw / EU Point Pairs table by selecting the row and clicking the Capture button. The
edit dialog will now be available for this row.

409
 Calibration Tool

42.2. Importing and Exporting Calibration Data

The calibration tool supports the import/export of comma-separated text format .csv or .txt.
To save calibration results:
 In the Calibration Tool, select the File menu > Export > Calibration Data. This process
saves calibrated data to a file. This data can be used to manually create IADS EU derived
parameters.

To import saved calibration data:

 In the IADS Calibration Tool, select the File menu > Import > Saved Calibration Data.
To import raw and EU values:
Raw and EU data is imported during the calibration process by clicking the Import button in
the IADS Calibration Tool. EU data only can be imported (or entered by hand) for an End to
End calibration, and both the raw and EU values must be imported for a Transducer
calibration.
To import metadata to the Raw Parameters table:
1. In the IADS Calibration Tool, select parameters by holding down the Ctrl key and
selecting the applicable rows.
2. Select the File menu > Import > Metadata. The user data in the file will be added to the
selected parameters in the table.

42.3. Creating a Metadata File

To create a metadata file:

1. Open Notepad on your computer.
2. Enter the Raw Parameter table column name for the metadata entries and the
corresponding value.
3. Save the file.

410
 IADS User Manual

43. Post Test Data Server (PTDS)

43.1. Post Test Data Server (PTDS)
The Post Test Data Server is used to distribute IADS data to IADS Playback (post test)
Clients.
When you click the IADS Playback Client icon on the Desktop, the IADS Startup Dialog
will list all the available (networked) Post Test Data Severs that are currently running (shown
on the Existing tab of the Startup dialog). VCR type controls allow you to control the
playback of your data and do not affect other users attached to your server unless you close
the PTDS; the system will post a message that there are clients connected.

To connect to a data set using the Post Test Data Server:

1. Click the IADS Post Test Data Server icon on your Desktop.
2. Click File > Open.
3. Use the dialog box to navigate to the folder containing the test data and config file of
interest.
4. Click OK.
5. Click the IADS Playback Client icon > Existing Tab > the Server Name.
To connect to a data set and use a configuration file from a different location:
1. Click the IADS Post Test Data Serve icon on your Desktop.
2. Click File > Open.
3. Uncheck the Use config file in the selected directory box.
4. Navigate to the folder containing the test data of interest.
5. Click OK.
6. In the Select Config File dialog box, navigate to the desired configuration file of interest.
7. Click Open.
8. Click the IADS Playback Client icon > Existing Tab > the Server Name.
The IADS real time system can compress the data files (which are organized by parameter
name and compressed into a single file). This file can be moved onto removable media. This

411
 Post Test Data Server (PTDS)

compressed file can then be stored and/or transported and uncompressed on an IADS post test
system.
To launch a Post Test Data Server from the Operator Console
To uncompress test data:
1. Place the media that contains the test data in the corresponding drive.
2. Select the PTDS icon.
3. Select File > Open Compressed.
4. Use the dialog box to navigate to the compressed data set and select the file name.
5. Click Open
6. Click the IADS Playback Client icon and Log on.

43.2. Post Test Data Server (PTDS) Menus

File:
New - Creates a new configuration file or Z-Ball file and some sample derived data. Use the
dialog box to navigate to the folder you want to create the data in.
Open - Use the dialog box to navigate to the folder containing the data set and configuration
file.
Close - Closes the data set you have selected.
Save - Saves the current configuration file.
Save As - Saves the current configuration file as a new file.
Open Compressed - Select your compressed data and the desired destination of the IADS data
files.
Create Compressed - Use the dialog box to navigate to a folder. The PTDS will compress the
data files and the configuration file into a single file (to save hard drive space on your local
machine).
Create Z-Ball - Creates a zip file of the configuration file.
Open Multi-Test - Use the dialog box to open multiple data sets, in order to analyze them
simultaneously. Not Implemented
Create Multi-Test - Use the dialog box to create a configuration file based on two or more
data sets. This file will then be used with the Open Multi-Test (above). Not Implemented
Import Data - IADS accepts CSV and character delimited text files.
Exit - Closes the Post Test Data Server application.
Edit:
Goto Time - Brings up the IRIG Time dialog which allows you to enter a desired time and
begin displaying the data from that time.
Play Speed - Allows you to select a faster or slower Post Test Data Server play speed. If you
set the PTDS play speed, in IADS click the Global Time button on the Dashboard and select
the "Obtain Time from Post Test Data Server" check box.

412
 IADS User Manual

View:
Configuration - Navigate to the desired configuration file and view in WordPad.
Refresh Test Info - Recalculates start and end times of data archive.
Help:
Contents - Opens the IADS Help System.
Version - Displays the application version.
Node-Locked Licenses - True or False.
Number of Clients - Displays the number of allowable Clients.
SysID - Displays the IADS System ID number.
Key - Displays the IADS license key number.

43.3. Importing Data using the Post Test Data Server

You only need to import data one time to view it in IADS as many times as you like. To view
data that has already been imported, see the Post Test Data Server topic. If you import data
more than once to the same output directory, your previous config file will be overwritten.

To import data and create a new config file:

1. Create a new output directory for the data files.
2. Click the IADS Post Test Data Server icon on the Desktop or click Start > All Programs
> IADS > IADS Post Test Data Server.
3. Click File > Import Data > "file type".
4. In the Select File to Import dialog box, navigate to the data file of interest and click
Open.
5. In the Browse for Folder dialog box, select the new folder you created in step 1.
6. Enter the sample rate and start time of the new data and click OK.
7. An "Import Data" dialog box will appear noting the parameters that were found. Click
OK if correct. The bottom portion of the Post Test Data Server dialog box will update
with "Data Ready! Waiting for displays to connect..." if the file is imported successfully.
To import data to an existing config file:
1. Open the Post Test Data Server.
2. Click the IADS Post Test Data Server icon on the Desktop or click Start > All Programs
> IADS > IADS Post Test Data Server.

413
 Post Test Data Server (PTDS)

3. Select the file to import and click Open.

4. Select the directory with the desired config file and click OK.
5. Warning Message: A config file already exists in this directory, do you wish to merge in
this new data?
6. Click Yes.
7. Enter the sample rate and start time of the new data and click OK.
8. An "Import Data" dialog box will appear noting the parameters that were found. Click
OK if correct. The bottom portion of the Post Test Data Server dialog box will update
with "Data Ready! Waiting for displays to connect..." if the file is imported successfully.
Note: When you select a file with the extension .txt, it assumes it is tab delimited; .csv is
comma delimited and .prn is space delimited. You cannot import a comma or space separated
file with a .txt extension, and the same applies with the other delimiters.

43.4. Z-Ball
The Z-Ball is a zip file that contains a configuration file, and directories that contain dlls and
miscellaneous files. The IADS/Com folder is designated for dynamic load library (dll) files.
Objects conforming to the Microsoft Common Object Model (COM), i.e., dll's, ocx's, etc.
(they must be COM objects not just any dll.) in the IADS/Com folder will be distributed and
registered on the IADS Display Clients. The IADS/Misc folder is designated for support files
that are used during a mission. For example, if a bitmap is loaded onto an Analysis Window,
that bitmap is saved inside the IADS/Misc folder of the Z-Ball. The Z-Ball is not a file
retrieval area for files; if a previously used bitmap is needed during a mission, you cannot
navigate to the Z-Ball to retrieve the bitmap.
You have the option of running in both real time and in playback mode using the standard
configuration file or from a Z-Ball. If a standard configuration file is used, the system will
maintain that format when saving/logging off.
To create a Z-Ball from an existing config file:
1. Click the Post Test Data Server icon on your Desktop.
2. Click the File > Create Z-Ball.
3. Select the desired configuration file.
4. Click OK.
To create a new Z-Ball:
1. Click the Post Test Data Server icon on your Desktop.
2. Click the File > New > Z-Ball.
3. Create and select a new directory for the Z-Ball.
4. Click OK.
To run the Post Test Data Server using a Z-Ball:
1. Click the Post Test Data Server icon on your Desktop.
2. Click File > Open.
1. Navigate to the Z-Ball (ConfigName.zip) and click OK.
3. Click the IADS Playback Client icon.
4. Click the Existing tab in the IADS startup dialog.

414
 IADS User Manual

5. Select the machine running the Post Test Data Server.

To select a Z-Ball as the source config file at the Operator Console:
1. Click the Operator Console icon on the Desktop of the computer designated as the
Operator Console.
2. At the File Management dialog, enter the source configuration file or Z-Ball file path
name or click the button to select it from the directory. The source file defines the
original configuration file you want to you for this test.
3. Enter the Destination File path name or click the button to select it from the directory.
The destination file is the location where the IADS Server will directly interact with the
config file.
4. Click OK.

44. Settings/Options
44.1. Screen Resolution
The monitor's screen resolution may change when using IADS on different computers. For
example you may have a computer with a 1600x1280 resolution that is used for a real time
test and the computer at your desk may have a 1280x1024 resolution. By default, when a
desktop is loaded on a different resolution than it was saved, the Analysis Windows will
attempt to resize. The rule is "resize to Analysis Window to take up the same relative size on
the new desktop but strictly maintain the original aspect ratio".
This feature may be disabled via the IADS Client Application Properties dialog on the
Settings tab under Login > Auto-resize Analysis Windows if Desktop resolution differs.
The auto-resize feature can also be disabled via a command line option "/noAutoResizeAws"
on the client.

44.2. IADS Client Application Properties

To open the Client Application Properties Dialog:
 Go to Start > All Programs > IADS > Tools > IADS Display Client Properties.

44.3. IADS Command Line Options

You can use command line configuration options to control how IADS operates, which
components open initially, and what the components look like or do within the application.
When editing the command line remember to use the correct spacing. There must be a space
before any forward slashes in the command line and a space between a command and its
value. Command entries within the line are not order dependent.
To add a command line option:
You must have administrative privileges and any changes will affect all users on the machine.
1. Right-click on the IADS icon.
2. Click Properties.
3. Click the Shortcut tab.
4. In the Target box, enter a command option(s) after the Iads.exe file location.

415
Settings/Options

To change a command line option by making a copy of the shortcut:

Changes only apply to whoever uses this shortcut copy to access IADS.
1. Right-click on the IADS icon.
2. Click Copy.
3. Right-click on the Windows screen and click Paste.
4. Right-click on the new copy IADS icon.
5. Repeat steps 2-4 above.
Note: Shortcut copies will not update with new installs. Also, modifying the desktop shortcut
will not affect the startup menu shortcut. This would need to be edited as well.
IADS command line options:
/aircraft AIRCRAFTTYPE - Enables functions which are set to a particular aircraft type.
Sets the aircraft graphic to be displayed on the splash screen and dialog boxes.
/broadcastAddress BROADCAST ADDRESS - sets the broadcast address used by the
IADS client to look for Post Test data servers (the application default is 255.255.255.255).
/colorBitsGL NUMBER - Sets the number of color bits to be used in OpenGL for IADS. If
the number of depth bits is set to 0, IADS will compute the minimum number possible for
your video card.
/depthBitsGL NUMBER - Sets the number of alpha blending bits to be used in OpenGL for
IADS. If the number of depth bits is set to 0, IADS will compute the minimum number
possible for your video card.
/local - Enables execution of IADS without connecting to a data source. Note: Useful for
editing a configuration file.
/local /configFile "location on machine" (for example: /local /configfile
D:\PostTestData\pfconfig) - Enables execution of IADS with desired configuration file
without connecting to a data source. Note: Useful for creation/editing of a configuration file.
/local /iapDerived - Re-runs IAPs (DPS IAPs Only!!) Create a shortcut from an IADS Client
icon, add /local /iapDerived on the command line and then click it. You will see the DPS
server window run; IADS will not come up. Go to the directory where you selected the config
and in the Data file you should see your DPS parameters (not applicable to OA
(setTriggerParameters) Server parameters).
/maxLoadedAwsPerDt X Where X is the maximum number of loaded (pre-built) Analysis
Windows, for example, /maxLoadedAwsPerDt 2
/noAllButton - Disables the All button on the Analysis Window's Toolbar.
/noAuto - Disables the ability to perform Automated Analysis.
/noAutoDesktopValidation - Disables Desktop validation.
/noCacheGL - Disables caching of OpenGL drawing areas (increases memory usage).
/noChangeDesktop - Disables the Change Desktop button on the Dashboard
/noDoubleBufferGL - Disables double buffering of OpenGL for IADS.
/noFreezeKey - Will eliminate the ability to freeze a single display using the F keyboard
button.

416
IADS User Manual

/noHardwareAccelGL - Disables hardware acceleration of OpenGL for IADS.

/noParamRecovery - Disables attempt to recover parameters during Desktop validation that
are missing from the Parameter Defaults Table but are still in displays.
/noPreloadAws - Disables pre-loading of all Analysis Windows associated with a desktop
(real time only - in post test no preload is the default).
/noRegisterCom - Will not register any .DLL files on the workstation.
/noSaveSilent - Same as /private but no warning dialog box. This will disable the user's
ability to save their desktop, and will do this silently without any message boxes.
/noUserLogging - Removes user name dialog box that comes up in real time.
/pfConnectForever - Perpetually attempt to connect to the specified Post Test Data Server
(/postflight /server SERVERNAME)
/private - Disables the ability for the user to save their changes, or send any information to
the server (such as event markers etc). Warns the user with a dialog box at start. Can be used
to isolate a client and prevent it from affecting the other clients or the config file.
/preloadAws - Forces pre-loading of all windows.
/promptOnImport - You will be prompted with a "Browse..." dialog when you import an
Analysis Window.
/portId PORTNUMBER
/postFlight - Forces IADS to run in a post test mode.
/rtConnectForever - Perpetually attempt to connect to the specified Caching Data Server
(/server SERVERNAME)
/server SERVERNAME (server name optional) - If no server name is defined, you will be
prompted to select one.
/server SERVERNAME (server name optional) /portId PORTNUMBER- Entered together
simulates real time. These options must match the configuration specified at the server being
connected to. If for example you are connecting to a Post Test Data Server (PTDS) on your
machine, set the portId in the PTDS shortcut properties to match the portId in the IADS
shortcut properties, i.e., /server jennifer2x300 /portId 58105
/useNanFilter - Will eliminate Not a Number (NAN) values from the data. Not
recommended for real time.
/userName USERNAME or /username "USERNAMEWITHASINGLE SPACE"- Set
IADS to always log onto this particular user, i.e., /userName User1. A username can never
have more than a single space in it. Always use quotation marks around a user name that
contains a space.
IAP Command Line Switches (applied to Iads.exe):
/iapDerived - Designates the exe as an IAP Derived Parameter Server (DPS).
/iapOADerived - Designates the exe as an Order Arrival Derived Parameter Server (OA
DPS). Computes equations with "SetTriggerParam" function in an order arrival manner.
/iapDerivedNoDynamic - Tells any Derived Parameter IAP to not allow changes to its initial
set of computed parameters (as in change of equations, removing a parameter, adding a
parameter).

417
Settings/Options

/iapDerivedNoAppend - Instructs IAP to truncate the entire parameter file at the IADS
Server before computing; otherwise it starts at the existing end of the parameter.
/iapMinimized - Starts any IAP with its main window minimized (available on task bar but
not initially visible).
/iapHidden - Starts any IAP with its main window removed (not available on task bar).
/dlls CommaSeparatedDlls - Load Balancing. Specifies a comma separated list of dlls.
Compute only these derived parameters calling these dlls.
/parameters CommaSeparatedParams - Load Balancing. Comma Separated list of
parameters. Compute only these derived parameters.
/functions CommaSeparatedFunctions - Comma Separated list of functions. Compute only
these derived parameters calling these functions.
Post Test Data Server command line options:
/portId PORTNUMBER
/IgnoreNonLocalClients - Clients on the network cannot see or connect to this Post Test
Data Server.
IADS Audio Video Server command line options:
/channel ChannelNumber - Specifies the channel (1..100) on which video is broadcasted to
a particular channel (in some cases this may be necessary to prevent channel/port conflicts).
Also used to formulate the video file name (e.g. IadsVideoChannel1.avi). It is recommended
to use the default AVI file name for its use with the IADS Video Player in playback mode
(the user does not have to change any properties (set video file name or IRIG Start Time)
between real time/playback mode. The external video server channel numbers should start
after the last internal video channel number (if both internal and external video sources are
used). For example, if you have four embedded Acra VID/103 card channels on the KAM,
then the shortcut for the first external video server should be /channel 5. Each external video
server has to have its own shortcut and individual channel number (/channel 6, etc.). Also,
make certain you are not trying to broadcast on a channel that is already broadcasting.
/server HostNameOfCDS - Automatically stamps the IRIG start time of the video into the
AVI file for use in IADS playback mode. Also necessary if you are using an overlay that
requires data.
/portId PortNumber - Specifies an alternative TCP/IP connection port for "/server". If not
specified, the system will use the default port Id for the IADS Server (58000).
/overlay ProgIdOfOverlay - Specifies that the video server should load and execute a video
overlay. The overlay can receive real time data from the server and draw any addition
graphics. The graphics will be merged (overlaid) into the video and
compressed/broadcast/archived.
/startCaptureBroadcast - Starts the broadcast and capture directly after the application is
started.
/outputDirectory outputFilePath- Specifies the video file output directory (you must put
quotes around the file path if it contains spaces). Note: Due to MS bug, this must be the last
argument.
Operator's Console command line options:
/disableCompression - Grays out the Compression button on the Operator Console.

418
IADS User Manual

/domain DOMAINNAME - This command sets the name of the Windows network domain
which will be scanned for IADS real time clients.
/aircraft AIRCRAFTTYPE - Predefines the aircraft type that will be distributed to the real
time clients.
/bypassCDS - Enables execution of the Operator Console without an available Compute Data
Server. Useful for DLL distribution or access to the console tools without starting an IADS
Server.
/altEnvDistrib - Enables an alternate method for distribution of the iadsStartupFile to the real
time clients. Note: All clients must have their program files\IADS directory shared with write
permissions.
/noSplash - Disables the splash screen.
/noDomainSearch - This command will prevent the Operator Console from trying to predict
what IADS Clients are available on the network. Note: This command must be used in
conjunction with modifications to the iadsStartupFile located on the Operator's Console to
predefine the available clients.
/mandatoryClassification - This command will cause the Operator Console to force the
setting of a classification level to all Analysis Windows as a mandatory step in the
OpConsole sequence.
/noConnectTest - This command will cause the Operator Console to instruct the IADS
Server to skip performing a connection test with the data source.
Classification Broadcaster command line options:
/show - Displays the Classification Program window
/portId PORT NUMBER - sets the portId
/updateRate UPDATE RATE - sets the update rate
/defaultClassification DEFAULT CLASSIFICATION - sets the default classification
/broadcastAddress BROADCAST ADDRESS - sets the broadcast address used by the
IADS client to look for Post Test data servers (the application default is 255.255.255.255).
Note: Command line options that are for development use or those that are customer specific,
are not listed.

419
 Index

45. Index

/Server .................................................... 414 Mesh (Drawing Package) ................... 119

1D Interpolation ...................................... 239 Multi Graph ........................................ 106
2D Interpolation ...................................... 241 NGon .................................................. 119
3D Interpolation ...................................... 242 Overlay (Drawing Package) ............... 119
3D Model................................................... 93 Picture ................................................. 120
3D Moving Map ...................................... 137 Polygon ............................................... 120
Absolute Mode ........................................ 156 Primary Flight Display ....................... 108
Action Object ............................................ 93 Rectangle ............................................ 120
Activation Option Table .......................... 296 Situational Awareness (SA) ................ 137
Active Parameters.................................... 215 Slider................................................... 109
ActiveX Controls ....................................... 31 Spin Box ............................................. 109
Action Object ........................................ 93 Standard Gauge................................... 110
Adding ActiveX Controls to IADS ....... 31 Stick Force .......................................... 111
Altimeter................................................ 97 Stop Watch Display ............................ 111
Attitude Direction Indicator (ADI) ........ 96 Text (Drawing Package) ..................... 120
Attitude Indicator ................................ 102 Toggle Switch ..................................... 114
Audio Player .......................................... 97 Triangle............................................... 121
Bar Graph .............................................. 98 Video Player ....................................... 114
Button .................................................... 99 Adding ActiveX Controls to IADS........... 31
Circle ................................................... 118 Adding Aircraft to a SA Display ............ 137
Creating Custom Displays ..................... 32 Adding Parameters to Displays .............. 149
Dial (Drawing Package) ...................... 101 Advanced Import Wizard ....................... 327
Dial Graph ........................................... 100 Advanced Property Dialog ..................... 159
Display Defaults .................................... 31 Advisories ............................................... 124
Drop Down .......................................... 101 Aero Functions ....................................... 243
Editing ................................................. 146 Airspeed .................................................. 243
Eight Ball Display ............................... 102 Aliasing................................................... 172
Event Monitor...................................... 121 Aligning Displays ................................... 152
Force Gauge ........................................ 103 Alphanumeric Displays ............................ 39
Heading Indicator ................................ 103 Creating ................................................ 39
Horizontal Situation Indicator ............. 104 Customizing .......................................... 39
ICAW Function Bit Display (ICFB) ... 124 Function Keys ....................................... 39
Layering............................................... 145 Printf Functions .................................... 37
LED Display ........................................ 106 Property Dynamics ............................... 33
Library ................................................. 147 Right-Click Menu ................................. 40
Line (Drawing Package) ...................... 118 Setting Color Thresholds .................... 347

420
 IADS User Manual

Text/String ............................................. 43 Right-Click Menu ................................. 21

Alphanumeric Table Displays ................... 41 Scrollbar Options .................................. 27
Creating and Customizing ..................... 41 Security Classifications ........................ 18
Displaying Text ..................................... 43 Toolbar.................................................. 20
Function Keys........................................ 41 Annunciators............................................. 44
Property Dynamics ................................ 33 Changing Color Thresholds ................ 347
Right-Click Menu .................................. 42 Changing Data Format.......................... 45
Altitude Functions ................................... 243 Creating and Customizing .................... 44
Altitude/Altimeter ..................................... 97 Function Keys ....................................... 44
Amplitude Checking................................ 345 Right-Click Menu ................................. 45
Amplitude Rainbow ................................ 311 Aperiodic Input Parameter ...................... 215
Analysis ................................................... 292 Aperiodic Parameter ............................... 183
Automated Time Domain Analysis ..... 193 Append Configuration Information ........ 329
Half Power Method ............................. 305 Application Properties ............................ 414
Log Amplitude Picking ....................... 300 Arc - Circle Control ................................ 118
Log Decrement .................................... 298 Archive Off ............................................. 224
Log Decrement Averaging .................. 299 Archiving Data ....................................... 224
Phase and Gain Margin ....................... 306 ARINC ................................................... 249
RFP Curve Fit...................................... 308 Articulated Models ................................. 144
Time History Curve Fit ....................... 301 Attaching Displays ................................. 152
Analysis Log............................................ 199 Attitude Direction Indicator (ADI) ........... 96
Analysis Windows ..................................... 18 Attitude Indicator (Eight Ball) ................ 102
Changing Names ................................... 18 Audio File from a Stripchart ..................... 91
Changing Windows ............................... 18 Audio Player ............................................. 97
Copy ...................................................... 18 Auto Correlation ..................................... 294
Creating Windows ................................. 30 Auto Scaling (1 2 5 Rule) ......................... 59
Dashboard.............................................. 16 Auto Spectrum Plots ................................. 53
Deleting ................................................. 21 Creating ................................................ 53
Displaying Multiple Windows .............. 26 Recalculating Frequency Data ............ 316
Floating.................................................. 18 Reference ............................................ 365
Freezing/Unfreezing .............................. 25 Setting Peak Hold ............................... 314
Import/Export Analysis Windows ....... 331 Auto Tab ................................................. 197
Key Hits................................................. 22 Automated Analysis ............................... 193
Locking and Unlocking ......................... 18 Automated Analysis Results ................... 199
Minimizing ............................................ 18 Automated Frequency Domain Analysis 316
Parameter Tool .................................... 148 Automatically Setting Event Markers ...... 93
Parameters Used in a Window ............ 185 Averaging Data ....................................... 294
Printing .................................................. 26 Manual Auto Correlation .................... 294
Properties ............................................... 18 Manual Pseudo Randomdec ............... 295

421
 Manual Randomdec ............................. 297 Phase and Gain ................................... 306
Real Time Randomdec ........................ 293 Selective Area RMS ........................... 309
AVI Files (Video Player)......................... 114 Calculating Frequency and Damping ..... 308
Azimuth ................................................... 258 Using Damping Ratio ......................... 303
CoordinateTransformationFuncs ......... 258 Using Frequency Response Curve Fit 308
TerrainFuncs........................................ 286 Using Log Amplitude Picking ............ 300
BandStop ................................................. 336 Using Log Decrement ......................... 298
Baseline Value ......................................... 281 Using Log Decrement Averaging ....... 299
Batch Server ............................................ 382 Using the Half Power Method ............ 305
Batch Server Command Line Options ..... 397 Using Time History Curve Fit ............ 301
BCD to Value .......................................... 257 Calibration Tool ...................................... 406
Bessel .................................................... 336 Importing and Exporting .................... 409
Bit - The ICFB Display ........................... 124 Metadata ............................................. 409
Bitwise Functions .................................... 247 Capturing Load Values ........................... 356
Blackman Window .................................. 379 Cartesian ................................................. 257
Blink in Scrollbar ...................................... 27 Cautions .................................................. 124
Blob .................................................... 276 Centered Bar Graph ................................ 106
Blob Definitions Table ........................ 172 Changing (Analysis Windows) ................. 18
Blob Parameter .................................... 172 Chart Speed........................................... 86
Blob Viewer .......................................... 98 Color and Size of Symbols ................... 67
Decom Function .................................. 262 Color Thresholds for a Display........... 347
IadsBus Functions ............................... 249 Data Format .......................................... 45
MakeBlob ............................................ 276 Default Color Thresholds ................... 347
MakeBlob2 .......................................... 277 Default Filters ..................................... 336
Blocks (Averaging) ................................. 375 Default Properties ............................... 209
Bode Plots.................................................. 60 Desktops ............................................... 15
Boolean Equation .................................... 112 Direction of Data Flow ......................... 88
Box - Drawing Package ........................... 120 Envelope Line Attributes .................... 354
Browser ................................................... 104 Envelope Load Limit Symbols ........... 356
Buffer Depth on Cross Plots ...................... 46 Grid Spacing ......................................... 87
Building Displays ...................................... 30 Parameter Defaults ............................. 209
Burst Data ................................................ 197 Screen Resolution ............................... 414
Button (Input Object) ................................ 99 The Name of an Analysis Window....... 18
Byte Swap................................................ 255 The Size of a Display.......................... 153
Calculate Derived Macro......................... 207 Time Depth ........................................... 27
Calculate Slope on Cross Plot ................... 46 Time Display Colors ............................. 82
Calculating............................................... 305 Windows using Action Object .............. 93
Frequency Response Functions ........... 310 Chart (Map) ............................................ 134
Half Power Damping ........................... 305 Chart Speed............................................... 86

422
 IADS User Manual

Chirp Z Transform (CZT) ....................... 315 Keyboard Shortcuts ............................ 166

Choose Function ...................................... 256 Merging Configuration Files .............. 331
Circle Display .......................................... 118 Mission Attributes .............................. 180
Classifying analysis windows.................... 25 Null Corrections ................................. 341
Client Application Properties .................. 414 Overview ............................................ 160
Client Workstation .................................... 11 Planned Flutter Test Point Table ........ 202
Clock .................................................... 105 Planned Loads Test Points Table ........ 205
Coherence .................................................. 60 Right-Click Menu ............................... 165
Color ...................................................... 16 Save Options ....................................... 167
Dashboard.............................................. 16 Searching ............................................ 169
Data Trace ........................................... 155 Searching for Items ............................. 169
Dynamics ............................................... 33 Smart Import ....................................... 329
Thresholds ........................................... 347 The FES Parameters Table ................. 194
Color Thresholds ..................................... 346 The Parameter Defaults Table ............ 209
Changing ............................................. 347 TMATS........................................177, 334
Overview ............................................. 346 Undo Options...................................... 167
Resetting .............................................. 346 Validating the Desktop ....................... 185
Turn Off............................................... 346 Validation Options .............................. 185
Columns in Tables ................................... 169 Configuration Tool Menus ..................... 163
Combine Data .......................................... 391 Constants ................................................ 264
Command History ................................... 382 Contact Information .................................... 2
Command line Options ............................ 414 Contact Us .................................................. 2
Data Manager ...................................... 397 Conversion .............................................. 257
Command Word ...................................... 249 Conversions ........................................ 257
Comments in the Config File .................. 165 Unit Conversions ................................ 291
Compare Strings ...................................... 285 Convert Data ........................................... 391
Composites .............................................. 116 Convert to Float ...................................... 257
Concatenate Multiple Words ................... 276 Convert to Integer ................................... 257
Concatenate Words.................................. 277 Converting Data Views Screens ............... 36
Condition ................................................... 29 Coordinate Transformation Functions .... 258
Conditional Statement ............................. 396 Copy Analysis Window ............................ 18
Configuration Tool .................................. 160 Copy Displays......................................... 154
Adding Comments ............................... 165 Coquad ..................................................... 60
Data Group Setup ................................ 322 Countdown Counter ................................ 111
Defining Event Marker Groups ........... 362 Create Data Files .................................... 222
Defining the ICAW Definitions Table 124 Creating .................................................... 30
Import/Export Desktops and Analysis A Display Panel .................................... 51
Windows .......................................... 331 A Display Tool Chest ......................... 147
Import/Export Information .................. 329 A Fixed Block Frequency Plot ............. 90

423
 A New Desktop ..................................... 15 Curve Fit Degrees of Freedom (DOF) .... 316
Auto Spectrum or Power Spectral Density Curve Fitting ........................................... 316
Plot..................................................... 53 Curve Mode ............................................ 156
Cross Plot Envelopes ........................... 349 Custom Derived Function ....................... 243
Custom Derived Functions .................. 218 Custom Displays and Functions ............. 218
Custom Displays.................................... 32 Custom Overlay ........................................ 89
Derived Parameters ............................. 215 Customizing Displays ............................... 37
Displays ................................................. 30 Alphanumeric Properties ...................... 39
Event Markers ..................................... 360 Alphanumeric Table Properties ............ 41
Frequency Plot Envelopes ................... 353 Annunciator Properties ......................... 44
Frequency Response Plot - Bode ........... 60 Cross Plot Properties ............................ 48
IRIG Time Display on a Stripchart ....... 89 Flutter Summary Properties .................. 68
Label Displays ....................................... 52 Frequency Plot Properties ..................... 54
Layers with ActiveX Objects .............. 145 Frequency Response Plot Properties .... 61
Load Limit Envelope ........................... 349 Loads Summary Plot Properties ........... 65
Multiple Displays .................................. 30 Nyquist Plot Properties ......................... 70
New User at Logon................................ 14 Octave Band Plot Properties ................. 73
Nyquist Plots ......................................... 69 Real Time Randomdec Display ............ 76
Overlay Controls ................................. 119 Slider Properties ................................... 78
Primitives............................................... 31 Stripchart Properties ............................. 82
Transfer Function Plots ......................... 60 Customizing the Parameter Tool ............ 148
Windows................................................ 30 Damping ................................................. 305
Cross Plots ................................................. 48 Calculating Half Power Damping ....... 305
Adding Event Markers ........................ 360 Using Log Amplitude Picking ............ 300
Adding Parameters ................................ 48 Using Log Decrement ......................... 298
Buffer Depth .......................................... 46 Using Log Decrement Averaging ....... 299
Changing Data Symbols ........................ 46 Using Time History Curve Fit ............ 301
Creating a Cross Plot ............................. 46 Damping Ratio ........................................ 303
Creating an Envelope .......................... 349 Dashboard ................................................. 16
Creating Fixed Block Cross Plots.......... 90 Dashboard Color ................................... 16
Customizing........................................... 48 IRIG Time and Test Info .................... 159
Data History .......................................... 46 Overview .............................................. 16
Function Keys........................................ 48 The Configuration Tool ...................... 160
Pick X-Y .............................................. 356 The Parameter Tool ............................ 148
Right-Click Menu .................................. 49 Data ................................................... 410
Selecting and Removing Points ........... 156 Archiving ............................................ 224
CSV Export Options ................................ 322 Deleting Overlays ............................... 298
CSV File import ...................................... 412 Dropouts ............................................. 345
Curve Fit .................................................. 301 Export ................................................. 318

424
 IADS User Manual

Exporting Data Groups ........................ 322 Filtering a Data Group on Export ....... 336
File .................................................... 364 Data History on a Cross Plot .................... 46
Format ................................................... 80 Data Import ............................................. 332
Importing Configuration Data ............. 329 Data Manager ......................................... 382
Importing Test Data............................. 412 Command History............................... 382
Log Behavior ....................................... 357 Command Line ................................... 397
Logging ............................................... 357 Data Manager Overview ..................... 382
Logging Values ................................... 363 Export Data to CSV, IADS or Matlab 390
Management ........................................ 224 Import Data from CSV ....................... 389
Multiple Flight..................................... 382 Import Export AW and Desktops ....... 387
Recalling Events .................................. 364 Import Export Config Table Info ........ 386
Recalling Stored Data .......................... 364 Run File .............................................. 397
Saving Logged Data ............................ 364 Search ................................................. 396
Scrolling the Displays in a Window ...... 27 Data Search Tool ...................................... 29
Selecting and Removing Points ........... 156 Data Source Name .................................. 151
Selection Modes .................................. 156 Data Stitching ........................................... 88
Setting up IADS to Plot Flutter Data ... 200 DataGroup .............................................. 322
Storage Query ...................................... 359 DataViews ................................................ 36
Summarizing Flutter Data in a Plot ..... 200 Data Views Converter .......................... 36
Summarizing Loads Data in a Plot ...... 204 DataViews Within IADS ...................... 35
Translating ........................................... 155 dB-SPL ..................................................... 75
Zipping ................................................ 413 Debugging a Parameter........................... 174
Zooming .............................................. 159 Decimation Factor .................................. 318
Data Averaging........................................ 294 Decom Function ..................................... 262
Manual Auto Correlation..................... 294 Decom Status .......................................... 263
Manual Pseudo Randomdec ................ 295 Default ................................................... 209
Manual Randomdec ............................. 297 Color Thresholds for a Parameter ....... 347
Data Editing............................................. 342 Filters .................................................. 336
Overview ............................................. 342 Parameter Defaults ............................. 209
Spike Correction .................................. 344 Parameter Names ................................ 209
Sync Lock Processing ......................... 345 Scales .................................................. 158
Wild Points .......................................... 345 Specifying or Changing ...................... 209
Data export .............................................. 322 Default Properties ..................................... 30
Data Export Groups ............................. 322 Defining .................................................... 67
From a Frequency Plot ........................ 333 Criteria for Summary Plot Data ............ 67
From a Stripchart ................................. 318 Criteria for the Modal Definitions ..... 203
Data Export Wizard ................................. 319 Event Marker Groups ......................... 362
Data Group .............................................. 322 Degrees ................................................... 257
Creating a Data Group ......................... 322 Degrees of Freedom................................ 308

425
Deleting ................................................... 298 DFT ................................................... 369
Analysis Windows ................................. 21 Dial Display ............................................ 100
Data Overlays ...................................... 298 Direction ................................................... 96
Desktops ................................................ 15 Disable Archiving ................................... 224
Parameters from Displays.................... 149 Disabling the Threshold Log .................. 346
Deleting Library Entries .......................... 147 Discontinuous ........................................... 88
Demo ...................................................... 11 Discrete Fourier Transform .................... 369
Density .................................................... 243 Display Default Properties........................ 30
Derived Equation and Operators Table ... 227 Display Defaults ....................................... 31
Derived Equation Update Tool................ 223 Display Head ............................................ 21
Derived Equations ................................... 227 Displaying Logged Data ......................... 364
Constants ............................................. 264 Displaying Multiple Analysis Windows ... 26
Creating ............................................... 215 Displaying Time in Text Object ............. 120
Data Editing Derived Parameters ........ 339 Displays .................................................. 149
Decom Status....................................... 263 Adding a Parameter ............................ 149
Filtering ............................................... 339 Adding labels ........................................ 52
GetTestPointActive ............................. 266 Adding Multiple ................................... 30
IfThenElse ........................................... 276 Aligning and Grouping ....................... 152
Parameter Analysis Tool ..................... 174 Attaching ............................................ 152
Time .................................................... 288 Changing Chart Speed .......................... 86
Unit Conversions ................................. 291 Changing Default Scales..................... 158
Using ActiveX Properties as Parms .... 270 Changing Size ..................................... 153
Validating Derived Parameters............ 185 Changing Time Display Colors ............ 82
Derived Function Lookup Tool ............... 184 Copying .............................................. 154
Derived Parameter Error.......................... 215 Creating ................................................ 30
Derived Parameter Server (DPS)............. 220 Customizing .......................................... 37
Derived Parameters ................................. 222 Deleting a Parameter .......................... 149
Desktop...................................................... 15 Folders .................................................. 50
Changing ............................................... 15 Freezing ................................................ 25
Creating New ......................................... 15 Logged Data ....................................... 364
Deleting a Desktop ................................ 15 Moving................................................ 154
Import/Export Desktops ...................... 331 Overlays .............................................. 119
Listing Parameters Used in a Desktop. 185 Panel ..................................................... 51
Right-Click Menu Options .................... 15 Picking X-Y ........................................ 158
Scrolling ................................................ 28 Point Selection .................................... 156
Validating the Desktop ........................ 185 Printing ................................................. 26
Desktop Summary Report ....................... 185 Scale Attributes................................... 158
Desktops (Viewing Others) ....................... 24 Scrolling Desktops ................................ 28
Detrend ...................................................... 55 Scrolling Displays................................. 27

426
 IADS User Manual

Selecting/De-selecting ......................... 155 Parameter Names ................................ 179

Set as Nonfreezing............................... 154 Wild Points ......................................... 345
Translating Data .................................. 155 Editing Spectral Data .............................. 313
Zooming .............................................. 159 Eight Ball Display .................................. 102
Distance Bearing Marker ......................... 133 Elevation ................................................. 258
Dominant Mode ......................................... 55 Enabling Data Editing ............................ 345
Double Integration ................................... 317 Applying Null Correction ................... 341
Drawing Area .......................................... 153 Spike Detection and Correction .......... 344
Drawing Package (Primitives) ................. 116 Wild Point Editing .............................. 345
Adding Parameters .............................. 149 Enabling parameters ............................... 224
Circle ................................................... 118 ENBW ................................................... 379
Color Dynamics ..................................... 33 End to End .............................................. 406
Getting the Test Point state.................. 266 Envelope Equation .................................. 354
Line .................................................... 118 Envelope Function .................................. 354
Mesh .................................................... 119 Envelopes................................................ 349
NGon ................................................... 119 Capturing Load Values ....................... 356
Overlay ................................................ 119 Changing Line Color .......................... 354
Overview ............................................. 116 Creating in Table ................................ 353
Picture.................................................. 120 Dynamic Envelopes ............................ 351
Polygon ................................................ 120 Load Limit Algorithms ....................... 355
Rectangle ............................................. 120 Load Limit Symbol Color and Size .... 356
Right-Click Menu ................................ 117 Modifying ........................................... 351
Text .................................................... 120 Overview ............................................ 349
Triangle ............................................... 121 Resetting Max Load Limit .................. 356
Using ActiveX Properties as a Parm ... 270 SA Envelopes ..................................... 142
Drop Marker ............................................ 132 Secondary ........................................... 349
Dropouts .................................................. 345 Showing Data History .......................... 46
Dynamic Envelopes ................................. 351 Using the Envelope Dialog ................. 351
Dynamics Wizard ...................................... 33 Viewing .............................................. 351
Earth Radius ............................................ 286 Equation Operators and Functions.......... 227
ECEF (Earth Centered, Earth Fixed) ....... 258 Event Marker .......................................... 360
Editing .................................................... 146 Adding Multiple Lines of Text ........... 360
ActiveX Controls ................................. 146 Defining Event Marker Groups .......... 362
ActiveX Layers.................................... 145 Logging Data Values .......................... 363
Applying Frequency Averaging .......... 313 Overview ............................................ 360
Config Tool Edits Since Last Save ...... 163 Set using Action Object ........................ 93
Derived Parameters ............................. 339 Event Monitor ......................................... 121
Event Markers ..................................... 360 Excel Export ........................................... 318
IADS Logs ........................................... 359 Data Export from a Stripchart............. 318

427
 Data Export From Frequency Plot ....... 333 Flat Top................................................... 379
Data Export Wizard ............................. 319 Flight Information................................... 159
Excel Export Options .............................. 322 Global Right-click Menu Options ...... 159
Execute Action .......................................... 93 Mission Attributes .............................. 282
Export Data.............................................. 318 Floating Analysis Window ....................... 18
Export Directory ...................................... 322 Floor ..................................................... 33
Export Wizard ......................................... 319 Flutter Excitation System ....................... 197
Exporting Data ........................................ 322 Flutter Summary Log.............................. 199
Calibration Data .................................. 409 Flutter Summary Plots .............................. 68
Data Export from Frequency Plot........ 333 Creating and Customizing .................... 68
Data Export from Stripchart ................ 318 Planned Flutter Test Point Table ........ 202
Data Group Setup ................................ 322 Right-Click Menu ................................. 66
Desktops and Analysis Windows ........ 331 Setting up IADS to Plot Flutter Data .. 200
Test Point Export Dialog ..................... 334 Summarizing Flutter Data in a Plot .... 200
Using the Data Export Wizard ............ 319 Flutter Sweep Processing.......................... 64
FDI .................................................... 317 Flutter Test Point .................................... 199
Feedback.................................................. 369 Folders ..................................................... 50
FES Automated Analysis System ............ 197 Force Gauge ............................................ 103
FES Parameters Table ............................. 194 Format ..................................................... 45
FFT .................................................... 369 Changing Data Formats ........................ 45
File Importing .......................................... 329 Slider Display Data ............................... 80
Configuration Data .............................. 329 Fourier Transform................................... 314
Test Data.............................................. 412 Freezing .................................................... 25
File Search Path ....................................... 170 Freezing Columns within Tables ........ 169
Filled Waveform...................................... 311 Freezing Displays and AW .................. 25
Filter (Frequency) .................................... 336 Frequency ................................................. 90
Filter Frequency GUI ................................ 90 Creating Fixed Block Frequency Plots . 90
Filtering ................................................... 168 Creating Real Time Frequency Plots .... 53
Configuration Tables ........................... 168 Frequency Blocks/Averaging ............. 368
Derived Parameters / Equations .......... 339 Frequency Domain Algorithm
IADS Logs ........................................... 359 Familiarization Tool ....................... 292
Parameters ........................................... 336 Frequency Averaging ............................. 313
The Parameter Tool ............................. 150 Frequency Data and Analysis ................... 59
Filtering Functions .................................. 339 Auto Scaling ......................................... 59
Find Function ............................................ 29 Calculating Half Power Damping ....... 305
Fixed block .............................................. 368 Calculating the Selective Area RMS .. 309
Averaging ............................................ 368 Chirp Z Transform (CZT) ................... 315
Cross plots ............................................. 90 Dominant Mode .................................... 55
Frequency plots ..................................... 90

428
 IADS User Manual

Editing Spectral Data Using Frequency Right-Click Menu ................................. 62

Averaging ........................................ 313 Sharing Spectral Data ......................... 310
Recalculating Scrolled Back Data ....... 316 FSP ..................................................... 64
Reference ............................................. 292 Functions and Operators ......................... 227
Reset Frequency Averaging ................ 313 AeroFuncs........................................... 243
Viewing ................................................. 53 CoordinateTransformationFuncs ........ 258
Frequency Domain .................................. 292 Filtering Derived Parameters - Set
Frequency Domain Integration ................ 317 Functions ........................................ 339
Frequency Plots ......................................... 54 HelicopterFuncs .................................. 271
Adding Parameters .............................. 149 IADS Functions .................................. 227
Auto Scaling .......................................... 59 IadsBusFunctions................................ 249
Auto Spectrum Plots .............................. 53 Lookup Tool ....................................... 237
Changing Default Scales ..................... 158 String Compare ................................... 285
Chirp Z Transform (CZT) ................... 315 Gain ................................................... 306
Creating a Frequency Plot ..................... 53 Gauges ..................................................... 97
Creating a Frequency Response Plot ..... 60 Altimeter ............................................... 97
Creating Reference Envelopes ............ 353 Attitude Direction Indicator (ADI) ....... 96
Customizing a Frequency Plot............... 54 Eight Ball Display .............................. 102
Defining a Spectrum .............................. 53 Force Gauge ........................................ 103
Function Keys........................................ 54 Heading Indicator ............................... 103
Picking X-Y ......................................... 158 Horizontal Situation Indicator ............ 104
Power Spectral Density ......................... 53 Multi Graph ........................................ 106
Right-Click Menu .................................. 55 Primary Flight Display ....................... 108
Selecting and Removing Points ........... 156 Standard Gauge................................... 110
Setting Peak Hold ................................ 314 Stick Force .......................................... 111
Sharing Spectral Data .......................... 310 Generic 3D Model .................................... 93
Viewing Spectral Data......................... 311 Geodetic Coordinate Functions .............. 258
Frequency Response Plot ........................ 316 Geodetic Coordinates ............................. 257
Frequency Response Plots ......................... 61 Georeference........................................... 134
Calculating Frequency Response Curve Get User Input ........................................ 268
Fit .................................................... 308 GetConstant ............................................ 264
Calculating Indirect Functions ............ 310 GetData ................................................... 265
Calculating Phase and Gain ................. 306 GetTestPointActive ................................ 266
Coherence .............................................. 60 GetUserInput .......................................... 268
Creating ................................................. 60 GetValue ................................................. 270
Creating Reference Envelopes ............ 353 Global Hints............................................ 159
Customizing........................................... 61 Global Options........................................ 159
Flutter Sweep Processing ...................... 64 Global Scrollbar ........................................ 28
Function Keys........................................ 61 Global Time .............................................. 16

429
Go To Definition ..................................... 151 Log Off from IADS .............................. 18
Go To Tab ................................................. 93 Log On to IADS ................................... 14
Go To Time ............................................. 360 Logs ................................................... 357
Event Markers ..................................... 360 Primitives ............................................ 116
Go To Time ........................................... 28 System performance ............................. 17
Go To Window .......................................... 93 IADS Calcuations ................................... 238
Google Group .............................................. 2 IADS Model File (IMF) ......................... 144
Graphs ...................................................... 98 IADS Name ............................................ 151
Grayed Out .............................................. 215 IadsBus ................................................... 249
Great Circle ............................................. 286 Iadsread................................................... 273
Grids ...................................................... 87 iadsUpdate File ....................................... 327
Advanced Stripchart Spacing ................ 87 IAP ................................................... 220
Alphanumeric Tables ............................ 43 Creating an IAP Derived Parameter ... 220
Spacing on Stripchart ............................ 87 Processing IAP Derived Parameters in
Group Export ........................................... 318 Post Test ......................................... 222
Grouping ActiveX Controls - Library ..... 147 ICAW Function Bit Display ................... 124
Grouping Displays ................................... 152 Defining the ICAW Definitions Table 124
Groups .................................................... 322 Sample Text File ................................. 125
ActiveX Displays ................................ 147 Identify Displays..................................... 148
Data Groups......................................... 322 Identifying Current Test Point ................ 187
Event Marker ....................................... 362 IFT ................................................... 314
Parameter Tool .................................... 148 IfThenElse .............................................. 276
GTOPO30 Terrain Data .......................... 258 Image ..................................................... 26
Half Power Damping Results .................. 305 Imaginary ................................................ 369
Hamming Window .................................. 379 Import Data ............................................. 332
Hanning Window .................................... 379 Importing ................................................ 332
Hard Copy ................................................. 26 Advanced Import Wizard ................... 327
Heading - Moving Map ........................... 129 Calibration Data .................................. 409
Heading Indicator .................................... 103 Configuration Data ............................. 329
Helicopter Functions ............................... 271 Desktops and Analysis Windows ....... 331
Help Desk .................................................... 2 Equations ............................................ 223
Hexadecimal .............................................. 37 Smart Import ....................................... 329
Hide Column ........................................... 169 Test Data ............................................. 412
Hint .................................................... 159 Importing Test Data ................................ 332
Horizontal Situation Indicator ................. 104 Inactive Parameters................................. 215
HTML Viewer ......................................... 104 Indirect Frequency Response Functions . 310
IADS ...................................................... 14 Input Frequency Data to a Stripchart ...... 364
Contact Information ................................ 2 Input Objects........................................... 113
Drawing Package ................................. 116 Action Control ...................................... 93

430
 IADS User Manual

Button .................................................... 99 Layering ActiveX Objects ...................... 145

Dial .................................................... 101 LED Display ........................................... 106
Drop Down .......................................... 101 Library ................................................... 147
Slider ................................................... 109 Line Display ........................................... 118
Spin Box .............................................. 109 Line Graph ................................................ 98
Text Input that Drives a Display ......... 113 Linear ..................................................... 33
Toggle Switch...................................... 114 Little Endian ........................................... 247
Integrated Cautions, Advisories and LL Negative and Positive ....................... 209
Warnings ............................................. 124 Load Limit Algorithms ........................... 355
Interpolation ............................................ 239 Load Limit Hints .................................... 159
Invalid Parameter Name Characters ........ 329 Load Values ............................................ 356
Inverse Fourier Transform - Creating...... 314 Loads Summary Log .............................. 204
IPAT .................................................... 174 Loads Summary Plot ................................ 65
IRIG Clock .............................................. 105 Creating and Customizing .................... 65
IRIG Time Displays ................................ 159 Planned Loads Test Point Table ......... 204
Dashboard............................................ 159 Right-Click Menu ................................. 68
Stripchart ............................................... 89 Summarizing Loads Data in a Plot ..... 204
Kaiser Bessel Window ............................ 379 Lock/Loss ............................................... 263
Keyboard Shortcuts in Displays Locking ..................................................... 18
Alphanumeric Keyboard Shortcuts ....... 40 Log Amplitude Picking .......................... 300
Alphanumeric Table Shortcuts .............. 42 Log Decrement ....................................... 298
Annunciator Keyboard Shortcuts .......... 44 Log Decrement Averaging ..................... 299
Cross Plot Keyboard Shortcuts .............. 48 Log Entries ............................................. 112
Frequency Plot Keyboard Shortcuts ...... 54 Log Values to CSV File.......................... 112
Frequency Response Plot Shortcuts ...... 62 Logging Data .......................................... 363
Nyquist Plot Keyboard Shortcuts .......... 70 Data Export ......................................... 318
Octave Band Plot Shortcuts ................... 74 Saving Logged Data to a File ............. 364
Real Time Randomdec Shortcuts .......... 76 Summary Plot Data ............................... 67
SA Keyboard Shortcuts ....................... 139 The IADS Logs ................................... 357
Slider Keyboard Shortcuts..................... 78 Values/Analysis Entries ...................... 363
Stripchart Keyboard Shortcuts .............. 82 Logon to IADS ......................................... 14
Summary Plot Keyboard Shortcuts ....... 65 Logs ................................................... 357
Labels ...................................................... 52 Editing ................................................ 359
Landscape - Printing .................................. 26 Filtering .............................................. 359
Latch Equation ........................................ 276 Loads Summary Log .......................... 203
Latitude.................................................... 286 Message Log ......................................... 17
Derived Parameters ............................. 215 Modal Definitions Log ....................... 203
Georeference Tool ............................... 134 Overview ............................................ 357
Situational Awareness ......................... 137 Recalling Data .................................... 364

431
 Setting Log Behavior........................... 357 Mission Attributes .................................. 180
Threshold Log ..................................... 348 Modal Definitions ................................... 203
Longitude................................................. 134 Modal Definitions Table ......................... 199
Look Angles ............................................ 258 Model 3D .................................................. 93
Look Up Parameter ................................. 151 Monitor Resolution ................................. 414
Lookup Derived Functions ...................... 184 Monitor Secondary ................................... 21
Lost Equations ......................................... 185 Moving ................................................... 154
LSB .................................................... 247 A Parameter Trace .............................. 155
Mach .................................................... 243 Displays .............................................. 154
Magnitude................................................ 371 Moving Map ........................................... 126
Magnitude Plots......................................... 60 Adding Overlays ................................. 130
Make Default Display ............................... 31 Adding Targets ................................... 129
MakeAscii ............................................... 227 Distance Bearing Marker .................... 133
MakeBlob ................................................ 276 Georeference Tool .............................. 134
MakeBlob2 .............................................. 277 Overlays Table.................................... 132
Making Point Selections .......................... 156 Overview ............................................ 126
Malibu Antenna Control Functions ......... 278 Toolbar Buttons .................................. 127
Maneuver ................................................. 187 Multi-Create.............................................. 30
Manual Nulling........................................ 281 Multiple .................................................. 157
Map .................................................... 126 Monitors................................................ 21
Margin .................................................... 306 Multiple Displays (Point Selection).... 157
Marker .................................................... 132 Multiple Log to File ............................ 364
Marking an Event .................................... 360 Multiple Parameters (Deleting) .......... 149
Matlab Executable Iadsread Function ..... 273 Multiple Degrees of Freedom ................. 308
Matlab Export .......................................... 318 Naming Parameters................................. 215
Matlab Export Options ............................ 322 Natural Spline ........................................... 33
Maximize ................................................. 153 New User .................................................. 14
MDF .................................................... 308 NGon Display ......................................... 119
Mean Removal ........................................ 372 Noise Reduction ..................................... 294
Merge Data .............................................. 391 Manual Auto Correlation .................... 294
Merging Configuration Files ................... 331 Manual Pseudo Randomdec ............... 295
Mesh Display........................................... 119 Manual Randomdec ............................ 297
Message Log.............................................. 17 Nonfreezing Displays ............................. 154
Metadata .................................................. 409 Normalized Az/El ................................... 257
MEX-File................................................. 273 Notch Filter (BandStop) ......................... 336
Mil1553 ................................................... 249 Null Corrections ..................................... 341
Minimizing an Analysis Window .............. 18 Nulling ................................................... 341
Missing Data............................................ 159 Parameters .......................................... 341
Missing Parameters ................................. 185 Real Time ........................................... 224

432
 IADS User Manual

Report .................................................. 224 Parameter Naming Rules ........................ 217

Nyquist plots.............................................. 70 Parameter Report .................................... 185
Calculating Indirect Functions ............ 310 Parameter Selection Tool........................ 182
Creating ................................................. 69 Parameter Tool ....................................... 148
Customizing (The Property Sheet) ........ 70 Customizing ........................................ 148
Function Keys........................................ 70 Filtering .............................................. 150
Reference ............................................. 372 Parameter Usage Report ......................... 185
Right-Click Menu .................................. 71 Parameterize Data ................................... 262
Sharing Spectral Data .......................... 310 Parameters .............................................. 149
Octal ...................................................... 37 Active.................................................. 215
Octave Band .............................................. 73 Adding Multiple to Stripcharts ........... 149
Creating ................................................. 72 Adding to Cross Plots ........................... 48
Customizing........................................... 73 Adding to Displays ............................. 149
Function Keys........................................ 73 Aliasing............................................... 172
Reference ............................................. 372 Changing the Default Filter ................ 336
Right-Click Menu .................................. 74 Changing the Default Name ............... 209
Sound Pressure Level - dB-SPL ............ 75 Changing the Default Thresholds ....... 347
Viewing Octave Data ............................ 72 Creating a Derived .............................. 215
Operating Deflection Shapes ..................... 64 Data Editing Derived Parameters ....... 218
Operators (Derived) ................................. 227 Deleting from Displays ....................... 149
Option Table for Pseudo Randomdec...... 296 FES Table ........................................... 194
Order of Fit .............................................. 406 Inactive ............................................... 215
Others Desktops ........................................ 24 Invalid Characters in Name ................ 329
Output Name ........................................... 268 Missing ............................................... 185
Overlap Frequency Averaging ................ 372 Null Correction Value ........................ 341
Overlays................................................... 119 Parameter Analysis Tool..................... 174
Creating Primitive ............................... 119 Parameter Defaults Table ................... 209
Deleting ............................................... 298 Recovering .......................................... 185
Moving Map ........................................ 130 Renaming ............................................ 179
SA Overlays ........................................ 143 Report (Desktop) ................................ 185
Packet .................................................... 276 Selection Dialog ................................. 182
Paper Orientation ....................................... 26 Sync Lock Processing ......................... 345
Parameter Alias Quick Look ................... 151 The Parameter Tool ............................ 148
Parameter Alias State .............................. 172 Trace ................................................... 155
Parameter Aliasing .................................. 172 Validating Parameters......................... 185
Parameter Analysis Tool ......................... 174 Past Auto Analysis Results ..................... 316
Parameter Archiving................................ 224 Pause Window .......................................... 93
Parameter Defaults State Table ............... 215 PCM Stream ........................................... 263
Parameter Defaults Table ........................ 209 Peak Hold ............................................... 314

433
Peak Mode ............................................... 156 Pressure................................................... 243
Pen - Data Flow ......................................... 82 Pressure Functions .................................. 243
Blending ................................................ 82 Prev Function.......................................... 283
Direction ................................................ 88 Prevent Duplicate Parameter Names ...... 163
Percent Load Limit .................................. 356 Primary Flight Display (PFD) ................ 108
Performance............................................... 17 Primitives (Drawing Package) ................ 116
PFD (Primary Flight Display) ................. 108 Circle .................................................. 118
Phase Plots................................................. 60 Color Dynamics .................................... 33
Phase Wrapping....................................... 306 Creating ................................................ 31
Pick X-Y .................................................. 158 Line ................................................... 118
Picture Display ........................................ 120 Mesh ................................................... 119
Pitch - ADI ................................................ 96 NGon .................................................. 119
Planned Flutter Test Points Table............ 202 Overlay ............................................... 119
Planned Loads Test Points Table ............ 204 Overview ............................................ 116
PlannedTestPointsEx Table ..................... 192 Picture ................................................. 120
Play From Here ......................................... 27 Polygon ............................................... 120
Play Sound................................................. 95 Rectangle ............................................ 120
Play Text.................................................... 95 Right-Click Menu ............................... 117
Playback Client.......................................... 11 Text ................................................... 120
PlayWavFile .............................................. 95 Triangle............................................... 121
Plot Flutter Data ...................................... 200 Printf ..................................................... 37
Point Selection......................................... 156 Alphanumeric Display .......................... 39
Data Selection Modes .......................... 156 Printf Formatting .................................. 37
Displays ............................................... 156 Text Display ....................................... 120
Multiple Displays ................................ 157 Printing ..................................................... 26
Picking X-Y ......................................... 158 Property Dynamics ................................... 33
Polar .................................................... 257 Pseudo Randomdec................................. 295
Polar Plotting ............................................. 46 Activation Option Table ..................... 296
Polygon Display ...................................... 120 Averaging Data ................................... 295
Popup Hint............................................... 159 Reference ............................................ 374
Post Test .................................................. 222 Selecting a Signal Segment ................ 295
Post Test Data Server (PTDS) ................. 410 PTDS (Post Test Data Server) ................ 410
Menus .................................................. 411 PVT ................................................... 144
Post Test Mode .......................................... 11 Query Builder ......................................... 150
Power Spectral Density ............................. 53 Quick Find .............................................. 148
Precedence ............................................... 215 Quick Look ............................................. 151
Predefined................................................ 291 Quick View Display ............................... 108
Predefined Comments ............................. 360 Radar ................................................... 137
Predicted Results ..................................... 192 Radians ................................................... 257

434
 IADS User Manual

Rainbow..................................................... 57 Phase ................................................... 373

Randomdec ................................................ 76 Power Spectral Density ...................... 373
Customizing a Real Time Display ......... 76 Pseudo Randomdec............................. 374
Manual Pseudo Randomdec ................ 295 Randomdec ......................................... 374
Manual Randomdec ............................. 297 Real ................................................... 374
Real Time Randomdec ........................ 293 Real Reference .................................... 374
Read Only Columns in Tables ................. 169 Real Time Frequency Averaging ........ 375
Real Time Display of Predicted Results .. 266 Selective Area RMS ........................... 376
Real Time Frequency Averaging............. 375 Time Domain ...................................... 292
Real Time Randomdec .............................. 76 Time History Curve Fit....................... 378
Averaging Data.................................... 293 Transfer Function ............................... 378
Customizing a Display .......................... 76 Reference Envelopes (Creating) ............. 353
Recalculating Data .................................. 316 Reference Line ........................................ 134
Recalling Data Events ............................. 364 Reload Envelopes ................................... 349
Recovering Parameters ............................ 185 Remote Terminal .................................... 249
Rectangle Display.................................... 120 Renaming ................................................ 179
Red Bang ................................................. 151 Analysis Windows ................................ 21
Red X .................................................... 159 Desktops ............................................... 15
Reference ................................................. 365 Multiple Parameter Names ................. 179
Auto Correlation .................................. 365 Parameter Names ................................ 179
Auto Spectrum..................................... 365 Replace Equations .................................. 223
Blackman ............................................. 379 Replacing Multiple Parameter Names .... 179
Coherence ............................................ 366 Reports ................................................... 185
Fixed Block Frequency Averaging...... 368 Reset Default Display Properties .............. 31
Frequency Domain .............................. 292 Resetting ................................................. 158
Half Power Damping ........................... 367 Color Thresholds ................................ 346
Hamming ............................................. 379 Frequency Averaging ......................... 375
Hanning ............................................... 379 Peak Hold ........................................... 314
Imaginary............................................. 369 Slider % Load Limit ............................. 79
Inverse Fourier Transform................... 370 Zoom, Translate and Points ................ 158
Kaiser Bessel ....................................... 379 Resize a Display ..................................... 153
Log Amplitude Picking ....................... 370 Resizing Columns in Tables ................... 169
Log Decrement .................................... 370 Resolution (Screen) ................................ 414
Log Decrement Averaging .................. 371 RFP Curve Fit ......................................... 376
Magnitude............................................ 371 Right-Click Menus ................................... 40
Mean Removal .................................... 372 Alphanumeric ....................................... 40
Nyquist ................................................ 372 Alphanumeric Table ............................. 42
Octave Band ........................................ 372 Analysis Window ................................. 21
Overlap Frequency Averaging ............ 372 Annunciator .......................................... 45

435
 Configuration Tool .............................. 165 The Parameter Tool ............................ 148
Cross Plot .............................................. 49 Screen Resolution ................................... 414
Dashboard IRIG Time ......................... 159 Scrollbar.................................................... 27
Flutter Summary Plot ............................ 66 Desktops ............................................... 28
Frequency Plot....................................... 55 Go To Time .......................................... 28
Frequency Response Plot ...................... 62 Recalculating Frequency Data ............ 316
Label Displays ....................................... 53 Right-Click Menu Options ................... 27
Loads Summary Plot ............................. 68 Scrolling Displays in a Window ........... 27
Nyquist Plot ........................................... 71 Time Range........................................... 27
Slider ..................................................... 78 Searching .................................................. 29
Stripchart ............................................... 83 Data Manager ..................................... 396
RMS .................................................... 309 Data Search Tool .................................. 29
Calculating Time Domain RMS .......... 304 File Search Path .................................. 170
Root Mean Squared ................................. 309 Logged Data ....................................... 359
Rotary .................................................... 271 The Configuration Tool ...................... 169
RTRD .................................................... 293 Secondary Monitor ................................... 21
Run File ................................................... 397 Security ..................................................... 25
Run VB Script ........................................... 93 Select Windows for Viewing .................... 24
SA Display .............................................. 137 Selecting ................................................. 155
SA Display .......................................... 137 A Signal Segment ............................... 295
SA Envelopes ...................................... 142 Displays .............................................. 155
SA Operations ..................................... 138 Multiple Parameters to Paste .............. 182
SA Overlays ........................................ 143 Points in Displays ............................... 156
SA Texture Images .............................. 140 Points in Multiple Displays ................ 157
SA Envelope Text File ............................ 142 Selection Dialog ..................................... 182
SA Overlays ............................................ 143 Selective Area Peak ................................ 309
SA Texture Images .................................. 140 Selective Area RMS ............................... 309
Sample Rate............................................. 183 Selector ................................................... 256
Sampling Period ...................................... 224 Set Constant .............................................. 93
SARMS ................................................... 309 Set Functions .......................................... 218
Satellite Images ....................................... 140 Set Mission Attribute ................................ 93
Save Image ................................................ 26 Setting (Test Points) ............................... 187
Save Options............................................ 164 Automated Time Domain Analysis .... 193
Scales ...................................................... 59 Peak Hold ........................................... 314
Screen Operations...................................... 15 Up IADS to Plot Flutter Data ............. 200
Creating Windows and Displays ........... 30 SetTriggerParam ..................................... 284
The Configuration Tool ....................... 160 Sign Change ............................................ 226
The Dashboard ...................................... 16 Signal Segment ....................................... 295
The Message Log .................................. 17 Single Integration ................................... 317

436
 IADS User Manual

Situational Awareness ............................. 137 State (Parameter Defaults) ...................... 215

SA Display .......................................... 137 Status (Decom) ....................................... 263
SA Envelopes ...................................... 142 Status Bar in Config Tool ....................... 160
SA Operations ..................................... 138 Stick Force .............................................. 111
SA Overlays ........................................ 143 Stitching .................................................... 88
SA Texture Images .............................. 140 Stop Test Point.......................................... 93
Size (Display) .......................................... 153 Stop Watch Display ................................ 111
Changing Pixel Size and Position........ 153 Stored Data ............................................. 364
Changing Summary Plot Symbols......... 67 Strain Parameter ..................................... 281
Minimizing Analysis Windows ............. 18 StrCmp() ................................................. 285
Slider (Customizing) ................................. 78 String (Text) ............................................. 43
Capturing Load Values .......................... 79 String Compare Function........................ 285
Changing % Load Limit Symbols ......... 80 Strip Graph ............................................... 98
Data Formats ......................................... 80 Stripchart .................................................. 89
Data History (Tail) ................................ 78 Stripchart Filter Frequency GUI ............... 90
Function Keys........................................ 78 Stripchart Speed ........................................ 86
Resetting % Load Limit......................... 80 Stripcharts ................................................. 82
Right-Click Menu .................................. 78 Changing Default Scales..................... 158
Slope on Cross Plot ................................... 46 Changing Grid Lines ............................ 87
Smart Import............................................ 329 Color Thresholds ................................ 346
Smoothing Reference .............................. 377 Custom Overlays .................................. 89
Sorting Tables.......................................... 169 Customizing (The Property Sheet) ....... 82
Sound ...................................................... 95 Data Flow Direction ............................. 88
Sound Pressure Level ................................ 75 Data Grid Setup Dialog ........................ 87
Spacing, Advanced Stripchart ................... 87 Data Stitching ....................................... 88
Spectral .................................................... 310 Default Color Thresholds ................... 347
Spectral Data (Frequency Plots) ................ 57 Exporting Time History Data ............. 318
Creating from a Stripchart ..................... 53 Filter Frequency GUI............................ 90
Editing Spectral Data........................... 313 Fixed Block Data Auto Spectrum ......... 53
Viewing Spectral Data........................... 57 Function Keys ....................................... 82
Spike Detection/Correction ..................... 344 Point Selection .................................... 156
Spin Box .................................................. 109 Right-Click Menu ................................. 83
Split Data ................................................. 391 Selecting and Removing Points .......... 156
Stale Data ................................................ 283 Time Based Stripcharts ......................... 87
Standard Gauge ....................................... 110 Toolbox................................................. 91
Start Test Point .......................................... 93 Subframe Status ...................................... 263
Start-Bit ................................................... 247 Summary Plots ........................................ 203
Startup Dialog............................................ 11 Changing Color and Size of Symbols ... 67
Startup Dialog Import Option.................. 332 Modal Definitions Log Criteria .......... 203

437
 Planned Flutter Test Point Table ......... 202 TerrainFuncs ........................................... 286
Planned Load Test Point Table............ 205 Test Data ................................................. 412
Setting up IADS to Plot Flutter Data ... 200 Test Data Request Dialog ....................... 191
Summarizing Flutter Data ................... 200 Test Points .............................................. 187
Summarizing Loads Data .................... 204 Actions ................................................ 188
Support ........................................................ 2 Calculate Derived Macro .................... 207
Swap (Bytes) ........................................... 255 Exporting ............................................ 190
Sweep Processing (Flutter) ........................ 64 Import Wizard..................................... 192
Switch (Choose Function) ....................... 256 Overview ............................................ 187
Symbols (In Sliders) .................................. 80 Real Time Predicted Results............... 192
In Cross Plots/Envelopes ..................... 356 Settings ............................................... 188
In Summary Plots .................................. 67 Transferring ........................................ 191
Sync Lock Processing ............................. 345 Wind Calibration Macro ..................... 205
Sync Lock Protection (Thresholds) ......... 348 TestInfo Command ................................. 386
System (IADS) .......................................... 14 Text Display ........................................... 120
Logging In ............................................. 14 In Alphanumeric Displays .................... 43
Logging Off ........................................... 18 Input Object ........................................ 113
Performance........................................... 17 Text History Viewer ............................... 112
Tab Display ............................................... 50 Text Input Object .................................... 113
Table Lookup (1D) .................................. 239 Texture Images ....................................... 140
2D Interpolation .................................. 241 THCF ................................................... 301
3D Interpolation .................................. 242 Thresholds .............................................. 346
Tables (Config Tool) ............................... 160 Changing............................................. 347
FES Parameters Table ......................... 194 Overview ............................................ 346
Modal Definitions Table...................... 203 Strip Chart Thresholds Off ................. 346
Parameter Defaults Table .................... 209 Sync Lock Protection.......................... 348
Planned Flutter Test Point Table ......... 202 The Thresholds Log ............................ 348
Planned Load Test Point Table............ 205 Time (IADS) ............................................. 27
Sorting ................................................. 169 Above Threshold ................................ 304
Tabular Display ....................................... 112 Based Stripchart .................................... 87
Target (Moving Map) .............................. 129 Dashboard IRIG Time ........................ 159
SA Display .......................................... 137 Displayed in Text Object .................... 120
Taskbar (The Dashboard) .......................... 16 Displays ................................................ 89
TDR Dialog ............................................. 191 Global Scrollbar .................................... 28
Telemetry Attributes Transfer Standard 334 In Derived Equations .......................... 288
Temperature............................................. 243 In Text Display ................................... 120
Terrain Data............................................. 140 Recalling Events ................................. 364
Terrain Elevation Function ...................... 258 Scrollbar Right-Click Menu ................. 27
Terrain Functions .................................... 286 Scrollbar Time Range ........................... 27

438
 IADS User Manual

Scrolling ................................................ 27 Tutorial (Startup Dialog) .......................... 11

Time Domain ........................................... 292 Undo Parameter Replace ........................ 179
Automated Analysis ............................ 193 Unfreezing Displays and Windows .......... 25
Log Amplitude Picking ....................... 300 Unit Conversion...................................... 291
Log Decrement .................................... 298 Universal Cursor ..................................... 157
Log Decrement Averaging .................. 299 Unlocking ................................................. 18
Root Mean Squared ............................. 304 Update Rate ............................................ 209
Time Functions ........................................ 288 Usage Report .......................................... 185
Time History Curve Fit ........................... 301 User Input Objects .................................. 268
Time History Data Averaging ................. 294 User Input Values Table ......................... 268
Manual Auto Correlation..................... 294 Validating (Parameters) .......................... 185
Manual Pseudo Randomdec ................ 295 Derived Equations .............................. 185
Manual Randomdec ............................. 297 The Desktop........................................ 185
Time Interval ........................................... 112 Value Change ......................................... 112
Time Segments Log................................. 357 Value Selection ....................................... 158
TMATS ................................................... 334 Variance Function................................... 291
Toggle Switch.......................................... 114 VBScript ................................................... 95
Toolbar (Analysis Window) ...................... 20 Velocity .................................................. 243
ActiveX Toolbox Edit Tab .................. 146 Velocity Functions .................................. 243
ActiveX Toolbox Layering Tab .......... 145 Video Player ........................................... 114
ActiveX Toolbox Library Tab ............. 147 View Parameter Values .......................... 108
Configuration Tool Toolbar ................ 163 Viewing AW on Other Desktops .............. 24
IADS Logs Toolbar ............................. 357 Viewing Parameter Information ............. 174
Toolbox ..................................................... 91 Viewing Spectral Data .............................. 57
Top Down View ...................................... 311 Warning .................................................... 17
Torque Difference ................................... 281 Warnings................................................. 163
TPP Parameter ......................................... 183 Waterfall Plots .......................................... 72
Trace (Data) ............................................. 155 Editing the IADS Logs ....................... 359
Transducer ............................................... 406 Viewing Spectral Data .......................... 57
Transfer Function Plots ............................. 60 Wav File ................................................... 95
Transferring Test Points .......................... 191 Wave File.................................................. 91
Translate (Move Data)............................. 155 Audio Player ......................................... 97
Triangle Display ...................................... 121 Weather Display ..................................... 104
Trigger off Boolean Equation .................. 112 Width of Parameter Trace ....................... 155
Trigger off Time Interval......................... 112 Wild Cards .............................................. 150
Trigger off Value Change ........................ 112 Wild Points ............................................. 342
Trigger Parameter .................................... 284 Wind Calibration .................................... 205
Cross Plot Right-click Menu Options.... 49 Wind Direction ....................................... 205
MakeBlob ............................................ 276 Wind Speed............................................. 205

439
Window Equivalent Noise Bandwidth .... 379 XY Plotting ............................................... 46
Window Security Classification List ......... 25 Z-Ball (Zip File) ..................................... 413
Windowing .............................................. 379 Zero Centered ......................................... 106
Wizard .................................................... 327 Zipped Config File.................................. 413
Data Export Wizard ............................. 319 Zooming.................................................. 159

440